Business and Licence conditions

for purchasing the Licence of the Program package REFLEXW

By purchasing the licence of the program package REFLEXW the user has
accepted the following utilization, warranty and liability limitations.

§1. COPYRIGHT

REFLEXW The program REFLEXW and the documentation are protected by the copyright law of June
26, 1985 and Copyright 1993-2006 by Karl-Josef Sandmeier. Therefore it must not be
reproduced, distributed, let, hired out or resold without permission in writing from K.-J. Sand-
meier. Only for the purpose of saving and archiving a copy on disc may be produced. All rights
for this program and the manual are reserved by K.J. Sandmeier, Zipser Straße 1, 76227
Karlsruhe. REFLEXW is written with Delphi 3.2/Delphi 5 created using Borland International
1988,2000.
Version 4.0
§2. LICENSE CONCESSION
The program package REFLEXW is licensed, not sold. The legal purchase of the licence of
the program package and of the documentation entitles to the usage of the REFLEXW-
program on one data processing device (computer). The program package must not be
employed simultaneously on several computers. If the program package shall be transferred
to the server of a network, for each connected network station one licence of the program
package REFLEXW has to be purchased. Duplication of the manual is only allowed with
permission from K.-J. Sandmeier.

§3. WARRANTY
Windows™ 9x/NT/2000/XP-program 1. REFLEXW is an extensive program package for the recording and processing of reflection
for the processing of and transmission data. No warranty is made for the correctness of the program package
REFLEXW and for the correctness and completeness of the documentation. However, it is
seismic, acoustic or electromagnetic guaranteed to the user, that the program package is useable in the sense of the program
reflection, refraction and transmission data documentation that is valid at the time of delivery to the user and possesses the features
guaranteed there.
2. K.-J. Sandmeier guarantees that the original program package is duly recorded on a
certified data storage device.
3. If a program package proves not useable as defined by paragraph 1 or defective within the
meaning of paragraph 2, within a warranty period of six months, beginning with the delivery of
the program package to the user, the delivered program package is taken back and
exchanged free of charge for a new program package with the same title. In case that this one
Copyright 1998-2006 by also proves unuseable within the meaning of paragraph 1 or defective as defined by
paragraph 2 and K.-J. Sandmeier is unable to establish applicability with a reasonable effort
K.J. Sandmeier in a reasonable amount of time, the user has according to his choice the right of a reduction
Zipser Straße 1 of the purchase price or to return the program package and receive a refund of the purchase
D-76227 Karlsruhe price.
Germany 4. Further warranty obligations do not exist. Especially no warranty is made that the program
Tel. (49)721/491206 package complies with the special demands of the user. The user alone is responsible for
selecting, installing and using and also for the intended results.
Fax (49)721/4067994
§4. LIABILITY
Please feel free to contact us. 1. The applicability of the program package for a special purpose is not guaranteed. Also no
e-mail: [email protected] liability is taken in any way for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of
Web: www.sandmeier-geo.de this program package (these are among others without limitation damages due to losses of
business profits, operating troubles, loss of business data or other financial losses). This
All companies and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of exclusion of liability equally applies to damages to a third party.
their respective holders.
§5. The court of jurisdiction is Karlsruhe, Germany
Table of Contents Table of Contents

traveltime analysis 2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

0.8 Introduction to seismic reflection data interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
0.8.1 Import the data (done within the module 2D-dataanalysis) . . . . . 37
0.8.2 Setting the geometry (done within the module 2D-dataanalysis)
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
0.8.3 pre-stack filtering (done within the module 2D-dataanalysis) . . . 43
0.8.4 velocity analysis and stacking (done within the module 2D-
About REFLEXW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dataanalysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
0.9 Introduction to the 3D-datainterpretation within REFLEXW . . . . . . . . . . 50
0. REFLEXW user’s guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0.9.1. generation of a 3D-dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
0.1 the different REFLEXW modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0.9.1.1 Generating a 3D-file during the import without interpolation
0.1 Directory structure/project directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
0.2 some general comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0.9.1.1.1 Generating a 3D-file from original parallel 2D-
0.3 Import and first display of GPR-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
0.3.1 Import GPR-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 0.9.1.1.2 Generating a 3D-file from an original 3D-file
0.3.2 Display the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
0.4 Filtering the imported data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 0.9.1.2 Generating a 3D-file from REFLEXW formatted 2D-lines
0.4.1 General overview of filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 (done within the 3D-datainterpretation) . . . . . . . . . 54
0.4.2 Filtering of a single datafile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 0.9.1.2.1 Generating a 3D-file from REFLEXW 2D-lines
0.4.3 Filtering different 2D-lines using the same filter sequence (sequence without interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 0.9.1.2.2 Generating a 3D-file for freely distributed 2D-
0.5 Picking within REFLEXW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
0.5.1 Picking single objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 0.9.1.3 resulting REFLEXW 3D-datafile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
0.5.1.1 Picking hyperbolas along one profile line . . . . . . . . . . . 17 0.9.2 processing a 3D-data file (done within the 2D-dataanalysis) . . . 59
0.5.1.2 Use of xy-coordinates defined within the fileheader . . . 18 0.9.3 interpretation of a 3D-data file (done within the 3D-datainterpretation)
0.5.1.3 control and output of single picks for several profiles . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
0.5.2 Picking different reflectors within REFLEXW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 0.9.3.1 load a 3D-datafile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
0.5.2.1 General flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 0.9.3.2 display a 3D-datafile using the scroll option . . . . . . . . . 60
0.5.2.2 pick a distinct reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 0.9.3.3 display a 3D-datafile using the windows option . . . . . . 61
0.5.2.3 generate a velocity file for the time-depth conversion (open 0.9.3.4 display a 3D-datafile using the 3D-cube option . . . . . . 62
layershow panel ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 0.10 Introduction to the modelling/tomography tools within REFLEXW . . . . 63
0.5.2.4 combine the different picked reflectors into one layer model 0.10.1 model generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
(open layershow panel ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 0.10.1.1 create a new model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
0.5.2.5 generate an output report of the layer-show (open layershow 0.10.1.2 change an existing model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
panel ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 0.10.2 Finite Difference (FD) modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
0.6 coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 0.10.3 ray tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
0.6.1 pecularities for meandering 2D-profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 0.10.4. tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
0.6.2 Use of GPS-coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 0.10.4.1 picking the traveltime data and description of the format
0.6.2.1 Set the GPS-coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
0.6.2.1 Handle the traceheader(GPS)-coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 29 0.10.4.2 performing the transmission tomography . . . . . . . . . . 72
0.6.2.1.1 picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 0.10.4.3 performing the refraction tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
0.6.2.1.2 viewing options within the 2D-dataanalysis 0.11 Use of CMP-analysis for a single or several independent CMP-files . . 76
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
0.6.2.1.3 processing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 1. 2D-Data-Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
0.6.2.1.4 3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 1.1 File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
0.7 Introduction to seismic refraction data interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.1.1 interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
0.7.1 Import the data and pick the first onsets (done within the module 2D- 1.2 Global MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
dataanalysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.2.1 Global settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
0.7.2 interpretation of the picked traveltimes (done within the module 1.3 Plot MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table of Contents Table of Contents

1.4 View MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1.11.1.14 Walsh bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

1.5 Import Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 1.11.2 Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
1.5.1 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 1.11.2.1 AGC-Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.5.2 Import filename specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 1.11.2.2 Energy decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.5.3 Import ControlOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 1.11.2.3 Gain function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.5.4 Import format specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 1.11.2.4 Remove header gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.5.5 Import ConversionMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 1.11.2.5 div. compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1.5.6 Import ControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 1.11.2.6 Manual gain (y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.5.7 Import time/comment specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 1.11.2.7 Manual gain (x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
1.5.8 Access of the Exabyte drive (RADAN_TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 1.11.2.8 Scaled windowgain(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.6 Export Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 1.11.2.9 x-distance decay(db) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.7 PlotOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 1.11.3 StaticCorrection/muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.7.1 Plotsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 1.11.3.1 Static correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.7.2 Pointmodeattributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 1.11.3.2 Dynamic correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.7.3 Wiggleattributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 1.11.3.3 Move starttime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.7.4 Manual scaling and incrementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 1.11.3.4 Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
1.7.5 PlotGain/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 1.11.3.5 Time cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1.7.6 Plotsuboptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 1.11.3.6 Correct max. phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.8 Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 1.11.3.7 Correct picked phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1.8.1 PrintOptions1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 1.11.3.8 Correct for 2 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
1.8.2 PrinterSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 1.11.3.9 Correct 3D-topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
1.8.3 PrintOptions2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 1.11.3.10 Suppress multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
1.8.4 FontSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 1.11.4 Declipping/arithmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
1.8.5 ControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 1.11.4.1 Declipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
1.8.6 Printing on banner paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 1.11.4.2 Arithmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.8.7 Print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 1.11.5 Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
1.9 FileHeader Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 1.11.5.1 Complex trace-analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
1.9.1 Fileheader coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 1.11.5.2 Trace spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
1.9.2 Fileheader time specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 1.11.5.3 Moving window spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1.9.3 Fileheader input1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 1.11.5.4 Spectral whitening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1.9.4 Fileheader filename specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 1.11.5.5 1. derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
1.9.5 Fileheader ControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 1.11.5.6 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
1.9.6 Traceheader Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 1.11.5.7 Rotate 2 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
1.10 Edit several FileHeaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 1.11.6 Trace Interpolation/Resorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.11 Processing MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 1.11.6.1 Markerinterpol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
1.11.1 1D-Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 1.11.6.2 Traceincr-resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.11.1.1 Meanfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 1.11.6.3 Make equidist.traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.11.1.2 Medianfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 1.11.6.4 fix profile length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.11.1.3 Bandpassfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 1.11.6.5 YFlipProfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.11.1.4 Bandpassbutterworth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 1.11.6.6 XFlipProfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
1.11.1.5 Filter/timedependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 1.11.6.7 Resort-traceheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
1.11.1.6 Notchfilter/frequ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 1.11.6.8 Resort-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
1.11.1.7 Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 1.11.6.9 Yo-Yo section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1.11.1.8 Deconvolution/shap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 1.11.6.10 Traceinterpol-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
1.11.1.9 Subtract-mean (dewow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 1.11.6.11 XFlip-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
1.11.1.10 Subtract-DC-shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 1.11.6.12 Shift-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
1.11.1.11 Crosscorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 1.11.6.13 create 3D-ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
1.11.1.12 auto correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 1.11.7 Edit traces/traceranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
1.11.1.13 Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 1.11.7.1 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Table of Contents Table of Contents

1.11.7.2 Remove range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.12.3.1 Create LayerShow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

1.11.7.3 Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.12.3.2 Create LayerShow report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
1.11.7.4 Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.12.3.3 Create LayerShow velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
1.11.7.5 Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.12.3.4 LayerShow amplitude calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1.11.7.6 Reverse polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.12.3.5 LayerShow multioffset picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1.11.7.7 Set to zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.12.4 CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
1.11.7.8 Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.12.4.1 CMP-processing geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
1.11.7.9 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 1.12.4.2 CMP-processing stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.11.7.10 Insert profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 1.12.5 A/D conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1.11.7.11 Mix profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 1.12.6 edit comment markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
1.11.7.12 Combine files f.CMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 1.12.7 adjust trace gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
1.11.7.13 merge files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 1.12.8 3-component analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
1.11.7.14 insert zero traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1.11.7.15 merge in timedir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2. CMP(1D) velocity analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
1.11.7.16 remove zero traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.1 CMP velocity adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
1.11.8 2D-Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.2 CMP semblance analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.11.8.1 Running average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.3 CMP 2D-model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
1.11.8.2 Subtracting average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
1.11.8.3 Background removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 3. 3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
1.11.8.4 average xy-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 3.1 3D-datainterpretation MenuItems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
1.11.8.5 median xy-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 3.1.1 3D-File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
1.11.8.6 Compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.1.2 View MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1.11.8.7 Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.1.3 Analyse MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
1.11.8.8 Stack traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.2 Scroll 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
1.11.8.9 Subtract traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 3.3 Windowing 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
1.11.8.10 Compress 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 3.4 3D-cube display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
1.11.9 Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 3.5 Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
1.11.9.1 Diffraction stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 3.6 Generate single timeslices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
1.11.9.2 Kirchhoff migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 3.6.1 Timeslice calculation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
1.11.9.3 Fk migration (Stolt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 3.6.2 Timeslice calculation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
1.11.9.4 diffraction 2D-veloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 3.7 view fast data cube display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
1.11.9.5 Kirchhoff 2D-veloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 3.8 3D picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
1.11.9.6 FD-migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
1.11.9.7 3D-diffraction stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 4. Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
1.11.9.8 3D-Kirchh. migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 4.1 Modelling File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
1.11.9.9 timedepth conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4.2 Modelling Edit MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
1.11.9.10 semblance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 4.3 Modelling View MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
1.11.9.11 3D-semblance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 4.4 Model generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
1.11.10 Fk-filter/Fk-spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 4.4.1 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
1.11.10.1 Fk filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 4.4.2 Generating a new layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
1.11.10.2 Fk filter-lineparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 4.4.3 Input of model parameters window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
1.11.10.3 Fk spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 4.4.4 Changing an existing layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
1.11.11 Sequence Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 4.4.5 Changing the position of all layers within the model . . . . . . . . . 335
1.12 Analysis MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 4.4.6 Topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
1.12.1 Velocity adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 4.5 FD-Model simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
1.12.2 Pick MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 4.5.1 FD-computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
1.12.2.1 Pick save MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 4.5.2 Computation of several single lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
1.12.2.2 Auto-Pick MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 4.5.3 Absorbing Range for the e.-m. wave propagation . . . . . . . . . . 342
1.12.3 LayerShow MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 4.5.4 FD-modelling 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table of Contents Table of Contents

4.6 Tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 6.3.1.2 The difference between FileHeader and Traceheader
4.7 raytracing/wavefront inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.7.1. raytracing 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 6.3.1.3 edit the geometry of source and the receivers within the
fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.7.1.1 raytracing shot/receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 6.3.1.4 edit the geometry of source and the receivers within each
4.7.1.2 3D raytracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 traceheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.7.2 wavefront-inversion 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 6.3.2 process the seismic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
6.3.3 pick the frst arrivals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
5. Refraction traveltime analysis 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 6.3.3.1 Preconditions for picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
5.1 traveltimes put together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 6.3.3.2 Setting of picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
5.2 traveltimes assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 6.3.4 put together the traveltimes of different shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
5.3 traveltimes combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 6.3.5 assign the traveltimes to specific layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
5.4 time term analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 6.3.6 combine the assigned traveltimes to one forward/reverse traveltime
branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
6. User‘s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 6.3.7 invert the individual layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
6.1 GPR-DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 6.3.8 use of the 1D-interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
6.1.1 Which data types can be imported? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 6.3.9 how to handle the topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
6.1.2 The difference between FileHeader and Traceheader . . . . . . . 364
6.1.3 How is the FileHeader set or changed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6.1.4 How is the TraceHeader set or changed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6.1.5 How are the PlotOptions set or changed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6.1.6 First filter steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.1.6.1 Fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.1.6.2 Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.1.6.3 Shot time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.1.6.4 Peculiarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.1.7 Getting information about the velocity of the medium . . . . . . . . 367
6.1.7.1 Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.1.7.2 ZO-data / CO-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
6.1.7.3 CMP-Measurements / Moveout-Measurements . . . . . 368
6.1.7.4 Using Coredata to get velocity information . . . . . . . . . 368
6.1.7.5 Generating 2D-velocity models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6.1.8 Picking of onsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.1.8.1 Preconditions for picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.1.8.2 Setting of picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.1.8.3 Saving of picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.1.8.4 Saving of picks to create a layershow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.1.8.5 Export of picks to create contour plots . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.1.8.6 Picking and time-depth conversion of several layer
boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.1.9 Generating 3D-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
6.1.9.1 Generating 3D-files during the import . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
6.1.9.2 Generating 3D-files from already imported data . . . . . 375
6.1.10 Interpretation of freely orientated 2D-lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6.3 seismic refraction data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.3.0 standard processing/interpretation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.3.1 import seismic data and define the geometry of the source and the
receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.3.1.1 import the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
About REFLEXW 1 About REFLEXW 2

About REFLEXW module 3D data-interpretation for displaying x-,y- or z-slices. The slices are either
displayed in manually scalable windows or by moving through the 3D-cube using a
Short program description: track bar.

REFLEXW is the new Windows™9x/NT version of REFLEX - the DOS program for module modelling for the 2D-simulation of the seismic or electromagnetic wave-
the processing and interpretation of reflection and transmission data (special propagation based on a Finite Difference approximation. In addition a tomographic
applications: ground penetrating radar (GPR), reflection and refraction seismics and algorithm for traveltime data is included
ultrasound).

graphics resolution: It is recommended to use 16 bit high color resolution (65536 module traveltime analysis 2D which allows to analyse and interpret picked first
colors) because a higher graphics resolution (true color) needs much more memory arrivals (refraction seismics).
(the max. bitmap size is also reduced) and slowens the plotting significantly. Using
256 colors means that the colors will not be stable when switching between
different programs.

The following modules are available:

module 2D data-analysis with

- easy import of data of many different formats (e.g. SEGY, SEG2, most of the
EMR- and seismic systems (for example: GSSI, RAMAC, PULSE-EKKO) and so
on), integration of other nonstandard formats.
- conversion of single sections and of a profile sequence (automatic assembling
and storing of the sections under one single data file or automatic generation of
data files for parallel and inline-sections).
- many different display and processing possibilities
- interactive processing of single files or by generating a batch-file (sequence
processing)
- one- and multi-channel filters, editing, static correction, deconvolution, migration
and much more.
- interactive velocity adaptation
- picking of onsets
- layer-show
- CMP-processing

module CMP velocity analysis which the calculation of a one-dimensional velocity-

depth-distribution from CMP- or moveout-data based on different analysis
techniques with the following possibilities:

- interactive CMP velocity adaptation of a velocity-model for a CMP- or a moveout-

section with continuous indication of the actual reflections
- CMP semblance analysis for a given velocity-interval, interactive choice of a
vrms-depth-distribution from the semblance or unnormalized correlation analysis,
direct reconstruction of the interval velocities, possibility to change the resulting
distribution by the model generation module described above
- generation of a CMP 2D-model based on the resulting 1D-velocity-depth
distributions. This 2D-model represents the base for the stacking, the migration
and the depth-conversion.
REFLEXW user’s guide 3 User’s guide - directory structure/project directory 4

0. REFLEXW user’s guide 0.1 Directory structure/project directory

Within this short user’s guide some basic applications are described. It mainly The program REFLEXW uses a special directory structure, where the data are
concerns: stored in the order of projects and processing steps.
the import and display of GPR-data (chap. 0.3) The standard directory name is the subdirectory, where all projects shall be stored -
the filtering (chap. 0.4) e.g c:\programs\reflex. The default directory is the directory where the program has
the picking (chap. 0.5) been installed. Any other standard directory must be created manually, e.g. using
the use of GPS-coordinates (chap. 0.6.2) the explorer. The last specified standard directory is automatically stored when
the seismic refraction interpretation (chap. 0.7) leaving the program.
the seismic reflection interpretation (chap. 0.8) Under the standard directory the user has to create himself his projects as
the 3D-datainterpretation (chap. 0.9) subdirectories (option new project) These subdirectories are the so called project
the modelling/tomography (chap. 0.10). directories. All subdirectories created by the user under the standard directory
name are listed after calling REFLEXW.
An existing subdirectory can be chosen by simply click on the wanted directory
(either single or double click).
0.1 the different REFLEXW modules When calling the option confirm project the actual chosen directory is used as the
working project directory.
When calling the option new project the actual entered project name is used as the
This is the first window of REFLEXW from which you may enter the different
working project directory.
program modules (see also program modules).
Each project again has 6 subdirectories, which, if not already created by the user,
are created by the program REFLEXW automatically after selecting the project.
Project: Selection of a new project. After selecting this option the directories
included in the current project directory are listed. From these you can choose the
Overview over the directory structure:
project you want to work with.
ASCII
ROHDATA
Exit: Exit the program REFLEXW.
standard-path - project directory - PROCDATA
LINEDATA
Modules: Chose of the different program modules:
MODEL
ANYTHING
- 2D data-analysis which allows the complete processing of 2D-lines.
Externally formatted data (e.g. SEGY or SEG2-data) should be stored in the
- module CMP velocity analysis which the calculation of a one-dimensional
directory ASCII (default import directory) but it is also possible to import the data
velocity-depth-distribution from CMP- or moveout-data based on different
from any other directory or drive (see also Import Menu).
analysis techniques.
Installing the DEMO-DATA:
- module 3D data-interpretation for displaying x-,y- or z-slices. The slices are
either displayed in manually scalable windows or by moving through the 3D-cube
The demo-data enclosed on the CD are automatically installed under the path
using a track bar.
REFLEXW has been installed. Example:
installation directory: C:\programs\reflex
- module modelling for the 2D-simulation of the seismic or electromagnetic wave-
data directory: C:\programs\reflex
propagation based on a Finite Difference approximation. In addition a
The demodata-diskette contains the following files:
tomographic algorithm for traveltime data is included.
gprline_.00t - a GPR-2D profile with a 300 MHz antenna -
this file may be used within the 2-d-data-analysis module.
seismic1.01t - a seismic shot file consisting of 46 shots -
this file can be processed using the CMP-processing routines
gprcmp1_.00t -a GPR moveout file - this file can be interpreted within the
CMP-velocity- analysis module
3ddata__.00t - a 3D-GPR datafile -for use within the 3D-datainterpretation
User’s guide - some general comments 5 User’s guide - some general comments 6

0.2 some general comments The files CBNDLL.DLL and CBN.VXD are copied under your system directory.
If the installation is made under Windows NT or Windows 2000/XP, in addition three
different drivers (MARXDEV1.SYS, MARXDEV2.SYS and MARXDEV3.SYS) are
1. import NON-reflex formatted data: installed which allow the proper access to any parallel port.
To be considered under WindowsNT and Windows 2000/XP: You must be a
Externally formatted data (e.g. SEGY or SEG2-data) should be stored in the member of the administration group for installing the driver properly.
directory ASCII (default import directory) but it is also possible to import the data
from any other directory or drive. Use the option file/import within the 2D-
dataanalysis module for importing the data. The converted files are written to the 5. display resolution
subdirectory ROHDATA, any processed data and the timeslices are saved under
the subdirectory PROCDATA. Please use high color (16 bit) resolution because this is the best compromise
between color resolution and needed RAM. True color (32 bit) needs twice as much
memory and therefore slowens plotting significantly. When using 256 colors the
2. first filter operations: colors don't remain when switching to another window.

Some data like RAMAC or PULSE-EKKO formatted data must be preprocessed in

a special way in the module 2D data- analysis. The first filter is either the so called 6. Decimal separator
subtract-mean(dewow) under the 1D-filter processing group or the subtract DC-shift
filter which eliminates a possible time constant shift. The second filter consists of Reflexw always uses the dot (“.”) for the numerical data representation within
the application of a gainfunction (e.g. option manual gain(y), energy decay, AGC or ASCII-files to be read or saved. The decimal separator within the Reflexw input
gain function under the Gain processing group). windows is given by default by the Windows settings and may be changed within
The AGC (AutomaticGain Control) or the energy decay has not to be used as a the gloabal settings menu (chap. 1.2.1).
filter function but can also be used only for the presentation of the data (see plot
options). Each filtered data set is stored on disc with a user defined label in the
extension.
Using the option "change second to primary" you may declare the actual filtered file
as the primary file which can be processed in a different manner. In order to enable
a good control of the filtering you may choose between non split, vertically split or
horizontally split window (options horizontal split or vertical split under plotoptions).

3. demodata

If the program is delivered on CD demo data are automatically installed under your
working directory. Thereby a project named demodata is automatically created.

4 hardware dongle

if the program is supplied with a hardware dongle the dongle must be installed on
one of the two parallel or on the USB port.
The program works both with the attached USB and the parallel port dongle.
For a proper working of the hardware dongle under Windows9x or Windows NT and
Windows 2000/XP the Crypto-Box Windows 95/2000/NT/XP driver must be
installed.
Enter cbsetup.exe from the CD for the installation. Click on install and OK and then
choose CRYPTO-BOX USB CrypToken (USB) for the USB dongle or CRYPTO-
BOX Versa (LPT) for the parallel port dongle.
User’s guide - import and first display of GPR-data 7 User’s guide - import and first display of GPR-data 8

0.3 Import and first display of GPR-data

In the following the import and the first display of GPR-data within REFLEXW are
described. The functions are described using a MALA/RAMAC GPR-example file.
You only have to change some options for other data types.

0.3.1 Import GPR-data

1. enter the module 2D-

dataanalysis

2. enter the import menu using

the option File/Open/import.
The REFLEXW-DataImport
menu appears (see figure at
the right).

3. Make the following inputs:

input format: RAMAC
output format: 16 bit integer
filename specification: original
0.3.2 Display the data
name for example; to be
considered: REFLEXW (until
version 2.5.x) only uses max. 8 1. After having done the import the data are displayed using the standard plot
(16 from version 3) characters options. You may change these plot options using the option Plot/Options.
for the filename for DOS- Activating this option the Plot
compatibility. Options menu appears (see
Choose X or Y as figure on the right).
ProfileDirection and Y or X as
ProfileConstant. 2. The main plot options for
Choose if the traceincrement and/or the coordinates shall be read from the original GPR-data are:
data.
- Plotmode
4. Activate the option Convert to Reflex. A fileopen menu appears with the - PointmodeScale
directory ASCII under your project directory as the standard import path. You may - EnergyDecay
choose an original RAMAC file (RD3 or RAD-file) from this import path or from any - AmplitudeScale
other directory. In any case both RAMAC files (RD3 and RAD) must be present.
After having chosen the wanted RAMAC file the data are converted into the Plotmode: by default use
REFLEXW internal format and stored under the path ROHDATA under your project Pointmode for GPR-data.
directory. With the option PrimaryFile activated the imported data are automatically PointmodeScale:
displayed into the primary window (see figure below). XYScaledPlot: the data are
completely plotted into the actual
5. Exit the import menu using the option exit. window provided that the two
scale options XScale and
YScale are set to 1. The option
may be used for small data (few
traces) or if you want to display
User’s guide - import and first display of GPR-data 9 User’s guide - filtering the imported data 10

the complete dataset into the main menu ( the Zoom-options are available - see 0.4 Filtering the imported data
also option Xscale and Yscale)). With no zooming and large datasets the display
resolution is quite poor.
PixelPerSample: the plotting size of each data point is given in screen pixels. In the following the filtering within REFLEXW is described including single filtering
Zooming or rescaling is only possible in y-direction (option Yscale). The option (chapter 0.2.3.2) and sequence processing (chapter 0.2.3.3).
might be useful for large data.
PixelsPerTrace: the distance between successive traces is given in screen pixels.
The complete time series of each trace is plotted corresponding to the size of the
actual window. No zooming possibilities are available. For example this option may
be used for large data (many traces). 0.4.1 General overview of filtering
EnergyDecay: the RAMAC GPR-date are raw data without any gain in time-
direction. Therfore activate this option if no gain-filter (see also filtering guide) has 1. The filtering options can only be applied on REFLEXW formatted data - this
been applied on the GPR-data in order to compensate the energy decay with time. means that other formatted data (like RAMAC, GSSI, SEGY,...) must be imported
AmplitudeScale: this parameter controls the contrast of the data display. first using the option File/import. The imported data are stored under the
subdirectory rohdata.
On the lower figure you see the data using the plot parameters shown in the
plotoptions figure above. 2. The filtered data are always stored on a separate file using the same filename
and a special extension given by the processing label. Example: original file:
To be considered: Normally the data must be filtered (see the filtering guide). The profile1.dat; filtered file: profile1.00t (the processing label was set to 0). The filtered
main filters are: data are always stored under the subdirectory procdata.
static correction to compensate for the time delay of the first arrival.
y(time)-gain 3. Filtering can be done for a single dataprofile (see section II) or for a number of
dewow profiles (so called sequence processing, see section III).

0.4.2 Filtering of a single datafile

In the following the filtering of a single REFLEXW-formatted datafile is described

step by step. The following filtering sequence is used:
subtract-mean(dewow)
static correction
manual gain(y)
background removal
This may be a standard filter sequence for GPR-data which are stored as raw data
like RAMAC or PULSEEKKO data. For a detailed information about the individual
filter steps please press F1 within the corresponding filtermenu.

1. enter the module 2D-

dataanalysis

2. load the wanted datafile into

the primary window using the
option File/Open/rawdata and
then choose the wanted datafile.

3. The chosen datafile has been

plotted into the primary window
(Hor.Split activated). Depending
User’s guide - filtering the imported data 11 User’s guide - filtering the imported data 12

on the settings of the split plot options (see option Plot/Options - options Ver.Split 9. A table appears on the right side. You may
or Hor.Split activated) the screen is subdivided vertically or horizontally into two either enter manually the correction values
different windows (primary window and secondary window). If none of the two within this table or you may enter the values
options is activated the screen is not subdivided. interactively using the left mouse button within
the data. The option save allows to store the
4. enter the first filter step using the option Processing/1D-Filter. correction values on file for any later step.

5. The 1D-filter window appears. Enter 10. Enter the wanted ProcessingLabel and
the following parameters or options: start the static correction. To be considered:
- activate the option subtract-mean the processing label must be different from that
(dewow) of the primary file because original and filtered
- enter the filterparameter timewindow datafile must not have the same filename.
- enter the wanted ProcessingLabel
- start the filtering 11. The static corrected data have been plotted
into the secondary window. Close the static correction window and use the option
With the option Apply on example trace File/ChangeSecondToPrimary in order to use the filtered dataset for the next
activated the effect of the entered desired filter step.
filterparameter(s) can be controlled
interactively (filtered trace and filtered
spectrum). Trace number controls which 12. Enter the third filter step using the
trace is shown. option Processing/Gain.

W it h the option Seq u en cePro c. 13. Within the Gain window activate the
activated the SequenceProcessing menu option manual gain (y). A table appears
opens in addition which allows you to add the actual filter step to the processing on the right side for
flow (see chapter 0.2.3.3). entering the
gainvalues (analogous
6. The filtered data have been to the previous static
plotted into the secondary window. correction) together
Now close the filter window and with a new window
yo u m u s t e n t e r t h e o p t i o n which allows to
File/ChangeSecondToPrimary in interactively enter the
order to use the filtered dataset for gainvalues.
the next desired filter step.

14. Enter the wanted ProcessingLabel and start the manual gain (y) processing
step. Again the processing label must be different from that of the primary file.
7.Enter the second filter step using the option Processing/staticCorrection/
muting. 15. The manual gain (y) corrected data
have been plotted into the secondary
8. Within the StaticCorrection/muting window activate the option static window. Close the gain window and
correction and the suboption move to negative times. enter the option File/
ChangeSecondToPrimary in order to
use the filtered dataset for the next
desired filter step.
User’s guide - filtering the imported data 13 User’s guide - filtering the imported data 14

16. Enter the last filter step using the option 0.4.3 Filtering different 2D-lines using the same filter
Processing/2D-filter.
sequence (sequence processing)
17. Within the 2D-filter window activate the option
background removal. In this case the complete The sequence (batch) processing facilitates a completely automatic sequence of
datarange is used for determining the filtertrace processing steps for a choosable number of profiles. For this you have to define a
(suboption whole line activated). Enter the wanted sequence of processing steps before, then select the data lines and then start the
ProcessingLael and start the background sequence processing.
removal filter. Again the processing label must be
different from that of the primary file.
1. Defining the sequence during the filtering of a single example file (see
section II).

18. The filtering is finished. You may use the For that purpose you must always activate the option SequenceProc. when
option File/ChangeSecondToPrimary and entering any of the filter menus. Then the SequenceProcessing menu opens in
deactivate the option Hor.Split within the addition and you are able to add the
plotoption menu in order to only view the actual filter step to the processing flow
finally filtered dataset. The complete using the option AddActualProc. The
processing flow can be displayed using the step AddActualProc. must be done
option File/ProcessingFlow . The after having specified the filter
processing flow of the actual file may also be parameters and before closing the
saved on a separate file and be used for a actual filter menu (e.g. between step 5
further sequence processing (see section and step 6 within chapter II).
0.2.3.3).
After having done all wanted filter
steps for the example file including
adding to the
sequence processing
you may save the
actual sequence
processing on a
separate file using
t h e o p t i o n
SaveSequence.

Such a processing
sequence file may be
loaded at any time
using the option
LoadSequence.

Normally the actual processing step is added at the end of the processing
sequence but it is also possbile to inlcude it at any position. For that purpose you
must click on the wanted processing step (a tick appears) the actual step shall be
included before.

It is also possbile to remove a special processing step from the processing flow. For
that purpose you must click on the wanted processing step (a tick appears) and
then use the option DeleteProc. in order to remove this processing step.
To be considered: for some processing steps where you have to enter the
User’s guide - filtering the imported data 15 User’s guide - filtering the imported data 16

processing values by the mouse or within the table these values have to be saved The program uses the correction (processing) values for each profile within the
on an ASCII file before defining/starting the sequence processing. For the following sequence processing. Therefore it must be ensured that the precondintion for
processing steps the edit values are read from a file: that holds true (especially for the processing step static correction).
manual gain (y), manual gain (x), static correction, muting and fk-filter.

Therefore when you are adding for example the processing step static correction to
the sequence processing flow first you must enter the wanted static correction
values and then you must press the option save within the static correction menu.
The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the procject
directory with the name correct and a freely choosable extension. This datafile is
asked for when you are starting the sequence processing which includes the static
correction (see item 2).

2. Start the sequence processing

The sequence processing menu is entered either during filtering a single example
file or by the option Processing/SequenceProcessing.
After having defined the processing flow you must specify the ProcessingLabel
and then start the sequence processing.
Activating the option StartActualLine applies the processing flow on the actual
primary file.
Activating the option StartSeveralLines applies the processing flow on a number
of files to be chosen. The option filefilter allows to enter a filter for the multi file
choice. Filepath specifies the path for loading the files to be processed. The
multifile choice is done using the Shift or Strg-key.
Activating the option plotdata allows you to display original and filtered file
simultaneously, whereby a direct control of the result is given.
You may choose between the so-called sequence mode and the single processing
mode (option SingleProcess activated) with the possibility of applying the
processing steps individually on the original file(s).

Flow for the option StartSeveralLines:

1. After having defined the sequence processing (see item 1.) activate the option
filepath and choose rohdata if the files to be processed are the original date or
procdata if the files have been processed before.
2. Enter the wanted processing label.
3. activate the option plot data in order to plot the processed files during the
sequence processing.
3. Click on StartSeveralLines and choose the wanted files - multifile choice using
the shift or the ctr-key.
4. the sequence processing is started and after having finished the processing a
report menu is shown.

To be considered: For the following processing steps the edit values are read
from an ASCII file which is asked for after having choosen all wanted files (item
4):
manual gain (y), manual gain (x), static correction, muting and fk-filter.
User’s guide - picking 17 User’s guide - picking 18

0.5 Picking within REFLEXW 0.5.1.2 Use of xy-coordinates defined within the fileheader

The ASCII-output described above does not contain the real xy-coordinates but
0.5.1 Picking single objects the distance coordinates along the profile together with the start coordinate in the
profile constant direction. Therefore these coordinates only correspond to the real
0.5.1.1 Picking hyperbolas along one profile line xy-coordinates if the profiledirection is strictly orientated into x- or y-direction. If
this does not hold true (e.g. diagonal lines) you must take into account the so
The following flow described one way how to mark single objects (hyperbolas) called traceheader coordinates in addition.
and to save the parametres x, z and ID on an ASCII file for a further interpretation
with any other CAD-system. The following steps are necessary before picking:
1. enter the module 2D-dataanalysis 1. Define the geometry of your file
within the fileheader either during
2. load the wanted GPR or seismic ZO(zero offset) profile the import or within the edit
fileheader menu (option edit
3. activate the option pick fileheader). The example shows a
diagonal line.
4. activate the option manual pick
2. After having defined the
5. enter the ID of the hyperbola within the paramter pickcode fileheader coordinates (do not forget
so save them before when you have
6. click on the cusp of the hyperbola within the profile using the left mouse button changed the fileheader coordinates
within the fileheader menu) activate
7. repeat step 5-6 until all hyperbola cusps have been picked the option ShowTraceHeader.
8. enter the option save and activate the pickformat ASCII-colums. In addition
you also may save the picks using the REFLEXW-Win format in order to load the
picks at a later stage again.

9. Activate the options depths, amplitudes and pick codes. 3. The traceheader menu opens.
Here you may actualize the
10. enter the wanted velocity in m/ns for converting the 2-way traveltimes into traceheadercoordinates either based on
depths the fileheader coordinates or based on
different ASCII-files (see also guide for
11. enter the wanted filename and press save GPS-coordinates, chap. 0.6). Enter within
the Actualize panel for type fileheader
12. each line of the output file contains the following informations: and press the buttom actualize.
profiledirection profileconstant traveltime depth amplitude code
4. Now the traceheader coordinates are
defined based on the given fileheader
coordinates. You may check the
coordinates using the trace number edit
button.

5. Close the traceheader and the

fileheader menu and pick the hyperbolas
like described in chapter 1.
User’s guide - picking 19 User’s guide - picking 20

0.5.1.3 control and output of single picks for several profiles

6. When saving the picks
using the format ASCII-colums
you must activate the option It is also possible to save the picks of different 2D-profiles into one ASCII-file.
xy-coordinates in addition.
1. For that purpose first you must save the picks of the 2D-profiles into different
7. 12. Now each line of the Reflexw-pickfiles using the pick format Reflex Win.
output file contains the
following informations: 2. You may control the
profiledistance profileconstant- location of the picks
start shot-x shot-y receiver-x within the interactive
receiver-y traveltime depth choice menu - enter for
amplitude code that purpose
file/interactive choice
For zero offset data the shot within the 2D-
and the receiver coordinates are the same and you only may consider one datananalysis - the
coordinate pair. interactive 2D-line choice
menu opens

3. Choose the wanted

filepath and press show
all lines

4. Click on show picks

and choose the wanted
pickfiles (multifile choice using the shift or strg key)

5. Picks belonging to the same code are connected if the option interpolation is
activated. If the option use code within the 2D-dataanalysis is activated the
layershow-colors are used for the display of the picks.

6. If the picks are correct you may leave the interactive choice menu and enter
the pick save menu in order to save all the picks for the different 2D-lines into one
single ASCII-file.

7. Within the save pick menu you must choose the “ASCII-colums” pick format
and you have to activate the option “export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-
file”.

8. Click on save and choose all wanted ReflexWin formatted pickfiles (multi
filechoice using the shift or strg key).

9. Each line of the resulting ASCII-file contains the following values:

traveltime depth amplitude x-shot y-shot z-shot x-receiver y-receiver z-receiver
code(optional)
Depths and amplitudes are set to zero if the corresponding options depth and
amplitudes are deactivated.
User’s guide - picking 21 User’s guide - picking 22

0.5.2 Picking different reflectors within REFLEXW

5. use the option save for saving the
picks of one reflector using the format
0.5.2.1 General flow Reflex Win. Enter the following
parameters:
1. pick a distinct reflector - it is not necessary that the reflector is continuous but it
global code: any code
also may consist of different broken parts (chap. 0.5.2.2)
layer number: number of the layer -
necessary for the following
2. save the picks of one reflector using a special name (e.g. layer 1)- enter the
combination of the different picked
layer number, the mean velocity and a layer code
reflectors, min. layer number is 0,
max. layer number is 10 (up to ver.
3. repeat step 1 and 2 until all reflectors have been picked
2.1) or 100 (from ver. 2.5). Each
reflector should receive an individual
4. enter the layer-show
number.
mean velocity: enter a mean velocity
5. create a velocity file if layer velocities shall be used instead of mean velocities
for the depth conversion
(chap. 0.5.2.3)
filename: filename for the picks (automatic extension is pck)
6. create the layer-show (chap. 0.5.2.4)
6. reset all picks if you want to pick a new reflector
7. create a report (chap. 0.5.2.5)
7. repeat step 4-6 until all reflectors are picked - to be considered: the layer
number must be changed for every different reflector. The max. layer number is
10 until ver. 2.1.2 (100 from ver. 2.5).
0.5.2.2 pick a distinct reflector
8. activate the option layer-show or under analyse/layer-show - the
corresponding ZO-profile must be loaded - the new layershow parameter panel
Each reflector must be picked separately. It is not necessary that the reflector is opens.
continuous but it also may consist of several broken parts. In the following the
different steps are described:

1. enter the module 2D-dataanalysis

0.5.2.3 generate a velocity file for the time-depth conversion
2. load the wanted GPR or seismic ZO(zero offset) profile - comment: GPR (open layershow panel )
profiles are normally ZO-lines

3. activate the option pick For the time-depth conversion using the option create LayerShow (see section
0.5.2.4) it is necessary to take a velocity into account.
4. pick the reflector using one of the possible picking possibilities: The first possibility is to use the constant mean velocities for the total
overburden of every pick file, which were set during the pick process (see section
phase follower: use this option for long profiles (plotoption PixelsPerTrace 0.5.2.2 - step 5). If you want to use this option you may skip this chapter and
recommended) and for the case that the reflector is quite continuous. The you may continue with chapter 0.5.2.4.
automatic phase follower is stopped using the right mouse button or the escape The second possibility is to use an ASCII velocity datafile (e.g. test.vla). In that
key. Then you may force the phasefollower to continue the picking at a distinct case, the velocities for each layer may vary laterally and they are given as layer
place. Already existing picks are replaced by the new ones - for a detailed velocities in contrast to the mean pick velocities. Such an ASCII-file contains the
description please see online help. following information:
continuous pick: use this option for a continuous manual picking comment line
manual pick: use this option for single trace picking or for changing individual comment line
picks 1.velocity line
auto pick: use the object type continuous reflector (from ver. 2.5)
User’s guide - picking 23 User’s guide - picking 24

.... 0.5.2.4 combine the different picked reflectors into one layer
n. velocity line model (open layershow panel )
Each velocity line contains:
distance v-layer1 v-layer2 ..... v-layer10 or v-layer 100 (from ver. 2.5)
This option offers the possibility to
The layer velocities may not defined at each desired distance position but the combine individual pick files stored on
program performs a linear interpolation between the given values. file, to plot them together with the wiggle-
files and to output them in report form on
Such an ASCII velocity datafile can either be generated manually using any editor printer or file. The maximum number of
or using core files (see chapter 6.1.7.4 within the manual) or using the option combined picks per layer boundary is
create velocity in the LayerShow panel. The latter option is described below in equal to the max. number of traces per
detail: profile. The maximum number of layer
boundaries is 10 (until ver. 2.1) or 100
1. activate the option create velocity within the layershow panel - the create (from ver. 2.5).
velocity menu opens (see figure on the right). The picked traveltimes of the reflectors
are transformed into dephts using either
2. there are four different ways to generate an a mean velocity for a distinct layer or
ASCII velocity datafile: The layer velocities are based on a laterally varying velocity file.
set manually, which implies no lateral change of
the velocity in one layer, or the velocities are In the following the individual steps of creating a layer-show are described.
calculated using an amplitude calibration of the
picked layer boundaries, or the velocities are 1. activate the option create within the layershow panel - the create layer show
calculated based on different multioffset picks menu opens (see figure on the right).
or they are taken from core data. The second
case (amplitude calibration) is only integrated 2. activate the option pick files within the layer show menu and choose all
within REFLEXW for completeness. We do not wanted pickfiles (multiple choice using the shift or str-key) - the chosen pick files
recommend this method (see manual, chap. 1.12.3.4 ). You may use different are listed in the textbox on the right.
ways for the different layers.
3. Control the other parameters like start/end position, increment and the velocity
3. Activate the option manual and enter the velocities for the individual layers choice for the time-depth conversion.
and the filename for the velocity file (the velocity file automatically has the If you want to use a velocity file for the time-depth conversion instead of the
extension vla). mean velocity stored with each pick file first you must create such a velocity file
(see section III). Then you must activate the option velocity file and load the
4. activate the option start for the generation of the ASCII file. The file is shown in wanted velocity file. The option interpolate layer controls how the special case
a window and activate the option close for closing the display of the file. of broken reflectors are handled (see below).
5. activate the option close for closing the create velocity menu. 4. Enter a filename for the layer-show (extension is automatically lay) and
activate the option start in order to create the layer-show.
6. The ASCII-file can be changed manually within any editor in order to take into
account lateral velocity variations. 5. activate the option close for closing the create layershowy menu.
User’s guide - picking 25 User’s guide - picking 26

6. the layer-show is 0.5.2.5 generate an output report of the layer-show (open

displayed in the lower layershow panel )
window - the traveltime
picks are displayed The results of the current layershow can be stored in a report. The output is
together with the ZO- performed either on a printer or on a file with an arbitrary name. According to the
profile within the upper individual settings, the report contains information about single layers like e.g.
window. thickness, velocity, amplitudes and coordinates. In addition, actually loaded core-
Note: If the option depth data and marker comments can be reported. It is also possible to reduce the
axis within the plotoptions information on single points e.g. to represent only material depth between two
is activated the depths for construction changes.
the picks of the upper
window are only 1. activate the option create report within the layershow panel - the create report
comparable to the depths menu opens (see figure on the right). Precondition: a layershow must be loaded
of the layers in the lower or just created.
picture if mean velocity
has been used for creating 2. enter the necessary parameters for
the layershow and if all the output:
mean velocities of the - start/end position and increment
picks are equal to the - layers: enter the numbers of the
velocity for the depthaxis display. layers for the report output: e.g. 1-5 or
1-5,8,9
7. Any layershow can be reloaded using the option load within the layershow
panel. 3. activate the option start in order to
start the report output.
To be considered: If the mean pick velocities are used for the time-depth
conversion, the time-depth conversion of each layer boundary is independent
from the conversion of the upper boundary.
In contrast, if an ASCII velocity datafile is used, the time-depth conversion of
each layer boundary depends on the conversion of the upper boundary.
Therefore, in that case one has to control how the time-depth conversion for a
special layer is done if any upper layer is not continuously picked. This is done
using the option interpolate layer.
If this option is activated every upper layer is assumed to be continuous even if it
is not picked and either an interpolation or an extrapolation both for the layer
points and the velocities is done. Based on these calculated values the time-
depth conversion of the actual layer is done.
If the option is deactivated, the velocities of the next upper picked layer are used.
This might result in a sharp step of the depth of the actual layer at the point
where any of the upper layers is broken.
User’s guide - coordinates 27 User’s guide - coordinates 28

0.6 coordinates 0.6.2 Use of GPS-coordinates

Reflexw uses both fileheader and traceheader coordinates.
The fileheader coordinates contain all the information about the geometry of the
whole file, e.g. it‘s start and end coordinates, distance dimension, trace REFLEXW allows to handle so called traceheader coordinates which are stored
increment. Therefore, if one deals with equidistant data, the coordinates of any within the header of each trace. Therefore it is possible to use GPS-coordinates
single trace are known in relation to the other traces of one file without defining for a special analysis.
the traceheader coordinates.
The traceheader contains additional information concerning a single trace: e.g. 0.6.2.1 Set the GPS-coordinates
shot position or receiver position in relation to the trace, which are needed in the
case of multi shot data or if GPS-coordinates are present. First you must set the traceheader coordinates using the GPS-coordinates.
For that purpose it is necessary that the GPS-coordinates are stored within an
Normally the data are displayed using the fileheader coordinates. The ASCII-file. Several formats are supported. For example:
traceheader coordinates are only used in addition, e.g. for the ASCII-output of the 1. ASCII-DST format - each line contains the following informations:
picks, for the CMP-processing of multi-offset data or for the interpretation of the tracenumber distance Shot-X-Pos Shot-Y receiver-X receiver-Y shot-Z(opt.) receiver-
refraction picked traveltimes. Z(opt.)
2. RAMAC GPS format (extension COR) - each line contains the following
informations:
0.6.1 pecularities for meandering 2D-profiles tracenumber,date,time,Northing,West,altitude,PDOP

Reflexw only allows a positive traceincrement, this means the endcoordinates in The traceheader coordinates of REFLEXW are changed using one of these
profiledirection must be larger than the startcoordinate. ASCII-formats within the traceheader menu. The traceheader menu is entered
within the fileheader menu using
If you have acquired 2D-profile in two different directions (meandering the option ShowTraceHeader.
acquisition) you have two different possibilities how to handle the problem:
Within the traceheader menu you
1. during the import of the data: must choose either ASCII-file,
- here you may enter a larger startcoordinate than the endcoordinate. In this case ASCII-file/interpol. or RAMAC-GPS
the imported profile will be automatically flipped in x-direction (this means the first for type and then you must press
trace becomes the last one and the last one the first one) and the end- and the button actualize inorder to
startcoordinate will be exchanged. actualize the traceheader
- if you have activated the option "parallel lines" you may activate the suboption coordinates.
"meandering". In this case each 2. line will be automatically flipped in x-direction. With the type “ASCII-file/interpol.”
If your entered startcoordinate is smaller than the endcoordinate the 2., 4., .... activated an automatic interpolation
profile will be flipped. If the startcoordinate is larger than the endcoordinate the is done if for various traces no
1.,3.,5.,.... profile will be flipped. coordinate data are present within
The status menu shows after the import whether a profile has been flipped. the ASCII-file.
Please check after the import whether the coordinates are correct and whether With the type “RAMAC-GPS” the program controls if there are consecutive
the correct profiles have been flipped because there are some additional identical coordinates in the *.cor file - these coordinates are automatically be
controlling options like "read traceincr." and "fix endcoord." which affect the replaced using an interpolation.
resulting coordinates. The option “interpolation 0-data” allows the interpolation of those coordinates
which have 0 values.
2. using the processing option "XFlipProfile":
this processing option can be found under processing/traceinterpolation To be considered: The traceheader coordinates are stored either using a 32 bit
/resorting. Use the option "XFlipProfile". The processed profile has been flipped in floating format (Reflexw formats 16 bit integer and 32 bit floating point within the
x-direction. The start- and endcoordinates will not be changed. import menu) or using a 64 bit double precision format (Reflexw formats new 16
bit integer and new 32 bit floating point) - see also chap. 1.5.4 Import format
specification. If the coordinates have very high values with small changes, the
data representation of the 32 bit floating format may not be good enough. In this
User’s guide - coordinates 29 User’s guide - coordinates 30

case the Reflexw new format with the 64 bit double precision format must be 0.6.2.1.3 processing options
used when importing the original data or a constant offset should be subtracted
from the coordinates before storing them into the traceheaders. There exist several processing options which allow the use of the traceheader-
coordinates. For example:

0.6.2.1 Handle the traceheader(GPS)-coordinates a. correct 3D-topography under processing/static correction: With the suboption
z-tracecoord activated the static correction is based on the shot and the receiver
elevations stored within the traceheader of each trace. The option is available
0.6.2.1.1 picking from Reflexw version 3.5.

The traceheader coordinates can be b. make equidist. traces: the option allows to interpolate non-equidistant data in
used for exporting picked data to an such a way that the resulting data are equidistant. The precondition is that the
ASCII-file. For that purpose you must true position of each trace is stored in the parameter distance within the individual
activate the option xy-coordinates trace header. If the distance is not defined you may do this within the traceheader
within the save pick menu (format: menu using the option actualize and the type “calculate distancies” (from version
ASCII-colums). Each line of the ASCII- 3.5).
file contains the following values: coor-
dinate in profiledirection(10:3),
coordinate in profileconstant(10:3), x- 0.6.2.1.4 3D-datainterpretation
traceheadercoordinate, y-
traceheadercoordinate, travel It is possible to build up a 3D-datafile based on freely distributed 2D-lines
time(12:6), depth(10:4), whereby the individual positions of the traces are either taken from the fileheader
amplitude(10:2). or from the traceheader coordinates (see also guide 3D-dataintepretation, chap.
The ASCII-file has the extension PCK and will be stored in the path ASCII in the 0.9.1.2.2 - Generating a 3D-file for freely distributed 2D-lines). With the sorting
actual projectpath. type “geophone coordinates” the xy-positions of each trace is taken from the xy-
receiver traceheader coordinates.

0.6.2.1.2 viewing options within the 2D-dataanalysis

Within the 2D-dataanalysis module there exist two different viewing options of
the traceheader xy-coordinates.
First using the option profile line (trace header coord.) the profile location
based on the traceheader coordinates is shown in an additional window (any
curvature of the line coordinates is displayed). When moving the mouse cursor
within the data window the actual xy-position of the mouse cursor is also shown.
Second with the option TraceHeader axis activated the xy-receiver
traceheadercoordinates are displayed along the distance axis in addition.

The traceheader z-coordinates are used for the plotoption correct header
elevations. If activated the traces are shifted based on the receiver and the shot
elevation values stored within the traceheader of each trace and the entered
elevation level. The shift levels are calculated from the difference of the entered
elevation level and the individual traceheader elevation values. Based on the
actual velocity the traveltime shift value is calculated from the sum of the shot
and the receiver elevation differences. The option is only enabled if the option
elevation is activated.
User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 31 User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 32

0.7 Introduction to seismic refraction data 4. Activate the option Convert to Reflex and choose the wanted original datafile
from the filelist.
interpretation REFLEXW uses the individual
traceheader coordinates
stored with each trace for the
In the following the complete interpretation of seismic refraction data is described further traveltime analysis.
including import of the seismic data, picking the first onsets, putting together the The coordinates defined
picked traveltimes, assigning to specific layers and doing the layer inversion. above (shot-pos. and rec.start
and rec.end) only serve as so
called header coordinates and
0.7.1 Import the data and pick the first onsets (done may be used to actualize the
traceheader coordinates (see
within the module 2D-dataanalysis) below).
REFLEXW automatically
1. Enter the module 2D-dataanalysis
reads in the shot and receiver
positions of the individual
2. Activate the option import
traces if these are defined
within the original files and
3. Choose the following options
stores them into the traceheader coordinates. After the import the traceheader
within the import menu:
coordinates are automatically shown within a tabella. Normally the x-coordinates
are used, the y- and z-coordinates are only listed for completeness.
data type: single shot
rec.start: start of the receiver line
If the traceheader coordinates are not correct (e.g. because they are not stored
rec.end: end of the receiver line
within the original files) these coordinates must be defined separately:
shot-pos.: position of the shot
a. within the tabella - enter the correct values within the tabella or use the option
It is not necessary to enter the shot
actualize from fileheader and then save changes in order to actualize the
and the receiver positions if these
traceheadercoordinates based on the entered fileheader coordinates (shot
(correct) positions are already
position, rec. start and end, see above). To be considered for manual editing:
included within the original data (see
distance value and rec.-x value should be equal for each trace.
item 4).
b. within the traceheader menu. The traceheader menu is entered within the
fileheader menu using the option ShowTraceHeader. Here different
outputformat: 32 bit floating point for
actualization options are available. You may choose either fileheader, ASCII-file
a higher data resolution
or tabella and then you must press the button actualize to actualize the trace-
header coordinates. For a further description of the individual options please refer
To be considered for SEGY or
to the online-help of the traceheader menu.
SEG2-data: the option swap bytes
controls if the original data originate
5. Do any processing if necessary or change the settings within the fileheader
from UNIX (activate option) or DOS-
(option edit/fileheader), eg. the start time, .....
machines (deactivate option). If the
conversion fails try to change this
6. Pick the first arrivals and save them on file. It is recommended to use the
parameter.
automatic name for saving the picks. It is not necessary to enter the layer number
and the velocity within the save picks menu. These parameters are only
The following plot options should be
necessary for reflection data. The warning message may be ignored.
set (the option may be activated
within the import menu (the speed
7. Do this procedure for all wanted shots. Then the picked traveltimes are ready
button below the help option):
for interpretation.
Plotmode: Wigglemode
8. You also may perform a simple intercepttime interpretation within the 2D-
tracenormalize activated
dataanalysis module. For that purpose load the wanted shot, enter the option
XYScaledPlot activated
User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 33 User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 34

analyse/velocity adaptation and activate the option intercept time analysis. Now 0.7.2 interpretation of the picked traveltimes (done
click on the data and move the cursor with clicked mouse button to the first
bending point and leave the mouse button. The first point is automatically set to within the module traveltime analysis 2D)
time zero and to the shot position. Activate again the left mouse button and move
to the next bending point, and so on. The velocites derived from these settings 1. Enter the module traveltime analysis 2D
must increase with depth. After having finished the settings the depth and
velocities of the calculated 1D-model are shown in a window. 2. Load the wanted traveltimes which shall be interpreted together - option
To be considered: if the geophone positions are not equidistant you must activate file/load traveltimes. Choose all wanted pickfiles which shall be interpreted
the plotoption traceheader distancies in order to plot the traces at these positions together - multiple choice using the shift or str-key.
stored within the traceheader distance positions (distance position should be
equal rec.x position). 3. Use the option edit/Insert
shotZerotraveltime in order to
insert a zero traveltime at all shot
points if this zero traveltime is not
still defined. This is useful in
order to better determine the
velocities of the uppermost layer.

4. Enter a filename for the

actually put together traveltimes
and save them on disk.

5. Increase the layer-nr to 1

6. Activate the option assign in order to assign the wanted traveltimes to layer 1.

7. Assign the traveltimes to layer 1 by using the different possibilities - see also
online help. The traveltimes assigned to layer1 will be highlighted (default colour
green), save the traveltimes.

8. Activate the option combine in order to do the inversion for the first layer (to
be considered: the inversion for the first layer only consists of the determination
of the velocity).

9. Activate the option wavefront-inversion and a new window opens (the

modelling window) and a model has been automatically created consisting of one
layer with the velocities taken from the linear regression analysis of the assigned
traveltimes.

10. Do some changes of the model if you want (e.g. remove some unwanted
velocity points) - to be considered: the option topography should be deactivated.

11. Enter a modelfile name and save this model on disk

12. Close the modelling window

13. Increase the layer-nr. to 2

14. Activate the option assign in order to assign the wanted traveltimes to layer
2.
User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 35 User’s guide - seismic refraction data interpretation 36

15. Assign the traveltimes to After having finished the wavefront inversion the new window “velocity
layer 2 by using the different determination using linear regression” opens showing the resulting forward
possibilities - see also online and reverse traveltimes for the determination of the refractor velocities. These
help. The traveltimes assigned traveltime branches are automaticall subdivided into a number of different linear
to layer 2 will be highlighted regression curves dependent from the chosen number of different velocities. You
(default colour blue). may change the start and end position of each regression curve by simply
clicking on it and drawing it with pressed left mouse button.
16. Activate the option
combine in order to do the 24. Activating the option close terminates the velocity determination window and
inversion for the second layer the new new layer boundary is plotted into the model.

17. Enter the forward and the 25. Extrapolate the inverted boundary to the model borders (option hor.extrap. or
reverse shot numbers - these numbers define the range for the inversion of the extrapolate) and do some changes of the model if you want to (see also
actual layer modelling guide).

18. Activate the option 26. The actual model may be checked and changed if necessary using the
generate when the option forward raytracing included within the modelling menu. For that purpose please
autocombine is chosen - a refer to the modelling guide (chap. 0.10.1 and chap. 0.10.3). Of course you only
complete combined should check the adaptation of those traveltime picks assigned to the actual layer
traveltimecurve (forward and and to the overburden.
reverse) is generated and the
total forward and reverse 27. Save the model using the old or another filname.
traveltimes are shown.
28. Close the modelling menu.
19. If total forward and reverse
traveltimes differ significantly 29. Repeat step 13-29 for layer 3 and so on.
(e.g. more than 5 ms) activate
the option balance in order to balance the forward and reverse traveltime 30. After having done the complete inversion the model should always be
branches. checked and changed if necessary using the forward raytracing included within
the modelling menu. For that purpose please refer to the modelling guide (chap.
20. Activate the option wavefront-inversion - a file choice window opens and 0.10.1 and chap. 0.10.3).
you must choose the modelfile containing the first layer already interpreted.

21. The chosen modelfile is shown within the modelling window- the inversion
must be started manually within the RayGroupBox on the right hand side of the
model. To be considered: The max. depth of the model must be chosen in such a
way that the max. estimated depth of the layerboundary to be inverted is smaller
than this max. depth value.

22. Enter the wanted increment DeltaX for the wavefront inversion (e.g. 0.5 m)
and the nr. of diff. velocities which controls the number of different refractor
velocities to be determined (one means that a laterally constant refractor velocity
is calculated).

23. Start the wavefront-inversion using the option start. Note: If the inversion fails
(because of not setting a appropirate max. depth value, e.g.) do not use the
option start to start the inversion a second time. Please shut the modelling
window and activate again the option wavefront-inversion in the module
traveltime analysis 2D to start the inversion again (ref. to 20).
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 37 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 38

0.8 Introduction to seismic reflection data within the import menu

(the speed button below
interpretation the help option)):

In the following the complete processing of seismic reflection shot data is Plotmode: Wigglemode
described including import of the seismic data (chap. 0.2.7.1) defing the geometry XYScaledPlot activated
(chap.0.2.7.2), filtering the shot data (chap. 0.2.7.3), performing the velocity XScale: 10
analysis and stacking (chap. 0.2.7.4). (corresponds to a
zooming in x-direction
by a factor of 10)
0.8.1 Import the data (done within the module 2D- Scale: setting depends
on the amplitude values
dataanalysis) of the data.
Optionally you also may
activate the option
1. enter the module 2D-
Tracenormalize. Then
dataanalysis
the option Scale gives
you the wigglesize in
2. activate the option
pixels.
file/import

3. choose the following

options within the import
menu:

data type: several shots

increment: average receiver
increment (this increment is
used for the equidistant
4. activate the option Convert To Reflex: the wanted shots must be chosen and
display of the data - the
they are automatically combined into one single datafile containing all the shots.
stacking is done based on
the traceheadercoordinates
There are 2 different possibilities of choosing the datafiles:
which may also be
a.. choose the datafiles from the openfile dialog (multiple choice using the shift or
nonequidistant - see also
str-key) : all chosen original data files are sorted with ascending order. Problems
chapter II setting the
may occur if the files don't have the same length (e.g. file1, file2,..., file11). In this
geometry).
case a warning message appears.
outputformat: 32 bit floating
point for a higher data resolution.
b. open an external ASCII-filelist with the extension "lst": the external filelist
To be considered for SEGY or SEG2-data: the option swap bytes controls if the
contains all wanted datafiles in an arbitrary order (one row contains one
original data originate from UNIX (activate option) or DOS-machines (deactivate
filename). The datafiles must be stored under the same path like the
option). If the conversion fails try to change this parameter.
ASCII-filelist. Example:
filename specification: manual input
TEST__02.sg2
filename: any name (e.g. line)
TEST__01.sg2
TimeDimension: ms
TEST__03.sg2
conversion sequence: combine lines/shots
TEST__04.sg2

After having chosen all the wanted datafiles the combined datafile including all
The following plot options may be set for example (the option may be activated
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 39 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 40

the shots is displayed using the actual plot settings. Because of the normally 0.8.2 Setting the geometry (done within the module 2D-
huge number of traces and the chosen plotmode (Wigglemode, XYScaledPlot)
the screen display resolution may be too small to plot the data correctly (XScale dataanalysis)
too small). In this case choose the Zoom-option in order to only display a small
part of the data in x-direction.
1. activate the option CMP within the 2D-dataanalysis

NOTE: The standard display within the 2D-dataanalysis uses the product of the
given traceincrement and the actual tracenumber for the axis display. Therefore
this display does not represent the correct coordinates for the combined shot
data and you may ignore them. But you don’t have to worry about them because
the subsequent sorting and stacking is always done based on the traceheader
coordinates (see chap. II below). The coordinates of resulting stacked section
(see chap. IV) however are displayed correctly within the standard display.

2. activate the option geometry

If the geometries have been already entered during the data acquisition and
REFLEXW allows to automatically take over these geometries the geometry is
shown in a tabella with shot number, shot position and receiver line position. If
the geometry is okay you may leave the geometry settings by deactivating the
option CMP and go on with chapter III..

If the geometry is not correct you must proceed with the following steps:

3. There are different possibilities to define the geometry. The most convenient
way is to use a standard geometry (option moving line and option fixed line) for
a selectable number of traces. Apart from the standard geometry it is also
possible to edit the geometry of single traces (option edit single traces) or to
load the geometry from an ASCII-file (option read from ASCII-file).
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 41 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 42

a.. Activating moving line allows you to define the d. The option edit single traces allows you to change the geometry of each trace
geometry for a geophone line moving with the shots. An individually. When activating this option the trace header Edit menu will be
example of the input parameters is shown on the right opened where you can edit the shot and receiver coordinates for each trace
figure. Nr.of channels is the number of channels per shot. separately.
First and last trace define the range on the profile for
which the standard geometry should be valid. This gives
you the opportunity to declare standard geometries for 4. If you want to apply a standard geometry (3.a or 3.b) you must activate the
different ranges of the profile. Instead of the first and last option apply std. geometry in addition.
trace it is also possible to define the range using the
original field record numbers. Shotstart is the position of 5. If necessary enter an additional standard geometry and apply it onto the
the shot of the first ensemble, shot increment is the profile or choose one of the other geometry edit possibilities.
distance between successive shots and shot offset is the
distance between a shot and the profile in perpendicular 6. If the geometry setting is finished choose the option save geometry in order to
direction. Receiver increment is the distance between save the geometry within the traceheader coordinates of the file.
successive receivers and receiver offset is the distance
between a geophone and the profile in perpendicular 7. Now the file is ready for pre-stack processing and stacking.
direction. First receiver, left shot receiver, right shot
receiver and last receiver define the position of the
geophones with respect to the shot.

b. Activating fixed line allows you to define the geometry

for a fixed geophone line for different shot points. The
input parameters are the same as for moving line except
the input of the receiver positions (see example on the
right figure). Here you only have to specify the first and
last receiver position. These are the absolute coordinates
in contrast to moving line where relative coordinates (to
the shot) are used.

c. The option read from ascii-file allows you to read the geometry from an
ASCII-file. The ASCII file must exist under the path ASCII and must have the
extension DST. Each line of the ASCII file contains the following 6 informations:
tracenumber distance Shot-X-Pos Shot-Y-Pos receiver-X-Pos receiver-YPos
Defining the tracenumber gives you the opportunity to read the geometry only for
a distinct part of the data.
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 43 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 44

0.8.3 pre-stack filtering (done within the module 2D- In the following the processing using a scaled windowgain(x) and a FK-filter is
described:
dataanalysis)
1. load the wanted raw data for which the geometry has already been defined (all
shots are stored within one file, see chap. I and II).
The aim of the pre-stack filtering is to prepare the dataset for the subsequent
stacking. Therefore the most important processing steps are: 2. enter the first filter step using the option Processing/gain.
- energy normalization
- elimination or suppression of the surface waves and other non desired waves 3. The Gain window appears. Enter
the following parameters or options:
The energy normalization should be the first filter step especially if you are - activate the option scaled
using multi-channel filters (e.g. FK-filter) for the suppression of non desired windowgain(x)
waves.. This filter step is applied to correct for the amplitude effects of wavefront - enter the filterparameter start
divergence and damping. It is also necessary if a subsequent filter shall be window and end window, the
applied for eliminating the surface waves. window size should be chosen in
The easiest way would be a manual gain function, e.g. manual gain (y). In the such a way that a good energy
case of strong surface waves this gain recovery function is not very suitable. In normalization is fulfilled. Default
this case the filter scaled windowgain(x) may be a good choice. values are:
To bo considered: Filtering and stacking are always done on the true amplitude start window: 0
data. The option tracenormalize within the plotoptions is only a plotoption and end window: the traveltime of the
does not effect the filtering/stacking process. Therefore the option tracenormalize main reflection at the greatest
within the plotoptions should be deactivated because otherwise the effect of the distance.
energy normalization may not be controlled correctly. - enter the wanted ProcessingLabel
- start the filtering
The second filter step consists of the elimination of the surface waves and
other non desired waves. For that purpose you may distinguish between editing
and 2D-filter steps. 4. The filtered data
Editing may be used for muting (set to zero) special data parts or to delete single have been plotted
traces or trace ranges. into the secondary
2D-filters may be used to suppress unwanted signals. A FK-filter may be a good window (depending
choice. on the settings of the
screen splitting within
the plot option menu).
Whereas in the
original data only the
surface waves and
the very first arrivals
are visible due to the
non normalized
display the filtered
data show clear
refracted waves for all
distancies and some
reflections. Now
close the filter
window and you must enter the option File/ChangeSecondToPrimary in order
to use the filtered dataset for the next desired filter step.
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 45 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 46

5. enter the second filter step using the option

Processing/FK-filter/FK-spectrum.

6. The FK-filter/FK-spectrum window appears. Enter

the following parameters or options:
- activate the option fk filter-lineparts
- enter the filterparameter tracenumber (corresponds
to the number of traces per shot)
- activate the option generate fk-spectrum

7. a new FK-filter/FK-
spectrum window
appears. Enter for
example the following
parameters or options:
- activate the option
velocity range
- activate the option
bandpass
- activate the option
Hanning **2
- enter 5 for the taper
widths
- enter the velocity fan Within this chapter we have discussed one example of a possible pre-processing.
for example: It is not possible to give some general rules for the processing because of the
1.neg.vel. to -2000, huge different problems involved with the datafiles.
2.neg.vel. to -1000000, In any case a gain recovery (energy normalization) and a suppression of the
1.pos.vel. to 1000000 and unwanted onsets must be performed.
2.pos.vel. to 2000. These
values may differ
significantly from case to
case. The velocity fan
should be set in such a way that all non desired onsets are suppressed.
- enter the wanted ProcessingLabel
- start the fk-filtering

8. The filtered data have been plotted into the secondary window (depending on
the settings of the scree splitting within the plot option menu). The surface waves
as well as the first arrivals (refracted waves) are quite well suppressed. If the
result is sufficient the pre-processing is finished and you may continue with
chapter IV. If not some other filter or editing steps must be performed.
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 47 User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 48

0.8.4 velocity analysis and stacking (done within the 8. The velocity analysis menu opens with the first CMP(shot)-data ensemble
loaded. On the left the actual layer model is shown (by default one single layer
module 2D-dataanalysis) included). On the right the CMP (or Shot) is shown.

9. Activate the option semblance or unnormalized corr. for doing a first

1. load the pre-processed datafile estimation of the velocity model.
2. activate the option CMP within the 2D-dataanalysis 10. Enter the velocity range and increment and start the semblance analysis. The
semblance is shown in an additional window.
3. click on CMP-sorting/stack

4. Choose the sorting option CMP or SHOT

5. choose the first and last CMP (or SHOT) and the increment for which a
velocity analysis shall be done (e.g. 10 for the first, 80 for the last and 10 for the
increment in order to do the velocity analysis for 10 different CMP’s).

6. activate the option velocity analysis

7. the mean traceincrement for the ensembles is asked for. This increment is
used for the equidistant display of the CMP or shot-ensembles.

11. set the left mouse button at the wanted positions within the semblance
analysis window in order to create a velocity model. The velocity model on the left
is automatically updated.

12. Activating the option interactive adaptation allows you to refine the model -
for a detailed description of the options see online help.

13. Save the model

14. click on Next to proceed with the next CMP (shot).

15. The last velocity model remains and you may refine the model using the
interactive adaptation or may create a completely new model using the
User’s guide - seismic reflection data interpretation 49 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 50

semblance or unnormalized corr. (see point 9). 0.9 Introduction to the 3D-datainterpretation within
16. Save the velocity model. REFLEXW
17. Repeat step 14 until 16 until the last wanted CMP (shot) is reached In the following the 3D-datainterpretation of REFLEXW is described including the
generation of a 3D-dataset (Chap. 0.9.1), the processing of 3D-datafiles (chap.
18. Activate the option 2D-model 0.9.2) and the interpretation of 3D-datafiles (chap. 0.9.3).
Please use in addition to this guide the handbook instructions within the
19. create a new 2D-model - after having activated the option create you are corresponding chapters and the online help.
asked for the wanted 1-dimensional velocity model. Choose the wanted models
from the open file dialog (multiple choice using the shift or str-key), enter a
filename of the 2D-model and the interpolated 2D-model is plotted into the right
window. 0.9.1. generation of a 3D-dataset
20. Exit the CMP-velocity analysis menu. A 3D-data file is a single REFLEX formatted file which consists of several
equidistant 2D-lines sequentially stored. All traces belonging to one 2D-line have
21. Choose NMO-stack and load the wanted 2D-model using the option load 2D- the same ensemble-number which is stored within the REFLEXW traceheader.
model. The direction (x or y) within the fileheader determines the direction of the 2D-
lines.
22. Enter the wanted sorting ensemble (e.g. CMP) and enter the ensemble
range for the stacking (e.g.: 1. CMP and last CMP and increment whereby the Depending on the original data there are several ways to generate a 3D-file in
increment should be set to 1). Start the stacking using the option stack. Enter a ReflexW format:
filename for the stacked data and enter the traceincrement (a calculated value
based on the fileheader traceincrement of the original file is given by default). The - generate from original 2D- or 3D-data during the import (chap. 0.9.1.1). In this
stacked section is stored under the path procdata using the processing label 0 case there are strong restrictions concerning the orientation of the original lines
and is shown in an additional window. To be considered for the stack section: and the complete dataprocessing is done for the 3D-datafile (see chap. 0.9.2.).
The default value of the trace increment is given by the number of stack traces
and the coordinate range. If this mean traceincrement does not equal any - generate from REFLEXW formatted 2D-lines (chap. 0.9.1.2). The 2D-lines may
increment between successive stack traces the resulting stack traces are be raw data (then the processing is done for the 3D-datafile) or already
obviously not equidistant. This may happen for example if the shot interval is not processed data. There are no general rules whether the processing shall be
equidistant for all shots. In this case the program (from version 3.03) gives a done for the 3D-datafile or for the individual 2D-lines.
warning message and asks if equidistant traces based on the mean
traceincrement shall be made from the non equidistant stack section. If this In any case, the data points of the resulting 3D-file have fixed increments in x-, y-
procedure is cancelled the resulting stack section not equidistant and you must and time-direction, respectively, and the max. size of the 3D-file is limited to 1024
activate the plotoption TraceHeaderDistancies (only enabled for the wiggle mode) points in each direction. The resulting 3D-datafile has the same REFLEXW
or you must make the stack section equidistant afterwards. format like a 2D-datafile (the ensemble number within the traceheader controls
the sequential storing) and it therefore may be processed within the 2D-
23. Now the stacking is finished and you may look for it and do some post- dataanalysis module (chap. 0.9.2) whereby the interpretation must be done within
processing within the 2D-dataanalysis (see also guide filtering). For that purpose the 3D-datainterpretation (chap. 0.9.3).
deactivate the option CMP and load the stacked section.
User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 51 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 52

0.9.1.1 Generating a 3D-file during the import without xstart: start coordinate in x-direction
interpolation ystart: start coordinate in y-direction
xend, yend, zstart, zend: not necessary to input
There are two different ways of generating a 3D-file during the import depending
on the structure of the original data: outputformat: 16 bit integer (e.g. for GPR-data) or 32 bit floating point for a
higher data resolution (e.g. for seismic data).
- the original data are parallel 2D-lines To be considered for SEGY or SEG2-data: the option swap bytes controls if the
- the original data are already a 3D-datafile original data originate from UNIX (activate option) or DOS-machines (deactivate
option). If the conversion fails try to change this parameter.
filename specification: manual input
0.9.1.1.1 Generating a 3D-
filename: any name (e.g. line_3d)
file from original parallel TimeDimension: ns (GPR data) or ms (seismic data)
2D-lines conversion sequence: combine lines/shots
linedistance: enter the distance between the individual parallel 2D-lines
The precondition is that the
original data are:
- parallel 2D-lines with a fixed 4. activate the option Convert To Reflex: the wanted shots must be chosen and
profileincrement (increment they are automatically combined into one single datafile containing all the shots.
between the different 2D-lines)
and identical startcoordinate There are 2 different possibilities of choosing the datafiles:
- fixed traceincrement
- fixed timeincrement a.. choose the datafiles from the openfile dialog (multiple choice using the shift or
- same number of points per trace (identical timerange) str-key) : all chosen original data files are sorted with ascending order. Problems
- same number of traces per 2D-line (identical distancerange) may occur if the files don't have the same length (e.g. file1, file2,..., file11). In this
case a warning message appears.
Then a 3D-datafile may be easily constructed during the import by simply storing
sequentially the different 2D-lines within one file. The size of the 3D-cube is b. open an external ASCII-filelist with the extension "lst": the external filelist
determined from the number of 2D-lines, the number of traces per 2D-line and contains all wanted datafiles in an arbitrary order (one row contains one
the number of points in timedirection. Example: 21 different 2D-lines with 200 filename). The datafiles must be stored under the same path like the
traces per 2D-line (profiledirection: y) and 256 points per trace: xpoints: 21, ASCII-filelist. Example:
ypoints: 200, zpoints (timepoints): 256. TEST__02.sg2
TEST__01.sg2
In the following the individual steps for creating such a 3D-file are described in
detail: After having chosen all the wanted datafiles the combined 3D-datafile is
displayed using the actual plot settings.
1. enter the module 2D-dataanalysis

2. activate the option file/import

3. choose the following options within

the import menu:

data type: const. offset (version 2) or

3D-const.offset (from version 3)
ProfileDirection: direction of the original
2D-lines (enter either x or y)
ProfileConstant: constant coordinate
direction of the original 2D-lines (enter
either y or x depending on the chosen
profile direction)
User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 53 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 54

0.9.1.1.2 Generating a 3D-file from an original 3D-file different 2D-lines is set based on the entered tracenr./2D-line.

In this case it is is assumend that the original profile is a 3D-file consisting of

parallel 2D-lines with: 0.9.1.2 Generating a 3D-file from REFLEXW formatted 2D-lines
- equidistant trace increment (done within the 3D-datainterpretation)
- equal trace number for each 2D-line
- identical start coordinate for each 2D-line A 3D-datafile may also be generated from REFLEXW formatted 2D-lines. The
- equidistant distance between the individual 2D-lines. 2D-lines may be raw data (then the processing is done for the 3D-datafile) or
already processed data. There are no general rules whether the processing shall
In the following the individual steps for creating such a 3D-file are described in be done for the 3D-datafile or for the individual 2D-lines. If only few 2D-lines are
detail: present it might be better to do the processing for the 2D-lines.
REFLEXW allows to construct a 3D-datafile either from equidistant parallel
1. enter the module 2D-dataanalysis 2D-lines without interpolation or from 2D-lines freely orientated within one
acquisition plane using a weighted interpolation. In any case the coordinates
2. activate the option file/import (start- and endcoordinate in profiledirection and profileconstant coordinate) must
have been defined within the fileheader of each 2D-line.
3. choose the following options within the import menu:

data type: const. offset (version 2) or 3D- 0.9.1.2.1 Generating a 3D-file from REFLEXW 2D-lines without
const.offset (from version 3)
interpolation
ProfileDirection: direction of the original 2D-
lines (enter either x or y)
The preconditions for generating a 3D-file within the 3D-datainterpretation without
ProfileConstant: constant coordinate
interpolation are REFLEX formatted 2D-lines with:
direction of the original 2D-lines (enter either
y or x depending on the chosen profile
- parallel 2D-lines with equidistant profile increment
direction)
- equidistant trace increment
xstart: start coordinate in x-direction
- equidistant time increment
ystart: start coordinate in y-direction
- same number of points per trace
xend, yend, zstart, zend: not necessary to
- same number of traces per 2D-line
input
If these preconditions are satisfied you may easily construct a 3D-file without a
outputformat: 16 bit integer (e.g. for GPR-
spatial interpolation:
data) or 32 bit floating point for a higher data
resolution (e.g. for seismic data).
To be considered for SEGY or SEG2-data: the option swap bytes controls if the
1. enter the module 3D-
original data originate from UNIX (activate option) or DOS-machines (deactivate
datainterpretation
option). If the conversion fails try to change this parameter.
filename specification: original name
2. activate the option file/Generate
3D-file from 2D-files
TimeDimension: ns (GPR data) or ms (seismic data)
conversion sequence: 3D-file equidistant
3. choose the following options within
linedistance: enter the distance between the individual parallel 2D-lines
the Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines
tracenr./2D-line: enter the number of traces for each 2D-lines containing within
menu:
the 3D-file
traceincr.: enter the increment between the traces within each 2D-line
3D-filename: enter any name for the
3D-datafile
4. activate the option Convert To Reflex: the wanted original 3D-file must be
chosen. The data within the resulting REFLEXW 3D-datafile are stored in the
type of interpolation: equidistant parallel 2D-lines without interpolation
same manner like the original data but the ensemble number which controls the
User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 55 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 56

EquidistantGroupBox: 0.9.1.2.2 Generating a 3D-file for freely distributed 2D-lines

choose either sort by filenames or sort by coordinates (see item 4)
line-increment: enter the increment between the different 2D-lines If the original data are not parallel
equidistant lines of constant
4. choose the wanted filepath and activate the option load 2D-files in order to lengths but they have for
choose the wanted 2D-files from the openfile dialog (multiple choice using the example different lenghts,
shift or str-key). The sorting of the 2D-files depends on the chosen option within different start coordinates or
the EquidistantGroupBox. With sort by filenames activated all chosen original different orientations (e.g.
datafiles are sorted with ascending filename order. To be considered: problems crossing lines - see figure on the
may occur if the files have names like file1, file2,..., file10, file11. In this case the right) you may use the
choosen files are resorted in thefollowing manner: file1, file10, file11, file12, .... interpolation routines within
,file2, .... which leads to a wrong sorting within the resulting 3D-file. With sort by REFLEXW for generating a new
coordinates activated all chosen original datafiles are sorted with ascending 3D-datafile. You may also use the interpolation for parallel equidistant lines (see
profileconstant coordinates. In this case the profileconstant coordinates must also chap. 0.9.1.2.1) if an interpolation is wanted (e.g. if only few 2D-lines exist).
have been defined first within the fileheader. To be considered: The necessary processing (see chap. 0.9.2.) should always be
done onto the original 2D-datafiles. Therefore the 3D-datafile should be
5. Activating the option start starts the generation of the 3D-datafile. The 3D-file generated based on the completely processed 2D-datafiles.
is generated without any interpolation. With ProfileDirection set to X and
ProfileConstant set to Y the number of points in x-direction is equal the number of 1. enter the module 3D-datainterpretation
traces per 2D-file, the number of points in y-direction is equal the number of 2D-
files and the number of points in z-(time-)direction is equal the number of points 2. activate the option file/Generate 3D-file from 2D-files
per trace. The file will be stored under the path rohdata under the actual project
directory. After having created the file the 3D-data are automatically loaded into 3. choose the following options within the Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines menu:
the RAM (see also chap. 0.9.3). The 3D-datafile can be processed within the 2D-
dataanalysis (see chap. 0.9.2). 3D-filename: enter any name for the
3D-datafile

type of interpolation: use

interpolation scheme for freely
distributed 2D-lines

3D coordinates group box :

XStart, XEnd, YStart and YEnd:
specify the range coordinates within
the dataacquisition plane for the
computation of the 3D-data cube.
XRasterincrement and
YRasterincrement: specify the grid
interval of the two coordinate axes spanning the plane in the given distance
dimension. A useful value for both XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement is
the traceincrement used for the individual 2D-profiles.
XInterpolation and YInterpolation: define the interpolation area (a rectangle) in the
given distance dimension. To guarantee a complete filing of the 3D-data cube the
interpolation range in x- and y-direction has to comply with the greatest occuring
distance between two data points in the correspoinding direction whereby a too
large range leads to an averaging.
interpol.weight: allows to specify the type of the interpolation weight.

timerange/sorting group box :

User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 57 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 58

time end: specifies the timerange for the 3D-data cube. The time always starts at 0.9.1.3 resulting REFLEXW 3D-datafile
0.
sorting: determines the sorting of the profiles entering the computation of the time The resulting 3D-file has the same REFLEXW format like a 2D-datafile and may
slices. Four different sortings are possible: fileheader coordinates or geophone be processed within the 2D-dataanalysis module (chap. 0.9.2.) whereby the
coordinates, midpoint coordinates and CMP coordinates (defined within the interpretation must be done within the 3D-datainterpretation (chap. 0.9.3).
individual traceheaders).
The different 2D-lines are stored sequentially. The distance axis within the 2D-
4. choose the wanted filepath and activate the option load 2D-files in order to dataanalysis represents the distance sum over all 2D-lines. Because of the
choose the wanted 2D-files from the openfile dialog (multiple choice using the normally huge number of traces and the chosen plotmode (Pointmode,
shift or str-key). XYScaledPlot) the screen display resolution may be too small to plot the data
correctly (XScale too small). In this case choose the Zoom-option in order to only
5. Activating the option start starts the generation of the 3D-datafile. The number display a small part of the data in x-direction.
of datapoints depends on the entered range of the 3D-cube and the raster
increments. To ensure, that the resulting 3D-file does not exceed the max. size of
10243 points, the parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement can be To be considered: If only few 2D-lines have been acquired with a large number of
enlarged and/or the volume of the data to be considered can be reduced. The file traces the resulting 3D-datafile may have many points in one direction and very
will be stored under the path rohdata under the actual project directory. After few in the other. In this case it might be better to use the interpolation method for
having created the file the 3D-data are automatically loaded into the RAM (see generating a 3D-datafile from REFLEXW formatted 2D-lines (see chap. 0.9.1.2.2)
also chap. 0.9.3). The 3D-datafile can be processed within the 2D-dataanalysis especially if you want to display timeslices. Although it is clear that the resolution
(see chap. 0.9.2). will not be enhanced the timeslices may appear more reasonable by the
averaging of the interpolation.
User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 59 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 60

0.9.2 processing a 3D-data file (done within the 2D- 0.9.3 interpretation of a 3D-data file (done within the 3D-
dataanalysis) datainterpretation)
A 3D-data file is a single REFLEX formatted file which consists of several The module 3D data-interpretation allows the interpretation of 3-dimensional data
equidistant 2D-cuts sequentially stored. All traces belonging to one 2D-cut have by displaying x-, y- or z-slices or the full 3D-data volume.
the same ensemble-number which is stored within the REFLEXW traceheader. The data are completely loaded into the RAM of the computer whereby a fast
The direction (x or y) within the fileheader determines the direction of the 2D-cuts. visualization of the data is possible. The max. number of points in each direction
A 3D-data file may be processed like any 2D-file (see for example filtering guide) (x-cuts, y-cuts and z-(time)cuts) is 1024.Three different display options are
but there are some peculiarities to be considered for: available (option windows, option scroll and option 3D-cube - see below).

1. If the 3D-datafile is generated by an interpolation (chap. 0.9.1.2.2) the 0.9.3.1 load a 3D-datafile
complete processing should be always applied onto the original 2D-datafiles.
1. enter the 3D-datainterpretation
2. If the data contain hyperbolas from small scale objects or from pipes a
migration is necessary in addition if timeslices are used for the interpretation (see 2. load the 3D-datafile using the option File/Open 3D-file
also chap. 0.9.2.I).
3. After having chosen the wanted 3D-file the
3. The processing step static correction is very important because the same time Ref3DProcessingFom menu opens which
baseline must be used for all 2D-cuts. Otherwise the timeslices are not correct. allows you to define the internal processing of
the 3D-file. Use envelope if you want to
4. multichannel filters like background display timeslices. Use no if you want to
removal or fk-filter: interpret x- or y-cuts.
the option line parts should be
activated. In this case the distance 4. activate the option close and the chosen
range for applying the filter is 3D-file is loaded into the RAM.
automatically determined for line parts
(individual 2D-cuts) separated by each 5. The internal processing may be changed at a later stage using the option
other by a new ensemble number. processing.

0.9.3.2 display a 3D-datafile using the scroll option

1. after having loaded a 3D-
datafile activate the option
scroll

2. Activating one of the three

different cuts (X-Cuts, Y-
Cuts or Slices) allows to
scroll through the 3D-
datacube into the given
direction using the scroll bar
or the arrows.

3. The coordinate
parameters within the
Options Menu are
automatically set. The option
User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 61 User’s guide - 3D-datainterpretation 62

StepRate allows you to change step rate for scrolling. Every step range 2D-cut 0.9.3.4 display a 3D-datafile using the 3D-cube option
will be plotted when scrolling.
The option smoothing allows to enter a value for smoothing the data in the scroll 1. after having loaded a 3D-datafile activate the option 3D-cube
direction. A value of 1 means no smoothing. A value of 2 means that 2D-cuts are
summed up and the mean values are calculated. The smoothing parameter is 2. The 3D-cube will be displayed together with the Cube3DOptions menu.
independent from the StepRate parameter.

3. The size of the 3D-cube

0.9.3.3 display a 3D-datafile using the windows option is determined from the
number of the points into the
1. after having loaded a 3D-datafile activate the option windows different directions x, y and
z(time). The point numbers
2. Activating one of the three different cuts (X-Cuts, Y-Cuts or Slices) allows to are displayed within the
display several 2D-cuts of the options min/max for x, y and
3D-cube, placed in freely z. Here you also may restrict
choosable manner within the the range. The axis scales
working window. of the 3D-cube are based on
these values and do not
3. The coordinate parameters correspond to the real
within the Options Menu are coordinates. This may
automatically set. The max. significantly differ for
number of cuts to be displayed example if the 3D-datafile
simultaneously is 25. The has been created without
program automatically calculates interpolation (traceincrement
the StepRate for the given cut and lineincrement differ
range (in this example TimeStart significantly). It is possible to
and TimeEnd) and calculates the change the axis scales
increment (this example 1.25 ns). using the options ScaleX, ScaleY and ScaleZ.
You may manually change these
parameters. 4. You have the possibility to look at the cube from different angles, e.g. from the
front side, the back side or from the side. The angles can be changed manually
4. The option window comb. allows to choose the combination of the windows to within the options x/, y/ and z/ or using the mouse with pressed left mouse
be subdivided in horizontal and vertical direction. the possible combinations are button within the 3D-cube display.
automatically predefined. If you have 24 different cuts to be displayed you may
choose the combination 8/3 - this means the screen is subdivided into 8 5. You have different display possibilities. You may select if only the front or back
horizontal and 3 vertical cuts. planes of the data cube are displayed (options front and back) or the full 3D-data
volume (option full). In addition you only may select single cuts (option single)
5. The option Options can be deactivated. In this case the OptionsMenu and scroll (option scroll) through the cube in one distinct direction.
disappears and the full screen is visible.
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 63 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 64

0.10 Introduction to the modelling/tomography tools opened. If this window is not on front press the right mouse button in order to
bring it to the front.
within REFLEXW
6. You may set or change the parameters either by editing the corresponding
In the following the different modelling/tomography tools within the modelling fields of the table or by using the general fields situated in the right upper corner.
menu of REFLEXW are described. The main tools are: Using the second possibility first you have to enter the parameters within these
2D and 3D Finite difference modelling for seismic and electromagnetic wave fields. These parameters can be overtaken to selected points of the current layer.
propagation (chap. 0.10.2) The selection is done by clicking on the fields in the first column of the table (the
2D ray tracing (chap. 0.10.3) fields, which indicate the number of the points) and is indicated by a cross or by
2D- and 3D- transmission and refraction tomography (chap. 0.10.4) activating the option take over all. Clicking the take over button in the
Chap. 0.10.1 includes the generation of a model. This chapter is a more general ControlBox leads to the updating of the parameters at the selected points or at
one because all tools need a model to be generated first. each point (option take over all activated).
Please use in addition to this user’s guide the handbook instructions and the
online help. 7. Use the button update for updating the model.

0.10.1 model generation 8. You may include some new layer points by simply clicking within the main
modelling menu. The actual general model parameters of the fields within the
right upper corner of the input of modelling parameter menu are automatically
taken over for these new layer points. You may change these parameters like
0.10.1.1 create a new model described under step 6.

9. Return to the main modelling menu by simply activating it or by closing the

First the generation of a input of model parameters menu.
complete new model is
described. 10. activate the option new for the next layer. The layer nr. is changed to 2.

1. Enter the module 11. For that layer you have to define all layer points and the corresponding model
modelling parameters - see step 6 to step 9.

2. Choose the wavetype (e.g. 12. Additional layers are defined as described for layer 2.
electromagnetic for a GPR-
modelling or acoustic for a 13. All layers must be closed - this means they must start or end at the model
raytracing). border or at any other layer boundary. It is not necessary to do this manually but
the options extrapolate and hor.extrapol. may be used for that purpose. The
3. Enter the min./max. borders of the model (parameters xmin, xmax, zmin, interfaces don't have to be entered exactly at the edge, intersection with another
zmax). To be considered: z is going from top to bottom with positive numbers interface, respectively, but in the vicinity because the option extrapolate makes
(e.g. zmin=0 and zmax=20). the automatic interpolation between two interfaces as well as the extrapolation of
the interface to the boundary possible. Therefore the program searches
4. activate the option new. The layer nr. is changed to 1. automatically the nearest border at the exposed end and extrapolates in that
direction (in the case of an edge, extrapolation in x-, z-direction, respectively, in
5. The first boundary at z=0 has the case of an interface to the nearest layer point).
been automatically created by
setting two layer points at the PLEASE NOTE: The layer points are sorted automatically from lower x-distance
left and right upper corner point to higher x-distance, i.e. the interface function is unequivocal. Should for example
of the model. Now you must set a convolution be given it has to occur by giving several interfaces, like it is done
the parameters for this by the predefined symbols circle and rectangle.
boundary within the input of
model parameters window 14. Enter a filename and save the model using the speedoption or the option
which has been automatically file/save model.
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 65 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 66

15. For additional features like using predefined symbols, combining existing
0.10.2 Finite Difference (FD) modelling
layers or adding a topography please refer to the handbook instructions under the The Finite Difference (FD) modelling tool allows the simulation of electromagnetic
individual chapters or to the online help. or seismic wave propagation, respectively by means of FD-method for different
sources (plane wave, point source as well as "Exploding-Reflector"-source). As a
result a single line or the complete wavefield are stored and can be displayed
after.
0.10.1.2 change an existing model
In the following we are describing the GPR-simulation for a 2D zero-offset section
In this chapter the changing of an existing model will be described. Such a model (standard GPR-data acquisition).
may be built up as described in the previous chapter or it may result from a
seismic refraction inversion (see chap. 0.7.2). 1. First a new model must be generated (see chap. 0.10.1) or an already existing
model must be loaded using the option file/load model.
There are different possibilities to change the existing model. A few of them are
described below: 2. Activate the option FD

First it might be useful to restrict the number of points of each layer. This will be 3. The FD-GroupBox
done using the option edit layer. Activate this option and then activate the option opens in addition (see
average. Enter an average value (e.g. 5 for amount) and click on the wanted figure on the right). Within
layer boundary (left mouse button). Then this layer boundary will only consist of a this group box you have to
5 times fewer datapoints. The option may be applied for each layer boundary. enter the necessary FD-
After this option it might be useful to extrapolate the boundary either using the Parameters.
option hor.extrap. or extraplate.
4. First you must enter the
Activating the option vert.move allows you to move up or down a special layer main frequency for the
boundary (all depth values by the same amount). simulation in Hz (seismics)
or MHZ (GPR).
In order to change the individual datapoints of a distinct layer activate the option
choose layer and click on the wanted layer - the layer will be highlighted (in red). 5. enter the wanted
Now you may either change the layer boundary or the velocity within the layer. source type - for this
example exploding reflector. The exploding reflector type allows you a simulation
When clicking on the right mouse the input parameter window appears and you of a 2D zero offset section within one calculation.
may change the velocities for the individual datapoints. You may enter the new
values either within the table or within the upper right overall table which allows 6. Enter the wanted DeltaX increment in space direction (equal in x- and z-
you to change the velocities for all points (option "take over all" activated) when direction). For the FD-computation the layer model has to be rastered with a
clicking on the option take over. given increment in x- and z-direction (option DeltaX). Just so, a time increment
has to be given (option DeltaT). The size of the space- and time-increment
In order to change the individual depths of the layer boundary activate the option corresponds to the minimal wave length as well as the velocity. The program
change p. and click on the wanted boundary datapoint and then move this determines automatically the critical value of the space-increment (1/8 of the min.
datapoint with pressed mouse to the wanted position. wave length for FD-scheme 4-space, 1/12 of the min. wave length for FD-scheme
The option remove p. allows to remove any layerboundary points, set p. includes 2-space, respectively) and shows this one in the calc. critical values box down
a new layerboundary point. right. This value should not be passed over. A too big chosen DeltaX increment
results in numerical dispersion of the wavelet. Therefore if the result shows such
a dispersion you have to decrease the DeltaX increment.

7. Enter the wanted timeincrement DeltaT. The max. time-increment depends on

)t <= 1./(%2V) for the el.magnetic propagation and )t <= 1./(Vp+Vs) for the
the max. velocity as well as on the given space-increment DeltaX (approximately:

elastic propagation). The critical time-increment of the current set DeltaX

User’s guide - modelling/tomography 67 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 68

increment is shown in the calc. critical values box at the bottom. A too big chosen 0.10.3 ray tracing
DeltaT increment results in an instability, this means the amplitude increases
exponentially with time. Therefore if the result shows such an amplitude increase The ray tracing modelling tool allows the traveltime simulation of electromagnetic
you have to decrease the DeltaT increment. or seismic wave propagation, respectively by means of a finite difference
approximation of the eikonal equation. The calculation of the synthetic traveltimes
8. Enter the total time TMax for the simulation. is restricted to the first arrivals for an arbitrary 2-dimensional medium. No
reflections and secondary arrivals can be calculated. This can be done using the
9. Enter the boundary conditions, e.g. lin.absorbing range for the GPR- FD-simulation (see chap. 0.10.2).
simulation. The main application is the seismic refraction but it is also possible to simulate
any transmission data. The raytracing may be used for
10. Choose the wanted excitation and registration components. By default the - the control of an inverted model
EY-components are activated. - an iterative adaptation of the calculated and real data by stepwise changing the
underground model
11. Choose the output type - for this example single line.
In the following the application to seismic refraction data is described.
12. Enter the output parameters for the single line (rec x start, rec x end, rec z
start, rec z end). For example: rec x start: 0; rec x end: 5; rec z start: 0; rec z end:
0 (registration line at the surface).. 1. first a new model must be generated (see chap. 0.10.1) or an already existing
model must be loaded using the option file/load model.
13. Activating the option StartFD starts first the rastering of model (if the option
raster is activated) and then starts the external program FDEMSEIS.EXE which 2. activate the option ray
will normally be executed in the background (option background activated), so
that it is possible to go on with the work in REFLEXW. If the option background is 3. The Ray-GroupBox
deselected, the computation is faster but there is no possibility to work with opens in addition (see
REFLEXW until the FD-computation is finished. figure on the right).
Within this group box you
14. After having finished the FD-computation you may display the simulation have to enter the
result within the 2D-dataanalysis. necessary raytracing
parameters.

4. We want to simulate
the observed traveltimes
of different shots along
the line. For that purpose
we have to load the
observed traveltimes
using the option File/load
data traveltimes. Then
the screen is split
vertically showing in the upper window the model and in the lower the data.

5. Now the ray tracing parameters have to be chosen:

- enter the wanted raytracing type FD-Vidale.
- enter the gridding increment DeltaX (equal in x- and z-direction - should be in
the range of the receiver increment or less - depends on the model complexity).
- enter the output-scale, e.g. 4
- enter the calculate type - in this case data traveltimes because we want to
simulate all loaded observed traveltimes
- enter the outputfile name
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 69 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 70

6. Start the raytracing using the option start 0.10.4. tomography

7. the calculated traveltimes are shown in the lower picture in addition. Now you Tomographic methods have been well established for borehole-borehole or
may check for the mean traveltime difference using the option Analyse/calculate borehole-surface measurements whereby the object will be directly transmitted
traveltime differences (so called transmission tomography).

In the case of the 2D refraction vertical tomography all sources and receivers
8. If the calculated and the observed raveltimes do not match you may make are located within one line at the surface. In order to allow for a high data
some changes wthin the model and restart the raytracing in order to get a better coverage within the medium vertical velocity gradients should be present and a
match. curved raytracing for the calculation of the traveltimes must be used.

REFLEXW supports a 2D- and 3D-transmission traveltime tomography and a 2D

refraction tomography. For the 2D-tomography both straight and curved
raytracing is supported. For the 3D-tomography only straight raytracing is
supported.

Chapter 0.10.4.1 includes the format and the picking of the traveltime data.
In chapter 0.10.4.2 the 2D tomographic interpretation of borehole-borehole
transmission tomography is described.
In chapter 0.10.4.3 the 2D tomographic interpretation of a refraction
tomography is described.

0.10.4.1 picking the traveltime data and description of the

format
Before performing the tomography the traveltime data to be inverted must be
present.

REFLEXW uses a 2D or 3D ASCII-data format:

2D-data format:
travel time, code, transmitter_X, transmitter_Z, receiver_X, receiver_Z
F8.2 I8 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2
example (2 travel times):
800.00 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 2.00
801.60 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 6.00

3D-data format:
travel time, code, transmitter_X, transmitter_Y, transmitter_Z, receiver_X,
receiver_Y, receiver_Z
F8.2 I8 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2
example (2 travel times):
800.00 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 2.00 5.00
801.60 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 6.00 5.00

These data can be created externally or within REFLEXW when picking the
original wavedata.
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 71 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 72

0.10.4.2 performing the transmission tomography

In the following the picking of the original wavedata within REFLEXW is
described. 1. First a starting model must be generated (see chap. 0.10.1) or an already
existing model must be loaded using the option file/load model. Normally the
1. The most important part is the definition of the source- and receiver- starting model may be a simple homogeneous model whereby the velocity should
coordinates. These coordinates are stored within the traceheader of each trace. be within the expected range.
There are two different possibilities for both the refraction and the transmission
data. 2. Activate the option Tomo
Either each shot is imported, filtered and picked separately (standard procedure
for “normal” refraction interpretation - see refraction guide, Import the data and 3. The TomographyGroupBox
pick the first onsets (done within the module 2D-dataanalysis). opens in addition (see figure on the
Or one datafile contains all shots (standard procedure for the reflection seismic right). Within this group box you
interpretation - see reflection guide, Import the data and setting the geometry have to enter the necessary
(both done within the module 2D-dataanalysis) and the data are filtered and tomography parameters.
picked in one step. If a very high data coverage is present the refraction data may
also be handled like the reflection data with one datafile containing all shots. In - Load the data using the option
that case the various possibilities of defining the geometry may be claimed. load data (see also chap.
0.10.4.1). If the 3D-data format is
To be considered: In any case the used for the 2D-tomography you
traceheader coordinates must be have to deactivate the option use
defined before picking! 2D-data and you have to specify
the second coordinate (y or z)
2. After having imported the data and within the radiobox sec.coord. The
having defined the traceheader first coordinate is always x. The third coordinate is neglected. The ASCII-
geometry the traveltime data must be tomography data may be created within the modules
picked. a. 2D-dataanalysis - save picks using the formats ASCII-2D tomography or
For that purpose activate the option ASCII-3D tomography
pick and pick the data using one of b. traveltime analysis - option export to ASCII
the picking options. Open the pick c. modelling - export data traveltimes to ASCII
save menu using the option save.
The save picks menu opens (see - Enter the wanted space increment (equal in x- and z-direction). This increment
figure on the right). In any case the picks also should be saved using the Reflex should be within the range of the receiver or shot increment.
Win format in order to have the possibility to load them again in a later stage.
Use the format ASCII-2D tomography or ASCII-3D tomography in order to - Activate the option curved ray if the curved raytracing shall be used. If
generate the ASCII-file for a subsequent tomography. With the option “export activated the option start curved ray specifies the iteration step for which the
several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file” activated you may export several existing curved raytracing will be used first.
pickfiles into 1 ASCII-file.
The pick-file will have the extension TOM and will be stored under the path ASCII - For a first tomographic result you may use the other default parameters. There
under the actual projectpath. are no general rules for these parameters but you have to adapt the parameters
to your data in order to get the best result.

- Enter a name for the final model. Please use not the same name as for the
starting model because this may lead to problems.

- Start the tomography. The tomographic result is stored using the “normal”
REFLEXW format. You may display the result within the 2D-dataanalysis.
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 73 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 74

0.10.4.3 performing the refraction tomography - The following options must be set for the refraction tomography:
- activate the option curved ray.
In the case of the 2D refraction vertical tomography all sources and receivers - set the parameter start curved ray to 1.
are located within one line at the surface. In order to allow for a high data
coverage within the medium vertical velocity gradients should be present and a - Enter a quite large value for max.def.change (%), e.g. 200 %
curved raytracing for the calculation of the traveltimes must be used.
The curved rays are calculated using a finite difference approximation of the - Often it is useful to force the first iteration (option force 1.iter. activated) to
Eikonal equation (see raytracing). A start model must be defined. No assignment generate a new model even if the resulting residuals are larger than for the
to layers is necessary. starting model.
The start model should contain a quite strong vertical velocity gradient and the
max. velocity variations should be large enough (e.g. 200 % of the original - Enter a smoothing value in x-direction (parameter average x, e.g. 10).
values) in order to enable strong vertical gradients at those positions where an
interface is assumed. A smoothing in horizontal direction is often useful because - Activate the option show result in order to display the tomography result
of the normally quite large receiver increments.
- For a first tomographic result you may use the other default parameters. There
1. First a starting model must be generated (see chap. 0.10.1) or an already are no general rules for these parameters but you have to adapt the parameters
existing model must be loaded using the option file/load model. Normally the to your data in order to get the best result.
starting model may be a simple homogeneous model with a quite strong vertical
velocity gradient (dv/dz = 50 1/m, e.g.) whereby the velocity at the surface - Enter a name for the final model. Note: do not use the same name like for the
boundary should be within the expected range (e.g. v=400 m/s). starting model.

2. Activate the option Tomo - Start the tomography. The tomographic result is stored using the “normal”
REFLEXW format. You may display the result within the 2D-dataanalysis.
3. The TomographyGroupBox
opens in addition (see figure on 4. Control the tomographic result by a forward raytracing. For that purpose
the right). Within this group box activate the option ray. The raytracing menu opens in addition.
you have to enter the necessary Load the traveltime data using the option File/load data traveltimes. Then the
tomography parameters. screen is split vertically showing in the upper window the model together with the
tomographic result and in the lower the data.
- Load the data using the option Now the ray tracing parameters have to be chosen:
load data (see also chap. - enter the wanted raytracing type FD-Vidale.
0.10.4.1). If the 3D-data format - enter the gridding increment DeltaX - this increment must be equal to the
is used for the 2D-tomography increment used for the tomography.
you have to deactivate the - enter the output-scale, e.g. 1
option use 2D-data and you - enter the calculate type - in this case data traveltimes because we want to
have to specify the second simulate all loaded observed traveltimes
coordinate (y or z) within the - enter the outputfile name
radiobox sec.coord. The first - deactivate the option raster - this must be done because otherwise the actually
coordinate is always x. The third coordinate is neglected. The ASCII-tomography loaded model (normally the start model for the tomography) will be used for the
data may be created within the modules raytracing
a. 2D-dataanalysis - save picks using the formats ASCII-2D tomography or - start the raytracing using the option start. As the option raster is deactivated
ASCII-3D tomography you are asked for the raster file. Choose the tomography raster file.
b. traveltime analysis - option export to ASCII - the calculated traveltimes are shown in the lower picture in addition. Now you
c. modelling - export data traveltimes to ASCII may check for the mean traveltime difference using the option Analyse/calculate
traveltime differences
- Enter the wanted space increment (equal in x- and z-direction). Normally this
increment should be small enough in order to allow small scale variations with
depth. It may be significantly smaller than the receiver increment.
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 75 User’s guide - modelling/tomography 76

0.11 Use of CMP-analysis for a single or several

independent CMP-files
In the following the use of the velocity adaptation
for a single or several indiependent CMP-files is
described.

1. Enter the CMP-module and load the wanted

cmp-file using the option file/open. The file is
plotted together with a simple one layer
startmodel on the left handside. By default the
velocity for the first layer is set to 0.1 m/ns for
GPR or 3000 m/s for seismics respectively. The
default max. modeldepth is calculated from this
velocity and the max. time of the loaded cmp-file.

2. activate the options

unnormalized cor. or
semblance and use for example
the following input parameters for
the min. and max. vel. and the
vel.interval. Click on start and on
the right hand side the correlation
histogram is shown. Within this
correlation histogram you may
choose the best adapted
velocities. Click on the chosen
velocity within the correlation
histogram and the actual 1D-
model will be updated. Choose
the next best velocity for the next
reflection and a second layer will be created and so on. The solid lines define the
layer velocities, the dashed ones the mean (vrms) velocities. To be considered:
the mean velocities correspond to those velocities which come from the
interactive velocity adaptation within the 2D-dataanalysis.

3. After having created all layers

you still can change interactively
(option interactive adaptation
active) the layer boundaries
and/or velocities by simply
clicking on the boundary and
drag it with pressed mouse key.
The same is possible for the
velocity within the layer (option
velocity activated). A new layer
boundary can be inserted (option
insert activated) and an existing
User’s guide - modelling/tomography 77 2D-Data-Analysis 78

one can be removed (option remove activated). The actual 1D-model can be
stored using any filename. The option model pos. defines the position of the 1D-
1. 2D-Data-Analysis
model along the distance axis. This paramter is important for creating a
The module 2D data-analysis allows the complete processing of 2D-lines (B-
subsequent 2D-model consisting of different 1D-models.
Scans).
4. If several CMP’s are present you may do the same procedure for each CMP.
The possibilities:
Then you may create a 2D-model using the option 2D-model. Click on create
and choose the wanted 1D-models. Enter the filename for the 2D-model. This
-A easy import of data of many different formats (e.g. SEGY, SEG2, most
2D-model can be used for a subsequent 2D-migration or depth-conversion
of the EMR- and seismic systems (for example: GSSI, RAMAC, PULSE-
(option CMP-analysis within the 2D-velocity model groupbox). If only one CMP is
EKKO) and so on), integration of other nonstandard formats.
present you still must create a 2D-model for the use within the migration or time-
- conversion of single sections and of a profile sequence (automatic
depth conversion. In this case you simply choose one 1D-model when creating
assembling and storing of the sections under one single datafile or
the 2D-model. A laterally homogeneous 2D-model will be created.
automatic generation of datafiles for parallel and inline-sections).
- many different display and processing possibilities
- interactive processing of single files or by generating a batch-file
(sequence processing)
- one- and multi-channel filters, editing, static correction, deconvolution,
migration and much more.
- interactive velocity adaptation
- picking of onsets
- layer-show
- CMP-processing From this menu you may enter the main options.

Use the lower panel for a speed access to different options:

2.->1. button: Use this option if you want the secondary file to be the primary
file (see also File MenuItem)
2<>1 button: Use this option if you want the secondary file to be the primary file
and the primary to be the secondary
1
caption import: enter Import Menu
caption raw: open REFLEX raw data (see also File MenuItem)
caption proc: open REFLEX processed data (see also File MenuItem)
caption procf: open REFLEX processed data with filter (see also File
MenuItem)
The caption is automatically updated when using one of the following
options within the File MenuItem: open rohdata, open procdata, open
procdata filter, import

next button: allows to switch to the next primary file (ascending alphabetic
order). The actual filefilter for the primary file is taken into
account. Example: the primary file “file001.01t” has been loaded
using the filenamefilter “01t”. The next file must have the same
extension “01t” and the next file therefore may be “file002.01t”. If
no filenamefilter has been specified the next file in ascending
alphabetic order is chosen.
prev. button: allows to switch to the previous primary file (ascending
alphabetic order) - see option next.
2D-Data-Analysis 79 2D-Data-Analysis 80

enter the LayerShow MenuItem

print the current data files (see also Print Menu). Depending on the actual
settings either only the primary file or the primary and secondary file are CMP button: enters the CMP-processing
printed based on the actual splitting parameters. With the option
showmarker activated (see PlotOption) the markers are printed in addition. AD button: enters the AD-conversion module
The size of the markers are taken from the size defined within the symbol
font (see FontSettings). act.palette: load the wanted color palette from the stored palettes (see also
PlotOptions menu).
copy to clipboard
plotscale: enter multiplication factor for the color-amplitude assignment or enter
enter FileHeader Edit multiplication factor for the wiggle size.
enter PlotOptions

scroll to the left

stop scrolling
scroll to the right

The spin button located beneath the autoscroll options defines a delay factor in
order to slow down the scrolling. Value 0 no delay - value 50 max. delay.

replot actual line with actual zoom parameters

resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the actual
line
enable magnifying glass function

enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the data
set can be selected and plotted in full screen size. If the screen is split in
order to show two data sets, this option can be applied to each data set,
but not across the separating line of the two data sets. With split screen the
ZOOM option automatically acts on both data sets.
The area to be enlarged, a rectangle, has to lie within a data set. Pressing
the left mouse button you determine a corner of this rectangle and by
moving the mouse with pressed button the desired area is opened.
The zoom range may be changed step by step using the small + or -
buttons on the right side. Clicking on the + button increases the zoom by
10 %, clicking on the - button decreases the zoom by 10 %, this means the
x-y-range to be shown will be larger.
The actual zoom may be stored using the small "s" button and may be
restored using the small "g" button.

enters the velocity adaptation MenuItem

pick button: enters the Pick MenuItem

2D-Data-Analysis 81 2D-Dataanalysis, File MenuItem 82

Within the Main Menu Bar you may choose the following items: 1.1 File MenuItem
File MenuItem: From this menu you may open any primary or secondary file, From this menu you may open any primary or secondary file, import data from
import data from different formats, export the data to different formats, copy the different formats, export the data to different formats, copy the actual images to
actual images to the clipboard or print out the data. the clipboard or print out the data.
Processing MenuItem: From this item you may choose the different filter and ProjectDir: Selection of a new project. After selecting this option the directories
edit possibilities. included in the current project directory are listed. From these you can choose
the project you want to work with.
View MenuItem: This item controls some display options.
Open: Use this option to load an existing REFLEX-file into the primary data
Global MenuItem: Enter some global settings like fonts, printer,... window. You may load the data from the rawdata directory (the directory
containing the files which are not precessed) or from the procdata directory. If
Plot MenuItem: Within this icon you may activate all the plot settings. you are choosing procdata filter a filter for the file extension must be entered in
order to make the choice easier. In addition you may load a REFLEX-file
Analysis MenuItem: This menu allows you to activate analysis procedures like interactively from the profile plan (see also interactive choice).
picking or velocity adaptation.
Open SecondLine: Use this option to load an existing REFLEX-file into the
secondary data window. You may load the data from the rawdata directory (the
key shortcuts: directory containing the files which are not precessed) or from the procdata
directory. If you are choosing procdata filter a filter for the file extension must be
There exist some key shortcuts for a fast access: entered in order to make the choice easier. The secondary data are plotted into
F2 - opens the plotoptions menu the second image depending on the actual screen split (horizontal split, vertical
F3 - deactivates show second line and screen split split or no split - see also Plotsuboptions).
The secondary data file cannot be processed. The file is only used for a
comparison with the primary file. When a processing is done for the primary file
the secondary file is automatically overwritten with the actual processed file.

Open 1.-4. Line: Use this option to load up to 4 different REFLEX-files into
different windows. The data windows may be splitted vertically (vertical split
activated) or horizontally (horizontal split activated) or both (options vertical split
and horizontal split deactivated). The chosen files are automatically sorted in
alphabetic acsending order. The option 2<->1 allows you to change the order.
The first line becomes the last one, the second the first one and so on.
The print, zoom and scroll options are available for all 4 lines whereas picking
and velocity adaptations can only be done within the standard 2 window
configuration. When a processing step is performed always the datafile of the first
window is the base for the processing and the datafile of the second window is
replaced by the new processed datafile.

ChangeSecondToPrimary: Use this option if you want the secondary file to be

the primary file. For example use this option if you want to use a filter sequence
on the primary file - e.g. 1.filter: bandpass, 2.filter: run.average.
- apply the bandpass filter on the primary file - in the secondary window the
bandpass filtered data are displayed
- choose option ChangeSecondToPrimary
- apply the run.average filter on the new primary file - in the secondary window
the completely filtered data are displayed (bandpass filter and run.average).
2D-Dataanalysis, File MenuItem 83 2D-Dataanalysis, File MenuItem 84

Print: Use this option if you want to print out the data. Depending on the actual 1.1.1 interactive choice
settings either only the primary file or the primary and secondary file are printed
based on the actual splitting parameters (see also Print Menu). With the option Within this menu the profiles may be interactively selected from a profile map. A
showmarker activated (see PlotOptions) the markers are printed in addition. The preselection of the profiles to be selected is done by the option Filepath and
size of the markers are taken from the size defined within the symbol font (see Filefilter.
FontSettings). With the option Pick activated the actual picks are printed in Filepath specifies the path for the files to be shown on the profile map. Filefilter
addition. The size of the picks are taken from the size defined within the symbol allows to enter a filter for the files to be shown. e.g. filepath is set to procdata and
font. filefilter is set to *.02t - only the files with the extension 02t are shown on the
profile map and can be selected.
Import: import data of different formats into the REFLEX-internal format (see Additionally you must select the plane where profile to be selected are located.
also Import Menu). You have the choice between XY-plane, XZ-plane and YZ-plane. Only those
profiles whose profile direction and profile constant span this plane, are projected.
Export: allows the conversion of REFLEX-formatted data into different export
formats (e.g. SEGY) - see also Export Menu (chap. 1.6). With the option show profile activated the actually chosen profile is shown within
a separate window whereby a fast display of the different profiles is possible. The
Edit FileHeader: This option allows to display and change the parameters stored plotting depends on the choice of the profile direction (see below). For example a
in the global file header and the individual trace headers. These parameters are profile in x-direction is plotted with a horizontal distance axis wherey a profile in y-
for example sample and trace increment, presetting of coordinates etc (see also direction will be plotted with a vertical distance axis. The size of the distance axis
FileHeader Edit). is automatically determined from the profile length within the profile map but the
plotting window may be rescaled and moved.
Edit several FileHeaders: opens the Edit several fileheaders menu (chap. 1.10).
Within this menu you may change the fileheader coordinates and the start time Activating the option show all lines reads the coordinates from all profiles
(see also fileheader time specification.) of a choosable number of lines. located within the given plane and shows them as straight lines and within the
input listbox on the left hand side in addition.
Edit TraceHeader: opens the trace header menu (chap. 1.9.6). Activating the option ResetChoice also reads the coordinates from all profiles
located within the given plane and shows them as straight lines. In addition
Processing flow: displays the processing flow of the actual primary file. already chosen profiles are removed from the output listbox.
CopyToClipboard/File: copy the actual windows into the clipboard (suboption Activating the option show picks allows you to display the xy-projections of the
clipboard) or into a file (suboption file). Different file-formats like BMP, JPEG or wanted picks. After having activated the option you are asked for the pick files to
TIFF are supported. be loaded. The option is useful for a direct control of the locations of the picks
within the xy-plane. Picks belonging to the same code are connected if the option
Image1ToClipboard: copy the primary window into the clipboard. interpolation is activated.If the option use code within the 2D-dataanalysis or 3D-
datainterpretation is activated the layershow-colors are used for the display of the
Image2ToClipboard: copy the secondary window into the clipboard. picks. For example the option might be used for the location control of picked
pipes or rebars.
Exit: leave the module 2D-dataanalysis.
With the option show markers activated the markers of each profile are shown in
addition. The precondition is that the markers are stored within the traceheaders.
With the option free of distortion activated the x- and y-axis are equally scaled
for display.
With the option use traceh.coord. activated the traceheader coordinates
(receiver) are used for the display of the profileline.
With the option interpolation activated the xy-projections of the picks belonging
to one element (given by the pick code) are connected (see option show picks).

The profiles may be selected or deselected either within the input listbox by
clicking on the checkbox or within the profile plane by clicking on the line. For a
selection the set button must be activated and for a deselection the remove
2D-Dataanalysis, File MenuItem 85 2D-Dataanalysis, Global MenuItem 86

button must be activated. A deselection may also be done within the output 1.2 Global MenuItem
listbox by activating any selected file and press the delete key.
The interactive selection within the profile plane is additionally controlled by the printersetup: enters the printersetup menu.
"direction" buttons. Only profiles can be selected or deselected, whose direction
complies with the active direction. Already selected profiles are marked red, all info: enters the info windows about REFLEXW.
the others black. For the selection of the profiles always that - not yet selected -
profile is taken that is next to the mouse cursor. If there exist more than 1 profile fonts: enters the font menu for either the text fonts or the number fonts. Please
with identical coordinates within the plane, then after selecting or deselecting a use only true type fonts because only these fonts are able to be rotated.
listbox appears with all profile names having these coordinates. Also the
beginning of the profiles is not marked as usually by the symbol "X" but by a cursor: specify the wanted cursor.
number, signifying the number of profiles with identical coordinates within the
plane. global settings: this menu allows to specify some global settings parameters
(see also global settings)
To be considered: The max. number of profile to be selected depends on the
REFLEX module from which the interactive choice has been called. When calling language: choose the language for the automatic labelling of the axis.
from the 2D-dataanalysis the max. number is restricted to to 4 (see also option
Open 1.-4. Line, chap. 1.1). When calling from the 3D-datainterpretation the max.
number is restricted to 25. With the option show profile only 1 profile may be
selected. 1.2.1 Global settings
It is possible to select files from different project directories and different search
paths because the outputlist box contains the full filenames. this menu allows to specify some global settings parameters:

The option Btm allows to load a background bitmap, e.g. a photo of the measure delay value: dependent on the computer used the display of the hyperbolas or
plane. Precondition is that the profiles of the pofile map are already loaded and the continuous picks, e.g., might be significantly delayed. This is due to the need
therefore coordinate axis are present. After having activated the option you are of the computing time intensive refreshing of the screen. This problem can be
asked for the wanted bitmap. The bitmap is plotted in addition and a menu opens resolved by entering a delay value n for the display of the hyperbolas, the
where the size of the background bitmap may be entered. By default the bitmap continuous picking or the phase follower (value n = 1 - no delay). Then, only
is plotted filling out the complete coordinate range under the assumption that the every nth call the hyperbolas for example are shown. The delay value n must be
coordinate origin is located on the lower left corner (flippped y-axis). Within the individually set based on the computer used. If the display of the hyperbolas or
menu you may enter a different coordinate range of the bitmap and to deactivate the continuous picks is still delayed with the chosen delay value n, please
the bitmap flipping in y-direction (option FlipYAxis). After having defined the increase n. The actual setting is stored within the ini-file when leaving the
correct coordinate range of the bitmap you may use the option close in order to program.
close this menu. Deactiving the option Btm removes the background bitmap. The
option Btm is also used when printing out the profile plan. ScrollSize: enter the fracture part of the image to be scrolled by one scroll step.
For example ScrollSize 1/10 means that scrolling is done with a step rate of 10 %
The option scale allows an manual scaling of the axis and the coordinate range of the total size of the image. ½ means a step rate of 50 %. The new scrollsize is
to be shown. If activated the coordinate range window is shown and with the only available after a new zoom range has been entered. The actual setting is
option manual scaling activated a manual scaling is enabled. stored within the ini-file when leaving the program. After having changed the
scroll size you must reset a possible zooming using the option reset and
The option close closes the interactive choice and the selected profiles are afterwards reenable the zoom range in order to activate the new scrollsize.
plotted.
You may also leave the menu by the key escape. In this case all changes done synchronize scrolling: if activated the scrolling of the primary and secondary file
within the interactive choice window are lost and the program returns to the within the 2D-dataanalysis is synchronized. The actual setting is stored within the
calling module. ini-file when leaving the program.

complete plot by scrolling: if activated the data are completely replotted when
scrolling in horizontal direction. Otherwise only the scroll part is replotted. Activate
this option is the data are not clear when scrolling.
2D-Dataanalysis, Global MenuItem 87 2D-Dataanalysis, Global MenuItem 88

Check disk space: activate this option if you want that the program controls the The option decimal places controls the number of decimal places for the ASCII-
free disk space during storing the data. export of the picks.
The option places controls the number of places for the ASCII-export of the
decimal separator: enter the character for separating floating point values within picks.
the input menus (ASCII-files always have the dot (“.”) as separator). The default plot on 2.line: if activated the picks are also displayed on the 2.line whenever
character is given by the Windows settings. This character must be used if you you press the plot or reset button. For example this option may serve as a
enter a floating point value (e.g. 0,50 for "," or 0.5 for "."). The actual setting is controlling possibility of the picking if you have acquired the same data with two
stored within the ini-file when leaving the program. different frequencies.

Bitmap size[kb]: this parameter controls the max.size of a bitmap created within core parameters: Within this groupbox you may enter some parameters
REFLEXW. The default value is 16318 kb. The max. allowed bitmap size may controlling the coredata (see also option Core data/1D models under View
vary from computer to computer. Therefore you may decrease this paramter if MenuItem). The option bar size controls the size in pixels of the bars of the
any problems occur e.g. during printing within the 3D-datainterpretation. The individual cores. With the option show quality activated a second bar is shown
program automatically restricts the bitmap to this max. value and generates indicating a quality factor stored within the core datafile. With the option show
different bitmap parts if necessary. border activated a black border rectangle is plotted in addition to the colored bar.
With the option show label activated the labels of the cores are shown in
Read exist.par.-files for direct import: if activated the program looks for an addition. The label corresponds to the individual corename without CORE. With
existing REFLEX-parameter file when a file is directly imported using double click the option save corefile activated the actual corefile is updated when storing the
within explorer. core velocity adaptations (see also velocity adaptation). With the option save
VLA-file activated a VLA-ASCII velocity datafile (see Create LayerShow
construction change marker: enter the text for the so called construction velocities) is automatically created when storing the core velocity adaptations
change marker (see also edit comment markers, chap. 1.12.6). A vertical bar is which may be used for the generation of a layershow.
plotted in addition to the comment marker text if the comment marker string is the
same like this text. In addition this text is used within the Create LayerShow CMP-velocity parameters: Within this groupbox you may enter some
velocities menu (chap. 1.12.3.3 - option use construction change). parameters controlling some functions within the CMP velocity analysis (see also
chap. 2).
Transp. comm.marker: if activated the comment marker textbox will be The option display scale allows the setting of the relation of the size of the two
transparent partial screens model and data within the CMP velocity analysis. The input 0
means full screen for the seismogram data, the input 1 full screen for the model.
pick parameters: With this groupbox you may enter some parameters controlling Inbetween any inputs are possible. By default a value of 0,33 is set.
the picking (see also chap. 1.12.2). The option curves size allows to enter the number of discrete points of the
With the parameters PickSymbols you can choose between two different calculated traveltime curves within the CMP velocity analysis. The larger this
symbols for the picks (* and -). value the larger the needed time to compute the traveltimes. Therefore you
The parameter display every n.pick controls that only every n. pick will be should search for the best compromise between a good resolution of the
plotted. This does not affect the settings of the picks themselves. Enter a number traveltime curves and a fast refresh of the display. By default a value of 20 is set.
larger than 1 if the phasefollower is too slow or if the picks are not displayed The option color allows you to enter the color for the calculated traveltime curves
when scrolling fast. within the CMP velocity analysis.
With the parameter pickcorrect traces your may enter the number (one sided) of The option pen size allows you to enter the pensize in pixels for the calculated
traces for the pick correction option corr.max/min.time (see also Pick MenuItem). traveltime curves within the CMP velocity analysis. The possible valuerange is
The parameter corr.xy-coord bin(%) controls the size of the crossing bin when from 1 (thin) to 5 (5 - very thick).
your are using the option control xy-coord within the pick panel (see chap. 1.2.2).
The parameter is in percentage of the actual traceincrement. Increase this LayerShow parameters: Within this groupbox you may enter some parameters
parameter if the option control xy-coord does not generate any picks. for the layershow like the plot colors (option color) and pen-thicknesses (options
With the option show pickdifferences activated the traveltime differences and thick and thick line) of the individual layer boundaries (option number). The
thicknesses are displayed when using the difference pick. option thick line allows to enter the overall line thickness for those layer
With the option keep distance activated the x-position between the two picks are boundaries for which the option thick is activated.
plotted in addition when using the difference pick. With this option not activated
the x-position of the second pick is automatically moved to the x-position of the Model and traveltimeanalysis parameters: Within this groupbox you may enter
first one. parameters for the modelling and traveltime analysis module. The option def.
2D-Dataanalysis, Global MenuItem 89 2D-Dataanalysis, Plot MenuItem 90

distance dimension defines the used dimension in x-distance (either METER or 1.3 Plot MenuItem
FOOT). Depending on this setting the velocity dimension is either m/s (m/ns) or
ft/s (ft/ns). enter these options either from the main menu or from the main tool bar.

PlotOptions

Plot: replots actual line with actual zoom parameters

Reset: resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the actual
line

Autoscroll-Right: autoscroll line to right

Autoscroll-Left: autoscroll line to left

Autoscroll-Stop: stop autoscroll

ManualZoom: enable manual zoom.Click on the uppermost left corner of the

area to be zoomed up and drag the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner
with the left mouse button pressed. The two additional speed buttons in the tool
bar enable a steplike increase or decrease of the zoom factor.

MagnifyingGlass: enable magnifying glass function. A freely definable data part

is continuously magnified within a window when moving the mouse. The zoom
factor can be arbitrarily chosen within the zoom window.
2D-Dataanalysis, View MenuItem 91 2D-Dataanalysis, View MenuItem 92

1.4 View MenuItem The dimension of the thickness and of the location is identical to the actual
distance dimension of the profile. The dimension of the velocity is m/ns or m/s
ColorBars: activate this option for displaying the actual color amplitude respectively.
assignment bar at the right of the window. A block ends when the program finds the identifier CORE or at the end of the file.

Amplitudes: activate this option if you want the actual amplitudes to be example:
displayed in the status panel on the top (A:) when moving the mouse. CORE 1 - dist.dim: METER, vel.dim: m/s
14.00
PickPanel: activate this option if you want the pick panel always to be visible 1 7.887100 1 470.553 470.553
even if the pick option is not chosen. 2 11.804501 1 576.020 677.474
3 15.052200 1 717.993 1059.677
CORE 2 - dist.dim: METER, vel.dim: m/s
VelocityAdaptationPanel: activate this option if you want the velocity adaptation
24.00
panel always to be visible even if the velocity adaptation option is not chosen. 1 7.887100 1 470.553 470.553
2 11.219000 1 573.388 677.474
FileInfo: activate this option if you want the label infos about the loaded files shall CORE 3 - dist.dim: METER, vel.dim: m/s
be visible. 34.00
1 7.887100 1 453.631 453.631
WiggleWindow: This option allows the additional plotting of the actual trace or of 2 11.219000 1 562.827 677.474
3 15.637701 1 713.371 1059.677
the trace spectrum or of a second profile into freely movable and scalable
window. The y-axis corresponds to that of the primary profile. After activating the
The max. number of different layers within one coreblock is 100 (identical to the
option you may choose between act. trace, act. spectrum or 2. line.
max. number of layers within the layershow). The colors for the individual
After activating actual trace the current trace is plotted in the wiggle-mode using
layerbars are identical to the colors within the LayerShow MenuItem. With the
the actual Plotsettings. Activating the option Tracenormalize enables a
option show quality within the global settings activated a second layerbar is
normalization to the max. value of the actual trace.
shown indicating the quality factor with the following color assignment: 1 - white,
After activating the option act. spectrum the frequency spectrum of the actual
2-yellow, 3-red. Within the global settings menu you may also change the width of
trace is shown.
the layerbars and activate or deactivate some checking parameters.
Activating the option 2. line allows the plotting of a second profile in the wiggle-
These core data are also the basis for a coredata based velocity adaptation (see
mode. Open the wanted line using the option open. All traces of the profiles are
also velocity adaptation - suboption core).
shown.
A core datafile may also automatically be created within the CMP 2D-model
The actual parameters time and amplitude are shown if the mouse cursor is
menu if the option create corefile is activated.
inside the wiggle window.
With the option save VLA-file within the global settings menu activated a
VLA-ASCII velocity datafile (see menu Create LayerShow velocities or Create
TraceHeaderDistancies: activate this option if you want the actual traceheader
LayerShow - suboption velocity choice / velocity file) is automatically created
distance to be displayed in the status panel (dist.:) .
when storing the core velocity adaptations which may be used for the generation
of a layershow.
Core data/1D models: activate this option if you want to display core data (1D-
depth distributions) as vertical bars onto the primary line and onto the layershow
profile line (trace header coord.): with this option activated the profile location
depth profile. The core datafile should be stored under the path ASCII under the
based on the traceheader coordinates (see also trace header Edit, chap. 1.9.6) is
actual project directory and must have the extension cor(e.g.
shown in an additional window (any curvature of the line coordinates is
c:\reflex\demodata\ascii\test.cor). A core datafile contains the informations of
displayed). When moving the mouse cursor within the data window the actual xy-
several cores associated with the actual 2D-line. One core block within the file
position of the mouse cursor is also shown.
has the following format:
TraceHeader axis: if activated the xy-receiver traceheadercoordinates are
1. line: CORE + any identification
displayed along the distance axis in addition. The option is only available for the
2. line: actual location within the 2D-line (floating point format)
primary profile and with deactivated plotoptions Rotate90degree and FlipXAxis.
3.-x. line: layernumber thickness quality-factor mean-velocity layer-velocity
The number font is used. The number of places and the number of decimal
places may be entered within the global settings menu within the pick parameters
2D-Dataanalysis, View MenuItem 93 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 94

panel. The option transp.comm.marker within the global settings menu controls if 1.5 Import Menu
the text will be transparent or if a white box will be underlied.
The suboptions at the top, at the bottom and at min.distance define the positions Use this option to import non REFLEX formatted data. The maximum number of
of the traceheader coordinates. With at the top activated the traceheader traces per file is limited to 256000. At the moment the program supports the
coordinates are displayed at the distance labels within the upper range of the following formats: SEGY, SEG2, SEG2-RADAR, RADAN, RADAN_ANALOG,
profile below the distance axis using a 90 degree rotated font. With at the bottom RADAN_TAPE, PULSEEKKO, RAMAC, EMR, BGREMR, BGRDHU, BGRBHRU,
activated the coordinates are displayed within the lower range of the profile again UTSI, IDS, TRS2000, ABEM, BISON-2, OYO8BIT, ASCII-OYO8BIT,
using a 90 degree rotated font. With at min.distance activated only the ASCIISYNTH, ASCII-3COLUMS, ASCII-MATRIX, BITMAP, 3D-RADAR. The
traceheader coordinate for the min. coordinate will be displayed above this min. program performs a so called plausibility test, i.e. various values (e.g. the number
coordinate. If enough space above the min. coordiante is available the x- and y- of samples per trace) are checked for reasonable values. If an "incorrect" value is
traceheader coordinates will be separately plotted, otherwise they will be recognized (e.g. number of samples smaller than 0 or larger than 16000), the
combined separated by the “/” character (according to the options at the top and conversion is terminated with the corresponding message.
at the bottom). The default directory for the non REFLEX data is ASCII under the actual project
directory (default import directory) but it is also possible to import the data from
add. 2colum data: option allows to display any 2 colum ASCII-data (e.g. the any other directory or drive. Example for storing the externally formatted data
topography) along the profile (distance) axis. under the default import directory: Standard directory name is C:\REFLEX, inside
After having activated the option show within the Add2ColumData menu you are C:\REFLEX the project directory DEMO1 is created (C:\REFLEX\DEMO1), inside
asked for the ASCII-file with each line containing two values - the distance and this the default import directory ASCII (C:\REFLEX\DEMO1\ASCII). Into the
the parameter value. These parameter data may contain for example any directory C:\REFLEX\DEMO1\ASCII the desired externally formatted data might
informations (e.g. topography, moisture, ....) along the profile. The max. number be copied.
of datavalues is restricted to 32768. In any case REFLEXW stores the converted data under the path ROHDATA
After having chosen the wanted ASCII-file a control menu opens. The option under the actual project directory. REFLEXW DataView stores the converted data
overlay primary section control whether the data are plotted within a separate under that path the non REFLEX data are placed.
image at the top of the profile (option deactivated) or within the actual primary
section (option activated). The size of the vertical axis is given by the option It is possible to automatically import a datafile from the formats RADAN,
vertical size (pixels) The horizontal size is connected to the size of the profile PULSEEKKO, RAMAC and IDS by double click on such a file provided the
distance axis. The min. and max. parameter value of the chosen ASCII-file is corresponding datatype (DZT, DT1, RD3 or DT respectively) is connected to
automatically determined. Activating the option manual scaling allows to restrict ReflexW. Example: you want to automatically import a RAMAC file - you must
the range to be displayed. connect REFLEXW with files with the extension RD3. After double click on such a
The data are plotted as a polygonial line. The line color as well as line thickness RAMAC-file, e.g. within the explorer, REFLEXW is started and this file is
is taken from the symbol font. The option is not available for the printing. automatically imported and displayed. The following import options are always
valid: filename is set to original name, read traceincrement is always activated.
profile histograms: activating the option The imported datafile is stored under the path rohdata under the projectpath. The
opens a new window which shows the projectpath is automatically determined from the path where the original file is
amplitude histogram of the primary profile located. Therefore it is not possible to load a datafile from CD. If the last directory
(upper panel) as well as the sum spectrum within this path is named ASCII (standard import directory - see above), the
over all traces of the profile (lower panel). directory ASCII is neglected for the determination of the projectpath, otherwise
It is possible to select the number of the projectpath is equal to the path where the original file is located. Example1:
subdivisions for the histogram. The default the original file is located under d:\reflex\demo\ascii - the converted file is stored
value is 50. Activating the option log.scale under d:\reflex\demo\rohdata. Example2: the original file is located under
enables a logarithmic scale for the d:\reflex\demo\name1 - the converted file is stored under
amplitudes. d:\reflex\demo\name1\rohdata.
With the option ShowSingleSpectra
activated the spectra of the single traces Before beginning the conversion you have to specify several settings. These are
are plotted in addition to the sum spectrum. essentially coordinate settings and name specifications. These specifications also
Double clicking on the histogram or the spectrum copies the corresponding chart enter the naming of the converted data, if this shall be done automatically or not.
to the clipboard for a succeeding import into any document. REFLEX stores the data using a 16 bit integer format or 32 bit floating point
format. If your original data have a larger dynamic range than the output format
you must enter a scaling value (option scaling). All data are multiplied with this
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 95 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 96

value before conversion. With 16 bit outputformat specified the resulting values 3. optional UTM-conversion if necessary
larger than 16 bit are clipped during the conversion. 4. optional calculate distancies
Note: during conversion all 8 bit-data are internally multiplied by the factor 16 in To be considered: during the RADAN-dataimport the GPS-start and end
order to be able to use all default parameters of the program (e.g. plotting coordinates given within the tmf-file are also stored within the traceheader of the
parameters) without any essential changing. 1. and the last trace respectively. These coordinates will be overwritten when
using the option actualize based on gps-times. The coordinates are written out for
Most of the available informations are read from the data headers. There is one completeness and may be used when no external ASCII gps-file is present.
peculiarity concerning the geometry. The program REFLEXW is based on a 3- It is possible to ignore the timing of each marked scan. For this purpose you must
dimensional geometry. That is why the coordinates must be entered manually deactivate the option GPS mark/times within the import menu.
and those parameters are normally not read from the file header. Peculiarities for RADAN_TAPE-Format: It is not possible to define the geometry for this format.
the following formats: The program automatically reads the traceincrement and the starttime if defined.
PULSEEKKO-Format: With the option read coordinates activated the starting By default the traceincrement is set to 1 and the starttime is set to 0. The
and ending coordinates in profile direction are read from the header. With the geometry must be redefined at a later stage (see edit fileheader, chap. 1.9 or edit
option read traceincr. activated the trace increment is read from the header and several fileheaders, chap. 1.10). The program always uses the original name of
the ending coordinate is calculated based on the manually given starting the raw data for the determination of the REFLEX filename.
coordinate, the trace increment and the number of traces. With no option SEGY-Format: Some programs (e.g. Eavesdroper) are writing out ‘modified’
activated the entered manual parameters are valid. SEGY-data, e.g. the SEGY-fileheaders or the traceheaders are missing. In order
RAMAC-Format: With the option read coordinates activated the ending to be able to import these data REFLEXW allows to neglect the SEGY-file- and/or
coordinate in profile direction is read from the header (the starting coordinate is traceheaders (options read fileheader and read traceheader).If the original SEGY
set to 0). With the option read trace increment activated the trace increment is raw data have been recorded on a Unix machine the option swap bytes must be
read from the header and the ending coordinate is calculated based on the given activated. The dataformat is not always correctly defined especially for 32 bit
starting coordinate, the trace increment and the number of traces. With no option swapped (Unix) data. The option IBM controls in this case whether the data are
activated the entered manual parameters are valid. IBM-compatible or not.
The program supports three different marker files (same filename but different SEG2-Format: If the trace increment is defined in the header this value is read
extension as the rd3-file): and the ending coordinate is calculated based on the given starting coordinate,
mkr-file: ASCII file with each line containg the tracenumber of the marker. The the trace increment and the number of traces. If the original SEG2 raw data have
markers are written out as distance markers. been recorded on a Unix machine the option swap bytes must be activated.
mrk-file: ASCII file with one header line and then each line containg the Infrasense-Format: With the option read coordinates activated the starting and
tracenumber of the marker. The markers are written out as distance markers. ending coordinates in profile direction are read from the infrasense header. The
mkn-file: ASCII-file with up to 9 different comment markers defined at the start coordinate is set to the beginning distance counter divided by the scale
beginning and then each line containing the tracenumber and the code of the factor. The end coordinate is set to the last distance counter divided by the scale
marker (2. or 3. colum). The markers are written out as comment marker with the factor. Zero traces (marker traces) are automatically omitted as well as the traces
comments defined wihin the first nine lines. before the trace with the beginning distance counter. The trace after a zero
RADAN-Format: With the option read trace increment activated the trace (marker) trace receives a marker flag.
increment is read from the header and the ending coordinate is calculated based With the option read coordinates deactivated the starting and ending coordinates
on the given starting coordinate, the trace increment and the number of traces. must be entered manually. No traces are omitted.
With no option activated the entered manual parameters are valid. In both cases the actual distance (distance counter / scale factor) is stored within
A GPS-tmf file is supported. A tmf-datafile is created when using the SIR-3000 the trace header of each trace. Obviously the data acquired with the Infrasense
together with a GPS-system. The tmf-datafile is a binary file and it contains: system may not always be equidistant. This means that the distances stored
1. the start and end GPS-positions (in degree) and the UTC-time within each traceheader do not exactly correspond to the distances calculated
2. the timing of each marked scan from the fileheader coordinates even if the option read coordinates is activated. In
The UTC-times and the times of each marked scan are stored within the Reflexw a subsequent processing step a file with equidistant traces can be created based
traceheader on TimeCollect in secs after midnight. Based on these times it is on these traceheader distances (see processing step: make equidist. traces).
possible to input GPS-data from an external ASCII-file using the type GPS-times IDS-Format: With the option read coordinates activated the starting coordinate in
within the traceheader menu (see chap. 1.9.6 for a detailed description). profile direction and the trace increment are read from the header. With the
In order to use this option the following actualization must be done within the option read traceincr. activated the trace increment is read from the header and
traceheader menu: the ending coordinate is calculated based on the manually given starting
1. interpolation 0-data coordinate, the trace increment and the number of traces. With no option
2. gps-times activated the entered manual parameters are valid
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 97 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 98

BITMAP: The amplitude values for the imported REFLEX file are calculated from the fileheader of the raw data, the coordinates in profile direction are
the color intensity of each bitmap point (sum of the three RGB values divided by automatically updated provided that the corresponding ControlOptions are set.
3). Therefore a gray scale bitmap will be best imported.The timeincrement must
be entered. DistanceDimen.: input of the desired distance-dimension. Possible inputs are
3D-Radar: imports the data from the 3D-Radar system (default extension 3dr). MM, CM, METER, INCH, FOOT or TRACNR.. Choosing TRACENR. means that
The data are 3-dimensional data either in the time- or frequency domain. If the the trace increment is automatically set to 1 and the name of the axis in profile
data are in the frequency domain an automatic transformation into the direction is set to LOCATIONNUMBER.
timedomain is done. In this case the max. timerange is asked for. The following
restriction is valid at the moment: the data must be completely read into the RAM. data type: There are five different types: const. offset, single shot, several shots,
Therefore the max. dataset size is restricted by the available RAM. 3D-const.offset and timeslice.
By default the conversion sequence is set to "3D-file equidistant". In this case a The data type ‚const. offset‘ can be used for the import if the measurement is
3D-Reflexw file is generated. done along a line using a fixed offset between shot and receiver (e.g. Constant-
With the conversion sequence set to "parallel lines" the 3D-Radar file is Offset (CO) radar data).
automatically subdivided into different 2D-Reflexw files. If the filename has been If the data set is the result of a measurement with only one shot point but many
set to "original name" the program automatically adds the number of the 2D-lines receivers in a line, the use of the default data type ‚single shot‘ data is
to the output filenames - example: the 3D-radar file testa.3dr contains 20 different recommended (e.g. Common-Mid-Point (CMP) radar data, refraction seismic
2D-lines - the Reflexw files will have the names testa000.dat, testa001.dat,..., data).
testa020.dat. In case of data, which contain any kind of multiple shot / multiple receiver data,
the default data type ‚several shots‘ should be used (e.g. reflection seismic -
one data set combined of individual CMP data sets).
The data type ,3D-const.offset‘ should be used for a 3D-data file consisting of
Choosing the distance dimension TRACENR. the trace increment is automatically several parallel 2D-lines (see also 3D-datainterpretation). This datatype should
set to 1. be used in combination with the conversion mode 3D-file equidistant or combine
lines. The ensemble nr. within the REFLEXW traceheader controls the storing of
If you want to convert parallel profiles with constant distance between and equal the individual 2D-lines. All traces belonging to one 2D-line have the same
start coordinates in profile direction, the selection of the so called conversion ensemble-number which is stored within the REFLEXW traceheader (see chap.
sequence (see also Import ConversionMode) is recommended. This option 1.9.6).
should also be selected, if you want to convert several shots or CMPs of a certain The data type ,timeslice‘ should be used if the original data are timeslices i.e.
geometry within a profile line. If the distance between the single profiles is smaller time constant cuts within the XY-plane. This data type is also automatically used
than 1 unit, you have to adjust the filenamefactor accordingly, so that different if the timeslices are created within REFLEXW (see chap chap. 3.6). The
labels are possible for the automatic naming. profiledirection should be X and the profileconstant Z. The profileconstant
coordinate defines the position of the timeslice in time(z)-direction. Whereby the
After the setting (please note that, according to the read format additional coordinates in x-direction are given corresponding to the standard const.offset
parameters such as signal length or time increment have to be specified) you can type data, the coordinates in y-direction are defined like the parameters in time-
start the conversion of the external data by the option convert to REFLEX. direction for the const.offset data. Therefore the increment in y-direction is given
After selecting convert to REFLEX all files existing in the directory ASCII are by the y-increment which corresponds to the timeincrement for the const.offset
listed. If you have set the option conversion sequence to no, you have to select a type data and the start position in y-direction corresponds to the starttime for the
file, which then is automatically converted and stored in the directory ROHDATA. const.offset type data and is taken from the original data if the option read
If the target file already exists, a corresponding message is issued. After starttime is activated. Otherwise it is set to 0 and may be entered afterwards
terminating the conversion the currently converted file is automatically shown within the fileheader menu.
either as primary or secondary file.
The following options are valid for the data type const.offset:

1.5.1 Import Fileheader-coordinates ProfileDirection: enter the axis in which the profile is orientated. Possible Inputs
are X, Y or Z.
Within this group box the fileheader-coordinates must be entered. The geometry
of the profile is defined by the 3D-starting coordinates and the 3D-ending ProfileConstant: enter the axis perpendicular to the profile orientation. Possible
coordinates. If the data are acquired in one single plane, the third coordinate (e.g. Inputs are X, Y or Z. With the setting of the ProfileDirection and the ProfileConst
the z-coordinates) hast not to be defined. If the coordinates are already defined in the so called profile plane is determined.
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 99 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 100

XStart: enter the starting coordinate in x-direction. The X-,Y- and Z-start- and end-coordinates determine the location of the profile
line. However, this plane doesn't have to coincide necessarily with a plane
XEnd: enter the ending coordinate in x-direction. spanned by the coordinate axes. The profiles within a plane don't have to
coincide with a coordinate axis either, so that with the setting of the 6 coordinates
YStart: enter the starting coordinate in y-direction. a profile lying arbitrarily in space is specified. The determination of the so called
profile plane, profile-direction and -constant is important for an interactive profile
YEnd: enter the ending coordinate in y-direction. selection and three-dimensional data viewing processes.
In profile direction the end coordinate must not to be identical with the start
ZStart: enter the starting coordinate in z-direction. coordinate. If the end-coordinate is smaller than the start-coordinate the profile is
inverted on request after termination of data recording. Start- and end-coordinate
ZEnd: enter the ending coordinate in z-direction. together with the number of recorded traces determine the so called trace
increment, which is written in the file header. Though, this increment can be
The following options are valid for the data type single shot: changed again if necessary.

rec.start: enter the start coordinate of the receiver line.

1.5.2 Import filename specification
rec.end: enter the end coordinate of the receiver line.
This group box allows to specify the naming of the converted profiles.
lat.offset: enter the lateral offset of the receiver line.
specification: this option allows you to specify the naming of the converted
shot-pos: enter the shot coordinate. profiles. Entering automatic name means that the naming is based on the
entered profile coordinates in profile constant direction (see below). Choosing
shot.lat.offset: enter the lateral offset of the shot. manual input means that the filename must be entered manually.Choosing
original name means that the original name of the raw data is automatically
The following options are valid for the data type several shots: used. Choosing manual /automatic means that the naming is based both on the
manually entered filename and the entered profile coordinates (see below).
increment: enter the mean traceincrement. To be considered: the max. number of characters for the filename is restricted to
16 (without extension). If the original name exceeds this number the filename is
The following options are valid for the data type timeslice: automatically truncated.
ProfileDirection: enter the x-axis for the timeslice - choose X. filename: enter a name of the converted file provided that the specification is set
to manual input.
ProfileConstant: enter the time (z)-axis - choose Z.
Filenamefactor: used if the specification is set to automatic name. The start-
XStart: enter the starting coordinate in x-direction. coordinate in profile-constant direction is multiplied with that factor for naming. A
value larger than 1 (e.g. 10) is for example reasonable if floating point numbers
XEnd: enter the ending coordinate in x-direction. should enter the naming. The actual coordinate is of course not influenced by this
value.
ZStart: enter the starting coordinate in time( z)-direction.
automatic name: The first two digits of the name are taken from the
ZEnd: enter the ending coordinate in time(z)-direction. ProfileConstant direction. The start-coordinate in the direction of the profile-
constant (only Integer number) is used for the digits 3 to 6. For this the coordinate
is being multiplied by the so called filenamefactor. The 7th and 8th digit in the file
The following options are valid for all data types. name is determined by the number.
an example: ProfileDirection is set to Y and ProfileConstant is set to X. The
number: enter a number between 0 and 99 which is used for the automatic profile extends in Y-direction from 0 to 100 meters. The ProfileConstant
naming of the profile if the filename specification is set to automatic name. coordinates are set to XStart = 1 and XEnd=1. The number is set to 0. With
automatic file naming the name will be XP000100.DAT (filenamefactor set to 1).
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 101 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 102

manual /automatic1: the naming is based both on the manually entered recorded traces. NO means no consideration - the coordinates in profile direction,
filename and the entered profile coordinates. For the manual name up to 30 which are manually entered, will be considered. Concerning the PULSEEKKO-
characters are permitted. If you use less than 2 characters, the name is filled with data in addition the distance coordinates of each trace are stored in the
'_' . The following 6 digits are taken from the start-coordinate of the profile- corresponding traceheaders. Activating the option TraceHeaderDistancies in the
constant direction (only Integer number). For this the coordinate is being PlotOptions menu allows you to plot the data (only wiggle mode) based on these
multiplied by the so called filenamefactor. coordinates, which have not to be equidistant.

manual /automatic2: the naming is based both on the manually entered read trace increment: input only for some data formats. Active means, that the
filename and an automatically determined part. For the manual name up to 28 trace increment is read from the fileheader if not equal 0. Based on this trace
characters are permitted. If you use less than 2 characters, the name is filled with increment and on the given start coordinate the final coordinate of the line is
'_' . The following 6 digits are taken from the start-coordinate of the profile- redefined. NO means no consideration - the trace increment is calculated from
constant direction (only Integer number). For this the coordinate is being the start- and final coordinates and from the given number of traces.
multiplied by the so called filenamefactor. The 7th and 8th digit of the name are
according to the number, as explained under automatic name. fix endcoord.: if activated and activated option read trace increment the entered
endcoordinate in profiledirection is fixed and the startcoordinate is changed
To be considered: Multichannel multiplexed data (e.g. RADAN multichannel based on the given endcoordinate and the given traceincrement.
files) are automatically demultiplexed. If multichannel data are present the NOTE: If the entered startcoordinate is bigger than the endcoordinate an
number and therefore the 7 and 8. digit of the filename is used for discriminating automatic flipping is done in any case (also if the option meandering is activated
between the different demultiplexed datafiles independently from the filename for the conversion sequence parallel lines) and the startcoordinate becomes the
specification. The actual number is increased by 1 for the second channel and so endcoordinate and vice versa.
on. Therefore in the case of bigger startcoordinate the entered startcoordinate is
an example: the original filename is file1; 4 channels are used; the number is set fixed if the option fix endcoord. is activated and with deactivated option the
to 0 and original name is used for the filename specification. Then the imported entered endcoordinate will be fixed.
data of the first channel has the filename file1_00.dat, the second file1_01.dat,
the third file1_02.dat and the fourth file1_03.dat. read stacknumber: specification only for BGREMR-data. YES means, that the
data are normalized based on the stacknumber stored in the BGREMR-
fileheader: 16*Data[i]/Stacknumber. NO means no consideration of the
1.5.3 Import ControlOptions stacknumber - direct transfer of the data.

This group box allows to control the conversion and to specify if the coordinates swap bytes: specification only for SEG2- and SEGY-data. Activate this option if
defined in the raw data header are read in or not. the bytes shall be swapped for the conversion. This hold true if the original raw
data are recording on a Unix machine.
read starttime: Specification not available for all formats. Active means that the
start time of the signal available in the original data is considered and saved IBM: specification only for SEGY-data. The option controls if the 32 bit SEGY-
within the Reflexw filheheader (option start time). Not active means no data are IBM compatible. The option is only active with swap bytes activated.
consideration (start time is set to zero). Please note that in the case of activated it Normally you should deactivate the option when the data are coming from an PC-
might happen that you must change manually the start time under the option Unix system and activate this option for e.g. older Unix systems but it is not
FILE/FILEHEADER in the main menu after having done a special processing possible to give general rules.
step (e.g. static correction).
To be considered for SEGY-format: the starttime is taken from the 240 byte- control format: activate this option if you which the program to control the input
traceheader of the first trace. Normally this value is given in ms. If this values format during conversion. In that case the program performs a so called
exceeds 50% of the total trace length it is assumed that the value is given in :s. plausibility test, i.e. various values (e.g. the number of samples per trace) are
checked for reasonable values. If an "incorrect" value is recognized (e.g. number
read coordinates: specification only relevant for some data formats. Active of samples smaller than 0 or larger than 16000), the conversion is terminated with
means, that the start- and final coordinates in profile direction available in the the corresponding message.
PULSEEKKO-data or the final coordinate in profile direction available in the
RAMAC-data (the start coordinate is automatically set to 0) are automatically read fileheader: only for SEGY-data. By default activated. Deactivate this option
considered (the coordinates in profile constant must still be entered manually). if the original data do not contain the SEGY-fileheaders (3200 EBCDIC-header
The mean trace increment is calculated based on these values and the number of and 400 byte binary header), e.g. data generated by the program Eavesdroper.
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 103 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 104

read traceheader: only for SEGY-data. By default activated. Deactivate this value of the second byte within each trace of the RADAN-data for detecting a
option if the original data do not contain the SEGY-traceheaders. marker. Change this value by trial and error if some markers could not be found.
61184: SIR-10, SIR-2, SIR-2000 16 bit data
ignore blocksize: only for SEG2-data. By default activated. If activated the 30000: SIR-20 16 bit data
program ignores the datablocksize within the SEG2-traceheader and only uses 239: SIR-10, SIR-2, SIR-2000 8 bit data
two special bytes for discriminating the individual traces. If deactivated the 127: SIR-20, SIR-3000 8 bit data
datablocksize is also taken into account. The option has been included because
sometimes the datablocksize is not correct and sometimes the two special check
bytes are missing.
1.5.4 Import format specification
Corr.ampl.: only for SEG2- and Yokogawa-data. If activated the descaling and
stack factors stored within the original data are used to correct the data values. This option allows to specify the input format and the output format.
ps timeincr.: only for SEGY-data. If activated the segy-timeincrement is input format: Specification of the format of the data to be converted. At the
assumend to be in picosec if the timeincrement is set to ns. moment the formats SEGY, SEG2, SEG2-RADAR, RADAN, RADAN_ANALOG,
PULSEEKKO, RAMAC, EMR, UTSI, INFRASENSE, IDS, BGREMR, TRS2000,
coord. in degree: only for SEGY-data. If activated the traceheadercoordinates ABEM, BISON-2, OYO8BIT, ASCII-1COLUM and ASCII-MATRIX are supported.
given in arc secs within the SEGY_file are transformed into degree values. Please pay attention that the correct format is specified for the conversion, since
the program otherwise can be caught in an infinite loop (restarting necessary) or
man. samplenr.: only for SEGY-data. If activated the samplenumber within the the program is aborted.
SEGY-fileheader is ignored and the manually entered value is used instead. For the conversion from the RADAN-8Bit-format the data are multiplied with the
constant factor 16. For SEGY-data, recorded under DOS, the swap bytes
use sweeplength: only for SEGY-data. If activated the sweeplength stored controloption must be deactivated, if the data have been recorded according to
within the SEGY-fileheader is used instead of the sample number in order to the DOS-convention. In case you don't know the recording convention you have
determine the length of the output trace. to test both reading in with activated and deactivated option.
The actual input-format is automatically saved in the INI-file.
read marker: only for SEGY-data. If activated marker events stored within the
SEGY-traceheaders are used as comment markers. The event numbers are output format: controls the data format of the converted data. Data may be
stored on bytes 193-196 within the SEGY-traceheader and a marker is set at that stored in 16 bit integer or 32 bit floating point format. In case the data are stored
position where the event number changes (at the 1. trace a marker is recognized in 16 bit integer format the scaling value must be taken into account (see below).
if the event number is <> 0). The number is taken as the comment. To be considered: The DOS-version of REFLEX does not support the 32 bit
floating point format. Data stored with this format cannot be accessed by the
GPS mark/times: only for RADAN-data. If deactivated the marker timings within DOS-version.
the tmf-file are not taken into account. There are two new output dataformats: new 16 bit integer and new 32 bit floating
point. Data stored with this format can only be accessed by REFLEXW version 3
min.marker: only for importing 16 bit or 8 bit RADAN-data. Enter a 16 bit value and higher. These new data formats are using double precision (64 bit) for the
without sign (between 0 and 65535) or a 8 bit value respectively depending on traceheader coordinates (see also trace header Edit, chap. 1.9.6). This is
the dataformat of the original RADAN data. The parameter controls the minimum necessary when storing GPS-coordinates because the resolution of single
value of the second byte within each trace of the RADAN-data for detecting a precision data used with the two other formats is too small for most GPS-
marker. Change this value by trial and error if some markers could not be found. coordinates. In addition a gain factor has been included into the traceheader of
The following default values can be given: the new formats which allows to individually adapt the single traces.
57471: SIR-10, SIR-2, SIR-2000 16 bit data
20000: SIR-20, SIR-3000 16 bit data scaling: Specification of a value (real input) the original data are multiplied with
220: SIR-10, SIR-2, SIR-2000 8 bit data before the conversion. The modified data are converted. This change of the data
90: SIR-20, SIR-3000 8 bit data is necessary when the dynamic range of the REFLEX-internal format (16 bit
integer format) is smaller than the one of the original data. The 16 bit integer
max.marker: only for importing 16 bit or 8 bit RADAN-data. Enter a 16 bit value format only has a dynamic range of 16 Bit, in order to save memory. Data in
without sign (between 0 and 65535) or a 8 bit value respectively depending on SEGY- or other formats can be saved as 32 Bit real data or as even larger binary
the dataformat of the original RADAN data. The parameter controls the maximum
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 105 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 106

coding. Values larger than 16 Bit therefore are clipped during the conversion, i.e. filename). The datafiles must be stored under the same path like the
they are assigned the maximum value of +- 32767. ASCII-filelist. Example:
TEST__02.sg2
Some format specifications: TEST__01.sg2
TEST__03.sg2
ASCII-1COLUM: ASCII format whereby each line contains one sample (floating TEST__04.sg2
point representation). The number of samples per trace must be defined
manually. Combine lines/shots means that all selected profiles are combined in one
profile and therefore also in one file in the sequence of selection. Use this
ASCII-MATRIX: ASCII format whereby each line contains all samples of one selection for a shot gather (see also CMP-processing ) or for a 3D-data
trace. Each value (floating point representation) must be separated from another acquisition (see also 3D-datainterpretation) for example.
by a sign not containing in the floating point representation, e.g. a blank With parallel lines it is assumed that the selected profiles are parallel profiles
character. Example (10 samples per trace - 2 traces): with identical start and end coordinates in profile-direction. The prespecified
200.1 205.1 208.9 180. 170 60. -20. -50. -80. -120. profile-constant is altered automatically by the program by a value to be
210.1 215.1 218.9 190. 180 70. -30. 60. -9. -130. predefined (option line distance - see below). The automatic naming is according
The number of samples per trace is automatically read in from the number of to the determined profile-constant.
values within the first line. The time increment must be entered manually (see With inline lines it is assumed that the desired profiles lie on one line each with a
Import HeaderInput). constant distance to the other (e.g. single shots or CMPs). For automatic naming
The options file header and trace header allow to enter a number of comment each of the two-digit numberings is increased by one starting from the preset
lines at the beginning of the file (option file header) and the number of comment numbering. Therefore, there can be up to 100 different profiles converted in one
lines at the beginning of each trace line (option trace header). All comment lines step.
are only read in and not interpreted. With 3D-file equidistant it is assumed that the original profile is a single 3D-file
consisting of parallel 2D-lines with equidistant trace increment and equal trace
number for each 2D-line and equidistant distance between the individual 2D-
1.5.5 Import ConversionMode lines. The parameters line distance, trace incr. and tracenr./2D-line must be
entered (see below).
this group box allows to specify sequence conversion modes. With geometry file the main geometrical data of the files to be converted are
read from an additional ASCII-file (name GEOMETRY.*). One line of the ASCII-
The options in the right block serve to specify the input format and the input mode file must contain the geometry informations as following:
as well as to set the plot parameters:
name(incl.extension)
profile direction (e.g. X)
conversion sequence: This option allows you to import several 2D-lines within profile constant (e.g. Y)
one step, e.g. a 3D-data volume consisting of individual parallel 2D-lines. After start coordinate in profile direction
selecting this option you have the choice between no, combine lines/shots, end coordinate in profile direction
parallel lines, inline lines, geometry file and 3D-file equidistant. When selecting start coordinate in profile constant
these options the original profiles remain unchanged and are stored under end coordinate in profile constant
different names, determined automatically by the program corresponding to the output filename (without extension) - only necessary if filename
settings of the filename specification. specification is set to manual input
To be considered: If a conversion sequence is specified there are 2 different
possibilities of choosing the datafiles: All inputs must be separated by at least one blank or tabulator sign (use tabulator
1. choose the datafiles from the openfile dialogue: all chosen original data files sign if you want to create the geometry file by Excel or Quattro Pro, e.g.).
are sorted with ascending order. Problems may occur if the filenames don't have Example of a geometry file (name: GEOMETRY.1):
the same length (e.g. file1, file2,..., file11). In this case the chosen files are
TEST__01.Dzt X y 0.0 40.0 0 0 test1
resorted in the manner: file1, file11, file2, .... In this case a warning message TEST__02.Dzt X y 0.0 40.0 1 1 test2
appears. Please take care that all original filenames have the same length - for TEST__03.Dzt x y 0.0 40.0 3 3 test3
example: file01, file02, ..., file11. TEST__04.Dzt y x 10.0 50.0 1.0 2.0 test4
2. open an external ASCII-filelist with the extension "lst": the external filelist
contains all wanted datafiles in an arbitrary order (one row contains one If the file is not correct (e.g. an input is missing) or a file name of the files to be
converted is missing, a corresponding message is given. The ASCII-file may
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 107 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 108

have more entries than the desired number of files to be converted. The name of max.traces/file: specification only for Radan, Pulseekko and Ramac-data. The
the ASCII-file must be GEOMETRY.* and it must be stored under the path ASCII max. number of traces in REFLEX is restricted to 64000. In order to import data
under the actual project path. files for the input-formats mentioned above with more than 64000 traces the
After clicking on ConvertToReflex first you must select the wanted geometry file original profile is automatically subdivided into different blocks with an equal
and then you are asked to select the wanted original profiles to be imported (multi number of traces. These blocks are stored on different files. The parameter
choice using the strg or shift key). After having chosen the wanted profiles the max.traces/file controls the size of the individual blocks. The max. value is 64000
conversion will be done. (default value) and is identical to the max. number of traces per REFLEX-file. It is
With multichannel a multichannel importfile (e.g. a RADAN file from the SIR-10) recommended to use a number smaller than 64000 because in this case the
is decomposed into different files and the prespecified profile-constant is altered individual files are easier to handle. If the number of traces to be imported exceed
automatically by the program by a value to be predefined (option line distance - the max.traces/file a new file is automatically created. The starting coordinate in
see below). The automatic naming is according to the determined profile-constant profile direction will be actualized and the number is increased by 10. This allows
(see also option parallel lines). To be considered: a multichannel importfile is a max. subdivision of the original file into 10 different files with a max. size of
always decomposed into different files. 64000 traces for each file. This results in a maximum size of 640000 traces of the
original file (the number must be set smaller than 10). If a multi-channel data file
After selecting convert to REFLEX and the possible specification of the profile is imported, the individual channels are also stored on different files with an
distance, the profiles to be converted have to be selected by pushing the left automatic increase of the geometry number by 1 for each channel (see also
mouse button or deselected again if the specification was incorrect. peculiarities of various formats - RADAN).
If the start coordinate in profile direction is larger than the end coordinate the line
is automatically flipped in profile direction (see also XFlipProfile) after the example: original file with 150000 traces and 4 channels (trace increment: 1
conversion. cm)

line distance: Specification of the distance of 2 profiles. This value is used for input - max.traces/file: 64000, number: 0
the automatic coordinate determination for a profile sequence conversion (see 1. line: 1.channel number 00
above). With combine lines/shots activated the line distance is stored within the from 0-640 m 2.channel number 01
64000 traces 3.channel number 02
fileheader and is used if the combination of the lines results in a 3D-file. With 3D- 4.channel number 03
file equidistant activated the line distance is stored within the fileheader. 2. line: 1.channel number 10
640-1280m 2.channel number 11
meandering: activate this option if the profiles are acquired meandering. The 64000 traces 3.channel number 12
option is available for the import sequences “parallel Lines” and “combine 4.channel number 13
lines/shots”. The meandering performs a flipping of each second original line/shot 3. line: 1.channel number 20
starting at line/shot number 2 if the entered startcoordinate is smaller than the 1280-1500 m 2.channel number 21
22000 traces 3.channel number 22
endcoordinate and starting at line/shot number 1 if the entered startcoordinate is
4.channel number 23
greater than the endcoordinate. With the import sequence “combine lines/shots”
activated this corresponds to the processing option XFlip-3Dfile with the flipmode
If the starting coordinates are greater than the end coordinates the single lines
1 or flipmode 2.
are automatically flipped in x-direction except the case you are using a profile
sequence for the conversion. If you have entered profilesequence/inline lines no
check tracelength: available only for import format SEG2 and conversion
subdivision into single lines is performed. If the total max. number of 64000 is
sequence combine lines - if activated the program controls the samplenumber for
reached, the conversion is broken off in this case.
each original file and sets the output samplenumber to the max. number of
samples found.

trace incr.: - parameter only enabled for the conversion sequence 3D-file 1.5.6 Import ControlPanel
equidistant - specification of the trace increment within one 2D-line provided that
the trace increment is not automatically read from the fileheader of the original file This group box controls the conversion.
(see also option read trace increment under Import ControlOptions).
Convert to REFLEX: Here the conversion of a profile or the profile sequence is
tracenr./2D-line: - parameter only enabled for the conversion sequence 3D-file started with the preset parameters. After selecting this option and confirmation of
equidistant - specification of the number of traces for each 2D-line within the the query if the data should be saved under the desired name, all files within the
original 3D-file. subdirectory ASCII are shown in a window. The desired profile, or for profile
sequence-conversion the desired profiles, has (have) to be selected. The actual
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 109 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 110

status is shown in a window. The maximum number of traces (Scans) for each 1.5.7 Import time/comment specification
recorded profile is limited to 64000 (see ConversionMode). If the number of
traces exceeds this value, the conversion is terminated automatically. This group box allows the input of the time dimension, a comment and if
If the start coordinate of the profile is larger than the end coordinate (in profile necessary (if not available in the file header of the raw data) of the time increment
direction, i.e. perpendicular to profile-constant), the profile is inverted and the sample number.
automatically, if the corresponding query is answered with yes. Such an inversion
is necessary if the same profile direction is desired. Each profile can also be TimeDimension: Specification of time dimension. Possible inputs are ms and ns.
inverted in Data processing. The standard setting complies with the reading-format. If you select RADAN,
If the data type is set to single shot the traceheader coordinates are RADAN_ANALOG, OYO8BIT, GEOTEL, TRS2000, PULSEEKKO, RAMAC,
automatically shown within a tabella after having done the conversion. The ASCII-PULSEEKKO, ASCII-OYO8BIT, SEG2-RADAR or ASCII-MATRIX as
coordinates can be changed manually or changed based on the fileheader reading-format ns is assumed as standard setting, for all others ms.
coordinates (option ActualizeFromFileHeader). On the other hand the option
ActualizeFileHeader allows you to set the fileheader coordinates (rec.start and Comment: Giving an arbitrary comment which is saved in the header and can be
end, shot position) based on the traceheadercoordinates. The option save recalled at any time. The comment is read from the raw data header and can be
changes saves the current settings of the traceheader coordinates. The option changed within the edit fileheader menu (fileheader input1 ).
reload from file reloads the traceheader coordinates from file.
time increment: Specification necessary for GEOTEL, OYO8BIT, ASCII-
Open SCSI-menu: opens the SCSI-menu (chap. 1.5.8) for a direct access to the OYO8BIT, TRS2000, ASCII-MATRIX, FREE8BIT, FREE16BIT or BITMAP data -
exabyte-tape for the inputformat RADAN_TAPE: specification of increment in time direction. Together with the number of samples
(see below) the recording length per trace in the specified dimension is
Header Info: in preparation - display of Header-Information of original data. After determined by the time-increment.
selecting this option all files within the subdirectory ASCII are shown in a window.
The desired file has to be selected. Then the header or the headers, if the original sample number: Specification necessary for GEOTEL, OYO8BIT, FREE8BIT,
data have trace headers (e.g. SEGY), are shown. The header preview is only FREE16BIT or ASCII-OYO8BIT-data - specification of the number of digital
implemented for the following formats: RADAN, RAMAC and PULSEEKKO. samples per trace. Together with the time increment (see above) the recording
length per trace in the specified dimension is determined by the sample number.
CheckExistingFiles: activate this option if you want to check for existing files
before conversion. In that case a warning message appears if the file to be file header: specification of the size of the filheader in bytes. Specification is
created for conversion already exists. only necessary for FREE8BIT and FREE16BIT data. The information within this
header will not be taken into account. The size must be entered in order to
PrimaryFile: activate this option if you want the converted profile to be the correctly read in the data.
primary file. Option not available for REFLEX DataView.
trace header: specification of the size of the header of each trace in bytes.
SecondaryFile: activate this option if you want the converted profile to be the Specification is only necessary for FREE8BIT and FREE16BIT data. The
secondary file. Option not available for REFLEX DataView. information within this header will not be taken into account. The size must be
entered in order to correctly read in the data.
enter PlotOptions. Enter this option, if you want to change the plot
parameters and to save them in the fileheader of the line to be imported.

Exit button: terminates the import and exits to the main menu.

Help button: activates the main help menu for the data import (Import
Menu).
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 111 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 112

1.5.8 Access of the Exabyte drive (RADAN_TAPE) Read all headers: After selecting this option all existing file header starting from
the actual tape position are read. Some informations from these headers are
After selecting the option open SCSI-menu the program opens the menu SCSI stored and displayed in the memo window (see option read directory). This option
tape-input, which allows direct access to an Exabyte-drive and reading and takes more CPU-time than the option read directory and should only be used for
conversion of RADAN-formatted data based on the ASPI-interface. tapes without directory information. The option fastread controls the access to the
The program autoamtically searches for an existing SCSI-tape device. Therefore individual files (see below). The option can be aborted at any time pressing the
it is not allowed to use two different SCSI-tape device at the same time. After option cancel. After aborting or if the end of tape or end of data is encountered
having found a tape device the SCSI tape-input window is opened and the device the tape is rewinded.
name together with the block size and the SCSI-ID are shown.
The program offers the possibility to access a particular file on the disc drive Read directory: Show the tape directory, if it exists. The information stored in the
(option goto file-pos.), plot it on the screen (option show file) and convert into a tape directory about the file-number, file position (see also option goto file-pos.),
REFLEX-file (option save file). You can move forward to the next file (option file file name and the date of file recording are shown in the memo-window. content
+) or rewind to the previous file (option file -). Moreover you have the possibility to of this memo box may be exported to the clipboard using the option .
view the tape content starting from the current file position (option show tape).
If there exists a directory on tape it can be displayed (option read directory). It is show file: Shows the current file with the preset plot parameters on screen. The
also possible to convert several files in one step (option save files). program reads from the current tape position data as long as a file mark is
recognized. After that the tape is repositioned at the beginning of the current file.
In detail these options have the following meaning: In the memo box at the right the header informations of the actual file are shown.
The content of this memo box may be exported to the clipboard using the option
load: load a new tape.
.
Unload: rewind and unload the tape.
show tape: After selecting this option the tape content starting from the current
rewind: Rewind the tape to the beginning of the tape. The current file position is file position is displayed continuously.The option fastread controls the access to
set to 0. the individual files (see below). The option can be aborted at any time pressing
the option cancel. After aborting or if the end of tape or end of data is
SCSIWait(ms): input of a delaytime in msec for the SCSI-communication with the encountered the tape is rewinded.
the exabyte-tape (e.g. before a rewind or before skipping to the wanted tape
position). The parameter was introduced in order to avoid possible problems Save file: The selection of this option allows the conversion of the data starting
during the SCSI-communication. The value should be at least 1000 msec (see from the current file position to the next file mark into the REFLEX-internal format.
also pecularities of the exabye-conversion). The actual value is automatically The program automatically reads the traceincrement and the starttime if defined.
stored in the configuration file. By default the traceincrement is set to 1 and the starttime is set to 0. The
geometry must be redefined at a later stage (see edit fileheader, chap. 1.9 or edit
goto file-pos.: Specification of the current fileposition (physical position on tape - several fileheaders, chap. 1.10). The program always uses the original name of
may not be identical to the actual filenumber - see also option read directory). the raw data for the determination of the REFLEX filename.
First you must enter the wanted file-pos. Within the edit option and then after
activating the option got file-pos. the tape is being cued forward or rewound Save files: The option allows to convert any number of files in one step. First you
automatically to the current fileposition. The fileposition for a particular profile can have to specify the file numbers within the text box below the option. You may
be read from the directory information, if it exists. A subsequent call of show file enter single numbers separated by commas, blocks with dash or combination of
shows the current profile on the screen. the two (e.g. 5,6,7,10-20). The order of the numbers is relevant if the fastread
option may be used or not. Only if the files are in strict ascending order the
File +: move forward to the next file. fastread option can be applied. After activating the option save files all the file
numbers of the files to be converted are shown for control. The option fastread
File -: move backward to the previous file. controls the access to the individual files (see below). The option can be aborted
at any time pressing the option cancel. After aborting or if the end of tape or end
Read header: Reads the header information of the actual file starting at the of data or the end of last filenumber is encountered the tape is rewinded.
actual tape position. In the memo box at the right the header informations are
shown. The content of this memo box may be exported to the clipboard using the Fastread: This option controls controls the access to the individual files for the
options show tape, read all headers and save files. With the option fastread
option .
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 113 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 114

deactivated the tape is always rewinded after a filemark has been reached and 1.6 Export Menu
then the tape is skipped to the next fileposition. With the option fastread activated
the next fileposition is reached in a faster way. Precondition is that the files to be Use this option to export REFLEX formatted data into different data formats. The
reached are in strict ascending order. following formats are supported: BITMAP (BMP), SEGY, SEG2, GEOTEL,
BGREMR, PULSEEKKO, RAMAC- and RAMAC-BOREHOLE, NWF, RADAN and
Close: Terminating access to Exabyte-drive. The tape is rewinded automatically. four ASCII-formats (ASCIISYNTH, ASCII-3COLUMS, ASCII-
MATRIX(TRACE/ROW) and ASCII-MATRIX(TRACE/COL)).
Cancel: allows to abort the following commands show tape, read all headers and
save files. After having pressed the option the actual command is still The option allows to export a number of 2D-lines. The filename of the single
accomplished and then the process is stopped. output name is equal to the filename of the original line plus an extension
corresponding to the export format.
pecularities of the exabyte-conversion: The option export format allows to specify the format of the data to be
converted. At the moment the formats BITMAP (BMP), SEGY, SEG2, BGREMR,
Using a fast computer it is possible that the communication between computer GEOTEL, PULSEEKKO, NWF, RAMAC, RAMAC-BOREHOLE, RADAN and five
and the SCSI-interface is disturbed. That is why a delaytime has been introduced ASCII-formats (ASCII-3COLUMS, ASCII-4COLUMS, ASCII-SYNTH, ASCII-
(option SCSIWait), which is used before the execution of different commands MATRIX(TRACE/ROW) and ASCII-MATRIX(TRACE/COL)) are supported.
(e.g. rewind or skipping to a distinct tapeposition). This time should be at least ASCII-3COLUMS: each line contains the distance, time and the amplitude
1000 msec. If neverthelss problems occur especially with activated option (format 12:3). Depending on the settings within the AsciiColums box the distance
fastread, you should use the deactivated option fastread (this procedure needs is either determined from the fileheader (fileheader coordinates activated) or set
quite much time and is shown on screen). An increase of the time delay may to the distance stored within the trace header (traceheader coordinates
avoid this problem. activated). Example for the use of the option traceheader coordinates: the data
are nonequidistant and you want to write out the correct positions.
If a SCSI-command cannot be ended the program must be aborted manually and ASCII-4COLUMS: each line contains the x-coordinate, y-coordinate, time and the
you should shut down the computer. amplitude (format 12:3). Depending on the settings within the AsciiColums box
the x- and y-coordinates are either determined from the fileheader coordinates
(fileheader coordinates activated) or they are set to the CMP-coordinates
stored within the trace header (traceheader coordinates activated). Example for
the use of the option traceheader coordinates: the data are nonequidistant and
you want to write out the correct CMP-positions.
ASCII-MATRIX(TRACE/ROW): each line of the ASCII-file contains the amplitude
values of one trace starting at trace 1 (row 1 = trace 1, row 2 = trace 2, ....). No
header information is written out.
ASCII-MATRIX(TRACE/COL): each column of the ASCII-file contains the
amplitude values of one trace starting at trace 1 (column 1 = trace 1, column 2 =
trace 2, ....). No header information is written out.
ASCII-GEOSOFT_XYZ: each line contains the distance, time and the amplitude
(format 12:3). Depending on the settings within the AsciiColums box the distance
is either determined from the fileheader (fileheader coordinates activated) or set
to the distance stored within the trace header (traceheader coordinates
activated). Each scan in x-direction is separated from the previous one by a
command line: "line xxx". The parameters XSCALE and YSCALE define a
scaling value for the x-values and the y-values respectively. The parameter
threshold defines a threshold value. Data values (absolute value) below this
threshold are not written out.
ASCII-GRD: this format corresponds to the ASCII-GRD format used by the
program SURFER. The radiobox first sorting defines how the data are written
out onto the ASCII-file. With y-(time)-direction activated the data are written out
trace after trace. Then the second line contains the number of samples and of
2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 115 2D-Dataanalysis, Import Menu 116

traces. The third line contains the start and end-position in time-direction, the from the x-size and this scale value. For example a number of 1 for the scale
fourth line the start and end-position in profile direction. Each of the following means that the x- and the depthaxis have the same scale. Example: if the x-axis
lines contains all amplitude values of one trace. With x-(distance)-direction of a file consisting of 2000 traces is 100 m long and the depth-axis is 10 m long
activated the data are written out sample after sample. Then the second line (depth-axis/x-axis = 1/10), the bmp-file will have about 2000 x 200 pixels if the
contains the number of traces and of samples. The third line contains the start scale relation is set to 1. If the scale relation is set to 2, the number of pixels for
and end-position in profile-direction, the fourth line the start and end-position in the depth-axis will double and the bmp-file will have 2000 x 400 pixels,
time direction. Each of the following lines contains all amplitude values of one approximately. The option is available both with activated and deactivated
sample. AutoSize option.
To be considered for timeslices: in order to get the correct sorting within Surfer it If axis within the PlotOptions is activated, the axis in x- and y-direction are
might be necessary to use the x(distance)-direction for the first sorting. automatically added to the bitmap using the actual font settings.
ASCII-3D_DATA: this format should be used for 3D-data (see also 3D- With the option show name activated the filename (without path) is shown at the
datainterpretation, chap. 3). Each line contains the x-, y-coordinates and the time top using the textfont.
and the amplitude. An exponential format is used. With the option depths With the option showpicks activated it is possible to display picks stored within
activated the converted depths based on the given velocity are written out in individual pickfiles. After having pressed button start you must choose the wanted
addition. Then each line contains the x-, y-coordinates, the time, the converted pickfiles from the filelist. Within the fileheader of each pickfile the corresponding
depth and the amplitude. datafilename is stored (see also Pick save MenuItem). This filename serves for
SEGY: With the option ps timeincr. activated the segy-timeincrement within the the assignment of the chosen pickfiles to the chosen 2D-datafiles.
exported data is assumend to be in picosec if the original timeincrement is in ns.
The parameter scaling factor is used for scaling the distances before export. Filefilter allows to enter a filter for the multi file choice.
The option is only necessary for the export format SEGY. The following bytes are
written out on the traceheaders: Filepath specifies the path for loading the files to be processed.
001-004: trace sequence number
009-012: original field record number Start starts the export. After having chosen the option, you must select the
029-030: trace id code (1 = seismic) wanted files to be exported. The converted files will have the same name as the
037-040: distance from source to receiver original file except the extension and will be stored under the path ASCII under
071-072: scaler for elevations and depths the project directory.
073-076: Source x-coordinate
077-080: Source y-coordinate
081-084: group x-coordinate
085-088: group y-coordinate
089-090: coordinate units (1=length)
115-116: Number of samples in this trace
117-118: sample interval in :s
159-160: day of year
161-162: hour of day
163-164: minute of hour
165-166: second of minute

BITMAP: The following bitmap formats are supported: bmp, jpg, tif and pcx. The
parameters AutoSize, XSize and YSize determine the size of the bitmap. With
AutoSize activated the x- and y-sizes of the bitmap are automatically determined
from the number of scans and samples. With AutoSize not activated you must
manually enter the x- and y-sizes. If the entered x- or y-size number exceeds the
trace or samplenumber an automatic interpolation in the corresponding direction
is done for the pointmode presupposed the option autointerpolation is active.
The max. x- or y-size in pixels is 30000. No flipping and rotation of the axis (see
plotoptions) are supported.
If the depthaxis under Plotsuboptions (chap. 1.7.6) is activated or if the y-axis
already is a depth axis the option scale relationship allows you to enter a scale
for the depth and therefore also the timeaxis. In this case the y-size is determined
2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 117 2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 118

1.7 PlotOptions below) the maximum amplitude of each visible trace is normalized to 1. Like that
a plotting is guaranteed, where all traces are well visible. Deactivate this option if
you want to plot the data with real amplitudes. For the wigglemode the size of
Within this menu you may change the actual plot settings. the individual deflections is controlled by the parameter Scale (tracenormalize:
Scale = Size in Pixels, no tracenormalize: actual amplitude * Scale = Size in
Pixels). For the pointmode the parameter Amplitude scale controls the amplitude
1.7.1 Plotsettings color assignment.

Plotmode: The option allows the specification of the plottype. You may choose Profilenormalize: with this option activated the normalization is not done based
between pointmode and wigglemode. on the max. amplitudevalue of each trace but on the mean amplitudevalue of the
Pointmode means that the data are plotted with colored pixels according to the complete profile. Thereby amplitude variations from trace to trace within one
predefined color-amplitude configuration (see also pointmodeattributes). profile will remain but it is possible to compare profiles with different value scales.
Wigglemode means that each trace of the profile is plotted as a polygonal line. The option is only available with the option tracenormalize activated. To be
The size of the deflections of each wiggle is controlled by the parameter scale considered for
(see also Wiggleattributes). Wigglemode: The entered wiggle size corresponds to the mean amplitude.
The two modes might be used together if the pointmode is chosen together with Therefore you must enter a clip value greater than 100 for the greater amplitudes.
the activated option ShowWiggle. Otherwise these amplitudes will be clipped. By default a clip value of 200 is set.
Pointmode: by default the amplitudescale is set to 0.5 - this means that the color
Three different scale modes are incorporated: amplitude assignment includes all amplitude values until twice the mean
amplitude. Higher amplitude values are assigned to the max. color(s).
XYScaledPlot: Activating this option means that the data are completely plotted
into the actual window provided that the two scale options XSCALE and load from fileheader: controls if the plotoptions stored within the fileheader of
YSCALE are set to 1. Increasing the number of the scale options means a each profile (plotmode, wigglemode attributes and pointmode attributes) are
zooming up, decreasing means a zooming down. used.
With the suboption no activated the plotoptions stored within the fileheader will
PixelsPerSample: Activating this option means that the plotting size of each data not be used. The actual plotoptions remain unchanged even if a new primary
point is given in screen pixels. The size in x-(distance) direction and y-direction profile will be loaded or if the projectdirectory will be changed.
can be changed using the option XSCALE and YSCALE respectively. With the suboption each primary profile activated the plotoptions are always
updated from the fileheader of the primary profile after a new pimary profile has
PixelsPerTrace: Activating this option means that the distance between been loaded. These plotoptions are used for all profiles to be displayed.
successive traces is given in screen pixels (option XSCALE). In every case the With the suboption always each file activated the plotoptions stored within the
complete time series of each trace is plotted corresponding to the size of the fileheader of each profile are always used for the display. This might be useful for
actual window. This means no zooming possibilities in y-(normally time-)direction example if profiles with very different amplitudes shall be displayed
are given for that scale mode. simultaneously or if profiles shall be displayed both using the pointmode and the
wigglemode.
XScale: enter a value for the window scaling in x-(normally distance-)direction. If
PixelsPerTrace or PixelPerSample is activated, the parameter gives the distance Manual scaling: Activate this option if you wish to manually input the min. and
between successive traces in pixels. If XYScaledPlot is activated, the parameter max. axis lengths in x- and y- (time-) direction (see also chap. 1.7.4 Manual
gives the x-zooming value corresponding to the actual profile window (e.g. a scaling and incrementation). Deactivate this option if you wish the program to
value of 2 means that half of the traces are plotted into the actual window). automatically determine the axis lengths.

YScale: enter a value for the window scaling in y-(normally time-)direction. If Man.: if activated the manual subdivision of the axis (options dx, dy and dz, see
PixelPerSample is activated, the parameter gives the range between successive also chap. 1.7.4 Manual scaling and incrementation) will be enabled - if
points in pixels. If PixelsPerTrace is activated, the parameter has no meaning. If deactivated the program automatically chooses a suitable incrementation.
XYScaledPlot is activated, the parameter gives the y-zooming value
corresponding to the actual profile window (e.g. a value of 2 means that half of TickNumber: Enter the number of ticks between the axis marks.
each trace length is plotted into the actual window).

Tracenormalize: Activate this option if you wish the data to be plotted amplitude
normalized for each trace. With the option profilenormalize deactivated (see
2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 119 2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 120

1.7.2 Pointmodeattributes with only positive or negative amplitude values (e.g. timeslices calculated on the
based on absolute amplitudes).
This group box controls the attributes for the pointmode. The color amplitude
assignment consists of 128 different colors which are linearly distributed between Amplitude scale: The minimum and maximum amplitude values are controlled
a minimum and maximum amplitude value. The minimum and maximum by the multiplication factor Amplitude scale. With a value of 1 for Amplitude scale
amplitude values are controlled by the multiplication factor Amplitude scale. the amplitudes range from -2048 to 2048 for unnormalized data and from -1 to 1
With a value of 1 for Amplitude scale the amplitudes range from -2048 to 2048 for for tracenormalized data. With a Value of 0.0625 the amplitudes range from -
unnormalized data and from -1 to 1 for tracenormalized data. With a Value of 32768 to 32768 provided the value of zero level is set to 0. The min. and max.
0.0625 the amplitudes range from -32768 to 32768. Amplitude values are shown within the options min. value and max. value which
also may be used for defining the amplitude scale. If new values will be entered
act.palette: load the wanted color palette from the stored palettes. The following here both the amplitude scale and the zero level will be updated accordingly.
palettes are predefined: Rainbow1, Rainbow2, Gray1, Gray2, Gray3,
BlueGrayRed. You may add any changed or created palette by activating the
option SaveActPalette. 1.7.3 Wiggleattributes
NewPalette: enter this option for defining a new palette. Please choose 16 Scale: enter a value for the size of the individual wiggle deflections. The size is
different colors from the color dialogue menu. Between these 16 colors a linear calculated by: actual amplitude * Scale = Size in Pixels. If the option
interpolation is automatically done in order to define the 128 different colors. The Tracenormalize is activated, the actual amplitude must be replaced by the value 1
new color palette is shown in the color bar on the right-hand side. - therefore the size directly corresponds to the wigglesize in pixels of the max. or
mean (profilenormalize activated) amplitude.
ResetAllPalettes: this option resets all palettes to the default ones.
ShowWiggle: activate this option if you want to display the polygonal line.
SaveAct.Palette: this option allows to save the actual palette on disk with a With the pointmode selected this option controls if the data are plotted in
freely choosable name. pointmode together with the wiggles or not.
With the Wigglemode selected the option controls if the polygonal line is plotted
RemoveColor: with this option activated you may remove any color from the or not. With this option deactivated only the filled part is plotted in this case (see
color bar on the right-hand side by clicking on the corresponding color using the below).
left mouse key.
ShowAllDataPoints: activate this option if you want to display all data points of
ChangeColor: with this option activated you may change any color from the the trace even if the number of data points per trace is larger than the pixel
color bar on the right-hand side by clicking on the corresponding color using the number of the actual window. Deactivating the option means that every trace is
left mouse key. The new color must be defined in the opened color dialogue resampled based on the actual screen points. If the number of samples to be
menu. displayed is much larger than the screen point number aliasing may occur. In this
case the option should be activated. This means that every data point is plotted.
InterpolateColor: with this option activated you may interpolate the colors
between two choosable colors. Click on the two colors in the color bar using the n.trace: only every n.trace is plotted in wiggle-mode. This option is for example
left mouse key. After having chosen the second color, the in-between colors are useful if you want to plot a large data file in point mode together with the wiggles.
linearly interpolated.
1.trace: specifies the first trace within each block to be plotted if n.trace is greater
DragColor: with this option activated you may continuously move a linearly than 1. The value of 1.trace must be between 1 and n.trace.
interpolated color range. After having activated this option, please click on two
different colors. In-between these colors a linear interpolation is done. The Color: choose the color for the polygonal line of the wiggles.
trackbar below may be used in order to increase or to decrease this color range.
Sec.Color: choose the wiggle color for the secondary line if primary and
Zero level: enter a zero amplitude level for the color-amplitude assignment. The secondary line are plotted into one image (no horizontal or vertical split).
mean level of the color amplitude assignment is shifted by this given level.
Thereby the color amplitude assignment is defined by this parameters and the Fill: controls the filling of the polygonal lines.
value given for the Amplitude scale. A value 0 for zero level is useful for “normal” Entering no, means no filling.
seismic or GPR-data. A value different from 0 is useful e.g. for displaying data
2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 121 2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 122

Entering positive, means only the positive amplitudes are filled with the chosen 1.7.5 PlotGain/Filter
FillColor.
negative means only the negative amplitudes are filled with the chosen FillColor. This group box allows to specify a gain or filter function for the plotting of the
colors means that the wiggles (positive and negative amplitudes) are filled with data.
the actual color amplitude assignment. In this representation correlated signal
arrivals are very well recognizable. AGCGain: if activated an AGC (AutomaticGainControl) with the given Window
Pos./neg. means that both the positive and negative wiggles are filled using the value (enter the wanted window length in the actual timedimension) is applied for
actual fill color. plotting the data. AGC facilitates the creation of equally distributed amplitudes in
y-direction (normally time axis) within a predefinable window. This option serves
Clip: With the parameter clip all amplitudes, exceeding the value of clip in pixels, for emphasizing of low amplitude ranges against ranges with high amplitudes.
can be cut. A large value for width and a small value for clip thus facilitates to The information of the true amplitude is lost, of course. The program calculates at
recognize signal arrivals of small amplitudes otherwise covered by phases with first an average amplitude over the total time range for each trace. After that the
large amplitudes. program scales each amplitude value in that way that the mean amplitude has
the same value for each selected window around the current value with in a trace.
FillColor: choose the color for the filled areas of the polygonal lines. The Fill The size of the window determines the kind of amplitude equality distribution. A
option must be set to positive or negative. window size of only one sample increment means that each time sample within
one trace receives the same amplitude value (no reasonable choice), a window
size of the whole trace length causes no modification of the amplitude. Small
1.7.4 Manual scaling and incrementation window sizes cause a strong equality distribution, large windows a weak.Often it
is necessary to apply a scaling factor (parameter Scale with which the data are
xmin: enter a value for the minimal x-(normally distance-) value of the line to be multiplied after the application of the AGCGain) smaller than one because after
plotted the application of the AGCgain some amplitude values will exceed the maximum
amplitude of the original profile. The optimal choice of this scaling factor enables
ymin: enter a value for the minimal y-(normally time-) value of the line to be that all amplitude values will not exceed the limit of 16 bit.
plotted
enter a value for the maximal axis value in x-direction EnergyDecay: if activated the energy decay curve is applied for plotting the data.
By activating this option a gaincurve in y-(time-)direction is applied on the
xmax: enter a value for the maximal x-(normally distance-) value of the line to be complete profile based on the mean amplitude decay curve. First a mean decay
plotted curve is determined from all existing traces. After the application of a median filter
on this curve every data point of each trace is divided by the values of the decay
ymax: enter a value for the maximal y-(normally time-) value of the line to be curve. Often it is necessary to apply a scaling factor (parameter Scale with which
plotted the data are multiplied after the application of the EnergyDecay curve) smaller
enter a value for the maximal axis value in x-direction than one because after the application of the gain some amplitude values will
exceed the maximum amplitude of the original profile. The optimal choice of this
dx: enter a value for the subdivision of the x-axis scaling factor enables that all amplitude values will not exceed the limit of 16 bit.

dy: enter a value for the subdivision of the y-axis tracegain: if activated the gain factors stored within the traceheader are used for
the display. The option is only available for data stored with the new 16 bit integer
dz: enter a value for the subdivision of the optional depth axis. If set to 0 the or new 32 bit floating point format (see also Import format specification, chap.
subdividion is automatically determined from dy. 1.5.4). The option has no effect with activated option tracenormalize.

Dewow: With this option activated a running mean value is calculated for each
value of each trace. This running mean is subtracted from the central point. As
filter parameter the timerange for the calculation of the running mean value must
be entered. This filter may be used for eliminating a possible low frequency part (
dewow). For this purpose the window range should be set to about one principal
period. This filter has been included wihtin the plotoptions in order to be able the
raw RAMAC or PULSEEKKO data without applying any processing step. In any
case you should use the processing step subtract-mean(dewow) processing step
2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 123 2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 124

(chap. 1.11.1.9) for the "normal" interpretation because other filters and 1.7.6 Plotsuboptions
interpretations tools are affected by a non dewowed datafile in a non desired way.
This group box controls the main plot settings.

ShowMarker: if activated the distance markers are shown as white rectangles.

Commentmarker: if activated the comment markers are shown as yellow

rectangles together with the comment.

TraceHeaderDistancies: if activated the profile is plotted based on the individual

distances stored in the single traceheaders and not based on the equal trace
increment of the fileheader. The option is only available within the wiggle
plotmode.

AutoInterpolation: if activated an autointerpolation in x- and y-direction is done

for the pointmode. Activate this option if your data density is smaller than the
plotting area (for example when you did a large zooming). Plotting takes more
CPU time when this option is activated.

Ver.Split: if activated the screen has a vertical split, this mean horizontally
splitted vertically (option is not available for REFLEXW DataView).

Hor.Split: if activated the screen is split horizontally (option is not available for
REFLEXW DataView).
For the case both options Ver.Split and Hor.Split are deactivated the following
holds true for the 2D-dataanalysis:
- If only two profiles have been loaded and the plotmode is set to pointmode the
option ShowSecondLine will be automatically deactivated.
- if two profiles have been loaded and the pointmode is set to wigglemode both
profiles are plotted together into one window using two different wiggle colors.
- if more than 2 profile have been loaded (see option open 1.-4.line) the data
windows are both splitted vertically and horizontally.

ShowSecondLine: if activated the second line is plotted (option is not available

for REFLEXW DataView).

Rotate90Degree: if activated the profile is rotated by 90 degrees.

FlipYAxis: activate this option if you want that the y-axis starts at the bottom.

FlipXAxis: activate this option if you want that the x-axis starts at the right. With
this option activated it is not possible to do some analysis steps like picking.

ShowAxis: if activated the x- and y-axis are plotted.

Grid: if activated a grid is plotted. The option grid color specifies the color of the
grid.
2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 125 2D-Dataanalysis, PlotOptions 126

XAxisName: activate this option for a manual labelling of the x-axis. This manual within the traceheaders. But in contrast to that processing option the range of the
labelling is stored in the INI file after terminating the program and is loaded when timeaxis will not be changed using this plot option. Therefore it can happen, that -
starting the program. If the option is deactivated, the x-axis name string stored in depending on the chosen elevation level - information of some traces is not
the fileheader of the actual line is used for the labelling. plotted because it is shifted to times outside of the time range.

YAxisName:activate this option for a manual labelling of the y-axis. This manual depthaxisname: activate this option for a manual labelling of the depth-axis. This
labelling is stored in the INI file after terminating the program and is loaded when manual labelling is stored in the INI file after terminating the program and is
starting the program. If the option is deactivated, the y-axis name string stored in loaded when starting the program. If the option is deactivated, the y-axis name
the fileheader of the actual line is used for the labelling. string stored in the fileheader of the actual line is used for the labelling.

AxisWithExponent: if activated the axis labelling is done with exponential showvelocity: if activated the depth axis labelling containes the velocity or the
representation if the labelling values exceed some predefined values (e.g. value velocity file which are the base for time-depth conversion.
between 10000 and 30000 are displayed as 100*10**2 and 300*10**2).
If activated and no manual axis labelling (options XaxisName and YaxisName
deactivated) is entered the following holds true in addition:
timeaxis: automatic display in :s instead of ns and ms instead of :s and s
instead of ms if the timerange is bigger than 10000.
distanceaxis: automatic display in KM instead of METER if the distancerange is
bigger than 10000.

reduction velocity: if activated the traces are plotted with a timeshift calculated
from the trace-distance and the entered velocity. The option is useful for e.g.
displaying refraction data.

DepthAxis: if activated an additional depth axis is plotted. The depth axis is

calculated from the timeaxis and the given velocity (see below).

v[m/ns]: enter a value for the velocity for the calculation of the depth axis.

non linear depth axis: if activated the depth axis is calculated from the timeaxis
and a 1D-depth velocity distribution which is taken from a previously stored 1D-
velocity file (see CMP-velocity analysis menu, chap. 2). When activating this
option the filename of the wanted 1D-velocity file is queried. The option is only
valid if the options flip y-axis and Rotate90Degree are disabled.

Elevation: With the option elevation activated the depth axis on the right hand
side is replaced by an elevation axis showing the elevations based on the entered
ref. level. The actual elevation is calculated from: reference level - actual depth
value.

correct header elevations: if activated the traces are shifted based on the
receiver and the shot elevation values stored within the traceheader of each trace
and the entered elevation level. The shift levels are calculated from the difference
of the entered elevation level and the individual traceheader elevation values.
Based on the actual velocity the traveltime shift value is calculated from the sum
of the shot and the receiver elevation differences. The option is only enabled if
the option elevation is activated.
The correct header elevations plot option is comparable with the processing
option correct3Dtopography in the processing menu StaticCorrection/muting, if
the static correction is done based on the shot and receiver elevations stored
2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 127 2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 128

1.8 Print Menu Landscape: if activated the output is landscape. With deactivated option the
output is portrait. The actual settings within the printer setup for landscape or
This menu allows you to setup the parameters for printing a profile. In every case portrait are overwritten.
the complete profile is printed according to the chosen minimum and maximum
border values (either automatically determined or entered manually - see also use actual zoom: if activated the actually set zoom parameters are used for the
manual scaling ). printing. If deactivated the complete profile(s) is plotted. The option is only
enabled for printing from the 2D-dataanalysis.
Batch printing is supported - see PrintOptions2 (option several files).

The scale in x- and y-direction is freely choosable (see also PrinterSize). The 1.8.2 PrinterSize
scale is entered either by direct input of the scale or by entering the length of the
individual x- and y-axis. x-axis length[cm]: enter the x-axis length of the output in cm. If page blocking is
activated, this length specifies the x-axis size of one page block.
A page blocking option is included (see also PrinterSize and PrintOptions1).
x-scale[relation-1:?]: enter the scale if the option x-scale output is activated. For
Printing on banner paper (printing on continuous paper) is supported. example: profile length 200 m. You enter a x-scale of 1000: the output has a
length of 20 cm.
If printing a layershow you may choose between printing both the profile and the
interpretation (options print profile and print layershow activated) and only the y-axis length[cm]: enter the y-axis (normally timeaxis) length of the output in
profile (option print profile activated) or the interpretation (only option print cm.
layershow activated).
y-scale[relation-1:?]: enter the scale if the option y-scale output is activated
(see also x-scale[relation-1:?].
1.8.1 PrintOptions1
upper border[cm]: enter the upper border in cm.
This group box allows to specify some controlling options for the scale and the
print view. left border[cm]: enter the left border in cm.

automatic center: if activated the profile is automatically centered on the sheet. profile length/page: enter the length of the profile part bo be printed on one
Automatic centering is automatically disabled if printing is done in the Printing on page if the option page blocking is activated.
banner paper mode (continuous paper).

X-scale output: the given scale is used for determining the x-size of the output. 1.8.3 PrintOptions2
Y-scale output: the given scale is used for determining the y-size of the output. fast print: if activated a fast algorithm is used for printing the data for the point
With layer-show activated (see also LayerShow MenuItem) the scale is applied mode. In some cases dependent from the printer this printing method fails (only
on the depth axis of the layer show in the lower image and not on the time axis of the frame is printed or the colors are not correct) and you must deactivate the
the 2D-profile in the upper image. option in order to print out the data.
With depth axis activated (see also Plotsuboptions) the scale is applied on the
depth axis and not on the time axis of the profile. print general comment: print a general comment - this comment is printed at
the upper left corner of the image.
page blocking: if activated only one block of the given profile length/page is
printed on one page. The program automatically subdivides the profile into print file comment: print the comment stored in the file header of the profile to
several parts of constant length which will be printed on individual sheets. be printed. This comment is printed at the lower left corner of each line to be
Page blocking is automatically disabled if printing is done in the Printing on printed. When printing the Windowing 3D-file the file comment is only printed
banner paper (continuous paper). when a 3D-file has been loaded.

pint frame: print a frame around the output.

2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 129 2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 130

Print frame is automatically disabled if printing is done in the banner mode

(continuous paper). 1.8.5 ControlPanel
print filename: print the filename on the top of each profile. PrinterSetup: Enter the printer-setup menu.
print several files: activate this option if you want to print out several files with Preview: Enter the print preview menu which allows a preview of the size of the
the same printer attributes and printer lengths. The actual plot settings are valid. printoutput and to define text boxes (for a detailed description see chap. 1.8.7).
When printing from the menu 2d-dataanalysis, a filechoice query appears where
you must select the wanted profiles. All chosen profiles are printed on separate CANCEL: break off printing
paper sheets.
When printing a 3D-file from the menu 3D-datainterpretation with the option PRINT: start printing
scroll activated all actual slices are printed on separate paper sheets.
When printing several 2D-lines from the menu 3D-datainterpretation with the
option scroll activated all actually chosen profiles are printed on separate paper
sheets.
When printing several 2D-lines from the menu 3D-datainterpretation with the
option window activated a filechoice query appears where you must select the
wanted profiles. The chosen profiles are sorted alphabetically and are printed
according to the actual window combination. An example shall make the
proceeding clear once more: You want to print 20 parallel profiles and for this
combine 4 profiles each time in 2*2 windows. First you have to choose 4 arbitrary
sample profiles and make the corresponding window selection. In the next step
you choose the print button with the option print several files activated and select
the desired profiles. The program then automatically prints the first 4 profiles on
one paper sheet. After terminating the output the next 4 profiles are taken and
processed in the same way.

print header boxes: if activated the program asks for the header box file to be
loaded after having activated the option print. For a detailed description of the
header comment boxes see chap. 1.8.7 (print preview).

1.8.4 FontSettings
Text Font: enter the font for the text of the output.

Number Font: enter the font of the numbers of the output.

Symbol Font: enter the font for the symbols to be printed (e.g. picks or markers).

Please use only true type fonts because only these fonts are able to be rotated.

control fontsize: active only when printing within the windows mode of the 3D-
datainterpretation. Deactivate this option if the fontsize is not correctly determined
from the program. In this case the screen fontsize is used for printing. Therefore
you must change the fontsize in such a way that the printer and the screen
resolution are matched.
2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 131 2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 132

1.8.6 Printing on banner paper 1.8.7 Print preview

Banner printing (printing on continuous paper) is supported. The following The print preview window ist only availabe within the 2D-dataanalysis.
restrictions are valid for banner printing: The print preview menu allows you to preview the size and shape of the print
output and to define a print header consisting of up to 30 different header
- no automatic center comment boxes containing up to 6 different comments. The print area is whitened
- no page blocking and a simple preview of the profile(s) is shown within this area.
- no print frame To be considered: The profile preview is only a simple bitmap transform from the
- the border in banner direction is always set to 0 screen and does not exactly respresent the print output especially concerning the
axis size. Some print options like print general comment or print file comment and
- because banner printing is still a page based printing the following problems print frame are also not taken into account.
may occur when switching to the next page:
- axis numbering is not correct If the printing is done onto several pages different print headers for each page
- the wiggles may be disturbed at this position may be defined (see option page (max.)). In this case the profile itself is not
shown but you only may define the print headers.

The following general options are available:

resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots

the print preview
replot with actual zoom parameters
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area
of the print preview can be selected and plotted in full screen
size. The area to be enlarged, a rectangle, has to lie within a
data set. Pressing the left mouse button you determine a
corner of this rectangle and by moving the mouse with pressed
button the desired area is opened. Afterwards you may use the
scroll buttons to scroll through the zoomed print area.

close: close the print preview window without printing.

print: does printing using the actual comment box settings and closes the print
preview window.

reset act: clear the actual comment box.

reset all: clears all comment boxes.

load: loads an existing set of comment boxes from file.

save: saves the existing set of comment boxes on file. The file will have the
extension hea and is stored under the path rohdata under the actual project
directory. You must store the set of comment boxes if you want to use the boxes
without entering the print preview window (see option print header boxes within
the PrintOptions2, chap. 1.8.3).

add: add header boxes (one additional file) to the actual ones

page (max.): choose the wanted print page for defining the print headers
2D-Dataanalysis, Print Menu 133 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 134

The print header is built up of up to 30 different header comment boxes each 1.9 FileHeader Edit
containing up to 6 different comments.
Within this menu you may change the file header parameters of the actual profile.
One comment box is characterized by the following values:

X-pos:enter the x-coordinate of the left corner in cm 1.9.1 Fileheader coordinates

Y-pos: enter the y-coordinate of the top corner in cm
width: width of the box in x-direction in cm This group box allows the input of the coordinates stored in the fileheader (see
height: height of the box in y-direction in cm also Fileheader-coordinates).
degree/: specifies the rotation angle of the comment text - e.g. 0/: horizontal
alignment, 90/: vertical alignment DistanceDimen.: input of the desired distance-dimension. Possible inputs are
pen width: specifies the width of the box frame MM, CM, METER, INCH, FOOT or TRACENR.. Choosing TRACENR. means
frame: specifies the color of the box frame that the trace increment is automatically set to 1 and the name of the axis in
fill: specifies the fill color of the box if transparent if deactivated profile direction is set to LOCATIONNUMBER.
transparent: if activated the box is transparent, activate this option for example if
you want to place some comments within your data ProfileDirection: enter the axis in which the profile is orientated. Possible Inputs
bitmap-file: if activated a bitmapfile can be loaded into the box, e.g. a logo. are X, Y or Z.

The actual box is highlighted by a big frame. An existing box may be activated ProfileConstant: enter the axis perpendicular to the profile orientation. Possible
by pressing the left mouse button wihtin the wanted box. With pressed left mouse Inputs are X, Y or Z. With the setting of the ProfileDirection and the ProfileConst
button the actual box may be moved to any position. the so-called profile plane is determined.
The edit option box nr. shows you the number of the actual box. This option also
allows you to choose any of the existing boxes. XStart: enter the starting coordinate in x-direction.

A new box is interactively defined by spanning up the wanted area. Click on the XEnd: enter the ending coordinate in x-direction.
uppermost left corner of the area to be spanned up and drag the mouse to the
wanted lowermost right corner with the left mouse button pressed. YStart: enter the starting coordinate in y-direction.

Each comment box may contain up to 6 different comments. Each comment is YEnd: enter the ending coordinate in y-direction.
defined by the following parameters:
the comment text itself ZStart: enter the starting coordinate in z-direction.
font: enter the wanted font of the comment
X-Pos.: enter the x-position in cm within the comment box.You may use the up ZEnd: enter the ending coordinate in x-direction.
and down arrows for a fast replacement of the comment. The option change size
defines the stepwise size of each redefinition. FixTraceincrement: With this option activated the trace increment of each file
Y-Pos.: enter the y-position in cm within the comment box. You may use the up will remain fixed. This means when changing the starting coordinate in profile
and down arrows for a fast replacement of the comment. The opiton change size direction the corresponding ending coordinate will be automatically changed
defines the stepwise size of each redefinition. based on this new coordinate and the fixed trace increment.
With this option deactivated the trace increment will be changed based on the set
starting and ending coordinates.
To be considered: A horizontal or vertical line is easily constructed by defining
a new header box with a width (vertical line) or height (horizontal line) smaller trace increment: enter the trace increment, i.e. the increment between
than 0.05 cm. successive traces. Input in Distancedimension (see above).

trace number: enter the number of traces for the actual file.

line increment: only for 3D-file - enter the distance between parallel lines.

number: enter a number between 0 and 99 which is used for the automatic
naming of the profile if the filename specification is set to automatic name.
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 135 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 136

coordinates in x-direction are given corresponding to the standard const.offset

1.9.2 Fileheader time specification type data, the coordinates in y-direction are defined like the parameters in time-
direction for the const.offset data. Therefore the increment in y-direction is given
This group box allows the specification of the parameters of a single trace within by the y-increment which corresponds to the timeincrement for the const.offset
with the profile. type data and the start position in y-direction corresponds to the starttime for the
const.offset type data.
TimeDimension: Specification of the time dimension. Possible inputs are ms and
ns. S/R-distance: enter the distance between source and receiver in the given
distance dimension. This value is for example used for some CMP-based
time increment: Specification of the time increment in the give time dimension. calculation like in the CMP-velocity menu.
Together with the number of samples (see below) the recording length per trace
in the specified dimension is determined by the time-increment. shot position: enter the shot position within the CMP or moving line. By default
the shot location is set to 0. For a correct velocity analysis this value has to be
sample number: specification of the number of digital samples per trace. correctly specified.
Together with the time increment (see above) the recording length per trace in
the specified dimension is determined by the sample number. nominal frequency: enter the nominal frequency of the antenna (GPR-data) or
seismic source (seismic data) used. Enter the value in MHz with timedimension
start time: specification of the start time for sample 1 in the given time set to ns, KHz with timedimension set to :s or Hz with timedimension set to ms.
dimension.
Comment: Giving an arbitrary comment which is saved in the header and can be
viewed or printed. 2 lines of comments with a maximum length of 120 characters
for each line can be entered.
1.9.3 Fileheader input1
GAIN: This option allows the specification of the gain curve used for the
This group box allows the specification of some important fileheader parameters. acquisition of the data. The curve consists of up to 8 different gain values at
individual time points. In-between these points a linear interpolation of the curve
data type: There are five different types: const. offset, single shot, several shots, is automatically assumed. For some data this curve is automatically read in
3D-const.offset and timeslice. during the raw data conversion (e.g. from RADAN data - to be considered:
The data type ‚const. offset‘ can be used for the import if the measurement is restriction to max. 8 gainvalues - more gainvalues within the RADAN-file will be
done along a line using a fixed offset between shot and receiver (e.g. Constant- ignored). Using the option remove header gain within processing/gain (chap.
Offset (CO) radar data). 1.11.2.4 ) this gaincurve can be removed from the data.
If the data set is the result of a measurement with only one shot point but many
receivers in a line, the use of the default data type ‚single shot‘ data is
recommended (e.g. Common-Mid-Point (CMP) radar data, refraction seismic
data). 1.9.4 Fileheader filename specification
In case of data, which contain any kind of multiple shot / multiple receiver data,
the default data type ‚several shots‘ should be used (e.g. reflection seismic - specification: this option allows you to specify the naming of the converted
one data set combined of individual CMP data sets). profiles. Entering automatic name means that the naming is based on the
The data type ,3D-const.offset‘ should be used for a 3D-data file consisting of entered profile coordinates in profile constant direction (see below). Choosing
several parallel 2D-lines (see also 3D-datainterpretation). This datatype should manual input means that the filename must be entered manually. Choosing
be used in combination with the conversion mode 3D-file equidistant or combine original name means that the original name of the raw data is automatically
lines. The ensemble nr. within the REFLEXW traceheader controls the storing of used.
the individual 2D-lines. All traces belonging to one 2D-line have the same
ensemble-number which is stored within the REFLEXW traceheader (see chap. filename: enter a name of the converted file provided that the specification is set
1.9.6). to manual input.
The data type ,timeslice‘ should be used if the original data are timeslices i.e.
time constant cuts within the XY-plane. This data type is also automatically used Filenamefactor: used if the specification is set to automatic name. The start-
if the timeslices are created within REFLEXW (see chap chap. 3.6). The coordinate in profile-constant direction is multiplied with that factor for naming. A
profiledirection should be X and the profileconstant Z. The profileconstant value larger than 1 (e.g. 10) is for example reasonable if floating point numbers
coordinate defines the position of the timeslice in time(z)-direction. Whereby the
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 137 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 138

should enter the naming. The actual coordinate is of course not influenced by this 1.9.6 Traceheader Edit
value.
Within this menu you may show and edit (only enabled if the menu is called from
the CMP-geometry menu) the trace header informations of each trace of the
1.9.5 Fileheader ControlPanel actual profile.

MarkerRelocate: allows the relocation of the start- and end-profile-direction trace number: specifies the trace number within the profile to be edited.
coordinate based on the marker defined by the parameter number and the
preset position. The program searches the number. marker within the line and distance: enter the distance along the profile
sets its position to the preset position value. The start and end coordinates in
profile direction are automatically updated (see also Edit several shot x-pos: enter the shot position in x-direction
FileHeaders).With the option comment marker activated the comment markers
are loaded in addition to the distance markers (see also edit comment markers). shot y-pos: enter the shot position in y-direction

ShowTraceHeader: shows the headers of the individual traces - see also trace shot z-pos: enter the shot position in z-direction (elevation)
header Edit (chap. 1.9.6).
rec. x-pos: enter the receiver position in x-direction
enter PlotOptions. Enter this option, if you want to change the
rec. y-pos: enter the receiver position in y-direction
plot parameters and to save them in the fileheader of the actual
file.
rec. z-pos: enter the receiver position in z-direction (elevation)
SAVE button: stores the changes in the fileheader of the actual profile.
CMP x-pos: enter the CMP position in x-direction
CANCEL button: leaves this menu without saving the changes.
CMP y-pos: enter the CMP position in y-direction

ensemble-nr.: this number is used for subdividing the profile into different 2D-
lineparts, e.g. a 3D-file consisting of different parallel 2D-lines. All traces
belonging to one 2D-line have the same ensemble-nr. (see also option
Create(3D)Ensembles).

field record nr. (component): shows the field record nr. of the original data. This
value may be used for defining a standard geometry within the CMP-processing
(see also chap. 1.12.4.1). This value is read from SEG2 or SEGY original data if
defined there. In the case of mutlicomponent data this value indicates the
component (see also chap. 1.12.8).

SaveOnASCII: the option allows to save the traceheader coordinates on an

ASCII-file. Activating this option opens a new window where you may define
which parameters shall be written on the ASCII-file. Each line of the ASCII-file
contains the desired informations of the individual trace. In addition to the
parameters mentioned above two additional parameters can be written out:
marker and TimeCollect. Marker values > 0 and < 100 define a distance marker,
marker values >= 100 a comment marker. TimeCollect is the acquisition time in
seconds after midnight. This value may be used in order to synchronize time
based GPS-data (see option actualize based on GPS-times).

apply: applies the changed geometry on the current file (only enabled if the menu
is called from the CMP-geometry menu).
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 139 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 140

With the type RAMAC-GPS activated it is possible to read the GPS coordinates
actualize: The group box allows to actualize the geophone-, shot- and CMP- using the format of the RAMAC GPS device. The file should have the extension
coordinates based on the distance coordinates of the file header (option type is COR. Each line of the GPS-ASCII file contains the following informations
set to fileheader - coordinates in profile direction and in profile constant - this is (following optional additional informations are ignored):
also possible within the Edit several FileHeaders menu, chap. 1.10; for a 3D- tracenumber,date,time,Northing,West,altitude,PDOP
datafile you should use fileheader 3D) or based on a special circle geometry The separator between the different values may be either comma, blank or tab. In
(option type is set to circle) or the coordinates are read from an ASCII file (option addition the orientation may follow the coordinate value seaparated by a comma,
type is set to ASCII-file). blank, tab or nothing (e.g.53.5891830N or 53.5891830,N).
REFLEXW stores the northing coordinates, the west coordinates and the altitude
The options interpolation and interpolation 0-data and interpolation equal into the traceheaders using a 32 or 64 bit floating format depending on the output
data allow the interpolation of the position data stored in the trace header, if for format during the import of the data. If there are consecutive identical coordinates
various traces no corresponding values exist. in the *.cor file these coordinates are automatically be replaced with an
The option interpolation uses a special flag within the traceheader of each trace interpolation. An interpolation or extrapolation is also done where no coordinates
which druing the import of the data is set to 0 by default and set to a special value are defined (missing tracenumbers).
when traceheadercoordinates have been recognized. Only these traces where
this flag is 0 are interpolated. With the type WSKTRANS-GPS activated it is possible to read the GPS
The option interpolation 0-data controls if all traceheaderheadercoordinates of coordinates using the format of the WSKTRANS software. The file should have
one trace are 0 and performs an interpolation for those traces. the extension ut or utm. The file consists of two optional header lines and then
The option interpolation equal data controls if identical coordinates for the x- each line of the GPS-ASCII file contains the following informations (following
and y- shot and receiver positions for subsequent traces are present and optional additional informations are ignored):
performs an interpolation for those traces. tracenumber Northing West altitude
The separator between the different values may be either comma, blank or tab.
If the type circle is activated, you must enter the radius r and the x- and y- REFLEXW stores the northing coordinates, the west coordinates and the altitude
midpoint coordinates (x-mid and y-mid) of the circle. The circle is subdivided into into the traceheaders using a 32 or 64 bit floating format depending on the output
equidistant angle ranges. Based on these values the x- and y-CMP coordinates format during the import of the data. If there are consecutive identical coordinates
are calculated using the following formulas: x=r*sin(alpha)+xmid and in the *.ut(m) file these coordinates are automatically be replaced with an
y=r*sing(alpha)+ymid with alpha ranging from 0 to 360 degrees. interpolation.An interpolation or extrapolation is also done where no coordinates
are defined (missing tracenumbers).
With the type ASCII-file activated you must choose the wanted DST file from the
file list opened when entering the option actualize. Any ASCII file must exist With the type CSV-GPS activated it is possible to read the GPS coordinates
under the path ASCII and must have the extension DST. Each line of the ASCII using the format of the CSV-GPS software. The file should have the extension
file contains the following 6 or 8 (z-pos. optional) informations: csv.The file consists of one header line and then each line of the GPS-ASCII file
contains the following informations:
trace number distance Shot-X-Pos Shot-Y receiver-X receiver-Y shot-Z(opt.) receiver- latitude,longitude,altitude,tracenumber
Z(opt.) REFLEXW stores the latitude, the longitude and the altitude into the traceheaders
using a 32 or 64 bit floating format depending on the output format during the
Defining the trace number gives you the opportunity to read the geometry only for import of the data. If there are consecutive identical coordinates in the *.csv file
a distinct part of the data. If the distancies within the ASCII-file are zero (2.colum) these coordinates are automatically be replaced with an interpolation.An
they will be calculated from the total difference between each shot and receiver interpolation or extrapolation is also done where no coordinates are defined
positions (x,y and z-coordinate are taken into account). (missing tracenumbers).

With the type ASCII-file/interpol. activated the data are read again from an With the type IDS-GPS activated it is possible to read the GPS coordinates using
ASCII-file (see type ASCII-file). In addition an automatic interpolation is done if for the format of the IDS-GPS software. A GPS ASCII-file with the extension gps
various traces no coordinate data are present within the ASCII-file. containing the GPS-coordinates must exist. The corresponding tracenumbers are
taken from the comment markers with the comment “gps”. Normally the original
With the type RAMAC-borehole activated it is possible to read the source and IDS-file contains these comment markers and they are taken over into the
receivers coordinates from the ASCII RAMAC-borehole files. First you must Reflexw file during import. Older IDS-systems generate an additional ASCII-file
choose the wanted tlf file. The corresponding f1.fot and f2.fot must exit. with the extension gpt containing the tracenumbers. If this file exists (same
filename like the gps-file except the extension) the tracenumbers are taken from
this ASCII-file.
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 141 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 142

There might be a header within the gps-file but the first line containing the first reloads the traceheader coordinates from file.The option save on AsciiFile allows
GPS-coordinates corresponds to the first tracenumber stored within comment to write the coordinates on an ASCII-file with the extension DST (see option
marker or within the first line of the gpt-file. The next line corresponds to the ASCII-file above).
second tracenumber and so on.
One line of the gps-file contains the following informations: The option GPS-times allows to actualize the traceheader coordinates based on
$GPGGA,123015.00,5141.607563,N,00439.680658,E,2,04,2.3,2.74,M,47.21,M,2.8,0000*40 the acquisition times (in secs after midnight) stored within the line traceheader
whereby the following fields will be interpreted: and an ASCII-file containing the GPS-coordinates and the GPS-time. The format
field 3: 5141.607563 - geographic latitude in ddmm.mmmmmmm format (51 of the ASCII-file is as following:
degrees and 41.607563 minutes)
field 5: 00439.680658 - geographic longitude in dddmm.mmmmmm format (4 Easting Northing MSL GPS Date GPS Time
degrees and 39.680658 minutes) 638434.601 7215215.236 143.227 19.05.02 07:32:12
field 10: 2.74 - antenna height above MSL (mean sea level) reference (2.74 m) 638434.573 7215215.253 143.191 19.05.02 0.314039352
The latitude and the longitude are stored in degress within the x- and y-receiver There is no header line - the ASCII-file must begin with the first data values. The
traceheader positions. GPS-date must be present but it will not be used for the matching. Only the GPS-
REFLEXW stores the latitude, the longitude and the altitude into the traceheaders times are used. The program performs an automatic interpolation or extrapolation
using a 32 or 64 bit floating format depending on the output format during the if the times are not exactly matching.
import of the data. If there are consecutive identical coordinates in the gps-file
these coordinates are automatically be replaced with an interpolation. An The option calculate distancies allows to update the traceheader distancies
interpolation or extrapolation is also done where no coordinates are defined based on the x- and y-receiver traceheader coordinates. The start distance is
(missing tracenumbers) or where the GPS-coordinates are not defined. taken from the fileheader but can be changed manually (option start distance).
With the type PulseEkko-GPS activated it is possible to read the GPS The option UTM-conversion allows to convert GPS degree traceheader
coordinates using the format of the PulseEkko-GPS software. One GPS file with coordinates to local cartesian coordinates using the so called Universal-
the extension gps must exist. Each block of the file starts with a line containing Transverse-Mercator(UTM)-conversion. You must specify where the latitude is
the trace number. A number of lines follow containg the gps-coordinates. By stored within the traceheader (latitude in degrees either in x- (shot x, rec x and
default the coordinates are taken from the line starting with $GPGGA. Following CMP x-pos) or y-coord). The longitude is automatically vice versa in y- or x-
an example of one GPS-block is shown: coord.
Trace #1 at position 0.000000
$GPVTG,266.2,T,,,007.12,N,013.19,K,A*4E The conversion can be done automatically (default) or by using a distinct zone. If
$GPGSA,M,3,03,19,15,16,18,22,,,,,,,2.8,1.7,2.2*33 the automatic conversion is used, the UTM-zone for the whole profile is
$GPRMC,093704,V,4625.938530,N,00950.727816,E,007.12,266.2,240404,0.7,W,N*2D determined using the GPS traceheader coordinates of the first trace. So the
$GPGGA,093705.00,4625.938360,N,00950.724940,E,1,06,1.7,2635.92,M,48.00,M,,*53
coordinate origin is fixed for the whole profile not regarding, that the profile may
Within the $GPGGA line the following fields will be interpreted:
lie in different UTM-zones.
field 3: 4625.938360 - geographic latitude in ddmm.mmmmmmm format (46
If a distinct zone shall be used for the conversion, it can be chosen from a list if
degrees and 25.938360 minutes)
the option 'distinct zone' is chosen. This zone is also fixed for the whole profile.
field 5: 000950.727816 - geographic longitude in dddmm.mmmmmm format (9
There exist 120 different zones which cover nearly the whole globe: 60 zones
degrees and 50.727816 minutes)
cover the northern part of the world ( 0 deg <= lat <= 84 deg), the rest the
field 10: 2635.9 - antenna height above MSL (mean sea level) reference (2635.92
southern part (-80 deg <= lat < 0 deg).
m)
The zones of every half sphere are determined as following:
The latitude and the longitude are stored in degress within the x- and y-receiver
Zone 1: -180 deg <= lon <= -174 deg (if lat >= 0 this is zone utm1n,
traceheader positions.
otherwise utm1s)
REFLEXW stores the latitude, the longitude and the altitude into the traceheaders
Zone 2: -174 deg < lon <= -168 deg
using a 32 or 64 bit floating format depending on the output format during the
..
import of the data. If there are consecutive identical coordinates in the gps-file
Zone 60: 174 deg < lon <= 180 deg (if lat < 0 this is zone utm60s,
these coordinates are automatically be replaced with an interpolation. An
otherwise utm60n)
interpolation or extrapolation is also done where no coordinates are defined
(missing tracenumbers) or where the GPS-coordinates are not defined.
For the regions near the poles (Lat > 84deg or Lat < -80deg) the Universal-Polar-
Stereographic(UPS)-conversion is performed instead the UTM-conversion.
With the option tabella activated the actual traceheader coordinates are shown
within a tabella and can be changed manually. The option save changes saves
the current settings of the traceheader coordinates. The option reload from file
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 143 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 144

The following table contains a complete listing of all UTM zones and their West Territories; Ontario. Guatemala. Mexico. United States (USA) -
association to the countries of the world, so that the appropriate zone can be Gulf of Mexico (GoM).
chosen for the manual conversion: UTM zone 15S -96deg to -90deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 16N -90deg to -84deg Northern hemisphere. Belize. Canada - Manitoba;
UTM zones and their association to the countries of the world: North West Territories; Ontario. Costa Rica. Cuba. El Salvador.
Guatemala. Honduras. Mexico. Nicaragua. Puerto Rico. United
States (USA).
UTM zone 1N -180deg to -174deg Northern hemisphere. Russia.
UTM zone 16S -90deg to -84deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 1S -180deg to -174deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 17N -84deg to -78deg Northern hemisphere. Bahamas. Ecuador - north
UTM zone 2N -174deg to -168deg Northern hemisphere. Russia. United States
of equator. Canada - North West Territories; Ontario; Quebec.
(USA) - Alaska (AK).
Cayman Islands. Colombia. Costa Rica. Jamaica.
UTM zone 2S -174deg to -168deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 17S -84deg to -78deg Southern hemisphere. Ecuador. Peru.
UTM zone 3N -168deg to -162deg Northern hemisphere. United States (USA) -
UTM zone 18N -78deg to -72deg Northern hemisphere. Bahamas. Canada - North
Alaska (AK).
West Territories; Ontario; Quebec. Colombia. Cuba. Ecuador.
UTM zone 3S -168deg to -162deg Southern hemisphere. Greenland. Haiti. Jamica. Panama. Turks and Caicos Islands. United
UTM zone 4N -162deg to -156deg Northern hemisphere. United States (USA) - States (USA). Venezuela.
Alaska (AK). UTM zone 18S -78deg to -72deg Southern hemisphere. Argentina. Brazil. Chile.
UTM zone 4S -162deg to -156deg Southern hemisphere. Colombia. Ecuador. Peru.
UTM zone 5N -156deg to -150deg Northern hemisphere. United States (USA) - UTM zone 19N -72deg to -66deg Northern hemisphere. Aruba. Bahamas. Brazil.
Alaska (AK). Canada - New Brunswick (NB); Newfoundland; North West
UTM zone 5S -156deg to -150deg Southern hemisphere. Territories; Nova Scotia (NS); Quebec. Colombia. Dominican
UTM zone 6N -150deg to -144deg Northern hemisphere. United States (USA) - Republic. Greenland. Netherlands Antilles. Turks and Caicos
Alaska (AK). Islands. United States. Venezuela.
UTM zone 6S -150deg to -144deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 19S -72deg to -66deg Southern hemisphere. Argentina. Bolivia. Brazil.
UTM zone 7N -144deg to -138deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - British Chile. Colombia. Peru.
Columbia (BC); Yukon. United States (USA) - Alaska (AK). UTM zone 20N -66deg to -60deg Northern hemisphere. Anguilla. Antigua &
UTM zone 7S -144deg to -138deg Southern hemisphere. Barbuda. Bermuda. Brazil. Canada - New Brunswick (NB);
UTM zone 8N -138deg to -132deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - British Newfoundland; North west Territories; Nova Scotia (NS); Prince
Columbia (BC); North West Territiories; Yukon. United States (USA) Edward Island; Quebec. Dominica. Greenland. Grenada.
- Alaska (AK). Guadeloupe. Guyana. Martinique. Montserrat. Saint Kitts and Nevis.
Saint Lucia. Saint Vncent and te Grenadines. Trinidad and Tobago.
UTM zone 8S -138deg to -132deg Southern hemisphere. Venezuela. Virgin islands.
UTM zone 9N -132deg to -126deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - British UTM zone 20S -66deg to -60deg Southern hemisphere. Argentina. Bolivia. Brazil.
Columbia (BC); North West Territories; Yukon. United States (USA) - Falkland Islands (Malvinas). Paraguay.
Alaska (AK).
UTM zone 21N -60deg to -54deg Northern hemisphere. Barbados. Brazil. Canada -
UTM zone 9S -132deg to -126deg Southern hemisphere. Newfoundland; Quebec. French Guiana. Greenland. Guyana. St.
UTM zone 10N -130deg to -120deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - British Pierre and Miquelon. Suriname.
Columbia (BC); North West Territories; Yukon. United States (USA) - UTM zone 21S 60deg to 54deg Southern hemisphere. Argentina. Bolivia. Brazil.
Alaska (AK). Falkland Islands (Malvinas). Paraguay. Uruguay.
UTM zone 10S -130deg to -120deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 22N -54deg to -48deg Northern hemisphere. Brazil. Canada -
UTM zone 11N -120deg to -114deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - Alberta; British Newfoundland. French Guiana. Greenland.
Columbia (BC); North West Territories. Mexico. United States (USA). UTM zone 22S -54deg to -48deg Southern hemisphere. Brazil. Uruguay.
UTM zone 11S -120deg to -114deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 23N -48deg to -42deg Northern hemisphere. Greenland.
UTM zone 12N -114deg to -108deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - Alberta; North UTM zone 23S -48deg to -42deg Southern hemisphere. Brazil.
West Territories; Saskatchewan. Mexico. United States (USA).
UTM zone 24N -42deg to -36deg Northern hemisphere. Greenland.
UTM zone 12S -114deg to -108deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 24S -42deg to -36deg Southern hemisphere. Brazil. South Georgia and
UTM zone 13N -108deg to -102deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - North West the South Sandwich Islands.
Territories; Saskatchewan. Mexico. United States (USA).
UTM zone 25N -36deg to -30deg Northern hemisphere. Greenland.
UTM zone 13S -108deg to -102deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 25S -36deg to -30deg Southern hemisphere. Brazil.
UTM zone 14N -102deg to -96deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - Manitoba; North
West Territories; Saskatchewan. Mexico. United States (USA). UTM zone 26N -30deg to -24deg Northern hemisphere. Greenland. Iceland.
UTM zone 14S -102deg to -96deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 26S -30deg to -24deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 15N -96deg to -90deg Northern hemisphere. Canada - Manitoba; North UTM zone 27N -24deg to -18deg Northern hemisphere. Greenland. Iceland.
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 145 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 146

UTM zone 27S -24deg to -18deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 36S 30deg to 36deg Southern hemisphere. Burundi. Kenya. Malawi.
UTM zone 28N -18deg to -12deg Northern hemisphere. Gambia. Greenland. Mozambique. Rwanda. South Africa. Swaziland. Tanzania. Uganda.
Guinea. Guinea-Bissau. Iceland. Ireland - offshore Porcupine Basin. Zambia. Zimbabwe.
Mauritania. Morocco. Senegal. Sierra Leone. Western Sahara. UTM zone 37N 36deg to 42deg Northern hemisphere. Djibouti. Egypt. Eritrea.
UTM zone 28S -18deg to -12deg Southern hemisphere. Ethiopia. Georgia. Iraq. Jordan. Kenya. Lebanon. Russia. Saudi
UTM zone 29N -12deg to -6deg Northern hemisphere. Algeria. Cote D'Ivoire. Faroe Arabia. Somalia. Sudan. Syria. Turkey. Ukraine.
Islands. Guinea. Ireland. Mali. Mauritania. Morocco. Portugal. Sierra UTM zone 37S 36deg to 42deg Southern hemisphere. Kenya. Mozambique.
Leone. Spain. United Kingdom (UK). Western Sahara. Tanzania.
UTM zone 29S -12deg to -6deg Southern hemisphere. UTM zone 38N 42deg to 48deg Northern hemisphere. Armenia. Azerbaijan.
UTM zone 30N -6deg to 0deg Northern hemisphere. Algeria. Burkino Faso. Cote' Djibouti. Eritrea. Ethiopia. Georgia. Iran. Iraq. Kazakhstan. Kuwait.
Ivoire. Faroe Islands - offshore. France. Ghana. Gibraltar. Ireland - Russia. Saudi Arabia. Somalia. Turkey. Yemen.
offshore Irish Sea. Mali. Mauritania. Morocco. Spain. United UTM zone 38S 42deg to 48deg Southern hemisphere. Madagascar.
Kingdom (UK). UTM zone 39N 48deg to 54deg Northern hemisphere. Azerbaijan. Bahrain. Iran.
UTM zone 30S -6deg to 0deg Southern hemisphere. Kazakhstan. Kuwait. Oman. Qatar. Russia. Saudi Arabia. Somalia.
UTM zone 31N 0deg to 6deg Northern hemisphere. Algeria. Andorra. Benin. Bukino Turkmenistan. United Arab Emirates. Yemen.
Faso. Denmark - North Sea. France. Germany - North Sea. Ghana. UTM zone 39S 48deg to 54deg Southern hemisphere. Madagascar.
Luxembourg. Mali. Netherlands. Niger. Nigeria. Norway. UTM zone 40N 54deg to 60deg Northern hemisphere. Iran. Kazakhstan. Oman.
UTM zone 31S 0deg to 6deg Southern hemisphere. Russia. Saudi Arabia. Turkmenistan. United Arab Emirates.
UTM zone 32N 6deg to 12deg Northern hemisphere. Algeria. Austria. Cameroon. Uzbekistan.
Denmark. Equatorial Guinea. France. Gabon. Germany. Italy. Libya. UTM zone 40S 54deg to 60deg Southern hemisphere. Seychelles.
Liechtenstein. Monaco. Netherlands. Niger. Nigeria. Norway. Sao UTM zone 41N 60deg to 66deg Northern hemisphere. Afghanistan. Iran.
Tome and Principe. Svalbard and Jan Mayen Islands. Sweden. Kazakhstan. Pakistan. Russia. Turkmenistan. Uzbekistan.
Switzerland. Tunisia. Vatican City State. UTM zone 41S 60deg to 66deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 32S 6deg to 12deg Southern hemisphere. Angola. Congo. Gabon. UTM zone 42N 66deg to 72deg Northern hemisphere. Afghanistan. India.
Namibia. Kazakhstan. Kyrgyzstan. Pakistan. Russia. Tajikistan. Uzbekistan.
UTM zone 33N 12deg to 18deg Northern hemisphere. Austria. Bosnia and UTM zone 42S 66deg to 72deg Southern hemisphere.
Herzegowina. Cmeroon. Central African Republic. Chad. Congo. UTM zone 43N 72deg to 78deg Northern hemisphere. China. India. Kazakhstan.
Croatia. Czech Republic. Democratic Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Kyrgyzstan. Maldives. Pakistan. Russia. Tajikistan.
Gabon. Germany. Hungary. Italy. Libya. Malta. Niger. Nigeria.
UTM zone 43S 72deg to 78deg Southern hemisphere.
Norway. Poland. San Marino. Slovakia. Slovenia. Svalbard and Jan
Mayen Islands. Sweden. UTM zone 44N 78deg to 84deg Northern hemisphere. China. India. Kazakhstan.
Kyrgyzstan. Nepal. Russia. Sri Lanka.
UTM zone 33S 12deg to 18deg Southern hemisphere. Angola. Congo. Democratic
Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Gabon. Namibia. South Africa. UTM zone 44S 78deg to 84deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 34N 18deg to 24deg Northern hemisphere. Albania. Belarus. Bosnia and UTM zone 45N 84deg to 90deg Northern hemisphere. Bangladesh. Bhutan. China.
Herzegowina. Bulgaria. Central African Republic. Chad. Croatia. India. Kazakhstan. Mongolia. Nepal. Russia.
Democratic Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Estonia. Finland. FYR UTM zone 45S 84deg to 90deg Southern hemisphere.
Macedonia. Greece. Hungary. Italy. Latvia. Libya. Lithuania. Norway. UTM zone 46N 90deg to 96deg Northern hemisphere. Bangladesh. Bhutan. China.
Poland. Romania. Russia. Slovakia. Sudan. Svalbard. Sweden. Indonesia. Mongolia. Myanmar (Burma). Russia.
Ukraine. Yugoslavia. UTM zone 46S 90deg to 96deg Southern hemisphere.
UTM zone 34S 18deg to 24deg Southern hemisphere. Angola. Botswana. UTM zone 47N 96deg to 102eg East; Northern hemisphere. China. Indonesia. Laos.
Democratic Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Namibia. South Africa. Malaysia - West Malaysia. Mongolia. Myanmar (Burma). Russia.
Zambia. Thailand.
UTM zone 35N 24deg to 30deg Northern hemisphere. Belarus. Bulgaria. Central UTM zone 47S 96deg to 102eg East; Southern hemisphere. Indonesia.
African Republic. Democratic Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Egypt. UTM zone 48N 102deg to 108deg Northern hemisphere. Cambodia. China.
Estonia. Finland. Greece. Latvia. Lesotho. Libya. Lithuania. Moldova. Indonesia. Laos. Malaysia - West Malaysia. Mongolia. Russia.
Norway. Romania. Russia. Sudan. Svalbard. Turkey. Uganda. Singapore. Thailand. Vietnam.
Ukraine. UTM zone 48S 102deg to 108deg Southern hemisphere. Indonesia.
UTM zone 35S 24deg to 30deg Southern hemisphere. Botswana. Burundi. UTM zone 49N 108deg to 114deg Northern hemisphere. China. Hong Kong.
Democratic Republic of the Congo (Zaire). Rwanda. South Africa. Indonesia. Macau. Malaysia - East Malaysia - Sarawak. Mongolia.
Tanzania. Uganda. Zambia. Zimbabwe. Russia. Vietnam.
UTM zone 36N 30deg to 36deg Northern hemisphere. Belarus. Cyprus. Egypt. UTM zone 49S 108deg to 114deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. Indonesia.
Ethiopia. Finland. Israel. Jordan. Kenya. Lebanon. Norway. Russia.
Saudi Arabia. Sudan. Syria. Turkey. Uganda. Ukraine. UTM zone 50N 114deg to 120deg Northern hemisphere. Brunei. China. Indonesia.
Malaysia - East Malaysia - Sarawak. Mongolia. Philippines. Russia.
2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 147 2D-Dataanalysis, FileHeader Edit 148

Taiwan. General:
UTM zone 50S 114deg to 120deg Southern hemisphere. Australia.
UTM zone 51N 120deg to 126deg Northern hemisphere. China. Indonesia. North The GPS-coordinates are stored within the x- and y-receiver traceheader
Korea. Philippines. Russia. South Korea. Taiwan. positions (rec-x and rec-y). In the case of the datatype “constant offset” the shot
UTM zone 51S 120deg to 126deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. East Timor. and the CMP-coordinates are set equal to the receiver positions. In the case of
Indonesia. the datatype “single shot” the shot coordinates are set to the entered shot
UTM zone 52N 126deg to 132deg Northern hemisphere. China. Indonesia. Japan. position and shot offset defined within the fileheader. The CMP-coordinates are
North Korea. Russia. South Korea. always calculated from the receiver and shot positions.
UTM zone 52S 126deg to 132deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. East Timor.
Indonesia. The single coordinates stored in the individual traceheaders are necessary for
UTM zone 53N 132deg to 138deg Northern hemisphere. China. Japan. Russia. some processing steps, e.g. for Export into the format ASCII-3COLUMS, the
UTM zone 53S 132deg to 138deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. Indonesia. ascii-columns output of the picks with the option xy-coordinates activated (see
UTM zone 54N 138deg to 144deg Northern hemisphere. Japan. Russia. also Pick save MenuItem).
UTM zone 54S 138deg to 144deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. Indonesia.
Papua New Guinea. To be considered: The traceheader coordinates are stored either using a 32 bit
UTM zone 55N 144deg to 150deg Northern hemisphere. Japan. Russia. floating format (Reflexw formats 16 bit integer and 32 bit floating point) or using a
UTM zone 55S 144deg to 150deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. Papua New 64 bit double precision format (Reflexw formats new 16 bit integer and new 32 bit
Guinea. floating point) - see also chap. 1.5.4 Import format specification. If the coordinates
UTM zone 56N 150deg to 156deg Northern hemisphere. Russia. have very high values with small changes, the data representation of the 32 bit
UTM zone 56S 150deg to 156deg Southern hemisphere. Australia. Papua New floating format may not be good enough. In this case the Reflexw new format with
Guinea. the 64 bit double precision format must be used when importing the original data
UTM zone 57N 156deg to 162deg Northern hemisphere. Russia. or a constant offset should be subtracted from the coordinates before storing
UTM zone 57S 156deg to 162deg Southern hemisphere. them into the traceheaders.
UTM zone 58N 162deg to 168deg Northern hemisphere. Russia.
UTM zone 58S 162deg to 168deg Southern hemisphere. project y to xz-plane: allows to project the y-coordinates of the individual shots
UTM zone 59N 168deg to 174deg Northern hemisphere. Russia. and receivers onto the xz-plane. The distance between source and receiver
UTM zone 59S 168deg to 174deg Southern hemisphere. New Zealand. remains unchanged. Therefore the x- and z-coordinates are changed
UTM zone 60N 174deg to 180deg Northern hemisphere. Russia. respectively.
UTM zone 60S 174deg to 180deg Southern hemisphere. New Zealand.
project z to xy-plane: allows to project the z-coordinates of the individual shots
and receivers onto the xy-plane. The distance between source and receiver
remains unchanged. Therefore the x- and y-coordinates are changed
respectively.

Within the groupbox Create(3D)Ensembles it is possible to subdivide the actual

profile into different lineparts. The ensemble-nr. within the traceheaders controls
the size of each linepart.
With the option equidistant activated the actual profile will be subdivided into
different equidistant lineparts. The option nr. of traces defines the number of
traces per linepart (ensemble).
With the option constr. change markers activated the actual profile will be
subdivided into different lineparts at the given construction change markers
positions.
Activate the option create to generate the lineparts (the Ensemble-Nr. within the
traceheaders will be actualized). This option allows you to redefine the individual
ensembles (2D-lines) of a 3D-file or of a 2D-file consisting of different parts. One
application for the second case is that some filter (e.g. background removal,
migration, option lineparts activated) may use this subdivsion.

close: terminates this window

2D-Dataanalysis, Project Fileheaders 149 2D-Dataanalysis, Project Fileheaders 150

1.10 Edit several FileHeaders UpdateAxisNames: With this option activated the manual set axis names are
stored within the fileheader when activating the option save (see also
Within this menu you may change the fileheader coordinates and the start time Plotsuboptions - x- or y-axisname).
(see also fileheader time specification.) of a choosable number of lines.
UpdateDistanceDimen.: With this option activated the actually entered distance
The following parameters can be changed within the table input: dimension is stored in the fileheader of each profile.

ProfileDirection, ProfileConstant, XStart, XEnd, YStart, YEnd, trace-increment, UpdateTimeDimension: With this option activated the actually entered time
Number, time-increment, start time, shot position and shot offset. dimension is stored in the fileheader of each profile.

In addition the distance and time dimension may also be changed if desired (one UpdateTraceHeaders: This radio box allows you to automatically actualize the
single entry for all chosen profiles). geophone-, shot- and CMP-coordinates either based on the distance coordinates
of the file header (coordinates in profile direction and in profile constant) or based
The wanted files are loaded within the filechoice groupbox: on an ASCII-file - see also option acutalize within the trace header menu (chap.
1.9.6).
Filefilter allows to enter a filter for the multi file choice. With the option ASCII-file or ASCII-file/int. activated the DST files for the
individual datafiles must exist. They must exist under the path ASCII under the
Filepath specifies the path for loading the files to be processed. project directory and the filename (without path and extension) must be the same
like for the datafile and they must have the extension DST. Each line of the ASCII
OpenFiles opens the files for which the file header coordinates shall be edited. file contains the following 6 or 8 (z-pos. optional) informations:
trace number distance Shot-X-Pos Shot-Y receiver-X receiver-Y shot-Z(opt.) receiver-
After having chosen the option you must select the wanted files. The fileheader Z(opt.)
coordinates are read in and shown within the table. It is only allowed to load data Defining the trace number gives you the opportunity to read the geometry only for
from one directory. a distinct part of the data.
With the type ASCII-file/int. activated an automatic interpolation is done if for
LoadTable loads a previously stored table from an ASCII-file. The file must have various traces no coordinate data are present within the ASCII-file.
the extension TAB and must be stored under the path ASCII under the actual In addition the following GPS-formats are supported: RAMAC-GPS (*.cor),
project directory. To be considered: Within the ASCII file only the filenames of the WSKTRANS-GPS (*.utm), CVS-GPS (*.cvs), IDS-GPS (*.gps) and PulseEkko-
individual lines without the filepath is stored. The filepath is automatically GPS (*.gps) (see also Traceheader Edit, chap. 1.9.6 for a detailed description of
determined from the entered filepath and the actual project directory. the formats). For each format the ASCII-GPS datafiles must exist and must have
the same name like the original datafile except the extension.
SaveTable saves the actual table on an ASCII-file. The file automatically
receives the extension TAB and will be stored under the path ASCII under the UpdateTable: update the table shown above based on the new set parameters.
actual project directory. The file is ready for editing using any table calculation This means the ending coordinates are recalculated if FixTraceincrement is set to
program like Excel or Quattro Pro. true.
The option within the UpdateGroupBox controls what is going to be changed save: save the current parameter settings within each fileheader
within each fileheader.
print: prints the actual table
FixTraceinrement: With this option activated the trace increment of each file will
remain fixed. This means when changing the starting coordinate in profile MarkerRelocate: allows the relocation of the start- and end-profile-direction
direction the corresponding ending coordinate will be automatically changed coordinate based on the marker defined by the parameter number and the
based on this new coordinate and the fixed trace increment. preset position. The program searches the number. marker within each line and
With this option deactivated the trace increment will be changed based on the set sets its position to the preset position value. The start and end coordinates in
starting and ending coordinates. profile direction are automatically updated (see also fileheader ControlPanel.).
With the option comment marker activated the comment markers are loaded in
UpdatePlotSettings: With this option activated the actual plot settings are stored addition to the distance markers (see also edit comment markers).
within each fileheader when activating the option save. The PlotOptions menu
can be entered within this menu using the corresponding speed option.
2D-Dataanalysis, Processing MenuItem 151 2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 152

1.11 Processing MenuItem 1.11.1 1D-Filter

The data processing is completely interactive. With the option Apply on example The following filter possibilities are included in the 1D-filter group:
trace activated the effect of the filter is online controlled when changing the filter
parameters by showing both the original and filtered trace. A great variety of one Meanfilter
and multi channel filters as well as edit and traceinterpolation functions are Medianfilter
included. All edit inputs may be entered either interactively in the original profile bandpassfrequency
or using the table input. Bandpassbutterworth
Each processing step can only be applied on the primary (1.) line. In order to filter/timedependent
apply any processing step on the secondary (2.) line first you must define the notchfilter/frequ.
secondary line as the primary line using the option ChangeSecondToPrimary. deconvolution
deconvolution/shap.
The data processing facilities are divided into different groups: subtract-mean(dewow)
subtract-DC-shift
1D-Filter processing crosscorrelation
Gain auto correlation
StaticCorrection/muting resampling
Declipping/arithmetic functions walsh bandpass
complex traceanalysis/spectral analysis
Trace Interpolation/Resorting For all filters available within this group the original trace is shown together with
Edit traces/traceranges the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum of
2D-Filter the actually filtered trace. With the filter crosscorrelation activated additionally the
migration/timedepth conversion reference trace is shown.
Fk-filter/FK-spectrum The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the
resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is
The sequence (batch) processing (see also Sequence Processing) facilitates a stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
completely automatic sequence of processing steps for a choosable number of time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds,
profiles. Primary and secondary section are displayed simultaneously, whereby a respectively.
direct control of the result is given. You may choose between the so-called In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
sequence mode and the single processing mode with the possibility of applying allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of
the processing steps individually on the primary profile. the corresponding spectra.

The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number or by clicking in the
primary file using the left mouse button.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 153 2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 154

the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of 1.11.1.1 Meanfilter
lines after.
The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter performs a mean over a
selectable number of time sample for each time step.

The filter parameter mean range determines the window width in samples over
which an averaging of the amplitudes of a trace is performed. With a window
width of 4 samples the mean value of the current, the two preceding and the two
following samples of a trace is calculated and assigned to the current sample as
a new value. If between the current sample and the beginning or the end of a
trace lie fewer samples than half of the window width the window width is
decreased on one side.

The effect of this mean value averaging complies with a lowpass filtering in the
time domain, which is the more pronounced the larger the chosen window width.
This filter is much faster than an application of a lowpass filter with, e.g. a
bandpass filter, but not as variable.

1.11.1.2 Medianfilter

The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter performs a median over a
selectable number of time sample for each time step.

The filter parameter median range determines the window width in samples over
which the median of the amplitudes of a trace is performed. With a window width
of 4 samples the current sample, the two preceding and the two following
samples of a trace are sorted according to their value. The median of these
samples, i.e. the third largest or the third smallest value, respectively, is assigned
then to the current sample. If between the current sample and the beginning or
the end of a trace lie fewer samples than half of the window width the window
width is decreased on one side.

The median filter can be employed for deleting spikes from the data. The lowpass
effect of the median filter is the stronger the larger the selected window width.
2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 155 2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 156

1.11.1.3 Bandpassfrequency 1.11.1.5 Filter/timedependent

The filter acts on each trace independently. Here you can apply a bandpass filter The filter acts on each trace independently. Here you can apply a timedependent
to each trace in the frequency domain. bandpass filtering in the time domain using a recursive filter.

The filter band is specified by the setting of four frequency values. The first point The filter band is specified by the setting of two frequency value pairs. The first
determines the low-cut frequency, the second one the beginning of the plateau frequency value pair is valid for the time-begin and the second frequency value
(lower plateau). Between the low-cut frequency and the beginning of the plateau pair is valid for the time-end of each trace. The first point of each pair determines
the filter is represented by a cosine-window. The third point determines the end of the low-cut frequency, the second one of each pair the high cut frequency.
the plateau (upper plateau) and the fourth the high cut frequency. Between The frequency spectrum below the low cut and above the high cut frequency is
these points the filter is represented by a cosine-window, too. The frequency set to zero. New filter boundaries are calculated for each time value based on the
spectrum below the low cut and above the high cut frequency is set to zero. By input value pairs (linear interpolation). Butterworth filtering is done using these
the corresponding choice of the points of the bandpass either a lowpass or a calculated filter boundaries.
highpass can be approximately realized.
The frequency values can be set either manually or within the frequency Example: you want to increase the lowpass filter effect with time because of
spectrum of the original example trace. For that activate the wanted filter stronger high frequency noise for greater times:
parameter by simply enter it and then choose the wanted frequency value using set the first filter pair resulting in a large bandpass (e.g. f1=100 MHz and f2=500
the left mouse button within the frequency spectrum. The activated filter MHz).
parameters is automatically updated. set the second filter pair resulting in a smaller bandpass (e.g. f1=100 MHz and
f2=300 MHz).
The cosine-range is used to suppress unwanted reverberations resulting from the Using these values the high frequency content of the filtered data for smaller
filter operator. The cosine range should be adapted to the spectral amplitudes times is maintained whereas for greater times this frequency content is filtered
existing at the high and low-cut frequencies. If the spectral amplitudes are quite out.
low, the cosine-range can be decreased.
Corresponding to the bandpassbutterworth filter, the frequency values can be set
Noise can be suppressed with the bandpass filter when it differs from the signal in either manually or within the frequency spectrum of the original example trace.
its frequency content. It is recommended to select a trace containing both a For that activate the wanted filter parameter by simply enter it and then choose
significant portion of noise and of the signal for the filter parameters setting. the wanted frequency value using the left mouse button within the frequency
spectrum. The activated filter parameters is automatically updated.

1.11.1.4 Bandpassbutterworth

The filter acts on each trace independently. Here you can apply a bandpass
filtering in the time domain using a recursive filter.

The filter band is specified by the setting of two frequency values. The first point
determines the low-cut frequency, the second one the high cut frequency. The
frequency spectrum below the low cut and above the high cut frequency is set to
zero. By the corresponding choice of the points of the bandpass either a lowpass
or a highpass can be approximately realized.
The frequency values can be set either manually or within the frequency
spectrum of the original example trace. For that activate the wanted filter
parameter by simply enter it and then choose the wanted frequency value using
the left mouse button within the frequency spectrum. The activated filter
parameters is automatically updated.

Noise can be suppressed with the bandpass filter when it differs from the signal in
its frequency content. It is recommended to select a trace containing both a
significant portion of noise and of the signal for the filter parameters setting.
2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 157 2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 158

1.11.1.6 Notchfilter/frequ. 1.11.1.7 Deconvolution

The filter acts on each trace independently. Here you can apply a notchfilter to The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter permits the application of a
each trace in the frequency domain. deconvolution on the profile. This is a so-called spiking-deconvolution, i.e. it is
tried to create a highly broadband and smooth spectrum (according to the
The filter band is specified by the setting of four frequency values. The first point spectrum of a spike). The program uses the recursion-algorithm of Levinson
determines the end of the low frequency plateau (lower plateau), the second one (Wiener-Filter method). For each trace the autocorrelation over a predefinable
the low-cut frequency. Between the end of the low frequency plateau and the number of samples is calculated and used as input signal for the Levinson-
low-cut frequency the filter is represented by a cosine-window. The third point Algorithm, which calculates recursively the deconvolution-filter trace. Then the
determines the high cut frequency and the fourth one the beginning of the high filter trace is convolved with the original trace.
frequency plateau (upper plateau). Between these points the filter is represented
by a cosine-window, too. The frequency spectrum between the cut frequencies is The deconvolution altogether needs four parameters (beginning and end of the
set to zero. autocorrelation range, length of the filter trace, portion of white noise in percent).
The frequency values can be set either manually or within the frequency With the specification of the beginning (autocorr.start) and the end of the range
spectrum of the original example trace. For that activate the wanted filter for the autocorrelation (autocorr.end) a certain control of the effects of the
parameter by simply enter it and then choose the wanted frequency value using deconvolution is possible. For a suppression of multiples for example it is
the left mouse button within the frequency spectrum. The activated filter necessary to choose a large time range for the autocorrelation, whereas a small
parameters is automatically updated. range is sufficient when "only" the original signal should be transformed back into
a spike.
The cosine-range is used to suppress unwanted reverberations resulting from the The length of the filter trace (parameter filter length) normally can be kept small.
filter operator. The cosine range should be adapted to the spectral amplitudes It must be smaller than or equal to the autocorrelation range.
existing at the high and low-cut frequencies. If the spectral amplitudes are quite To stabilize the deconvolution process white noise (parameter noise (perc.)) has
low, the cosine-range can be decreased. to be added to the data. The input parameter noise (percent) determines the
portion of white noise. A value that is too high leads to an insufficient
A notch filter is especially suitable for suppressing nearly mono-frequency noise. performance of the deconvolution, a too low value leads to stability problems.
For this you should select a trace containing a significant portion of noise. This
facilitates the setting of the filter band.
1.11.1.8 Deconvolution/shap.

This statistical deconvolution is based on the recursion-algorithm of Levinson

(Wiener-Filter method) for systems of linear equations with Toeplitz structure.
The filter acts on each trace independently. For each trace the autocorrelation
over a predefinable number of samples and the crosscorrelation between the
input and the desired output are calculated.
These correlations are the input of the Levinson-Algorithm, which calculates
recursively the deconvolution-filter trace. Then the filter trace is convolved with
the original trace.

Depending on on the goal of the deconvolution the desired output is selected.

The following types of statistical deconvolution are implemented:

spiking-deconvolution:
The goal of spiking-deconvolution is a concentration of the signal-wavelet in the
time domain or a broad and smooth spectrum of the deconvolved trace in the
frequency domain. The desired output is a spike, i.e. a wavelet with maximum
energy concentration. If 0 lag spike is selected the enegy is concentrated at the
beginning of the wavelet, if spiking is selected the enegy is concentrated at the
sample defined by the parameter lag. In practice the input signal ist mixed-phase
and the best spiking deconvolution ist done with a lag corresponding to the time
of the maximum energ in the input singnal wavelet. As spiking deconvolution
2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 159 2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 160

flattens the amplitude spectrum the deconvolution may cause high frequency 1.11.1.9 Subtract-mean (dewow)
noise and a band-pass filterung after deconvolution is necessary. This can be
done implicitely by choosing the parameter filter spectrum. With this option the The filter acts on each trace independently. With this option activated a running
amplitude spectrum of the filtered trace is scaled by the amplitude spectrum of mean value is calculated for each value of each trace. This running mean is
the unfiltered trace. subtracted from the central point.

wavelet shaping: As filter parameter the time window for the calculation of the running mean value
The goal of wavelet-shaping is to form the wavelet of the output signal e.g. to must be entered.
improve the minimum-phase properties of the output signal wavelet. The
deconvolution type any signal is not yet implemented. In later versions this This filter may be used for eliminating a possible low frequency part (dewow). For
option will allow the transformation of the input signal wavelet to a free this purpose the window range should be set to about one principal period.
chooseable wavelet, e.g a Ricker-wavelet. The deconvolution types zero phase
and min. phase transform the input signal wavelet to the corresponding
zero-phase or minimum phase wavelet. In practice the difference in transforming
to a zero-phase wavelet or a minimum phase wavelet is often small. As 1.11.1.10 Subtract-DC-shift
transforming to a minimum phase wavelet needs more computation time we
prefer the deconvolution type zero phase. In practice the input signal ist The filter acts on each trace independently. This option allows a so-called zero
mixed-phase and the best deconvolution is done with a lag corresponding to the mean, i.e. the subtraction of an existing time constant shift.
time of the maximum energ in the input singnal wavelet.
As filter parameter two time values (1.time and 2.time) must be entered. Within
predictive deconvolution: this time range the mean is calculated for each trace which is subsequently
The goal of predictive deconvolution is the supression of multiples or subtracted from all samples of each trace. Therefore it has to be guaranteed that
reverberations. The desired output is a time advanced (parameter lag) version of the mean value in the corresponding time range complies with the shift you want
the input signal. To supress multiples choose a lag coresponding to the to eliminate.
two-way-traveltime of the multiple, to supress reverberations choose a small lag
corresponding to the duration of the essential revreberation. If the input signal ist
mixed-phase a spiking deconvolution or wavelet shaping may improve the result
of the following predictive deconvolution. 1.11.1.11 Crosscorrelation
If the signal shape varies strongly from trace to trace the deconvolution may This option allows to calculate the crosscorrelation of a time trace to be specified
reduce the spatial coherences of reflections. This is caused by strong changes of with all the other traces of the profile.
the autocorrelation from trace to trace. To overcome this problem use the
parameter mean auto. With this parameter set the mean of all The trace used for crosscorrelation is chosen by the selection of a trace/time
trace-autocorrelations is used to calculate the deconvolution-filter. All traces are given by the filter parameters. This trace is shown in the reference trace window.
deconcolved with the same deconvolution-filter and spatial coherences will The first filter parameter specifies the start time (start ref.time) and the second
maintain. one the end time (end ref.time). The third parameter gives the start distance
range (start ref.distance) and the fourth one the end distance range (end
The deconvolution altogether needs three parameters (beginning and end of the ref.distance). Over the selected traces an automatic averaging is performed for
autocorrelation range, length of the filter trace). With the specification of the each selected time value, so that one gets a time series for the following
beginning (autocorr.start) and the end of the range for the autocorrelation crosscorrelation. The selected trace/time range can be for example the area of
(autocorr.end) a certain control of the effects of the deconvolution is possible. the first arrival.
For a suppression of multiples for example it is necessary to choose a large time
range for the autocorrelation, whereas a small range is sufficient when the The crosscorrelation can be used to improve the signal-to-noise ratio. Another
original signal should be transformed into a spike. The lenght of the filter trace effect is the shortening of the original wave train, if the conditions prevail (if
(parameter filter length) normally can be kept small. It must be smaller than or possible a broadband spectrum).
equal to the autocorrelation range. The lag (parameter lag) must be smaller than
the filter length. The parameters autocorr.start, autocorr.end, filter
length and lag are given in the actual time dimension.
2D-Dataanalysis, 1D-Filter 161 2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 162

1.11.1.12 auto correlation 1.11.2 Gain

This option allows to calculate the autocorrelation of each trace for a given time The following filter possibilities for changing the gain are included in the gain
range. group:

Enter the timerange (options start time and end time) for which the AGC-Gain
autocorrelation will be generated. The max. value of the autocorrelation for each energy decay
trace is set to the scaling factor. gain function
remove header gain
div.compensation
1.11.1.13 Resampling manual gain (y)
manual gain (x)
The filter allows you a resampling in time direction. The resampling is performed scaled windowgain(x)
wihtin the frequency range. x-distance decay(db)

The filter parameter timeincr. determines the new sampling interval in time For some filters available within this group the original trace is shown together
direction in the given time dimension. with the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum
of the actually filtered trace. With the filter energy decay activated additionally the
The filter may be used for an equal redefinition of the sample interval of different reference trace is shown.
2D-lines which have been acquired with different time increments. Some The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the
processing steps like the combination of 2D-lines into a 3D-file require equal time resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is
increments. To be considered: decreasing the original time increment does not stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
mean an increase of the vertical resolution. time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds,
respectively.
In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of
1.11.1.14 Walsh bandpass the corresponding spectra.

The filter acts on each trace independently. Here you can apply a bandpass filter When activating the options manual gain (y) or manual gain(x) a table appears.
to each trace using the Walsh transformation. The Walsh transformation is based With the option manual gain (x) activated the inputs may be entered either
on an orthonormal system of step funcitons instead of sin-functions which are interactively within the original profile or using the table input. With the option
used for the Fourier transformation. Therefore this filter is more suitable for manual gain (y) activated a new window appears which allows the interactive
spepwise data (e.g. timeslices) than for sinoidal data like the "normal" timeseries input of the new gain curve again with the possibility of entering the values within
of wavedata. the table. The options save and load allow to store the actual edit values to an
ASCII file and to load the wanted edit values from file, respectively.
The filter band is specified by the setting of the lower cutoff and the upper
cutoff walsh coefficients. The max. Walsh coefficient is equal half the sample The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
number. The walsh coefficients are not directly connected to the frequencies of windows can be chosen using the option trace number.
the signal but in general one can say: the lower walsh coeffients represent more
the lower frequencies whereas the higher coefficients are dominated by the The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
higher frequencies. Therefore a lowpass filter is set by a small value of the upper filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
cutoff parameter whereas a highpass filter is set by a high value of the lower effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
cutoff parameter. A taper can be defined both for the lower and the upper cutoff by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
coefficients (parameter lower taper and upper taper). control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.
2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 163 2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 164

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing 1.11.2.1 AGC-Gain
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of The filter acts on each trace independently. The gain filter facilitates the creation
lines after. of equally distributed amplitudes in y-direction (normally time axis) within a
predefinable window. The information of the true amplitude is lost, of course.

The filter parameter window length determines the window size in the given
timedimension. The program calculates at first an average amplitude over the
total time range for each trace. After that the program scales each amplitude
value in that way that the mean amplitude has the same value for each selected
window around the current value within a trace. The size of the window
determines the kind of amplitude equality distribution. A window size of only one
sample increment means that each time sample within one trace receives the
same amplitude value (no reasonable choice), a window size of the whole trace
length causes no modification of the amplitude. Small window sizes cause a
strong equality distribution, large windows a weak.
After the application of the AGC all data points are automatically multiplied by a
scaling factor. You should choose this factor in such a way that all amplitude
values lie within the 16 data bits if your REFLEX format is 16 bit Integer. If not,
those amplitudes are automatically restricted to values of 32000 or -32000 in this
case. If your REFLEX format is 32 bit floating point, the scaling value can be set
to 1.

This option serves for emphasizing of low amplitude ranges against ranges with
high amplitudes.

1.11.2.2 Energy decay

The filter acts on each trace independently. By activating this option a gaincurve
in y-(time-) direction is applied on the complete profile based on a mean
amplitude decay curve which is automatically determined. The information of the
true amplitude is lost, of course.

First a mean decay curve is determined from all existing traces. After the
application of a median filter on this curve every data point of each trace is
divided by the values of the decay curve.
After the multiplication of the energy decay curve all data points are automatically
multiplied by a scaling factor. You should choose this factor in such a way that
all amplitude values lie within the 16 data bits if your REFLEX format is 16 bit
Integer. If not, those amplitudes are automatically restricted to values of 32000 or
-32000 in this case. If your REFLEX format is 32 bit floating point, the scaling
value can be set to 1.

Analogous to the gain filter AGC-Gain this option serves for emphasizing of low
amplitude ranges against ranges with high amplitudes.
2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 165 2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 166

1.11.2.3 Gain function 1.11.2.6 Manual gain (y)

The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter facilitates the possibility of The filter acts on each trace independently. The option allows to interactively
multiplying the data points by a given function g(y) or g(t) respectively. define a digitized gain curve in y-direction (normally time axis) and to apply this
gain curve on the data.
The function g(t) consists of a linear and an exponential part: g(t)=(1+a*t)*e(b*t)
with a=a'/pulse width and b=b'*v/8.69 with v=0.1 m/nsec or 1.0 m/msec After having activated the option a table and a new window appears which both
respectively. The pulse width is automatically taken from the nominal frequency if allow the interactive input of the new gain curve (time in the given timedimension
given (see option FileHeader Edit). Otherwise, the nominal frequency is and factor in db). The chosen values are automatically transferred to the table
automatically determined from the first arrival. The two filter parameters a'(linear input and vice versa to the gain window. Inputs between -20 and 80 db are
gain) and b'(exponent) must be entered. a': not dimension except for the case of possible. Between the individual marks the values are linearly interpolated, at the
non set nominal frequency; b': input in dB/meter. In addition you have to enter the y-margins the specified value belonging to the smallest or largest y-coordinate,
start time (the filter starts at that time with value 1) and the max. gain. respectively, is extrapolated. The effect of the entered gain values is
automatically shown within the filtered trace window.
With the option “Apply on example trace” activated the resulting gain curve is
plotted within the image next to the filtered trace. The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with the name ygain and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the
The data are multiplied by this function in order to compensate for possible ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: time in the given time dimension,
damping or geometric spreading losses. 2. column: factor in db.
The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
ygain. The table and the interactive window are automatically updated.
1.11.2.4 Remove header gain The option reset resets the current edit values.

The filter acts on each trace independently. The option allows to apply the inverse The gainvalues entered are automatically transferred into the fileheader (max. 8
of a digitized gaincurve stored in the fileheader. values (time and gain) - see also option FileHeader Edit).

The gainvalues used for the GSSI data-acquisition, which are stored in the The first and last gainvalue are stored within the processing flow.
RADAN-header, are automatically read in (see also option FileHeader Edit).
Therefore it is possible to remove the gaincurve and to get raw data without The option may serve to emphasize y-ranges, where for example structures are
timevariant amplification. Any gaincurve, which is applied on the data after the assumed.
conversion (e.g. using the option manual gain (y)) is not automatically transferred
into the fileheader. This must be done manually within the option FileHeader Edit
(max. 8 values (time and gain)).

The filter is useful if you want to compare data files acquired with different gain
functions or if you want to use the true amplitude information.

1.11.2.5 div. compensation

The filter acts on each trace independently. The option allows to compensate for
the geometrcial divergence losses.

The processing step applies a compensation of the geometrical divergence

losses either proportional t (spherical losses - 3D-point source) or proportional
sqrt(t) (2-dimensional losses - line source).
2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 167 2D-Dataanalysis, Gain 168

1.11.2.7 Manual gain (x) 1.11.2.8 Scaled windowgain(x)

The filter acts on each trace independently. The option allows to interactively The filter acts on each trace independently. The gain filter facilitates the
define a digitized gain curve in x-direction (normally distance axis) and to apply amplitude equality distribution in x-direction for a y-window to be specified. For
this gain curve on the data. each trace one normalization factor is determined which will be mulitplied by each
value of the trace. Therefore the energy distribution within the trace will not be
After having activated the option a table appears which allows the interactive affected but energy differences inbetween the traces will be equalized.
input of the new gain curve. The distance and the multiplication factor (linear)
must be entered. Between the individual marks the values are linearly After selecting the option the program demands the input of the time window
interpolated, at the x-margins the specified value belonging to the smallest or (start window and end window). The filter facilitates a normalization of the
largest x-coordinate, respectively, is extrapolated. The distance can also be amplitude sum within this window.
defined within the original profile by pressing the left mouse button at the desired It is either possible to fix the normalization value (option fix meanvalue activated)
position. The multiplication factor must be enter manually within the table. or to automatically determine this value from the data (option fix meanvalue
deactivated).
The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project With the option fix meanvalue deactivatead the program first calculates the
directory with the name xgain and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the mean amplitude within this window for all traces (this mean amplitude is also
ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: distance in the given distance shown within the third filter parameter - not to change).
dimension, 2. column: factor. With the option fix meanvalue activatead you must manually enter the mean
The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename amplitude value within the third filter parameter. This is useful if you want to
xgain. The table and the interactive window are automatically updated. compare different datafiles (e.g. using timeslices) which have different amplitude
The option reset resets the current edit values. characteristics due to the source coupling.

The option serves to amplify profile areas, which are pronounced weaker than Each time sample of a trace is then multiplied by a scaling factor, which is
other areas because of higher attenuation for example. determined by the mean amplitude within the y-window of each trace and the
previously calculated or determined mean total amplitude. The result is a mean
amplitude equality distribution within the y-window for all traces.

The option can be employed reasonably, e.g. to compensate for different source
couplings.

1.11.2.9 x-distance decay(db)

The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter facilitates the compensation
of energy losses in dependence from the shot-receiver distance x. All samples of
one trace are scaled with the same filter value.

The filter function is linear with the distance x. The parameter decay defines the
filter strength. The 0-distance scale parameter defines a minimum scaling value
in order to prevent that the scaling value becomes 0 for a shot-receiver distance
of 0.

The option can be employed reasonably e.g. to compensate for energy losses
because of different shot-receiver offsets (e.g. seismic shot data).
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 169 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 170

1.11.3 StaticCorrection/muting
The following correction, muting and filter possibilities are included within the
static correction/muting group:

static correction
dynamic correction
move starttime
muting
time cut
correct max. phase
correct picked phase
correct for 2 layers
correct 3Dtopography

For some filters available within this group the original trace is shown together
with the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum
of the actually filtered trace. The arrows near the original trace and original
spectrum are used to enhance the resolution of the trace and spectrum windows.
The trace or the spectrum is stretched up and down when using these arrows.
The spectrum scale is Hz, if the time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time
scale is in nano-seconds, respectively.
In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of
the corresponding spectra.

When activating the options static correction and muting a table appears. With all
these options the inputs may be entered either interactively within the original
profile or using the table input. The options save and load allow to store the
actual edit values to an ASCII file and to load the wanted edit values from file,
respectively.

The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 171 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 172

1.11.3.1 Static correction The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with the name correct and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the
The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step static correction ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: distance in the given distance
facilitates a static, this means a time-independent, correction for each trace in dimension, 2. column: time in the given time dimension.
time direction. The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
correct. The table and profile image are automatically updated.
The options move to positive times, move to negative times and move to positive The option reset resets the current edit values.
times/shift control the direction of the static correction. The option load pick data allows to load new picks from disc. After having
With the selection of move to positive times the traces are shifted down (i.e. chosen a pick data set from the file list the picks are automatically converted into
towards larger times) exactly by the specified correction values. This processing the table edit values. Please note that all current edit values are lost.
step may also be used for a topographic correction. Normally for that purpose the
topographic values must be manually changed into two-way traveltimes. Use this option for example for eliminating a time delay or trigger errors.
With the selection of move to negative times the traces are shifted up (i.e.
towards smaller times) exactly by the specified correction values. It is reasonable
to employ this option for example in order to invert a possible time delay.
With the selection of move to negative times/shift the largest static correction
value is taken as the base level. The trace with this correction value is not
modified in time. All traces are shifted down (i.e. towards larger times) relative to
this base level according to the difference of its correction values and the base
level. The inserted time range is filled with zeros. The shape of the correction is
the same as for move to negative times but no data are lost with this selection.
The choice move to negative times/shift therefore allows for example the
compensation for topography under the assumption of a homogeneous velocity
distribution. The topography only has to be transformed into two-way travel times
for this. The smallest static correction value zero then matches the highest point
in topography, the largest static correction value the lowest point in topography.
The shape of the topography then matches exactly the shape of the correction
values on screen.

Activating the option use automatic filename allows you to automatically read in
the static correction values from an ASCII-file (see also option save for the format
of the ASCII-file) with the filename correct and the fileextension equal to the
profilename: Example: profilename: line1_.00t - correction filename:
correct.line1_. The correctionfile must have been stored under the
projectdirectory.Activating the option might be useful if you want to use the static
correction within the sequence processing (see also chap. 1.11.11). Then no
single correction ASCII-filename is queried but the correction values are read in
from the different ASCII-files with the automatic filenaming described above.

After having activated the option static correction a table with the parameters
distance and time appears which allows the interactive input of the static
correction values. The distance and the time must be entered in the
corresponding dimensions. Between the individual marks the values are linearly
interpolated, at the x-margins the specified value belonging to the smallest or
largest x-coordinate, respectively, is extrapolated. The values can also be defined
within the original profile by pressing the left mouse button at the desired position.
The chosen values are automatically transferred to the table input and vice versa
to the profile image.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 173 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 174

1.11.3.2 Dynamic correction 1.11.3.4 Muting

The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step dynamic The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step static correction
correction facilitates a dynamic, i.e. time dependent correction for a predefined facilitates the possibility of defining a muting curve above or below which all data
constant velocity and the distance between source and receiver in time (y) points are set to zero.
direction.
With the selection of mute data above muting curve all data points above the
The filter parameter S/R-distance determines the distance between source and specified muting curve (towards smaller times) are set to 0.
receiver in the given distance dimension. The parameter v determines the With the selection of mute data below muting curve all data points below the
constant velocity in the given velocity dimension. The calculated correction in specified muting curve towards larger times) are set to 0.
time direction depends on the two entered parameters and the actual time - the
larger the time the smaller the correction. The filter parameter taper window in the given time dimension determines a time
window for a smooth muting. The data within this timewindow above or below the
If source and receiver have a large distance while recording the zero-offset profile muting curve (dependent from the settings above) are tapered using a cos-
the application of this option is recommended especially for near surface onsets. function. A value of 0 means that the data are truncated at the muting curve.

After having activated the option muting a table with the parameters distance
and time appears which allows the interactive input of the new muting curve. The
distance and the time must be entered in the corresponding dimensions.
1.11.3.3 Move starttime Between the individual marks the values are linearly interpolated, at the x-
margins the specified value belonging to the smallest or largest x-coordinate,
The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step move starttime respectively, is extrapolated. The values can also be defined within the original
facilitates a static correction in time direction by a given value (by default the profile by pressing the left mouse button at the desired position. The chosen
start time specified within the fileheader time specification ). values are automatically transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile
image.
Within the groupbox move starttime you may define if the moving value is always
taken from the fileheader (option fileheader activated) or whether a manual input The option apply on whole line allows the actual chosen muting points (starting
is possible (manual input activated). at trace 1) to be periodically repeated for the complete line. Using this option is
reasonable for defining a muting for a shot gather in the case all shots all
The filter parameter move time determines the time value each trace is shifted in combined together within one file. You only have to define the muting curve for
the case the option manual input is acivated. The default value is the start time the first single ensemble, e.g. for the first shot and then use this option to apply
value stored in the fileheader. the actual muting curve on all existing shots. To be considered: the geometry for
all shots must be the same.
After having performed the processing step the start time of the processed file is
automatically set to 0. The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with the name correct and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the
When using this option within the Sequence Processing with activated option ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: distance in the given distance
fileheader, always the start time values stored in the individual fileheaders are dimension, 2. column: time in the given time dimension.
used. With activated option manual input the entered constant value is used for The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
all files. correct. The table and profile image are automatically updated.
The option reset resets the current edit values.
You may use this option for removing all data in time before the start time or you The option load pick data allows to load new picks from disc. After having
may use this option as a simple static correction (see also static correction). chosen a pick data set from the file list the picks are automatically converted into
the table edit values. Please note that all current edit values are lost.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 175 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 176

1.11.3.5 Time cut 1.11.3.6 Correct max. phase

The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step time cut offers The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step correct max.
the possibility to limit each trace to a predefinable maximum time. phase offers the possibility to automatically find the phase of max. amplitude
within a given time window and to flatten this phase. An automatic resampling in
The filter parameter max.time in the given time dimension determines the time time direction for each trace is included during the processing in order to increase
each trace is limited to. No compression or resorting takes place. Only the time the resolution of the automatically determined phase.
range is reduced to a preset range.
The filter parameters start window and end window in the given time dimension
Use this option for example if the time range was set to a too large range during determine the time window which is used for finding the phase to be corrected
the data acquirement and you want to save disk space and enhance the for. The polarity determines the polarity of the phase. The program determines
computer speed for the further data processing. for each trace the maximum amplitude having the chosen polarity within the given
timewindow.
With the option first onset under polarity activated the automatically determined
first arrival (independent from the polarity) is used for the correction. The input
parameter is a value threshold (absolute value) and the dominant frequency of
the wavelet. If the polarity of the automatically determined onsets has been
changed for one or more traces a warning message appears.

With the option zero cross. activated the identified time is shifted to smaller
times to the zero crossing.

The static correction is done for the corresponding time value for each trace.
Analogous to the suboption move to negative times/shift of the static correction
the traces are not shifted by this value but a mean time is determined first which
is taken as the base level.
The parameter average(traces) is used for building up a rolling median of the
time shifts for each trace. Enter a value greater than 2 if there are some traces
where the max.phase is disturbed within the given time window and you want to
use the median time shift built up from the neighbouring traces.

The switch group correct time is used for setting the time base. It controls the
shifting of the start time within the file header. With correct time set to auto the
time base is set to 0 for the flattened phase. This is done by automatically setting
the start time (see also fileheader time specification ) to the negative value of the
mean time. With correct time set to no the start time is not changed. With correct
time set to manual you must enter a target time within the filter parameter group.
The time base of the flattened phase is set to that target time.
With the switch group use mean you may specify if only the mean time shift is
used for all traces (set to yes) or if each trace is moved by its individual time shift
(set to no) or if the mean time shift is determined for lineparts separated by each
other by a new ensemble number (e.g. a 3D-datafile). With use mean set to yes
the mean time shift is calculated and only the start time is changed depending on
the options set within the switch group correct time. To be considered: if correct
time is set to no nothing happens for this particular case.

Use this option for example for a fast static correction of the first arrival (e.g. the
direct wave from source to the receiver) if this phase shows some irregularities
(e.g. a drift or trigger fluctuations) or to automatically change the start time.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 177 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 178

1.11.3.7 Correct picked phase 1.11.3.8 Correct for 2 layers

The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step performs a static The filter acts on each trace independently. The processing step static correct for
correction (see also static correction) of a picked phase stored under the same 2 layers facilitates a static, this means a time-independent correction for each
name as the data filename. trace in time direction based on a given 2 layer model.

Within the group box correct phase you may determine how the picked phase is The processing step is used for a correction of a rough surface if the data are
changed. acquired in a flat niveau above this surface. The idea of this static correction step
With the option flatten activated the picked phase is flattened. For example this is that the area between the data acquisition niveau and the surface shall be
is useful for flattening the first arrival because of a continuous timeshift of the replaced by the material with the same velocity as below the surface. Therefore
start pulse. the velocities within the layers above and below the surface must be known (see
With the option lowpass activated you are able to lowpass filter the picked filter parameter 1. velocity and 2. velocity) and the correction values must be
phase. For that purpose you must enter the upper cutoff wavelength (option entered for the surface reflection.
wavelength) in the given distance dimension. Fluctuations in x-direction, which
are smaller than this wavelength, will be eliminated. The option may be used for The filter parameter min time in the given time dimension determines the time
the smoothing of small scale topography effects or for the smoothing of the swell. base for the static shift. This time should be smaller than the minimum time value
Extensive fluctuations will be kept. of the correction timevalues (see below) and must be equal for all lines which are
With the option highpass activated you are able to highpass filter the picked interpreted together within a subsequent step (e.g. calculation of timeslices).
phase. For that purpose you must enter the lower cutoff wavelength (option Analogous to the suboption move to negative times/shift of the static correction
wavelength) in the given distance dimension. Fluctuations in x-direction, which the traces are not shifted by the individual correction timevalues but this min. time
are larger than this wavelength, will be eliminated. The option may be used for is taken as the base level.
the smoothing of large scale topography effects. The filter parameter 1. velocity determines the velocity within the layer above the
With the option move pos. activated the traces are shifted down (i.e. towards correction timevalues.
larger times) exactly by the specified correction pickvalues. This processing step The filter parameter 2. velocity determines the velocity within the layer below the
may also be used for a topographic correction. Normally for that purpose the correction timevalues.
picks must be manually changed into two-way traveltimes.
After having activated the option correct for 2 layers a table with the parameters
With the option flatten or highpass activated you must set the target time within distance and time appears which allows the interactive input of the static
the filter parameter group. The time base of the flattened or filtered phase is set correction values. The distance and the time must be entered in the
to that target time. The start time (see also file header time specification) is corresponding dimensions. Between the individual marks the values are linearly
automatically changed based on the difference between the entered target time interpolated, at the x-margins the specified value belonging to the smallest or
and the largest pick time value. largest x-coordinate, respectively, is extrapolated. The values can also be defined
within the original profile by pressing the left mouse button at the desired position.
The option wavelength determines the upper or lower cutoff wavelength if the The chosen values are automatically transferred to the table input and vice versa
options lowpass or highpass are activated. to the profile image.

The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with the name correct and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the
ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: distance in the given distance
dimension, 2. column: time in the given time dimension.
The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
correct. The table and profile image are automatically updated.
The option reset resets the current edit values.
The option load pick data allows to load new picks from disc. After having
chosen a pick data set from the file list the picks are automatically converted into
the table edit values. Please note that all current edit values are lost.

Use this option for example for remove the influence of a rough surface if the
data have been acquired in a flat niveau above the rough surface.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 179 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 180

1.11.3.9 Correct 3D-topography mean of the single z-positions is determined which is used for the static
correction for this trace.
The processing step correct 3D-topography facilitates a static, this means a time- The correction corresponds to static correction-move to negative times/shift, i.e.
independent, correction for each trace in time direction based on 3D topography the greatest z-position (transformed into two-way travel time) is taken as the base
coordinates stored within an ASCII-file or based on the z-traceheader level. The trace with this correction value is not modified in time. All traces are
coordinates. shifted down (i.e. towards larger times) relative to this base level according to the
difference of its correction values and the base level. The inserted time range is
With the option z-tracecoord activated the static correction is based on the shot filled with zeros. This means that the area between the actual topographic niveau
and the receiver elevations stored within the traceheader of each trace (see also and the maximum niveau is filled up with material with the given velocity.
plotoption correct header elevations).
The filter parameter velocity is used to transform the z-values of the topographic Use this option for a 3D-topographic correction. The option is also available within
coordinates into a two-way travel time whereby the traveltime shift value is the sequence processing.
calculated from the sum of the shot and the receiver elevation differences.

With the option ASCII-file activated the correction is based on an ASCII-file. 1.11.3.10 Suppress multiples
Each line of the ASCII-file with the 3D topographic coordinates contains one set
of 3D coordinates: The option allows to suppress multiple reflections from the surface. For that
purpose each wanted multiple reflection is first flattened based on the picked
x-position y-position z-position primary reflection and then the subtracting average filter is applied within a
choosable time range around the flattened multiple.
The x- and y-position define the acquisition plane where the profiles are located. The picks of the primary reflection must be saved under the same filename as the
The z-position defines the topographic niveau. At least one blank must exist actual profile filename (option use filename automatic name within the save pick
between the individual coordinates. Example with 3 different coordinate sets: menu activated).
The following inputs are necessary:
0 0 10 time range: specifies the time range for applying the subtracting average around
1 0 9 the flattened multiple reflection. The range should be greater or equal the signal
2 0 9.5 length.
time lag: enter a lag for shifting the time range to smaller times. Such a lag is
The dimension of the coordinates must be the same like within the datafile(s). necessary if you did not pick the very first arrival of the primary reflection. A
To be considered: the profiles must be located within the x-y plane, this means default value is about a quarter of the signal length if the first maximum has been
the profile direction and the profile constant must be x and y or vice versa. picked.
nr. of multiples: enter the number of multiple reflections to be suppressed.
The option load allows to specify the wanted topography file. The filename nr. of traces: enter the number of traces for the subtracting average filter. The
should begin with "top" and the file should be stored under the projectdirectory. smaller this value the larger is the effect of the subtracting average filter (see also
processing step subtracting average).
The filter parameters x-reference and y-reference define a reference point which
is subtracted from all topographic coordinates. Therefore it is not necessary to The picture shows an example of the suppress multiples filter. The left panel
input the topographic coordinates using the same coordinate level like for the shows the original data together with the picks of the primary reflection, the right
profile coordinates. panel shows the filtered data (time range: 20 ns, time lag: 10 ns, nr. of multiples:
The filter parameter velocity is used to transform the z-values of the topographic 3, nr. of traces: 20).
coordinates into a two-way travel time.
The coordinates are either taken from the fileheader or from the traceheader. If
you want to apply this filter on a 3D-file you should use the traceheader
coordinates because the fileheader coordinates of the 3D-file do not allow to
characterize the coordinates of the individual traces. The traceheader coordinates
of a 3D-file will be automatically updated during the 3D-file generation.

The program automatically determines the individual topographic values from the
given topography matrix. For this purpose the next topographic coordinate set
within each quadrant is determined for each trace location. Afterwards a weighted
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 181 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 182

1.11.4 Declipping/arithmetic functions

The following filter possibilities are included in the declipping/arithmetic functions
group:

declipping:
declipping/max.value
declipping/plateau
declipping/threshold
arithmetic function:
addition
multiplication
square
root
natural log
absolute
exp x
set ampl.range to 0

For all filters available within this group the original trace is shown together with
the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum of
the actually filtered trace.
The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the
resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is
stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds,
respectively.
In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of
the corresponding spectra.

The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number or by clicking in the
primary file using the left mouse button.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 183 2D-Dataanalysis, StaticCorrection/muting 184

1.11.4.1 Declipping 1.11.4.2 Arithmetic functions

The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter enables a declipping of The filter acts on each trace independently. Under this processing step you can
special onsets (see the different kinds of declipping). The declipping is done apply simple mathematical operations always acting only on the current sample
using a polynome of the 3. order based on the 4 next of a trace.
neighbours.
The following arithmetic functions are available:
Depending on your data you may choose between different addition, multiplication, square, root, natural log, absolute and exp x.
kinds of declipping in order to automatically specify which
data are clipped and which data are not clipped: The filter addition requires the input of a value which is added to every data
Choosing declipping/max.value is useful if your clipped point. Doing this, e.g. the representation of exclusively negative data can be
data always have the max. value existing in your data file improved through the addition of a positive value, if the data after the addition
(see figure on the right). fluctuate around zero.
Declipping/plateau should be used if the clipped data have
a plateau, this means that all amplitude values for that The filter multiplication requires the input of a value each data point is multiplied
special signal part are equal (again see figure on the right). with. This can be employed reasonably if the amplitude level has become too
Declipping/threshold should only be used if the clipped large or too small after a data processing step. Another possible application is the
data are disturbed. In some cases the clipped data jump amplitude normalization of different data sets.
from positive to negative values. In these cases you should
use the threshold declipping. The filters square, root and natural log can be used to emphasize certain
amplitude ranges. The sign of each data point is maintained when applying this
If choosing declipping/max.value and declipping/plateau declipping is done if at option. So, the option square for example improves the resolution of the absolute
least two successive samples do have the same amplitudes. Choosing the largest amplitudes.
suboption max.value the amplitudes values additionally must be equal to the
maximum value given in the complete profile. Choosing the suboption plateau no With the filter absolute each data point receives a positive sign.
additional restriction concerning the amplitude value is given.
Choosing the suboption threshold, a threshold value must be entered. All The filter exp x exponents all data values by x. You have to specify the exponent
amplitudes greater/equal than this value are clipped per definition. You may x as a filter parameter.
choose the suboption threshold if no unified plateau value is reached or if the
amplitudes did change significantly during a previous processing step (for The filter set ampl.range to 0 allows to set to 0 all data values lying inbetween
example application of a gain-function or an AGC). the given amplitude range. You have to specify the amplitude range by the values
min. amplitude and max. amplidute. Example: if you want to set the complete
After the declipping all amplitude values are automatically multiplied by a scaling negative phase to 0, enter for min. amplitude the highest negative value existing
factor. You should choose this factor in such a way that all amplitude values lie in the profile and for max. amplitude 0.
within the 16 data bits if your REFLEX format is 16 bit Integer. If not, those
amplitudes are automatically restricted to values of 32000 or -32000 in this case.
If your REFLEX format is 32 bit floating point, the scaling value can be set to 1.
2D-Dataanalysis, Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis 185 2D-Dataanalysis, Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis 186

1.11.5 Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis 1.11.5.1 Complex trace-analysis

The following filter possibilities are included in the complex trace-analysis/spectral The filter acts on each trace independently. The Hilbert-Transformation is used to
analysis functions group: calculate instantaneous attributes like the envelope, the instantaneous
frequency or the instantaneous phase.
complex trace-analysis
trace spectrum The instantaneous amplitude or envelope is a measure for the reflectivity
moving window spectrum strength, which is proportional to the square root of the complete energy of the
spectral whitening signal at an instant of time. The envelope gives an overview of the energy
1. derivative distribution of the traces and on the other hand it can facilitate the determination
integration of signal first arrivals.
rotate 2 components
The instantaneous phase is a measure of the continuity of evens on a section.
For some filters available within this group the original trace is shown together Jumps within the instantaneous phase might indicate superpositions of arrivals
with the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum for example. The phase can be plotted continuously with the option phase/cont.
of the actually filtered trace. or limited to an interval of 2*pi with the option phase/2pi. For the display a
The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the normalized wiggle-mode is advantageous.Because of the normally small values
resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is the 32 bit floating point format is automatically chosen for the processed data.
stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds, The temporal rate of change of the instantaneous phase is the instantaneous
respectively. frequency. The instantaneous frequency is calculated as the temporal derivative
of the phase using an approximation by central differences. The plot of the
The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum instantaneous frequency allows to recognize superpositions of arrivals, since
windows can be chosen using the option trace number or by clicking in the different arrivals are often characterized by different instantaneous frequencies.
primary file using the left mouse button. For this the choice of a normalized wiggle-mode is often more useful as the point-
mode. The instantaneous frequency may have a high degree of variation which
The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the may b or may be not related to stratigraphy. Therefore, an average filter
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the parameter is queried. It determines over how many samples the calculated
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters instantaneous frequencies should be averaged. The calculation of a mean value
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this is reasonable because of the often strong fluctuations of the instantaneous
control takes too much computer time. frequencies. Because of the normally small values the 32 bit floating point format
is automatically chosen for the processed data.
After having specified the filter parameter you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.
1.11.5.2 Trace spectrum
Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter trace-spectrum allows the
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of calculation of the amplitude spectrum of each trace.
lines after.
It is possible to restrict the amplitude spectrum calculation to a distinct time
range. For this you must enter within the filter parameter group the start time and
the end time for which the calculation shall be done. By default start time is set to
the time-begin of each trace and end time is set to the max. time of each trace.

The y-axis label of the filtered section automatically changes to frequency.

2D-Dataanalysis, Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis 187 2D-Dataanalysis, Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis 188

1.11.5.3 Moving window spectrum 1.11.5.5 1. derivative

The filter acts on a choosable number of traces. The filter moving window The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter 1. derivative allows to
spectrum allows a moving-window frequency analysis for all time samples calculate the 1. derivative in time for each trace.
averaged over all traces.
The calculation of the derivative is performed in the frequency domain by
Here, for each time value the amplitude spectrum is calculated over a window to multiplication by the frequency.
be specified (filter parameter window width in the corresponding time
dimension). The window is moved continuously over the y-(time)axis whereby The filter 1. derivative allows to emphasize the high frequency part of the
only every n. sample is used (filter parameter every n. sample). With the individual signals and therefore may enhance the vertical resolution under special
specification of a value greater than 1 for every n. sample you have the conditions (see also deconvolution).
possibility to have the computation-time consuming analysis performed not for
each time value but only for each n..time sample. The amplitude spectra are
summed contemporaneously for a choosable number of traces (filter parameters
first trace and last trace). Thus, you get a time-frequency dependency. The 1.11.5.6 Integration
dependency of the distance (x-axis) is eliminated.
The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter integration allows to
The moving-spectral analysis allows the visualization of frequency range shiftings integrate the signals in time for each trace.
with time (y-coordinate). This is reasonable for example for an attenuation
analysis or for the recognition of a possibly frequency-dependent reflection or The integration is performed in the frequency domain by division by the
transmission behaviour of the investigation area. frequency.

The integration allows to emphasize the low frequency part of the individual
signals (see also complex trace-analysis (envelope)).

1.11.5.4 Spectral whitening

1.11.5.7 Rotate 2 components
The filter acts on each trace independently. The filter spectral whitening allows
to compensate for frequency attenuation with time. The filter rotate 2 components allows to rotate two components around an angle
given within the traceheader under CMP(x-pos.).
The aim of the filter if to flatten the spectrum for a given frequency band (filter
parameter start frequency and end frequency). For this purpose a series of The data must be 3-component dipole/frame data with the first component (1., 4.
narrow overlapping band-pass filters is applied on each trace. The same series of , 7., ... trace) containing the data from the dipole antenna and the 2. (2.,5.,8.,...
amplitude decay curves is then computed to describe the decay rates for each trace) and 3. component (3., 6., 9.,.... trace) containing the data from two frame
frequency band. The inverses of theses decay curves are applied to each antenna. The data from the dipole antenna remain unchanged whereas the data
bandpass filtered trace and the results are summed. In order to preserve the from the two frame antenana are rotated around the angle given within the
amplitude characteristics of the original trace the summed trace is then multiplied traceheader (CMP-x-pos.) - see also 3-component analysis (chap. 1.12.8).
with the amplitude decay curve of the original trace. The filter changes the overall
amplitudes. Therefore a scaling factor allows to rescale the filtered traces with a
given value.

The spectral whitening allows to compensate for frequency attenuation with time.
It also partially deconvolves the effective source wavelet (see also
deconvolution).
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 189 2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 190

1.11.6 Trace Interpolation/Resorting 1.11.6.1 Markerinterpol

The following trace interpolation and resorting possibilities are included within the The option allows an interpolation of the data in X-direction on the basis of
trace interpolation/resorting group: markers to be set manually or to be automatically extracted from the data
(suboption ReadMarker).
markerinterpol
traceincr-resampling After having activated the option a table appears which allows the interactive
make equidist.traces input of the marker positions in traces (trace nr.) and the distance between
fix profile length successive markers (marker inc.). The program recalculates the number of
YFlipProfile traces between two set markers based on the wanted trace increment and the
XFlipProfile actual set distance between the two markers (marker inc.) using the following
resort-traceheader formula: calculated trace numbers = marker inc. / trace increment. The marker
resort-group increment must be predefined within the filter parameter group and can be
Yo-Yo section individually changed for each marker position within the table input.
Traceinterpol-3DFile
Xflip-3DFile The trace increment must be a multiple of each marker increment. This is due to
shift-3DFile the fact that the number of traces within each marker increment must be rounded.
create 3D-ensembles The program automatically calculates the total marker range and determines the
wanted number of traces based on the actual trace increment. If this number
When activating the option markerinterpol a table appears. With this option the does not correspond to the actual trace number got from the filter markerinterpol
inputs may be entered either interactively within the original profile or using the a warning message appears.
table input.
The marker positions may be defined either within the original profile using the
The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum left mouse key or by entering a trace number within the table input. Individual
windows can be chosen using the option trace number. marker increments must be entered within the table input. The 3. column of the
table shows the cumulated markerdistance (cannot be changed). In addition it is
The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the possible to read the marker positions from the trace header of the original file
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the (option ReadMarker). With the option comment marker activated the comment
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters markers are loaded in addition (see also edit comment markers). If the option is
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this used within the Sequence Processing the marker positions are always read from
control takes too much computer time. the trace headers of the individual original file. With activated option comment
marker the distance and the comment markers are used, with deactivated option
After having specified the filter parameter you must enter the processing label only the distance markers are used. The parameter SkipTraces allows to avoid
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e. that double marker clicks are considered. After one marker position was found
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing. the next marker to be found must be at least SkipTraces away. The option
calc.markerincr. allows to calculate the individual markerincrements based on
Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing the actual traceincrement and number of traces between the markers.
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to With the options first trace marker or last trace marker activated a marker will
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of be automatically included at the first or last trace position of the profile. Activating
lines after. this option is useful if no marker has been set at the start or end of the profile.

The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with a choosable name and the extension MAR. Each line of the ASCII
file consists of two columns: 1. column: trace number, 2. column: marker
increment. With activated option comment marker the comments of the comment
markers are stored in addition within the 3. colum.
The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
extension MAR. The table and the interactive window are automatically updated.
With the suboption ignore tracenr. activated the tracenumbers within the
ASCII-file will not be read in. This might be useful for example if parallel lines
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 191 2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 192

have been acquired and the markers have been set at identical not equidistant option ReadMarker allows the automatic recognition of markers directly from the
positions within the profiles. With the suboption view only activated the markers data, if they show certain properties. The program determines within a
from the ASCII-file are only displayed with red symbols. It is possible to enter a predefinable time window (1. time and 2. time within the filter parameter group)
shift value for the position of the first marker relative to the actual profile. This the average amplitude change in x-direction from trace to trace and also the
option might be useful to control the actual marker positions with an external average total amplitude.In addition the amplitude change from to the next trace
relocation file in order to check if some markers are missing or false. Of course but one is determined. If one of these two amplitude changes exceeds the
the option is only useful if the distance scale of the profile already fits quite well. average change value multiplied with a scaling factor (option scale) within this
The option reset resets the current edit values. time range and the number of extrema within the predinfed windows reaches the
value of extrama a marker is recognized. The automatically recognized markers
The program determines the corresponding number of traces between all set are displayed and can be reedited manually.
markers after the selection and executes a recalculation of the traces between
successive markers. If more traces within the original profile between successive
markers are available, some traces are omitted. If fewer traces are available,
some traces are added within each marker part until the wanted number of traces
is reached. The data before the first marker and behind the last marker are
ignored (exception if the option keep last traces is activated), i.e. the program
assumes that the beginning and the end of the profile are always indicated by a
marker. Please note that the data are modified by the interpolation.
The trace with the last marker position is also included. Therefore, the total
number of traces is increased by 1.

An example shall demonstrate the proceeding:

You have gained a profile of 0 to 10 meters with a particular scan rate (time).
There, 1200 traces were recorded. The program has calculated an average trace
interval of 0,00833 METERS from the distance specifications and the number of
recorded traces. The marker interval, i.e. the distance of the marker indications
recorded with the data in the field is 1 meter. You want to make the profile
spatially equidistant, now. The desired trace interval after making equal intervals,
i.e. the distance between two subsequent traces, shall be 0,01 METERS. This
value is in principle independent of the current average trace interval. If you
choose a smaller value the data volume in total is enlarged. For a larger value
than the current average trace interval the data volume is decreased accordingly.
You choose the option markerinterpol and specify for the marker increment the
value 1 METER and 0.01 METERS for the trace increment. Then you select on
the basis of the markers recorded with the data a total of 11 markers with the
mouse (indicate beginning and end of the profile - therefore 11 markers). After
confirmation of the selection and specification of the processing label the profile is
made equidistant. The result is a total of 1000+1 traces with a trace interval of
0,01 METERS.

The specification of the trace interval is determined by the lateral resolution

capacity, i.e. the investigation depth and the frequency spectrum of the source. It
is appropriate to find the best compromise between the smallest possible data
volume and necessary spatial sampling rate. Of course you can also
subsequently modify the spatial sample interval, e.g. with the options expand,
compress or stack traces.

Peculiarity for GSSI data recorded from older analogue apparatures:

The markers are placed on the data itself. Therefore, the option ReadMarker
cannot read the marker positions directly from the trace header. In this case the
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 193 2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 194

1.11.6.2 Traceincr-resampling The first sample will be the last one and the last sample will become the first
sample. The starting time will be unchanged. The option might be used if the data
The option performs a resampling of the data in x-direction for the given new samples are not correctly sorted during the data acquisition.
trace increment.

The filter parameter trace increment specifies the new trace increment. If the 1.11.6.6 XFlipProfile
new number of traces resulting from the new trace increment is smaller than the
trace number of the original file, some traces are omitted. If the new number of The option gives the possibility to flip a profile in x-direction.
traces resulting from the new trace increment is larger than the trace number of
the original file, some traces are added. In this case the traces are simply added For the inversion the program uses the RAM-memory if the number of traces is
and not interpolated between successive original traces. If you want the traces to smaller/equal 8192. If the profile will not be loaded into the kernel memory of the
be interpolated, you must use the option expand. computer because of insufficient RAM-memory, the option is carried out using the
This option might be useful if data with different trace increments are to be hard disk (this may take some time).
combined. The beginning and end coordinates in the profile direction are exchanged after
execution of the option if the beginning coordinates are larger than the end
coordinates.
1.11.6.3 Make equidist.traces

The option allows to interpolate non-equidistant data in such a way that the 1.11.6.7 Resort-traceheader
resulting data are equidistant. The precondition is that the true position of each
trace is stored in the parameter distance within the individual trace header. The option allows to resort the data in x-direction based on the distances stored
in the individual trace headers. The precondition is that the true position of each
The non-equidistant data are resampled in x-direction based on the filter trace is stored in the parameter distance within the individual trace header.
parameter trace incr. and the distance values stored in the individual trace
headers of each trace. In addition the start distance and the end distance The option allows the resorting in x-direction of the data based on the actual
(starting and ending position of the new profile) have to be specified in the given traceheader distances. After sorting the first trace corresponds to the minimum
distance dimension. By default the start distance and the end distance are distance and the last trace to the maximum one.
determined from the individual traceheaders. By the manual input you may
extract a distinct part from the profile.
As a result the data are equidistant in profile direction and all processing steps 1.11.6.8 Resort-group
like stacking or fk-filtering may be applied on.
The option allows a resorting of the data for a given trace group.

1.11.6.4 fix profile length The two filter parameter nr. of traces and trace difference must be entered. Nr. of
traces gives the number of traces which shall be combined. Trace difference
The option allows to fix the profile length to a given value. gives the trace number difference of the traces to be combined.

The filter parameter profile length specified the new length of the profile in the Example1: There are 48 traces. Resorting shall be done in the following way:
given distance dimension. If the original length is greater than this value the traces 1,13,25 and 37 are written on position 1,2,3 and 4; traces 2,14,26 and 38
corresponding traces will be omitted. In case of a smaller original profile length on position 5,6,7 and 8 and so on. The following inputs are necessary: trace
traces with zero amplitude values will be added. number: 4; trace incr.: 12.
Example2: There are two shot lines within one file. Each shot line consists of 120
shots with 24 channels and a receiver increment of 2 m. Two shots of each line
shall be combined together because the receiver positions are the same and the
1.11.6.5 YFlipProfile shot receiver positions differ by 1m (1. shot line: first receiver at 1 m from shot
position; 2. shot line: first receiver at 2 m from shot position). The 1. shot gather
The option allows to flip the data in time-(y-)direction. range from trace nr 1 to 2880 and the second one from trace n. 2881 to 5760.
Resorting is done by entering: nr of traces = 2, trace difference = 2880. After
resorting one complete shot gather results with a total amount of 120 shots and
48 channels with a receiver increment of 1m and the first receiver at 1 m).
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 195 2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 196

One useful application is the possibility of putting together different shot lines (see 1.11.6.9 Yo-Yo section
example 2). For this you must create the two different lines using the conversion
sequence combine lines/shots under Import ConversionMode and then combine The option allows the separate presentation of downhole-crosshole reflection
these two lines within one single file using the option insert profile (attach). This data (source and receiver hole) coming from below and from above a predefined
combined file may be resorting in the way described above. depthpoint.

Only those shot-receiver combinations are sorted out which direct wave is going
through a choosable depth midpoint resulting in a so called Yo-Yo section. In
constant velocity media Yo-Yo reflections from an interface have constant path
lengths. Therefore any horizontally layered reflector will appear on a Yo-Yo
section as a flat one.
The dataset must consist of different shots each containing the same number of
equidistant traces (receivers). The total number of traces within the dataset is the
number of shots multiplied with the number of receivers. The receivers as well as
the shots must be sorted with increasing depths. The shot and receiver
coordinates must be defined within the traceheader.
First the data are automatically separated into two datasets one containing the
upward travelling waves and the other one containing the downward travelling
waves. For that purpose a fk-filtering is used. The filtering is done for each shot
independently. For that purpose the complete dataset is subdivided into n
different subsets each containing equal number of receiver traces (option trace
number). Afterwards the data are sorted around the chosen midpoint.
The option needs the following inputs:
midpoint: defines the midpoint depthpoint for creating the Yo-Yo section. Only
these shot-receiver combinations are taken into account which direct wave is
going through this midpoint. (within the range of the chosen binsize).
binsize: defines the range for cutting the midpoint (see above). A value not equal
0 is necessary if source and receiver coordinates and the midpoint coordinate do
not exactly match.
trace number: enter the number of traces per shot. The input is necessary for the
fk-filtering of the individual shots.
velocity: enter the velocity which is used for calculating the traveltime of the direct
wave from the shot to
the receiver. This
traveltime is
subtracted from the
traveltime of each
trace.

The following pictures

show an example with
41 shots between 50
and 90 m and 37
receivers between 52
and 88 m (picture on
the left shows part of
the original crosshole
data - 6 shots).
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 197 2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 198

The Yo-Yo section has been created around the midpoint 70 m with a binsize of 1.11.6.10 Traceinterpol-3DFile
0.5 m, 37 number of traces and a velocity of 1000 m/s. On the right panel the
model is shown. The option allows to reinterpolate each 2D-line of a 3D-file in x-direction.

A 3D-file consists of several 2D lines each separated by a constant increment

(see also line increment under fileheader coordinates). The 2D lines are stored
successively within the 3D file. Normally the 2D lines should have the same
length and the same number of traces. If the number of traces within each 2D-
line differs, this option serves to compensate for these irregularities.

You must enter the two filter parameters trace increment and profile length in the
given distance dimension. Trace increment specifies the wanted trace increment
after interpolation. Profile length specifies the length of each 2D profile line of
the 3D file. The program recalculates the number of traces within each 2D-line
based on the wanted trace increment and profile length using the following
formula: calculated trace numbers = profile length / trace increment.

Use this option if the single 2D-lines within a 3D-file don`t have the same number
of traces because of some irregularities during the data acquisition (e.g. slip of
the measure wheel).

1.11.6.11 XFlip-3DFile

The option gives the possibility to flip the individual ensembles of a 3D-file in x-
direction.

You must enter the Flip mode within the filterparameter group. Enter 0 if all
lliterature: Whiteley, R.J., Holmes W.H. and R.D. Dowle, 1990. A New Method of ensembles within the 3D-files shall be flipped. Enter 1 if every 2. ensemble shall
Downhole-Crosshole Seismics for Geotechnical Investigation, Exploration be flipped starting at ensemble number 2. Enter 2 if every 2. ensemble shall be
Geophysics, 21, 83-89. flipped starting at ensemble number 1. The values 1 or 2 are useful if the data
have been acquired meandering.

1.11.6.12 Shift-3DFile

The option gives the possibility to shift each or every 2. ensemble for a definable
range.

The shift mode defines which ensembles shall be shifted. Enter 0 if every
ensemble shall be shifted. Enter 1 for shifting every 2. ensemble starting at
ensemble number 2 and enter 2 for shifting every 2. ensemble starting at
ensemble number 1. The shift range in the given distance dimension defines the
range for the shift of each 2. (or each) ensemble.

For example the option may be useful if a systematic shift of the traces has been
occurred during the meandering acquisition of a 3D-datafile.
2D-Dataanalysis, Trace Interpolation/Resorting 199 2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 200

1.11.6.13 create 3D-ensembles 1.11.7 Edit traces/traceranges

This option allows you to subdivide the actual profile into different 2D-lineparts. The following edit possibilities are included within the Edit traces/traceranges
This option allows you for example to redefine the individual ensembles (2D- group:
lines) of a 3D-file (the Ensemble-Nr. within the traceheaders will be actualized).
remove
With the suboption automatic activated you only have to enter the number of interpolate
traces per linepart (filter parameter: nr.of traces). In this case the actual profile is extract
subdivided into equidistant 2D-lineparts each containing the given number of replace
traces. reverse polarity
With the suboption manual activated you must manually enter the start position set to zero
of each linepart within the table or using the left mouse button within the profile. duplicate
move
insert profile
add profile
subtract profile
insert zero traces
remove zero traces
combine files f.CMP
merge files
merge in timedir.

When activating the options remove, interpolate, extract, replace, reverse

polarity, set to zero, duplicate and move a table appears. With all these options
the inputs may be entered either interactively within the original profile or using
the table input.

The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 201 2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 202

1.11.7.1 Remove mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated
you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of
This option allows to delete individual traces or trace ranges. the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the
left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
After having activated the option remove a table with the parameters 1.trace nr. transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image.
and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace ranges. If
the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr. must have The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
the same value. directory with the name interpol and a choosable extension. Each line of the
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: tracenumber1, 2. column: range
option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated interpol and any extension. The table and the interactive window are
you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of automatically updated.
the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the The option reset resets the current edit values.
left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image. The option generate per.groups allows the interpolation of periodic groups of
traces. One possible application is the elimination of groups of traces disturbed
The number of traces in the processed file decreases according to the defined by near surface periodic metal objects to be repeated periodically (e.g. rails).
trace ranges. Please note that the trace headers are maintained for all remaining Before activating this option the following filter parameter within the filter group
traces. This mainly concerns the coordinates. A shifting of the distance box must be entered: start distance and end distance define the distance range
coordinate according to the number of deleted traces does not occur. for the interpolation. In addition start distance characterizes the begin of the first
group of traces to be interpolated. Group interval defines the distance between
the single groups and group length defines the length of each individual group.
1.11.7.2 Remove range All inputs are in the given distance dimension. After activating the option generate
per.groups the actual table inputs are reset and recalculated based on the actual
filter parameters.
This option allows to delete a range of traces at the beginning and at the ending
of the profile. Only the interpolation of periodic groups based on the set filter parameters is
supported within the Sequence Processing.
The filter parameter front range and back range determine the size of the trace
ranges (in the given distance dimension) to be removed. Enter a size of 0 for the
corresponding parameter if you do not wish to remove a range either at the 1.11.7.4 Extract
beginning or at the ending. The filter parameter upd.coord. allows you to
determine if the starting and ending coordinates in profile direction are The option allows to extract individual traces or trace ranges, respectively, from
automatically updated. Enter a value different from 0 if you do not wish the start the primary file.
coordinates to change.
After having activated the option extract a table with the parameters 1.trace nr.
and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace ranges. If
1.11.7.3 Interpolate the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr. must have
the same value.
The option allows to replace individual traces or trace ranges with an interpolation The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the
of the two neighbouring traces. The interpolation is performed over samples with option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left
same time. When selecting marginal traces the corresponding neighbouring trace mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated
is duplicated. you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of
the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the
After having activated the option interpolate a table with the parameters 1.trace left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
nr. and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image.
ranges. If the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr.
must have the same value. The trace headers remain. The extracted traces or trace ranges are saved trace-
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the oriented sequentially in increasing order.
option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left
2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 203 2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 204

The option is not available within the Sequence Processing. The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
reverse and any extension. The table and the interactive window are
automatically updated.
1.11.7.5 Replace The option reset resets the current edit values.

The option allows to replace individual traces or trace ranges at equal traces by The option is also available within the Sequence Processing.
the corresponding traces of another file.

After having activated the option replace a table with the parameters 1.trace nr. 1.11.7.7 Set to zero
and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace ranges. If
the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr. must have The option allows to set individual traces or trace ranges to zero.
the same value.
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the After having activated the option set to zero a table with the parameters 1.trace
option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left nr. and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace
mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated ranges. If the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr.
you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of must have the same value.
the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the
left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left
transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image. mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated
you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of
The option load within the SecondLineGroupBox enables the opening of the file the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the
from which the traces to be replaced should be taken. The replacement is left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
performed at equal traces, that is the data at the specified trace positions or trace transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image.
ranges, respectively, are replaced by the data of the new file at the identical trace
positions.
1.11.7.8 Duplicate
The option is not available within the Sequence Processing.
The option allows to duplicate individual traces or trace ranges.

1.11.7.6 Reverse polarity After having activated the option duplicate a table with the parameters 1.trace
nr. and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual trace
The option allows to reverse the polarity of individual traces or trace ranges, this ranges. If the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace nr.
means a phase shift by 180 degrees. must have the same value.
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the
After having activated the option reverse polarity a table with the parameters option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left
1.trace nr. and 2. trace nr. which allows the interactive input of the individual mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated
trace ranges. If the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr. and 2.trace you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of
nr. must have the same value. the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. With the left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
option EditTraces activated you may select the desired trace by pressing the left transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image.
mouse button at the desired position. With the option EditTraceRanges activated
you may select the desired trace range by clicking on the uppermost left corner of The number of traces in the processed file increases according to the number of
the area and dragging the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the selected traces.
left mouse button pressed. The chosen trace numbers are automatically
transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image. The option is not available within the Sequence Processing.
The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
directory with the name reverse and a choosable extension. Each line of the
ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: tracenumber1, 2. column:
tracenumber2
2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 205 2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 206

1.11.7.9 Move 1.11.7.11 Mix profile

The option allows to move individual traces in time(y)-direction in order to balance This option gives the possibility to add, subtrace, multiply or divide a second
possible trigger errors. This movement corresponds to a static correction. profile acting on the primary file. The precondition for this is that the two profiles
have an identical number of traces and of samples. The distance or depth values
After having activated the option move a table with the parameters trace nr. and written in the trace header are averaged, if the values of both sections do not
time in the given timedimension which allows the interactive input of the agree.
individual trace ranges. If the trace range consists of only one trace 1.trace nr.
and 2.trace nr. must have the same value. The option load within the SecondLineGroupBox enables the opening of the file
The traces (trace ranges) can also be defined within the original profile. Choose which is to be added, subtracted, multiplied or divided by.
the desired trace by the left mouse and move it in time direction with pressed
mouse key. The chosen trace number and the moving time are automatically The options within the MixProfileGroupBox allow you to define which function
transferred to the table input and vice versa to the profile image. shall be used.

The option is not available within the Sequence Processing. The option is not available within the Sequence Processing.

1.11.7.10 Insert profile 1.11.7.12 Combine files f.CMP

The option allows to insert a second file at a distinct position. This option gives the possibility to combine together the original line with several
secondary lines into one new file.
The options EditTrace, Attach at end and use coordinates control the position of
the second file to be placed. The options single shots and zero offset lines control the data type of the lines to
With the option EditTrace activated you may specify any trace number within the be CMP combined and therefore the sorting of the traces within the new line.
table input or by clicking within the original profile. This trace number defines the With the option single shots activated all data files are read in subsequently and
position of the second line to be placed. written out. The first file is the original line, the second one the first secondary file
Activating the option Attach at end means that combining is done at the end of and so on. For example this option serves for a combination of several shot
the first profile independently from the original starting position of the second file. gathers analogous to the option combine lines/shots within the Import format
Activating the option use coordinates means that combining is done at the specification.
starting position of the second file. One application is the combination of two files, With the option zero offset lines activated the combining of the lines is done at
which do have different ending and starting coordinates (e.g. because of a non the position of each trace. This option is necessary for a subsequent CMP-
measurable area). The non measured area will be filled up with zero traces. If the processing of constant-offset lines. Example: you want to combine 4 profiles
profiles overlap the overlapping traces of the original profile will be put at the end trace by trace: After finishing the option the traces are sorted as followed: 1. trace
of the processed file. If this is not desired use the option merge files (chap. of the original profile, 1. trace of the 1. secondary file, 1. trace of the 2. secondary
1.11.7.13) with the suboption attach profiles instead. file, 1. trace of the 3. secondary file, 2. trace of the original file, 2. trace of the 1.
secondary file and so on. The trace increment and the time increment as well as
The option load within the SecondLineGroupBox enables the opening of the file the number of traces of each profile should be identical. The geometry (shot-,
which is to be inserted. receiver and CMP-coordinates) are automatically updated based on the
coordinates (profile coordinates and S/R-distance - see also fileheader
The resulting number of traces will be increased depending on the starting coordinates and fileheader input1 ) stored in the profile header of each profile.
coordinate of the second profile if the option use coordinates is activated or on
the number of traces of the inserted profile with the option EditTrace or Attach at The option load within the SecondLineGroupBox enables the opening of the
end activated. secondary files to be combined. The files are automatically sorted. Therefore, the
order of choosing the files is of no importance.
The option is not available within the Sequence Processing. The option combine files f.CMP is useful if the data shall be processed within the
CMP-processing afterwards.

The option is not available within the Sequence Processing.

2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 207 2D-Dataanalysis, Edit traces/traceranges 208

1.11.7.13 merge files The traces can also be defined within the original profile. You may select the
desired trace by pressing the left mouse button at the desired position. The
This option gives the possibility to merge the original line with several secondary chosen trace numbers are automatically transferred to the table input and vice
lines into one new file. versa to the profile image.
The merging is done based on the start coordinates of the single lines stored
within the individual fileheaders (see also fileheader coordinates). The If the value for trace nr. is set to 0 a corresponding zero traces range is inserted
traceincrement, the timeincrement and the starttime of each line must be before the first trace.
identical.
The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
Two different merging possibilities are given: directory with the name insert0 and a choosable extension. Each line of the
ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: tracenumber1, 2. column: range
With the suboption attach profiles activated it is assumed that the profiles do not The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
overlap and there might be gaps inbetween. The traceincrement of the resulting insert0 and any extension. The table and the interactive window are automatically
line will be the original traceincrement. The resulting profile starts at the smallest updated.
startcoordinate and ends at the largest endcoordinate of the original profiles. The The option reset resets the current edit values.
non measured area will be filled up with zero traces. If the profiles overlap only
the overlapping traces of the newly attached profile will be kept (in contrast to the
option insert profile, chap. 1.11.7.10). 1.11.7.15 merge in timedir.

With the option merge inline activated it is assumed that the startcoordinates of This option allows you to merge different lines into one new file whereby the
the different lines only differ by a fracture of the traceincrement. The merging is done in timedirection trace by trace. The data of one trace of all
traceincrement of the resulting line will be the original traceincrement divided by profiles are merged into one new trace. The new number of samples is the sum
the number of the merged profiles. of the samples of the individual lines.
example: 4 lines have to been merged together. Each line has a trace increment
of 1 meter. The start coordinates of the individual lines differ by 0.25 meter. The option serves for multiplexing multichannel data which are automatically
original line: start coordinate: 0 demultiplexed during the import. The program automatically searches for the files
1. sec. line: start coordinate: 0.25 to be merged. This means that all datafiles with identical filenames except the
2. sec. line: start coordinate: 0.5 last character which represents the channel number (t (see also Import filename
3. sec. line: start coordinate: 0.75 specification, chap. 1.5.2) are assumed to be the multichannel data to be merged
The traces of the merged file are sorted as followed: 1. trace of the original into one file.
profile, 1. trace of the 1. secondary file, 1. trace of the 2. secondary file, 1. trace The number of traces for all lines to be merged should be equal as well as the
of the 3. secondary file, 2. trace of the original file, 2. trace of the 1. secondary file timeincrement.
and so on.

The option load within the SecondLineGroupBox enables the opening of the 1.11.7.16 remove zero traces
secondary files to be combined. Multiple choice is available using the shift or strg
key. The option allows to automatically remove all traces with zero amplitude values.
The traceincrement as well as the startcoordinate will be kept. The endcoordinate
The option is not available within the Sequence Processing. is updated based on the new number of traces.

1.11.7.14 insert zero traces

T he option allows to insert traces with zero amplitude values.

After having activated the option insert zero traces a table appears with the
parameters trace nr. and range which allow the interactive input of the position
(trace nr.) and the range of zero traces to be inserted. The range must be entered
manually for each position in the given distance dimension.
2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 209 2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 210

1.11.8 2D-Filter 1.11.8.1 Running average

The following filter possibilities are included in the declipping/arithmetic functions This filter acts on the chosen number of traces. The filter performs a running
group: average over a choosable number of traces for each time step.

running average The running average is performed over a number of traces (parameter average
subtracting average traces). The max. bandwidth is restricted to 256 traces to be averaged. For a
background removal bandwidth of 4 the current sample, the next two in horizontal direction to the left
average xy-filter and the next two in horizontal direction to the right, i.e. five samples for each time
median xy-filter value, are taken into account. If between the current sample and the first or the
compress last trace are fewer samples than half the window width, the window width is
expand decreased on one side. From these five samples the mean value is calculated
stack traces and assigned to the current sample as new value. The filter is the more effective
subtract traces the larger the selected bandwidth.
compress 3D-file It is possible to restrict the affected time area of the filter. For this you must enter
within the filter parameter group the start time and the end time for which the
For the filter background removal within this group the original trace is shown filter shall be applied on. The resting data part will remain unfiltered. By default
together with the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the start time is set to the time-begin of each trace and end time is set to the max.
spectrum of the actually filtered trace. Additionally the reference trace calculated time of each trace.
from the filter input parameters is shown.
The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the This filter method suppresses trace dependent noise. Its effect is to emphasize
resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is horizontally coherent energy.
stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds,
respectively. 1.11.8.2 Subtracting average
In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of This filter acts on the chosen number of traces. The filter performs a subtracting
the corresponding spectra. average over a choosable number of traces for each time step. The filter
performs a so called sliding background removal.
The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number or by clicking in the The subtracting average is performed over a number of traces (parameter
primary file using the left mouse button. average traces). The max. bandwidth is restricted to 256 traces to be averaged.
For a bandwidth of 4 the current sample, the next two in horizontal direction to
The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the the left and the next two in horizontal direction to the right, i.e. five samples for
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the each time value, are taken into account. If between the current sample and the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters first or the last trace are fewer samples than half the window width, the window
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this width is decreased on one side. From these five samples the mean value is
control takes too much computer time. calculated. This mean value is subtracted from the value of the current sample
and the result is assigned to the current sample as new value. The filter is the
After having specified the filter parameter you must enter the processing label more effective the smaller the selected bandwidth.
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e. It is possible to restrict the affected time area of the filter. For this you must enter
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing. After within the filter parameter group the start time and the end time for which the
activating the processing label editing a list box appears which shows all labels filter shall be applied on. The resting data part will remain unfiltered. By default
already used for the actual line. start time is set to the time-begin of each trace and end time is set to the max.
time of each trace.
Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to This filter method suppresses horizontally coherent energy. Its effect is to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of emphasize signals which vary laterally (e.g. diffractions).
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 211 2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 212

1.11.8.3 Background removal attention: it might happen that the filter causes non real signals. This holds true
when the averaged time series contains energy which is not present within any
This filter acts on the chosen number of traces. The filter performs a subtracting part(s) of the profile.
of an averaged trace (tracerange) which is built up from the chosen time/distance
range of the actual section. The filter performs a so-called background removal.
1.11.8.4 average xy-filter
For this you must define the time/distance range for building up the average
trace. This average trace is shown in the reference trace window. The time range
is defined by the filter parameters start time and end time. The distance range is The filter calculates the average over a choosable xy-area for each time step.
defined by the filter parameters start distance and end distance. It is also
possible to define this data range interactively within the original profile. Click on The average is performed both over a number of traces (parameter nr. of traces
the uppermost left corner of the area to be chosen and drag the mouse to the (x)) and over a number of samples (parameter nr. of samples (y)). The max.
wanted lowermost right corner with the left mouse button pressed. bandwidth in x-direction is restricted to 256 traces to be averaged. The filter area
For each selected time sample the selected traces are averaged automatically in is centered around the current data point. Example: nr of traces (x) is set to 4 and
x-direction so that you get a time series for the subsequent subtraction. This time number of samples (y) is set to 8: around the current data point a data area of
series is subtracted from every trace of the profile. The noise signal you wish to 5*9 data points used for determine the average. The filter is the more effective
eliminate for example could be the range of the first arrival which is superposed the larger the selected area.
locally with diffraction arrivals of shallow diffractors. Then you have to select a It is possible to restrict the affected time area of the filter. For this you must enter
range of first arrivals where no diffractions are expected. Other noise that can be within the filter parameter group the start time and the end time for which the
eliminated is, e.g. electronic signals. filter shall be applied on. The resting data part will remain unfiltered. By default
With the definition of the time range for building up the time series the affected start time is set to the time-begin of each trace and end time is set to the max.
time area of the filter is automatically restricted to that range. The resting data time of each trace.
part will remain unfiltered.
To be considered for the sequence processing: If the lines have different distance This filter method suppresses trace and time dependent noise. It acts as a
or time ranges it might be useful to select the start distance and end distance lowpass filter both in x- and y-(time) direction.
and/or the start time and end time in such a way that the largest ranges occurring
within the lines are taken into account. Then it is sure that the filtertrace is built up
for all traces for each line. 1.11.8.5 median xy-filter
The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the reference trace is The filter calculates the median over a choosable xy-area for each time step.
determined from the whole line, from a special distance range (and dist.range
only respectively) or whether it is automatically determined for line parts The median is performed both over a number of traces (parameter nr. of traces
separated by each other by a new ensemble number. When using whole profile (x)) and over a number of samples (parameter nr. of samples (y)). The max.
or line parts the filter parameters start distance and end distance are of no bandwidth in x-direction is restricted to 256 traces to be averaged. The filter area
importance because always all traces within the whole profile or within one is centered around the current data point. Example: nr of traces (x) is set to 4 and
ensemble group are used for building up the filter trace. Activate the option line number of samples (y) is set to 8: around the current data point a data area of
parts if the file is composed of different 2D-lines or shots (e.g. a 3D-file consisting 5*9 data points used for determine the median. The filter is the more effective the
of different 2D-parallel lines). larger the selected area.
It is possible to restrict the affected time area of the filter. For this you must enter
With the option dist.range only activated only the traces lying within the chosen within the filter parameter group the start time and the end time for which the
distance range are filtered in contrast to the option distance range where only the filter shall be applied on. The resting data part will remain unfiltered. By default
filter trace is determined from the chosen distance range but all traces are start time is set to the time-begin of each trace and end time is set to the max.
filtered. time of each trace.

With this option you can eliminate temporally consistent noise from the whole This filter method suppresses trace and time dependent noise and spike events.
profile and therefore possibly make signals visible, previously covered by this It acts as a lowpass filter both in x- and y-(time) direction.
noise. This filter method also suppresses horizontally coherent energy. Its effect
is also to emphasize signals which vary laterally (e.g. diffractions).
2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 213 2D-Dataanalysis, 2D-Filter 214

1.11.8.6 Compress 1.11.8.9 Subtract traces

This option allows both a compression in time-(Y-)direction and in distance-(X- The option allows the temporal simultaneous subtraction of a selectable number
)direction. of traces from the first trace within each group.

The filter parameters factor (x-dir.) and factor (y-dir.) define the size of the As filter parameter enter the nr. of traces to be subtracted from the first trace
compressing window in x- and y-direction, this means every which trace and within each group. The number of traces within each group is nr. of traces + 1. A
every which sample will be saved. The filter parameter start trace means, which useful parameter value is 1. In this case alway the second trace is subtracted
trace will be used. The filter parameter start sample means which sample will be from the first one within a group of 2 traces.
used. Example: factor (x-dir.): 3, factor (y-dir.): 2, start trace: 2, start sample: 1.
The data are reduced to every 3. trace and 2. sample starting at trace number 2 The filter might be applied for shear wave-data with different polarities of the p-
and sample number 1. The samples or traces not needed anymore are omitted. waves. The data must be sorted in such a way that subsequent traces have the
Make sure before applying this option that due to compressing no aliasing different polarities.
problems occur.

A compression is reasonable before the application of computing-time intensive 1.11.8.10 Compress 3D-file
processing steps (e.g. fk-Filter).
This option allows a compression of a 3D-file into the two directions. A 3D-file
consists of several parallel 2D-lines separated by the so called line increment.
1.11.8.7 Expand
The filter parameters factor (line dir.) and factor (line perp.) define the size of
This option allows both an expansion in time-(Y-)direction and in distance-(X- the compressing window in line-direction and perpendicual to the line direction.
)direction. The filter parameter start trace means, which trace will be used first. The filter
parameter start 2D-line means which 2D-line will be used first. Example: factor
The filter parameters factor (x-dir.) and factor (y-dir.) define the size of the (line dir.): 3, factor (line perp.): 2, start trace: 2, start 2D-line: 1. The data are
expansion window in x- and y-direction. The values between the old sample reduced to every 3. trace in line direction and 2. trace perpendicular to the 2D-
values or traces, respectively, are linearly interpolated. lines starting at trace number 2 and 2D-line number 1. The samples or traces not
needed anymore are omitted. Make sure before applying this option that due to
Please note that with the application of this option the resolution capacity is not compressing no aliasing problems occur.
increased. Though, a reasonable application is for example an enhanced
visualization. A compression is reasonable before the application of computing-time intensive
processing steps (e.g. 3D-migration, see chap. 1.11.9).

1.11.8.8 Stack traces

The option allows the temporal simultaneous stacking of a selectable number of

traces.

As filter parameter enter the nr. of traces to be stacked. In contrast to the option
compress here no data are omitted but the mean value for the chosen number of
traces is calculated for each time sample. The total number of traces decreases
according to the number of stack traces. Please make sure before applying this
option that no aliasing problems occur due to stacking.

The filter might be applied in order to enhance the signal to noise ratio.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 215 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 216

1.11.9 Migration
The following migration and timedepth conversion possibilities are included in the
migration/time-depth conversion group:

diffraction stack
Kirchhoff migration
fk migration (Stolt)
diffraction 2D-veloc
Kirchhoff 2D-veloc
FD-migration
3D diffraction stack
3D Kirchh. migration
timedepth conversion
semblance
3D-semblance

The arrows near the original trace and original spectrum are used to enhance the
resolution of the trace and spectrum windows. The trace or the spectrum is
stretched up and down when using these arrows. The spectrum scale is Hz, if the
time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time scale is in nano-seconds,
respectively.
In addition to the zooming arrows there exist an equivalent spin button which
allows to move the starting point of the primary and filtered traces as well as of
the corresponding spectra.

The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
windows can be chosen using the option trace number or by clicking in the
primary file using the left mouse button.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group. With the option Apply on example trace activated the
effect of the filter parameters is online controlled when changing the parameters
by showing both the original and filtered trace. Deactivate this parameter if this
control takes too much computer time.

After having specified the filter parameter you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing. After
activating the processing label editing a list box appears which shows all labels
already used for the actual line.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 217 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 218

1.11.9.1 Diffraction stack 1.11.9.2 Kirchhoff migration

A simple time migration (diffraction stack) of a two-dimensional profile on the A time migration of a two-dimensional profile on the basis of a constant velocity is
basis of a constant velocity is performed. The profile must represent a so called performed. The profile must represent a so-called zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and
zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location. The receiver have to be at the same location. The goal of the migration is to trace
goal of the migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to their back the reflection and diffraction energy to their "source".
"source".
The Kirchhoff migration in done in the x-t range, this means that a weighted
The diffraction stack in done in the x-t range, this means that an unweighted summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperbola of preset
summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperbola of preset bandwidth is performed. Before the summation the original profile is
bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the number of traces (parameter differentiated. The bandwidth means the number of traces (parameter
summation width) over which shall be summed. Here the total number of traces summation width) over which shall be summed. Here the total number of traces
(on both sides) has to be specified. A larger number of traces naturally increases (on both sides) has to be specified. A larger number of traces naturally increases
computing time significantly and is only reasonable for a formation of clearly computing time significantly and is only reasonable for a formation of clearly
visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend over a large trace range. With a visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend over a large trace range. With a
summation width smaller than 256 the calculation of the hyperbolas is only done summation width smaller than 256 the calculation of the hyperbolas is only done
once which also saves a lot of computation time. once which also saves a lot of computation time.
Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the
distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be
obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the calculated hyperbola can obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the calculated hyperbola can
be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive continuous be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive continuous
variation of the velocity. The precondition for good determination of the velocity is variation of the velocity. The precondition for good determination of the velocity is
the existence of diffraction arrivals. Here, also the success of the migration can the existence of diffraction arrivals. Here, also the success of the migration can
be realized best. Ideally they should shrink to a very small area. Beside the be realized best. Ideally they should shrink to a very small area. Beside the
contraction of the diffraction energy another aim of migration is to shift the arrivals contraction of the diffraction energy another aim of migration is to shift the arrivals
to their "true" position. This is important for steep dipping reflectors. to their "true" position. This is important for steep dipping reflectors.
The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters
start time and end time define the time range. start time and end time define the time range.

The switch groupbox allows you to specify whether the summation is performed The switch groupbox allows you to specify whether the summation is performed
within the whole profile or whether individual data parts are automatically within the whole profile or whether individual data parts are automatically
determined for line parts separated by each other by a new ensemble number. determined for line parts separated by each other by a new ensemble number.
When using line parts, the migration is restricted to the area of each individual When using line parts, the migration is restricted to the area of each individual
linepart. Activate the option line parts, if the file is composed of different 2D-lines linepart. Activate the option line parts, if the file is composed of different 2D-lines
or shots (e.g. a 3D-file consisting of different 2D-parallel lines) because otherwise or shots (e.g. a 3D-file consisting of different 2D-parallel lines) because otherwise
data are summed up which have not been acquired within one 2D-line. data are summed up which have not been acquired within one 2D-line.

The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does
not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the
migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions
are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is
useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example. useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 219 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 220

1.11.9.3 Fk migration (Stolt) 1.11.9.4 diffraction 2D-veloc

A fast fk-migration of a two-dimensional profile after Stolt (1978, Geophysics 43, A simple time migration (diffraction stack) of a two-dimensional profile on the
23-48) on the basis of a constant velocity is performed. The profile must basis of a 2D-velocity distribution is performed. The profile must represent a so-
represent a so-called zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the called zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location.
same location. The goal of the migration is to trace back the reflection and The goal of the migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to
diffraction energy to their "source". their "source".

The method works in the frequency-wavenumber (fk) range (see also fk The diffraction stack in done in the x-t range, this means that an unweighted
spectrum). Within the fk-range a variable transform is done based on the entered summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperbola of preset
constant velocity (frequency is transformed onto the vertical wavenumber). If bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the number of traces (parameter
only a small data volume in time direction is available one should use an summation width) over which shall be summed. Here the total number of traces
interpolation for this transformation. Such an interpolation is not very stable. That (on both sides) has to be specified. A larger number of traces naturally increases
is why such an interpolation is not used in the program. This means the data computing time significantly and is only reasonable for a formation of clearly
volume in the f-k-range in direction of the variable to be transformed (in this case visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend over a large trace range. With a
the frequency) must be large enough. That is why the Stolt-migration should only summation width smaller than 128 the calculation of the hyperbolas is only done
be used if the number of wavelengths inside the time window to be considered once which also saves a lot of computation time.
exceeds a critical value (about 10-15). If this does not hold true, the time window The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters
must be enlarged. This is done if the filter scaling factor is set to a value larger start time and end time define the time range.
than 1. This factor allows to automatically exceed the time range by the given
value (e.g. enter a factor 2: the time range is doubled and therefore the number The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the 2D-velocity distribution is
of wavelengths within this window). obtained from the CMP-analysis (see also CMP 2D-model) or from the
The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters hyperbola adaptation (see also velocity adaptation) or directly read from a
start time and end time define the time range. Reflexw formatted rasterfile.
The rasterfile may either contain the mean velocities (option rasterfile mean) or
The switch groupbox allows you to specify whether the migration is performed the layervelocities (option rasterfile layer). The velocities (amplitudes) must be in
within the whole profile or whether individual data parts are automatically m/ns or epsilon for GPR data and in m/s for seismic or acoustic data. The
determined for line parts separated by each other by a new ensemble number. rasterfile may either be a depth model (y-axis always meter) or a twoway
When using line parts, the migration is restricted to the area of each individual traveltime model (y-axis corresponds to the two way traveltime). The x-axis is
linepart. Activate the option line parts if the file is composed of different 2D-lines always the distance.
or shots (e.g. a 3D-file consisting of different 2D-parallel lines) because otherwise The current VRMS- or average velocity for each point of the profile is determined
data are summed up which have not been acquired within one 2D-line. from the 2D-distribution and the summation is performed with this velocity, i.e. for
the calculation of the current diffraction hyperbola only a constant velocity is
assumed. However this is a valid approximation if the diffraction branches do not
First the x-t data are transformed into the f-k-range (see also option fk-filter). After extend over a large laterally heavily fluctuating area. For Ground Penetrating
having done the transformation the migration process will be done and after that Radar data this is normally always guaranteed, for seismic data the summation
the back transformation into the x-t-range is performed. width has to be reduced accordingly in the case of strong lateral velocity
fluctuations. If the migration shall be done using the "correct" 2D-velocity
In comparison to the Kirchhoff migration one hast not to enter a summation width distribution, the FD-migration must be used.
but the "summation" is always done using all traces. Therefore the Kirchhoff After having started the migration, the desired 2D-velocity distribution going to be
migration often gives better results if a restriction of the summation width is the basis of the migration is queried. The 2D-velocity distribution is shown in a
desired (e.g. if the diffractions only extend over a few traces). The Stolt migration separate window.
is mostly preferable for the migration of extended or steep reflectors.
The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does
The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the
not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions
migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is
are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 221 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 222

1.11.9.5 Kirchhoff 2D-veloc 1.11.9.6 FD-migration

A time migration of a two-dimensional profile on the basis of a 2D-velocity A time FiniteDifference(FD) migration of a two-dimensional profile on the basis of
distribution is performed. The profile must represent a so-called zero-offset a 2D-velocity distribution is performed. The profile must represent a so-called
profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location. The goal of the zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location. The
migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to their "source". goal of the migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to their
"source".
The Kirchhoff 2D-veloc migration in done in the x-t range, this means that a
weighted summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperbola of The FD-migration in done based on the one-way scalar wave equation. A 15/
preset bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the number of traces approximation is used.
(parameter summation width) over which shall be summed. Here the total The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters
number of traces (on both sides) has to be specified. A larger number of traces start time and end time define the time range. The parameter nom.frequency
naturally increases computing time significantly and is only reasonable for a defines the main frequency of the signal in GHz (timedimension=ns) or Hz
formation of clearly visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend over a large trace (timedimension ms or :s), respectively. These parameters are also stored within
range. With a summation width smaller than 128 the calculation of the hyperbolas the fileheader.
is only done once which also saves a lot of computation time.
The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the 2D-velocity distribution is
start time and end time define the time range. obtained from the CMP-analysis (see also CMP 2D-model) or from the
hyperbola adaptation (see also velocity adaptation). In contradiction to the
The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the 2D-velocity distribution is Kirchhoff 2D-veloc and diffraction 2D-veloc migration methods the "correct" 2D-
obtained from the CMP-analysis (see also CMP 2D-model) or from the velocity distribution is used for the downward continuation of the wavefield.
hyperbola adaptation (see also velocity adaptation) or directly read from a After having started the migration, the desired 2D-velocity distribution going to be
Reflexw formatted rasterfile. the basis of the migration is queried. The 2D-velocity distribution is shown in a
The rasterfile may either contain the mean velocities (option rasterfile mean) or separate window.
the layervelocities (option rasterfile layer). The velocities (amplitudes) must be in
m/ns or epsilon for GPR data and in m/s for seismic or acoustic data. The The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does
rasterfile may either be a depth model (y-axis always meter) or a twoway not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the
traveltime model (y-axis corresponds to the two way traveltime). The x-axis is migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions
always the distance. are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is
The current VRMS- or average velocity for each point of the profile is determined useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
from the 2D-distribution and the summation is performed with this velocity, i.e. for
the calculation of the current diffraction hyperbola only a constant velocity is
assumed. However this is a valid approximation if the diffraction branches do not
extend over a large laterally heavily fluctuating area. For Ground Penetrating
Radar data this is normally always guaranteed, for seismic data the summation
width has to be reduced accordingly in the case of strong lateral velocity
fluctuations. If the migration shall be done using the "correct" 2D-velocity
distribution, the FD-migration must be used.
After having started the migration, the desired 2D-velocity distribution going to be
the basis of the migration is queried. The 2D-velocity distribution is shown in a
separate window.

The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does
not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the
migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions
are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is
useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 223 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 224

1.11.9.7 3D-diffraction stack 1.11.9.8 3D-Kirchh. migration

A simple time 3D-migration (diffraction stack) of a three-dimensional profile on the A 3D timemigration of a three-dimensional profile on the basis of a constant
basis of a constant velocity is performed. The profile must be stored as a 3D-file velocity is performed. The profile must be stored as a 3D-file (see also option
(see also option Open 3D-file under 3D-File MenuItem) and must represent a so- Open 3D-file under 3D-File MenuItem) and must represent a so-called zero-offset
called zero-offset profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location. profile, i.e. shot and receiver have to be at the same location. The goal of the
The goal of the migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to migration is to trace back the reflection and diffraction energy to their "source".
their "source".
The Kirchhoff migration in done in the x-t range, this means that a weighted
The diffraction stack in done in the x-t range, this means that an unweighted summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperboloid of preset
summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperboloid of preset bandwidth is performed. Before the summation the original profile is
bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the area in x-and y-direction for differentiated. The bandwidth means the area in x-and y-direction for summation
summation in the given distance dimension (parameter summation area) over in the given distance dimension (parameter summation area) over which shall
which shall be summed. A larger area naturally increases computing time be summed. A larger area naturally increases computing time significantly and is
significantly and is only reasonable for a formation of clearly visible diffraction only reasonable for a formation of clearly visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend
hyperbolas that extend over a large trace range. over a large trace range.
Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the
distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be
obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the calculated hyperboloid obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the calculated hyperboloid
can be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive can be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive
continuous variation of the velocity. The precondition for good determination of continuous variation of the velocity. The precondition for good determination of
the velocity is the existence of diffraction arrivals. Here, also the success of the the velocity is the existence of diffraction arrivals. Here, also the success of the
migration can be realized best. Ideally they should shrink to a very small area. migration can be realized best. Ideally they should shrink to a very small area.
Beside the contraction of the diffraction energy another aim of migration is to shift Beside the contraction of the diffraction energy another aim of migration is to shift
the arrivals to their "true" position. This is important for steep dipping reflectors. the arrivals to their "true" position. This is important for steep dipping reflectors.
The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters The time range for applying the migration may be restricted. The filter parameters
start time and end time define the time range. start time and end time define the time range.

The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the summation is performed The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the summation is performed
using the complete 3D hyperboloid or whether the summation is only done using the complete 3D hyperboloid or whether the summation is only done
along the x- and y-axis (parameter sum over x-y). along the x- and y-axis (parameter sum over x-y).

The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does The migration is one of the most important filters. A zero offset section often does
not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the not represent the "true" position of the reflectors mainly for steep layers. After the
migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions migration often a better approximation to the reality is given. If strong diffractions
are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is are present, the migration tries to contract these diffractions to a minimum. This is
useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example. useful for an interpretation using timeslices for example.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 225 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 226

1.11.9.9 timedepth conversion activated within the semblance groupbox) of the semblance shall be calculated. If
the nominal frequency is stored within the file header (see also chap. 1.4.3) this
This option allows the conversion of the zero-offset-section into a depth-section. value is taken as the default value.
This is not (!) a depth migration but a transformation of the time axis into a depth
axis on the basis of a certain 2D-velocity distribution. Within the semblance groupbox you also may specify if the semblance data shall
be normalized to 1 or to the max. value of the original profile.
The filter parameters min.depth and max.depth define the new y-axis range.
The parameters are given in the distance dimension of the x-axis.

The radio groupbox allows you to specify whether the 2D-velocity distribution is
obtained from the CMP-analysis (see also CMP 2D-model) or from the
hyperbola adaptation (see also velocity adaptation) or directly read from a
Reflexw formatted rasterfile.
The rasterfile may either contain the mean velocities (option rasterfile mean) or
the layervelocities (option rasterfile layer). The velocities (amplitudes) must be in
m/ns or epsilon for GPR data and in m/s for seismic or acoustic data. The
rasterfile may either be a depth model (y-axis always meter) or a twoway
traveltime model (y-axis corresponds to the two way traveltime). The x-axis is
always the distance.
After having started the timedepth conversion, the desired 2D-velocity distribution
going to be the basis of the timedepth conversion is queried. The 2D-velocity
distribution is shown in a separate window.

To be considered: because of the possible changes of the mean velocities both in

x- and y-direction the data and therefore the shape of the signals may be
drastically changed. This also may result in great changes of the apparent
"frequency" of the signals.

1.11.9.10 semblance

This option allows to calculate the semblance or the unnormalized correclation for
each datapoint within the zero-offset section based on a summation over a
calculated hyperbola.

The semblance analysis in done in the x-t range, this means that an unweighted
summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperbola of preset
bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the area in x-direction for
summation in the given distance dimension (parameter width) over which shall
be summed. A larger area naturally increases computing time significantly and is
only reasonable for a formation of clearly visible diffraction hyperbolas that extend
over a large trace range.
Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the
distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be
obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the culculated hyperboloid
can be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive
continuous variation of the velocity. Precondition for good determination of the
velocity is the existence of diffraction arrivals.
In addition you must specify the nom.frequency in the given frequency
dimension. This parameter is necessary if the envelope (parameter envelope
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 227 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 228

1.11.9.11 3D-semblance 1.11.10 Fk-filter/Fk-spectrum

This option allows to calculate the semblance or the unnormalized correclation for The following fk processing possibilities are included within the fk-filter/fk-
each datapoint within the 3D-zero-offset section based on a summation over a spectrum group.
calculated hyperboloid.
fk filter
The semblance analysis in done in the x-y-t range, this means that an fk filter-lineparts
unweighted summation for each point of the profile over a calculated hyperboloid fk spectrum
of preset bandwidth is performed. The bandwidth means the area in x- and y-
direction for summation in the given distance dimension (parameter width) over For some filters available within this group the original trace is shown together
which shall be summed. A larger area naturally increases computing time with the actually filtered trace, the spectrum of the original trace and the spectrum
significantly and is only reasonable for a formation of clearly visible diffraction of the actually filtered trace. The arrows near the original trace and original
hyperbolas that extend over a large trace range. spectrum are used to enhance the resolution of the trace and spectrum windows.
Additionally the velocity has to be specified in the dimension predefined by the The trace or the spectrum is stretched up and down when using these arrows.
distance and time dimension. An overview over the optimal velocity can be The spectrum scale is Hz, if the time scale is in milli-seconds and MHz, if the time
obtained within the option velocity adaptation where the culculated hyperboloid scale is in nano-seconds, respectively.
can be optimally adapted to existing diffraction hyperbolas by interactive
continuous variation of the velocity. Precondition for good determination of the When activating the options fk filter or fk filter-lineparts and after having
velocity is the existence of diffraction arrivals. generated the fk-spectrum a table appears. With all these options the inputs may
In addition you must specify the nom.frequency in the given frequency be entered either interactively within the original profile or using the table input.
dimension. This parameter is necessary if the envelope (parameter envelope With the option fk filter or fk filter-lineparts activated first the fk-spectrum must be
activated within the semblance groupbox) of the semblance shall be calculated. If generated and then the filter parameters can be entered using the table or the
the nominal frequency is stored within the file header (see also chap. 1.4.3) this interactive input. The options save and load allow to store the actual edit values
value is taken as the default value. to an ASCII file and to load the wanted edit values from file, respectively.
Within the semblance groupbox you also may specify if the semblance data shall The trace number for the trace to be displayed in the trace and spectrum
be normalized to 1 or to the max. value of the original profile. windows can be chosen using the option trace number.

The filter parameters for the individual processing steps are entered within the
filter parameter group.

After having specified the filter parameter, you must enter the processing label
(option ProcessingLabel). If already a data set with the same name exists, i.e.
also with the same label, it is overwritten after starting the processing.

Activating the option sequence proc. additionally open the Sequence Processing
menu. With this menu opened you may easily add the actual processing step to
the sequence processing flow which may be applied to a choosable number of
lines after.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 229 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 230

1.11.10.1 Fk filter With the option bandpass activated the filters acts as a bandpass, this means
that the defined area remains unchanged whereas in the outer area the values
This filter acts on the chosen data area. The fk filter allows to apply a two- are set to 0.
dimension filter defined within the frequency-wavenumber domain to a selected With the option notchfilter activated the filters acts as a notchfilter, this means
data range. that the defined area is set to 0 whereas the outer area remains unchanged.
In addition you may specify a taper. Analogous to the bandpassfrequency filter
It is possible to restrict the affected data area that is going to be filtered. For this sharp steps at the filter borders may cause unwanted filter effects. The
you must enter within the filter parameter group the first trace, the last trace, the FKSpectrumTaper is used to suppress those unwanted effects. You may
first sample and the last sample. It is also possible to define this data area choose between the none (no taper), linear (linear decrease from the border with
within the original profile. Click on the uppermost left corner of the area to be the given taper length), Hanning (cos-window) or Hanning**2 (cos**2-window).
chosen and drag the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the left The width of the taper both in f and k direction is controlled by the options taper
mouse button pressed. The filtered data set is restricted to that chosen area. By width (f) and taper width (k) both given in points.
default the complete data area is set.
The option save stores the actual edit values on an ASCII file under the project
After having selected the data range you must activate the option generate fk- directory with the name fkfil and a freely choosable extension. Each line of the
spectrum (see also fk spectrum) which performs the Fourier transformation of ASCII file consists of two columns: 1. column: kx value in 1/meter, 2. column:
the data range into the frequency-wavenumber domain. Since the two- frequency in the given frequency dimension.
dimensional Fourier-transformation is very computing time intensive, a window The option load loads the wanted edit values from an ASCII file with the filename
informs the user about the current state of calculations. fkfil. The table and fk spectrum image are automatically updated.
After termination of the transformation into the frequency-wavenumber domain The option reset resets the current edit values.
the normalized amplitude fk spectrum of the selected data range appears on the
original profile image. The y-axis of the calculated fk spectrum is the frequency A precondition for the application of the fk filter are equidistant traces. In order to
axis in the given frequency dimension and the x-axis of the fk spectrum is the kx save computing time it is recommended to compress the data before using this
axis in 1/meter. If the horizontal axis of the used data set is not the distance axis filter both in x- and in t-direction to that extent that is possible without causing
or the vertical axis is not the time axis, at the axes of the amplitude spectrum aliasing. However, when applying the fk filter the amplitude spectrum of a
appear the corresponding Fourier transformed physical quantities. compressed data set should be checked for spatial or temporal aliasing. After
The calculation of the fk spectrum now allows to map the different dips of the filtering the data set can be re-expanded in order to guarantee a better viewing of
events onto different parts of the fk spectrum. Events with downdip to ascending the data.
distances are mapped onto the right part of the fk spectrum whereas events with
updip are mapped onto the left part. This allows you to easily distinguish between The fk filter can be used - though computing time intensive - as lowpass,
these types of events. In addition nearly horizontal events are mapped along highpass, bandpass or notch filter. It is highly effective for the suppression of
small k values within the middle of the fk spectrum. noise with a certain dip in the data set. Like this, horizontal noise signals, as
From the two-dimensional spectrum you have to select the filter area. This area caused for example by reverberations, can be suppressed by cutting the
may be defined manually (option manual input activated) or by defining a wavenumber zero from the filter area. In an analog way correlated signals with
velocity fan (option velocity range activated). The options neg. kx and pos.kx desired gradients can be emphasized.
may be used for an easy definition of a filter range for only negative or positive
kx-values.
With manual input activated the program demands the input of margin points
using the left mouse button within the fk spectrum. Set points are connected with
straight lines. Analogous to the other edit inputs the chosen values are
automatically transferred to the table input and vice versa to the fk spectrum
image. The last set point is automatically connected with the first set point so that
a closed curve is produced.
With velocity range activated you may define two different fans consisting of 2
different velocities respectively to be defined within the filter parameter group
(enter in the given velocity dimension). The chosen velocities are automatically
transformed into edit pairs and shown within the fk spectrum. Such a fan allows
you to easily define a filter for special dips.
2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 231 2D-Dataanalysis, fk-filter 232

1.11.10.2 Fk filter-lineparts 1.11.10.3 Fk spectrum

The fk filter-lineparts allows to apply a two-dimension filter defined within the This processing step acts on the chosen data area. The processing step allows to
frequency-wavenumber domain to the complete section which is automatically calculate the fk spectrum (frequency-wavenumber spectrum) for a definable data
subdivided into single parts with uniform size and afterwards all individual filtered area.
data parts are composed together into one file.
It is possible to restrict the affected data area for calculating the fk spectrum. For
First you must define the trace number within the filter parameter group. This this you must enter within the filter parameter group the first trace, the last
number defines the size of a single data part. For each data part an independent trace, the first sample and the last sample. It is also possible to define this data
fk filter is performed and afterwards all filtered data parts are put together. area within the original profile. Click on the uppermost left corner of the area to be
chosen and drag the mouse to the wanted lowermost right corner with the left
After having chosen the trace number you must generate the fk spectrum and mouse button pressed. The resting data part will not be used for the calculation of
afterwards you have to define the fk filter area analogous to the option fk filter. All the fk spectrum. By default the complete data area is set.
other options within the fk filter option are also available.
A 2D section is both a function of time and of space (distance). The Fourier dual
Using this option is useful if the fk filtering of the complete section exceeds the of the time if the frequency, the Fourier dual for the space is the spatial frequency
ram memory of your computer. or wavenumber. Whereas the frequency is a count of the number of peaks within
Another important application of the fk filter-lineparts is in the case all shots of a a unit time, the wavenumber of a dipping event is determined by counting the
seismic experiment for example all combined together within one file. If you are number of peaks within a unit distance along the horizontal axis. The y-axis of the
applying the "normal" fk filter on the complete dataset you will get unwanted filter calculated fk spectrum is the frequency axis in the given frequency dimension
effects resulting from the discontinuous data steps at the shot changes. In this and the x-axis of the fk spectrum is the kx axis in 1/meter.
case you should use the option fk filter-lineparts with a trace number equal to the The calculation of the fk spectrum now allows to map the different dips of the
number of traces per shot. A precondition for that is that the number of traces per events onto different parts of the fk spectrum. Events with downdip to ascending
shot within the data file is always the same. distances are mapped onto the right part of the fk spectrum whereas events with
updip are mapped onto the left part. This allows you to easily distinguish between
these types of events. In addition nearly horizontal events are mapped along
small k values within the middle of the fk spectrum.

The fk spectrum is often used to define a spatial filter in order to emphasize

events having special dips (see also fk filter).
2D-Dataanalysis, Sequence Processing 233 2D-Dataanalysis, Sequence Processing 234

1.11.11 Sequence Processing the 2nd processing step is applied to the original profile and so on. This results in
different output lines. The entered processing label is used for the first processing
The menu Sequence Processing allows a sequential processing, i.e. a step for all chosen lines. The label for the other processing steps is incremented
selectable number of lines is processed with an identical sequence of processing by 1 each time. You have chosen for example three processing steps and
steps. For this you have to define a sequence of processing steps before, then specified the number 10 as processing label. The processing labels 10, 11 and
select the data lines and then start the sequence processing. 12 for the three different steps are used. Notice that possibly existing files are
overwritten.
The actual processing flow is shown in the uppermost window. You can mark
the individual processing steps. Mark a processing step if you want to delete it or The option StartActualLine allows to apply the current processing flow on the
if you want a new processing step to be inserted before. You also have the actual original file loaded within the 2D-dataanalysis.
possibility to change the sorting of the individual processing steps by simply
dragging one processing step to another place (pressed left mouse button). The option StartSeveralLines allows to apply the current processing flow to
several lines. Filefilter allows to enter a filter for the multi file choice. Filepath
The definition of the processing flow is done with the options AddActualProc., specifies the path for loading the files to be processed. The maximum number of
DeleteProc., ResetSequence, LoadSequence and SaveSequence. files is restricted by the system (about 1000 files). This number is not exact and
therefore no warning message appears. If the filetype within the openfile-menu is
The option AddActualProc. adds the actual filter together with the filter set to ASCII-table the filenames of the wanted datafiles are read from a separate
parameter to the processing flow. A precondition to that is that the sequence ASCII-file. Each line of the ASCII-file contains the name of the datafile without the
processing menu is opened together with any filter menu. The actual filter is filepath. The complete filename of each datafile is given by the actual project
added at the end of the processing flow if no processing step within the directory, the chosen filepath (procdata or rawdata) and the filename stored
processing flow is marked. If any processing step is marked, the actual filter is within the ASCII-file. This option overcomes the problem with specifying more
inserted before this processing step. than about 1000 files.

The option DeleteProc. removes the marked filter steps.

Within the BatchGroupBox you may define and perform a batch processing, this
The option ResetSequence resets the actual processing flow to zero. means several sequence processings within one step.

The option LoadSequence loads a processing flow previously save from disk. The option generate batchfile creates an ASCII file with the extension SEQ
under the actual project directory containing:
The option SaveSequence saves the actual processing flow on disk. The file 1. line: directory name for the datafiles to be processed
automatically receives the extension PFL and is saved in the project directory. 2. line: sequence processing datafilename
3. line: processing label
4.-n. line: filenames
The ProcessingLabel defines the extension of the output datafile names. If example:
already a data set with the same name exists, i.e. also with the same label, it is d:\reflex\demo\procdata
overwritten after starting the sequence processing. d:\reflex\demo\mark1.pfl
0
With the option plot data activated the actual original file together with the actual file001.01t
processed file are plotted during the sequence processing. Deactivate this option file002.01t
if plotting takes too much computer time. file003.01t
After having activated the option you are asked for the wanted sequence
processing filename and the sequence processing label. Then you have to select
The option SingleProcess controls how the sequence processing is done: the wanted datafiles.
With SingleProcess deactivated the program executes the processing steps
sequentially on the selected profiles, i.e. the 1st processing step is applied to the The option start batchfile starts the batchprocessing. After having activated the
original profile. To the profile processed in that way then the next step is applied option you must select the wanted ASCII batchfiles. Then the batch processing is
and so on. As a result only one processed file will be created from each original started.
file. The intermediate processing steps will not be saved. To be considered: the different ASCII batchfiles must be located under one single
With SingleProcess activated each processing step is independently applied on directory but the ASCII batchfiles may contain any working directory (see line 1
the original line, i.e. the 1st processing step is applied to the original profile, then within the ASCII batchfile).
2D-Dataanalysis, Sequence Processing 235 2D-Dataanalysis, Analysis MenuItem 236

1.12 Analysis MenuItem

Peculiarities:
Within this menuitem you may choose between the following analysis
The following processing steps are not supported by the sequence processing: possibilities:
extract, replace, duplicate, move, insert profile, add profile, subtract profile and
combine files f.CMP.
The sequence processing flow from the DOS-version of REFLEX cannot be used
Velocity adaptation MenuItem: interactive velocity adaptation based on
diffractions, reflections or lines
anymore because the names of the processing steps have been changed.

When using the processing step interpolate only the interpolation of periodic Pick MenuItem: picking of onsets
groups based on the set filter parameters is supported.
LayerShow MenuItem: combine picked onsets and create a report
When using the processing step markerinterpol, the marker positions are always for the individual layers
read from the trace headers of the individual original file. You may choose
between: CMP-processing MenuItem: With the CMP-processing option activated a
1. the markerincrements are read from an ASCII-file which has been created complete CMP-processing of single shots
using the option save under markerinterpol stored in one file is possible.
2. the entered single marker increment is used for all marks.
AD-conversion MenuItem: enter the AD-conversion module for digitize
For the following processing steps the edit values are read from a file: analogue data
manual gain (y), manual gain (x), static correction, muting and fk-filter. If any of
these processing steps is included within the current processing flow the wanted edit comment marker MenuItem: enables the edit possiblities for the comment
file must be chosen. The file must have been created in a preceding step within markers
the processing menu using the option store.
adjust trace gain MenuItem: enables an individual gain adaptation for the
plotoptions: the actual settings of the plotoptions (point or wigglemode, single traces
amplitude scale and so on) are stored within the fileheader of each processed
file. If no primary file has been loaded and therefore no plotoptions are defined
those plotoptions stored within the fileheader of the first profile to be processed
are used.
2D-Dataanalysis, Velocity adaptation 237 2D-Dataanalysis, Velocity adaptation 238

1.12.1 Velocity adaptation The speed button core is only enabled when a core datafile is loaded (see
suboption Core data/1D models under View MenuItem). If the core datafile does
The option interactive velocity adaptation allows the interactive adaptation of not contain the velocities of the individual core layers all velocities are preset to
diffraction or reflexion hyperbola by calculated hyperbola of defined velocity the actual adaptation velocity. With the speed button core activated you may
and width. There is also the possibility of fitting linear features either by interactively adapt the core bars to layer boundaries visible within the 2D data.
interactively changing a line or by setting two points. The speed button core Click on any layer bar which you want to adapt. The fill style of this layer bar
allows to interactively vary the velocities of the single layers of the individual changes. With the adaptation parameter v highlighted it is now possible to
cores. The velocities may be stored on file and may be reloaded at any time. The change the velocity of this distinct layer by pressing the key < or > respectively
velocities are combined into a 2D-model by using a special interpolation (see also (see below).
option x-weight). Such a 2D-velocity distribution may be used in a subsequent
step for the migration or the depth conversion. With any of the other speed buttons activated a hyperbola or a line according to
the adaptation type based on the actual parameters is calculated and plotted, as
You may choose between the adaptation of linear features ( speed button / and soon as the cursor is within the working window of the primary or secondary
speed button V), of diffraction hyperbola (speed button D, the profile must be a profile.
zero offset profile) and of reflexion hyperbola (speed button R) and of core data Important:
(speed button core). The type reflexion adaptation needs CMP- or Moveout-data.
In addition there is the possibility of an intercepttime inversion for refraction data The type diffraction needs zero-offset data or a negligible source-receiver
(speed button ) as well as a direct wave adaptation of VSP-data (up or distance with respect to the depth of the object. With the option use S/R-dist.
activated the source-receiver distance stored within the fileheader is taken into
downhole data, speed button ).
account for the calculation of the diffraction hyperbola. This mainly affects the
apex of the hyperbola.
With the speed button V the program waits for the input of two data points for By pressing the left mouse button the current diffraction hyperbola is maintained
generating a straight line of distinct velocity. Pressing the left mouse button and plotted on the profile. Additionally the current velocity is displayed in a
determines the first data point and by moving the mouse with pressed button the window.
line with the actual velocity is shown. Leaving the mouse button holds the actual
line. All the adaptation parameters v, width, radius and angle can be interactively
changed using the keys < or > respectively. The parameter which can be
The speed button allows the interactive use of the intercept time method for changed is shown in aqua color. Activate the parameter to be changed
refraction data. The option enables to get a first 1D-model very quickly. After interactively by simply enter it. The size of the interactive change is controlled by
having activated the option you must enter the bending points by the left mouse the parameter change(%) given in percentage.
button. The first point is automatically set to time zero and distance of the shot
position. Move the mouse with pressed left mouse button to the next bending The input parameters in detail:
point and leave the mouse button and so on. The start point of a new branch
always corresponds to the endpoint of the previous one. The velocites derived v(all): input of the starting velocity for the interactive adaptation (input in m/ns or
from these settings must increase with depth. After having finished the settings m/s).
the depth and velocities of the calculated 1D-model are shown in a window.
Using the option save a 1D-model with the extension VEL is automatically saved width(diffraction, reflection, linear adaptation): input of the one-sided width of the
and can be used within the CMP velocity analysis window (chap. 2). hyperbola to be calculated in traces.

The speed button allows the interactive adaptation of the direct wave of a radius(diffraction hyperbola-adaptation): input of the presumed radius of the
VSP (vertical seismics profiling) measurement (uphole or downhole target object (specification in the dimension of the current profile, input 0 for
measurements). After having activated the option you must enter the bending point-shaped object).
points by the left mouse button. The first point is automatically set to time zero
and distance of the shot position (normally 0). Move the mouse with pressed left angle(diffraction hyperbola-adaptation): input of the presumed angle between the
mouse button to the next bending point and leave the mouse button and so on. profile direction and the direction of the line target. Input in degrees between 0
The start point of a new branch always corresponds to the endpoint of the and 90 degrees. For a point-diffractor you have to enter an angle of 90 degrees.
previous one. After having finished the settings the depth, velocities and
thicknesses of the calculated 1D-model are shown in a window. Using the option x-weight (all): input of a weight parameter for the 2-dimensional velocity
save a 1D-model with the extension VEL is automatically saved and can be used interpolation. The interpolation is done as following: all actual velocities are
within the CMP velocity analysis window (chap. 2). summed up for every point in the x-t range according to the square of their
2D-Dataanalysis, Velocity adaptation 239 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 240

distance to the x-t-point. A value for x-weight greater than 1 favours the x- 1.12.2 Pick MenuItem
direction (line direction). By choosing a value big enough you may get a vertical
layering based on only few velocity values. With the pick option activated arrivals can be picked. You have the choice
between manual picking, continuous pick and a semi-automatic picking using a
The speed button on the left-hand side allows to reset all adaptations, to load phase follower.
existing velocity adaptations and to save the current adaptations on file with the After having activated the pick option you still have the possibility to activate the
extension HYP under the rohdata directory. velocity adaptation option (chap. 1.12.1) in addition. Thereby for example it is
Using the option save it is also possible to save the adaptation using an ASCII- possible to continuously display a calculated diffraction hyperbola during picking
format with the extension ASC. Each row contains the distance, velocity and for a better determination of the hyperbola cusp.
time of one adaptation. In case of the intercepttime adaptation each row contains Picking is always done for the primary profile but you also may pick within the
the calculated depth, the velocity, the intercepttime, the distance and the time. In secondary profile and then the pick is displayed within the primary profile. This
case of the VSP adaptation each row contains the calculated depth, the velocity, might be useful if you have acquired a profile withi different frequencies and the
the thickness and the time. phase is sometimes better visible on the secondary line. To be considered for
The loaded adaptations are plotted at their original profile distance. This means continuous picking: the traceincrement as well as the profilestart coordinate must
that you have to be careful if you are using adaptations from other, e.g. crossing be the same for the primary and the secondary profile if you are picking wihin the
profiles. When saving the actual velocity adaptation, the following parameters are secondary profile. Otherwise a warning message appears.
stored: velocity, distance in profile direction, x-weight.
Corrections can be performed either on zero crossings or on the extremum
Peculiarity for speed button core: With the option save corefile under global (option CORRECTION). The picks can be saved with an arbitrary name and
settings activated the actually loaded corefile is updated using the current layer reloaded any time (option save and load). The maximum number of picks is
velocities. With the option save VLA-file under global settings activated a VLA- limited to the maximum number of scans per profile. If you need more picks for a
ASCII velocity datafile (see Create LayerShow velocities) is automatically created profile, they must be saved on different files. The picks belonging to one profile
which may be used for the generation of a layershow. can be put together and viewed as a whole with the option layershow and also
issued as report on printer or file ( see also LayerShow MenuItem).
Using the option 2D it is possible to show the 2-dimensional velocity distribution
based on the actual adapted velocities. The interpolation is controlled by the Both the travel time and the current amplitude of the phase are detected. The
parameter x-weight. If you are using such a velocity distribution in a subsequent manual picking of phases is superior to the automatic picking in respect to time
processing step (e.g. migration based on 2D-velocity adaptation) again the consumption for small data sets and in respect to accuracy for data sets of bad
interpolation is done according to this x-weight parameter. quality. For large data sets it is recommended to have a desired phase semi-
automatically picked, first - this is discussed under phase follower, and then to
The options set, remove and change control the settings of the hyperbola. With check the quality of the automatically set picks and correct them manually if
the option set activated a new adaptation may be set using the left mouse button. necessary.
Any adaptation may be removed by activating the option remove and choosing In addition to the distance the xyz-shot- and receiver coordinates stored in the
the desired adaptation. traceheader (see also trace header Edit menu, chap. 1.9.6 ) of each individual
trace are stored within the pick record. These values are used when using the
The max. number of different adaptations is 100. tomography or when exporting the picks to an ASCII-file e.g. in order to display a
2- or 3-dimensional contour plot of the pick values. If you want to create such an
ASCII-file you must ensure that the xyz-shot and receiver coordinates are correct.
These traceheader-coordinates may not always correspond to the
fileheader-coordinates and therefore you have different possibilities to update
them (see trace header Edit menu, chap. 1.9.6 and Edit several FileHeaders
menu, chap. 1.10).

Within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1) you can choose between two
different symbols for the picks (* and -). Here also some other pick paramters can
be entered. The size of the pick-symbol can be changed within the symbol font
menu (see also Global MenuItem).

manual pick: With the option set activated a pick can be set with the left mouse
button. The same applies to the manual removal or change of an existing pick
2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 241 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 242

after selecting the options remove or change, respectively. Here those picks are construction change marker to the left. The chosen mouse position is only shifted
removed or changed which are next to the current cursor position.The right to the left and no time correction is done. With the option last pick stop activated
mouse button activates the interpolate option whereby a fast piecewise linear the phase follower automatically stops at the position of the last manually set
picking is possible. pick.

continuous pick: With this option activated you can set (option set activated), Auto pick: With this option activated the Auto-Pick window opens which allows
remove (option remove activated) or change (option change activated) picks by you to set the autopick parameters and start the automatic picking (see also
moving the mouse cursor over the data set with continuously pressed left mouse chap. 1.12.2.2).It is possible to bring this window to the front by pressing the right
button. The picks are set or removed or changed at those traces that are next to mouse button within the primary profile (phase follower and continuous pick must
the current cursor position. The continuous picking must be done from left to be deactivated).
right, this means with increasing distance coordinates. The option continuous pick
therefore makes manual picking a lot easier for large data sets. If the cursor difference pick: With this option activated the traveltime difference between two
movement is too fast to pick every trace an interpolation between the founded successive picks is automatically determined. In addition the thickness is
pick position is done. The parameter delay under global settings controls the calculated based on this traveltime difference and the entered velocity (see
speed of the continuous picking. The data must be sorted in ascending order with PlotOptions chap. 1.7). First you must enter the reference pick and then the
respect to the distances (see also option sort). investigation pick. The two values traveltime distance and calculated thickness
To be considered: The continuous picking is done based on the tracenumbers are plotted right to the investigation pick using the number font if the option show
and these tracenumbers are stored with the picks. Therefore problems may occur pickdifferences within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2) (also active when
when you are loading existing picks which have been picked from another printing the profile) . The number of total places and decimal places can be
dataset with different tracenumbers (this means with different traceincrement defined within the global settings (chap. 1.2.1) menu. The remove button as well
and/or startcoordinate). The same holds true for picking within the secondary as the sort and control buttons are disabled. After having activated this option all
profile. Again the traceincrement as well as the profilestart coordinate must be picks are reset.
the same for the primary and the secondary profile. With the option keep distance within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2)
The right mouse button allows you to toggle between the options set and change. activated the x-position between the two picks are plotted in addition. With this
With the plotoption TraceHeaderDistancies activated no interpolation is done. option not activated the x-position of the second pick is automatically moved to
the x-position of the first one.
phase follower: The option allows the automatic assignment of picks to a
selected phase. For this you first have to select the desired phase at an arbitrary pick code: input of a code (integer value) for the characterization of the following
position of the profile with the left mouse button. picks to be chosen. This will also be used for the K+S ASCII-output and for the
With selected secondary option set the program then follows automatically this tomography. The picks with the actual code are plotted using the actual set pick
phase in the direction of larger distances. The choice is limited to the displayed color (see option color below). Picks with another code than the actual one are
screen range. If the phase follower reaches the right end of the screen the profile plotted using either the layershowcolor corresponding to their code or the color
is scrolled automatically towards larger distances and the pick assignment is not defined within the option panel "not active picks" within the add. options (see
stopped (the option set is also automatically set to change). A precondition for a below). When changing an existing pick the newly set pick always obtains the
correct application of this option is that the phase extends continuously over the actual code. With the option use code activated only the picks with the actual
whole profile without being perturbed by interference effects. The automatically code can be changed or removed.
detected picks certainly can be reedited like all other picks.
If the option change is activated already existing picks can be changed with the use code: if activated the pick code is used for discriminating the individual
automatic assignment. The program expects like with selected option set the picks:
selection of a value within the profile by pressing the left mouse button. If for the - only the picks with the actual code may be changed or removed
selected trace already a pick exists it is replaced by the new automatically - different colors are used for the picks with different codes (with the option use
assigned pick. With this option it is possible to react fast on an unwanted layershow-col. activated the layershow colors are used)
deviation of the automatic assignment from the desired phase. - options correct, auto cor. and control only act on the picks with the actual code
The Escape-key as well as the right mouse button allows to abort the automatic - when using the phase follower the option use code should be activated if
assignment. several reflectors at the same distance are picked.
With the option autostop (available within the PickGroupBox if the option
add.options is activated - see below) activated the phase follower automatically if deactivated the following holds true:
stops when a construction change marker (see also global settings chap. 1.2.1) - all picks may be changed or removed
or a change of the ensemble no. has been found. With the option autostart - the actual pick color is used for all picks
activated the phase follower automatically starts at the position of the nearest - one correction type is used for all picks
2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 243 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 244

color defines the color of the picks with the actual code. The color of the picks sort: sorts the picks with ascending order with respect to the distance axis. The
with other codes and deactivated option use layershow-col. is defined within the continuous picking needs sorted data. Activate this option if the continuous
add. options menu (panel not active picks). picking is not working. The data are automatically sorted after having saved.

use layershow-col.: if activated the layershow colors are used for the pick correct: activate this option to correct the current picks. With the option use code
display corresponding to their code. activated only the picks with the actual code are corrected for. The following
correct options are available:
load: This option allows to load new picks from disc. Please note that the current
picks are lost with the loading of new picks. After selecting the option you can correct to max.: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the signal
choose one or several datafiles from the file list. belonging to the pick.
It is possible to load REFLEX formatted PCK files as well as different ASCII-
formats: correct to zero: allows to correct the current picks to the zero crossing of the
ASCII-2-colums: each line of the ASCII-file corresponds to one pick and consists signal belonging to the pick.The zero crossing will not only be done to the nearest
of two columns containing the distance and the time in the corresponding data point but to the interpolated values between the two datapoints of the zero
dimensions. crossing.
ASCII-3D-tomography: see chap. 1.12.2.1 with each line containing the following
values: corr.max/min.time:allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the
traveltime code x-shot y-shot z-shot x-receiver y-receiver z-receiver signal and the minimum time within a tracerange of a predefined number of
ASCII-colums: see chap. 1.12.2.1 with activated options xy-coordinates, depths traces (see input pickcorrect traces under global settings). Use this option for
and codes. Each line contains the following informations: example to correct the picked cusp of a diffraction hyperbola.
distance offset(profileconstant) x-shot y-shot x-rec y-rec traveltime depth
amplitude code corr.max/dist.range: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the
When loading the Reflex formatted PCK files the program automatically controls signal within a given tracerange of a predefined number of traces (see input
if the tracenumbers stored with the picks correspond to the profile tracenumbers. pickcorrect traces under global settings). The timerange for searching the
If not a warning message appears and a query if the pick tracenumbers shall be maximum is automatically restricted by the polarity of the actual pick. Use this
updated. The tracenumber are used for continuous picking and for the phase option for example to correct the picked cusp of a migrated diffraction.
follower. Therefore the tracenumbers should be updated if one of these options
shall be used. auto cor.: if activated the picks are automatically corrected during the setting.
The above correct options are valid.
reset: This option allows to reset all current picks. The current pick settings are
lost. control: this option allows you to remove double picks, this means several picks
for one distance (one trace). Double picks may occur if you are using the
sec.picks: loading of picks already saved, which are plotted as comparative continuous picker with activated set option and you don't start the picking at that
picks in addition to the currently set picks. You may choose different pick files position where no picks have been set yet.
from the file list. The total number of secondary picks must not exceed the max.
number of scans. The color of these secondary picks may be freely chosen using interpolate: allows the linear interpolation between the two last picks or the
the small button at the right. After deactivating the option sec.picks the secondary extrapolation to the profile start and the profile end if only one pick exists.
picks are reset. The secondary picks are only for comparison and are not saved
together with the current picks.The secondary picks are also shown on the The four arrows at the right side allow to move up and down and to the left and
second profile. to the right the last set pick by one sample (trace) increment.
Activate the option all to move up and down (to the left or to the right) all picks by
save: saves the current picks. After selecting the option the Pick save menu will one sample (trace) increment. With the option use code activated in addition only
be opened. the picks with the actual code are moved.
To consider when moving the picks to the left or the right: the xy-coordinates of
autom.load: if activated the picks stored under the same filename like the the picks are not updated when using this option. This must be done during
actually loaded primary file (see also option automatic name under Pick Save saving the picks with activated option xy-coordinates.
MenuItem, chap. 1.12.2.1 ) are loaded automatically.
The option add. options opens an additional PickGroupBox containing the
following options and the options autostop autostart and last pick stop already
described under phase follower (see above):
2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 245 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick MenuItem 246

The parameter n.trace determines that only for every n. trace a pick is found for sec.picks: within this panel you may specify the color for the secondary picks.
the continuous picking and for the phase follower (the phase follower however With the option use layershow-col. activated the layershow colors are used for
acts on every trace but only every n. trace a pick is chosen). the pickdisplay corresponding to their code (option use code activated) or
corresponding to the given layernumber (option use code deactivated).
max.diff: This parameter specifies a stopping criterion for the phase follower.
The time difference between successive picks of the same polarity must not be
larger than maxDiff*Time increment. The default value of maxDiff is 5. You
should reduce this value if the phase is lost too often. You have to increase this
value if the phase does not follow the extremum.

marker picks: allows to automatically set picks at the existing marker positions.
The time values are set to 10*time increment. The option is only available if the
markers are stored in the trace header.

load perpendicular picks: allows to load and to correct existing picks for the xy-
coordinates stored within the traceheader of the actual datafile (see also trace
header Edit menu, chap. 1.9.6). Those picks which xy-coordinates do not
correspond to any existing xy-coordinate of the actual datfile are automatically
cancelled. The option might be useful if existing picks are loaded into a crossing
line. The parameter corr.xy-coord bin(%) under global settings (chap. 1.2.1)
controls the size of the crossing bin. Increase this parameter if the option control
xy-coord does not generate any picks.

remove non double picks: allows to remove all picks for which only 1 pick for
one distance position exists. The option is useful for a continuous picking of a
layer thickness. For that purpose first pick the upper border of the layer and then
the lower border. Then use the option remove non double picks in order to ensure
to have 2 picked values for each location. Then you may use the ASCII-pick
difference output within the Pick Save MenuItem (chap. 1.12.2.1) in order to
output the thickness of the picked layer.

change pick code: allows to change the codes of the picks with the actual code.
After having activated the option the new code is queried. The option is only
enabled if use code is activated.

move based on sec. picks: Activating the option moves the actual picks to
larger times based on the loaded secondary picks. The option might be used for
example for an adaptation of existing pick files to a topographic correction. For
this purpose the interpretation flow is the following:
a. pick the reflections based on the non topographic corrected profile
b. perform the topographic correction
c. pick the first arrival within the topographic corrected profile
d. load these first arrival picks as secondary picks
e. load the wanted pick file and activate the option “move based on sec. picks” -
the picks will be adapted to the topographic correction.

not active picks: within this panel you may specify the color for the picks with
another code than the actual one (see also option pick code) in the case the
option use layershow-col. (see above) is deactivated. The size and the shape of
the picks are determined from the actual settings of the symbol font.
2D-Dataanalysis, Pick save MenuItem 247 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick save MenuItem 248

1.12.2.1 Pick save MenuItem plane-coordinates of the picks are written on a file. Additionally the travel time can
be converted into depths on the basis of a specified constant velocity (option
Save the current picks using different formats. depth activated) and the current amplitude of each pick can be saved (option
amplitudes activated). If no depths and/or amplitudes shall be extracted, these
filename: specify the filename. Based on the chosen formats the file will have values are set to zero. Optionally the xy-coordinates of the receivers
different extensions and will be stored under different directories: (specification xy-coordinates) stored in each trace header may be written out
ReflexWin: extension PCK and storing under the path LINEDATA. (see also trace header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6). This allows you for example to
ReflexDOS: extension TRV (travel times) and AMP (amplitudes) under the path write out non equidistant xy-coordinates or the xy-coordinates, if the profile is not
LINEDATA. orientated into one direction (x or y). The xy-coordinates are only saved on file if
ASCII-columns: extension PCK and storing under the path ASCII chosen. Optionally the acquisition times of each trace stored within the
ASCII-tomography: extension TOM and storing under the path ASCII traceheader is written out (option acquisition times activated). Optionally the
pickcode of each pick can be written out (option pickcodes activated).
automatic name: if activated the file name is automatically determined from the The parameter n.pick controls the pick number to be output: only every n. pick
file name of the actual profile. will be output. The file has the extension PCK and will be stored under the path
ASCII under the actual projectpath.
backup file: if activated an additional pickfile with the name ???_backup.pck will With the option original datafilename activated the original datafilename
be created. (without path) is output in addition within the first column.

format group: The following output formats are supported: Ascii-2D tomography: every pick uses one line. It is possible to save the picked
traveltimes or the amplitudes. Each line contains the following values:
ReflexWin: new binary REFLEX pick format containing both the travel times and traveltime(yy:xx) or amplitude, code(10:0), x-tracehadercoordinate of the
the amplitudes - data cannot be loaded with the DOS-version of REFLEX transmitter, y-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(yy:xx),
anymore. x-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(yy:xx), y-traceheadercoordinate of the
receiver(yy:xx) where xx defines the number of decimal places given within the
ReflexDOS: old binary REFLEX pick format. Travel times and amplitudes are global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). The number of total places can also be
stored on different files with the extensions TRV and AMP. defined within the global settings menu. The xy-coordinates are taken from the
corresponding traceheaders of each trace (see also trace header Edit menu -
RefraDOS: old binary REFRA pick format. Traveltimes and amplitudes are stored chap. 1.9.6) during picking. The file has the extension TOM and will be stored
on a file with the extensions TRV under the directory TRAVTIME. under the path ASCII under the actual projectpath. The format corresponds to
that format needed by the 2D-tomographic traveltime-inversion and
ASCII-columns: convert picks to an ASCII file whereby every pick uses one line. amplitude-inversion.The distancedimension is always METER, the timedimension
With the option export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file activated you is either ms or ns. If the timedimension of the original data is :s, the traveltimes
may export several existing pickfiles into 1 ASCII-file. Each line of the ASCII-file are automatically transformed into ms-data for storing.
contains the following values:
traveltime(12:6), depth(10:4), amplitude(yy:xx), x-shot(yy:xx), y-shot(yy:xx), z- Ascii-3D tomography: every pick uses one line. Each line contains the following
shot(yy:xx), x-receiver(yy:xx), y-receiver(yy:xx), z-receiver(yy:xx) where yy values: traveltime(yy:xx), code(10:0), x-tracehadercoordinate of the transmitter,
defines the number of places and xx defines the number of decimal places given y-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(yy:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the
within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). The x-,y-,z-shot and receiver transmitter(yy:xx), x-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(yy:xx),
coordinates have been taken from the traceheaders of the individual profiles y-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(yy:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the
when picking the onsets (see also trace header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6). Depths receiver(yy:xx) where xx defines the number of decimal places given within the
and amplitudes are set to zero if the corresponding options depth and amplitudes global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). The number of total places can also be
are deactivated. defined within the global settings menu. The xyz-coordinates are taken from the
With the option export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file deactivated it is corresponding traceheaders of each trace (see also trace header Edit menu -
possible to save the existing picks into an ASCII-file. every pick uses one line. chap. 1.9.6) during picking. The file has the extension TOM and will be stored
Each line contains the following values: coordinate in profiledirection(10:3), under the path ASCII under the actual projectpath. The format corresponds to
coordinate in profileconstant(10:3), x-traceheadercoordinate (optional,yy:xx), y- that format needed by the 3D-tomographic traveltime-inversion. The
traceheadercoordinate (optional,yy:xx), travel time(12:6), depth(10:4), distancedimension is always METER, the timedimension is either ms or ns. If the
amplitude(yy:xx) where xx defines the number of decimal places given within the timedimension of the original data is :s, the traveltimes are automatically
global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). The number of total places can also be transformed into ms-data for storing.
defined within the global settings menu. By default the travel times and also the
2D-Dataanalysis, Pick save MenuItem 249 2D-Dataanalysis, Pick save MenuItem 250

GeoTomoCG: this format should be used when the picked data are interpreted layer number: The specification of the layer number serves to identify the
using the tomography program GeoTomoCG. individual picks within the option layershow. If you are using the option layer-
2 comment lines are at the beginning. Then every pick uses one line. Each line show with the option pick, you therefore should process together and save on a
contains the following values: pick number (5:0), x-tracehadercoordinate of the file only those arrivals that belong to one layer.
transmitter (13:3), y-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(10:3),
z-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(10:3), x-traceheadercoordinate of the check source/receivers positions: If activated the source/receiver positions of
receiver(10:3), y-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:3), each pick are updated from the actually loaded profile. The source/receiver
z-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:3), traveltime(10:3). The positions are used within the ASCII-export with activated option export several
xyz-coordinates are taken from the corresponding traceheaders of each trace existing picks into 1 ASCII-file.
(see also trace header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6 and CMP-processing geometry,
chap. 1.12.4.1) during picking. The file has the extension 3DD and will be stored save: the option starts the storing of the data. For the output formats ASCII-
under the path ASCII under the actual projectpath. columns and ASCII-tomography the created file output is displayed within a list
Activating the option store y on z-coord allows you to store the y-traceheader- box. Closing this box terminates the window.
coordinates on the z-coordinates of the GeoTomoCG-file.The y-coordinates of
the GeoTomoCG-file will be set to 0. This option may be useful for a 2D- cancel: close the window without saving the picks.
tomography in the x-z plane because the definition of the traceheader
coordinates within REFLEXW are much more easier for the xy-plane than for the
xz-plane (see CMP-processing geometry, chap. 1.12.4.1).

ASCII-pick difference: allows to output the traveltime difference of two

successive picks together with a calculated thickness. The picks may not be
located at the same distance position. The pick pair is defined from the ascending
order in distance direction. Therefore if you are using the manual or continuous
pick for defining a layer thickness you should use the option remove non double
picks (see Pick MenuItem, chap. 1.12.2) in order to ensure that the correct two
picks are always used for calculating the pick difference.
Every pick pair uses one line. Each line contains the following values: distance for
pick 2, distance difference, thickness, traveltime difference, traveltime 1,
traveltime 2, Pick Code. The number of total places and decimal places can be
defined within the global settings (chap. 1.2.1) menu. The thickness is calculated
from the traveltime difference and the entered velocity. With the option xy-
coordinates activated the xy-shot and receiver coordinates of the second pick
are written out in addition. The xy-coordinates are taken from the coordinates
stored in each trace header (see also trace header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6) of
the actual profile.
By default the picks are stored under ASCII under the actual projectdirectory.
Using the option path it is possible to enter another path. Then the filemenu
opens. If no filename has been specefied before you must enter such a name. To
be considered: it is still necessary to activate the option save in order to save the
picks.

global code: A code is queried which serves for differentiating picks of different
phases from one data set. Like this signal arrivals of compression waves can be
marked with a P and the ones of shear waves with a S. This code is used within
the LayerShow MenuItem (chap. 1.12.3). If no global code is entered no coding
is shown within the layershow.

mean velocity: Additionally a velocity can be preset which is used for the
conversion of the travel times in depths under the option layershow. You have to
specify a mean velocity for the total overburden.
2D-Dataanalysis, Auto-Pick MenuItem 251 2D-Dataanalysis, Auto-Pick MenuItem 252

1.12.2.2 Auto-Pick MenuItem zero: allows to correct the current picks to the zero crossing of the signal
belonging to the pick.
Within this menu you have the possibility to automatically pick the wanted onsets. max/min.time: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the signal
and the minimum time within a tracerange of a predefined number of traces (see
In any case it is recommended to check the automatic picks. For that purpose input pickcorrect traces under global settings). Use this option for example to
you may use all the other existing picking possibilities described above. correct the picked cusp of a diffraction hyperbola.
max/dist.range: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the signal
It is possible to bring this window to the front by pressing the right mouse button within a given tracerange of a predefined number of traces (see input pickcorrect
within the primary profile (phase follower and continuous pick must be traces under global settings). The timerange for searching the maximum is
deactivated). automatically restricted by the polarity of the actual pick. Use this option for
example to correct the picked cusp of a migrated diffraction.
At present it is possible to pick the following objects (option object type):
single objects like small diffractions (e.g. from rebars) - data should be migrated
(see also chap. 1.11.9) Depending on the object type you must enter different auto-pick parameters.
first arrivals (e.g. from refraction seismics)
continuous reflector Object type single objects:

A single object is dermined if the following criteria are fullfilled:

The following parameters are valid for all object types:
1. The polarity must fit.
start time: enter the start time of the time range for detecting the objects. 2. The onset must be located within the given time/distance range.
3. The amplitude must exceed a given threshold.
end time: enter the end time of the time range for detecting the objects. 4. The amplitude contrast within a given distance range must exceed a given
threshold.
total distance range: if activated the complete distance range is valid for
detecting the objects. The two threshold parameters are automatically calculated from the automatically
determined mean values and the given scaling factors.
start dist.: with deactivated option total distance range enter the start distance of
the distance range for detecting the objects. amp.scale: enter a scaling factor for determining the amplitude threshold. The
program automatically calculates the mean amplitude value within the given
end dist.: with deactivated option total distance range enter the end distance of time/distance range. The threshold is determined from this mean value multiplied
the distance range for detecting the objects. by the amp.scale factor.

slope /: enter the slope angle in degrees for determing the time/distange range contrast scale: enter a scaling factor for determining the amplitude contrast
for the automatic search of the picks. With a value <> 0 the start and end time for threshold. The program automatically calculates the mean amplitude contrast
the detection are changing with distance (distance*tan(slope)). A value <> 0 value within the given time/distance range based on the parameter xsize. The
allows you for example to automatically detect a continuously dipping reflector. threshold is determined from this mean value multiplied by the contrast.scale
factor.
Polarity: enter the polartiy of the onsets to be detected.
xsize: enter the expected size in x-direction of the objects. This value is used for
interpolate: if activated a linear interpolation between the detected picks will be the determination of the amplitude contrast as well as for excluding picking one
automatically performed. If only one pick was detected an extrapolation to the object twice on different traces or samples.
profile start and the profile will be done.
ysize: enter the max. expected size in y-(time-)direction of the objects. The
CorrectBox: within this box you may determine how the picks are corrected after polarity must remain the same within the given y-size. Otherwise the pick will be
having detected: rejected.
no: no correction is done.
max.: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the signal belonging x-interval: enter the x-range behind a detected pick where no pick detection will
to the pick. be done.
2D-Dataanalysis, Auto-Pick MenuItem 253 2D-Dataanalysis, Auto-Pick MenuItem 254

Object type first arrivals: detected picks of the different profiles are stored on individual files using the
ReflexWin pickformat (extension PCK under the path LINEDATA) and the
A first arrival is dermined if the following criteria are fullfilled: filename automatically determined from the acutal profile filename (see also
option automatic name under Pick Save MenuItem, chap. 1.12.2.1).
1. The polarity must fit.
2. The onset must be located within the given time/distance range. close: close the auto-pick window.
3. The amplitude must exceed a given threshold.
4. The instatnteneous frequency must be in the range of the mean instantaneous
frequency. The range is given by the mean instantaneous frequency and the
frequency scale parameter.

The two threshold parameters are automatically calculated from the automatically
determined mean values and the given scaling factors.

amp.scale: enter a scaling factor for determining the amplitude threshold. The
program automatically extracts the max. amplitude for each trace within the given
time range and at the given polartiy. The threshold is determined from this max.
value multiplied by the amp.scale factor.

frequency scale: enter a scaling factor for determining the range of the allowed
instantaneous frequencies. A factor of 1 means that a 100 % deviation from the
mean instantaneous frequency is allowed. Accordingly a factor of 0.1 means 10
% deviation and a factor of 10 1000 % deviation. The program automatically
calculates the mean instantaneous frequency for all traces within the given
time/distance range.The threshold range is determined from this mean value
multiplied by the frequency scale factor.

Object type continuous reflector:

A continuous reflector is automatically picked at those positions where:

1. the polarity fits.

2. the max. amplitude value within the given timewindow is given.

default: sets some default parameters for the types single objects and first
arrival.

The parameters within the control panel box are the following:

save par.: save the actual parameters on file with the extension api.

load par.: load the auto-pick parameters from file. The fileextension must be api.

start: start the autopicking for the actual primary file. The picks will receive the
actually set color and code and are displayed after having been detected.

batch start: start the autopicking for a choosabele number of files.

After having activated this option you must select the wanted profiles from the
filemenu. Afterwards the automatic picking is started for all chosen profiles. The
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 255 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 256

1.12.3 LayerShow MenuItem Activating the option colors allows to change the plot colors and pen-thicknesses
of the individual layer boundaries. A window appears where the predefined colors
This option offers the possibility to combine individual pick files stored on file (see and the pen-thicknesses of the individual layer boundaries can be changed. The
option PICK), to plot them together with the wiggle-files and to output them in option save allows to save the layershow colors on a file with the extension LCO.
report form on printer or file. The maximum number of combined picks per layer The option load allows to load an existing layershow-colorfile.
boundary is equal to the max. number of traces per profile. The maximum
number of samples per distance point and thus of layer boundaries is 100.
After selecting the option you have the choice between

create - i.e. to create a new layer show from pick files and save them on file
load - load an existing layer show
create report - i.e. to create a reportfile based on the actual layer show.
Create velocities - i.e. to create layer velocities for the individual layers either
based by manual input or based on an amplitude calibration

After selecting the option the screen is split automatically (Ver.split activated). In
the upper window the profile is plotted, in the lower layer window the depth-
converted combined arrivals (if already created with the option CREATE or
loaded from hard disc) are plotted as continuous layer boundaries. The maximal
displayed depth of the lower window is calculated from the maximal time of the
upper window and a given velocity.

The option x-flip allows you to flip the actual layershow in x-direction. The flipped
layer-show is saved under a new filename.

If the option show picks is activated, additionally in the upper window the
combined travel times (not depth-converted) are plotted as continuous layer
boundaries, so that a direct comparison between raw data and picked arrivals is
possible.
With the option dist.axis activated the distance axis is plotted for the lower layer
window.
With the option grid activated a grid is plotted within the lower layer window.
With the option fill layers activated the layer above the boundary is filled using
the actual layershow color. The option is also available for printing. The color for
the lowermost layer underneath the lowermost boundary is always white. To be
considered: if the boundary is not continuous the color of the lower boundary will
be used.

The current codings of the individual boundaries (see global code wihtin the Pick
save MenuItem, chap. 1.12.2.1) are displayed based on the settings within the
legend box using the symbol font. The colors of the codings are automatically
determined from the layer numbers.The option legend name allows you to define
the default prefixname of the legend - if this name is set to nil no legend is
plotted. The size of one coding is calculated from the option size (enter the size
of one coding in number of characters). The option rows defines the number of
rows the legend is subdivided into. You have the following possibilities for
defining the legend position:
Above means plotting the codings in the free space between the two windows.
Upper left means plotting in the upper left corner of the layer window.
Lower left means plotting in the lower left corner of the layer window.
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 257 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 258

1.12.3.1 Create LayerShow Choosing "velocity file" means that the layer velocities given in an ASCII file (for
the format description see option “create Layershow velocity”, chap. 1.12.3.3) are
This menu allows to create a file of combined equidistant picks. The "Input-picks", used for the time-depth conversion. The wanted velocity file must be choosen
which do not have to be equidistant, have to be saved on file before under the from the file menu. The velocities for each layer may laterally vary and they are
option PICK. With choosing the option a window is opened with the following normally given as layer velocities except if the second line within the ASCII-file
input or selection possibilities: includes the string “mean velocities”. The velocities given in the file are defined as
the velocities above the layer boundary. The time-depth conversion of each layer
filename: allows the input of an arbitrary name. The combined picks boundary depends on the conversion of the upper boundary (see also option
automatically receive the extension LAY and are stored in the directory interpolate layer). If no values are defined at the given position, an interpolation
LINEDATA. between the two next given values is used. Assumption: the layers are numbered
subsequently starting at 1 at the uppermost layer boundary (normally the air-
automatic name: if activated the filename of the layershow corresponds to the surface boundary).
name of the actually loaded profile. example: three different layer boundaries are defined at one position with
t1=10ns, t2=15ns, t3=22ns. Choosing "mean pick velocity" means that the given
old format: if activated the old layershow format (until version 2.1.2 of mean velocities of v1=0.1 m/ns, v2=0.09 m/ns and v3=0.085 m/ns are used. This
REFLEXW) is used (max. 10 different layers). The new layershow format cannot results in the following depths: depth1: 0.5 m, depth2: 0.675 m, depth3: 0.935 m.
be read from older versions of REFLEXW. Choosing "velocity file" means that the given layer velocities at the distinct
position are read from an ASCII file: e.g. vlay1=0.098 m/ns, vlay2=0.085 m/ns
pick files: allows to load the different pick files. The maximum number of and vlay3=0.070 m/ns. This results in the following depths: depth1: 0.49 m,
selectable files is 200. depth2: 0.7025 m and depth3: 0.9475 m.

start position: defines the start-position for the layershow file (has not to be interpolate layer: option is used if the velocities are read from an ASCII-file (see
identical to the start coordinate of the actual loaded profile). At the beginning this option VELOCITIES/velocity file). The option controls how the time-depth
coordinate is set to the start coordinate of the actual loaded profile. conversion for a special layer is done if any upper layer is not continuously
picked.
end position: defines the end-position for the layershow file (has not to be If the option is TRUE every upper layer is assumed to be continuous even if it is
identical to the end coordinate of the actual loaded profile). At the beginning this not picked. In this case either an interpolation or an extrapolation both for the
coordinate is set to the end coordinate of the actual loaded profile. layer points and the velocities is done. Based on these calculated values the
time-depth conversion of the actual layer is done. Activating this option is useful if
increment: defines the increment between successive positions for the you may assume that the upper layer is continuous but hardly to interpret in the
layershow file (has not to be identical to the trace increment of the actual loaded reflexion data.
profile - at the beginning this coordinate is set to the trace increment of the actual If the option is deactivated, the velocities of the next upper picked layer are used.
loaded profile). For the combination of the picks the original distance value is This might result in a sharp step of the depth of the actual layer at the point
modified by a multiple of this increment for a corresponding distance. For where any of the upper layers is broken. Deactivating this option is useful for the
example you choose an increment of 0,1 METER and have picks at 10,24 and case of a vanishing upper layer.
10,31 METERS. The program sets these picks at 10,2 and 10,3 METERS for the
combination. If for particular distances no picks exist, each time a space is start: starts the creation of the Layer-Show-file.
inserted in order to allow that a layer boundary disappears at distinct regions. For
the plotting of the combined picks in this case the picks to the left and right are close: terminates the window.
not connected with a straight line. You should therefore choose the increment not
smaller than the average distance between two picks.

velocity choice: specifies how the time-depth conversion of the picks is done.
You have the choice between mean pick velocity and velocity file.
Choosing "mean pick velocity" means that the mean velocity specified at the
saving of the picks of the corresponding layer (see also SAVE under PICK) is
used for the time-depth conversion. Only one value for the complete layer is
possible. The velocity is given as the mean velocity and not as the layer velocity.
The time-depth conversion of each layer boundary is independent from the
conversion of the upper boundary.
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 259 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 260

1.12.3.2 Create LayerShow report rezero at comment: if activated the start position will be rezeroed at the new
comment position except a construction change has been found.
This option allows the creation of a report of the current layershow file. The
output is performed either on a printer or on a file with an arbitrary name. The font reverse chainage: if activated the chainage is reversed for the output.
is selectable under Global (chap. 1.2 - option fonts/ReportFont). You should use
a non proportional font like Courier if you want that the colums are correctly thicknesses: activating this option allows the output of the thickness of each
displayed. After selecting the option the following input possibilities or choices layer instead of depth. If an averaging is used for the report output the mean
exist: thicknesses are calculated from the individual thicknesses at each location. One
exception: with the option “summary comment data” activated the calculation of
filename: allows the input of an arbitrary name or the printer interface, the mean thicknesses is simply based on the mean depths.
respectively. With specification of LPT1 or LPT2 or COM1 or COM2 or PRN the
output is sent to the desired printer interface, for any other specification a mm output for depths: if activated the depths or the thicknesses are output in
corresponding file with the extension REP in the directory ASCII is created. mm

automatic name: if activated the filename of the report corresponds to the name velocities: activating this option allows the output of the actual velocities.
of the actually loaded profile.
amplitudes: The amplitudes are also reported if the option is activated. You may
report code: allows the setting of an arbitrary coding. This coding appears in the output the amplitude as the true values (option unnorm.) or as normalized
header of the report. values. Normalizing the amplitudes may be done using low, mean or high
resolution. Values which do not differ significantly from the mean value
layers: allows the specification of the layers to output. It is possible to specify (dependent from the selected resolution), are characterized by the symbol o,
individual layers (e.g. 2 or 3) or as well layer sequences (e.g. 2-4) or lower amplitudes by the symbol -, higher amplitudes by the symbol +. The symbol
combinations of these each separated by comma (e.g. 1,3,5-7). The maximum position defines the size of the deviation.
number of layers is limited to 100, as already stated within the layershow creating
menu. core data: if activated the actually loaded coredata are reported at the given
positions in addition (see also View MenuItem - option Coredata/1D-models).
start position, end position, increment, average: specify the start and end
coordinate in the set dimension, increment the desired distance between 2 marker comments: if activated the comment markers are reported at the given
subsequent values. Average defines the range over which all values are positions in addition (see also edit comment markers).
averaged. By default average is set to increment. If average is chosen larger than
the distance between two picks within the layershow file, an averaging is statistic summary: If activated a statistic summary is added at the end of the
performed over the corresponding number of data points. report or at the end of each block defined by a marker comment (option marker
comments activated). The summary contains the following information:
report only construction data: if activated only picks at the construction change 1. line: statistics for comment marker
markers (see also global settings, chap. 1.2.1) are used. The number of reported 2. line: length of section
values is equal to the number of construction change markers. Averaging is done 3.- n. line: statistic summary for each layer. Each line contains the information for
like for the normal report output. one layer:
average absolute amplitude
summary comment data: option replaces the old option “summary construction average amplitude
data”. If activated all picks between two comment markers are averaged. In average thickness
addition the comment will be output in the first column of the report. The start standard deviation of the average thickness
position will be rezeroed at a new comment position if the option rezero at max. thickness deviation between two adjacent picks
comment is activated (exception: a construction change marker (see also global number of cores
settings, chap. 1.2.1) has been found). The number of reported values is equal to max. deviation in % between the core thickness and the thickness of the picks
the number of comment markers plus 1. The total start and end position are
automatically taken from the layer-show. The option is useful if you only want to comments: if activated a freely definable comment block is output in addition at
pick a single point to represent material depth between two construction changes. the very beginning of the report. The comments are stored on the file
To consider: the number of characters within one report colum is restricted by the ReportComment.txt under the project directory after having started the report
option number of digits. Therefore you must adapt this number to the max. size of output. In analogy the comments are automatically loaded from this file when
the comments if you do not want to loose any informations of the comments. activating the option comments.
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 261 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 262

number of digits: enter the total number of digits for each report value. 1.12.3.3 Create LayerShow velocities
decimal places: enter the number of decimal places for each report value.
This option allows to calculate laterally variable layer or mean velocities and to
check amplitudes: activate this option if you want that the amplitudes of the store these values together with the actual distancies on an ASCII-file. You may
individual picks are controlled before generating the report. If the amplitude of any manually input the layer (mean) velocities or calculate the values based on
layer pick is 0 this pick will not be considered and all values for this layer pick multioffset data (see also Layershow multioffset picks, chap. 1.12.3.5) or on the
within the report output are set to 0. If the amplitudes of all layer picks at a distinct reflection amplitudes (see also Layershow amplitude calibration, chap. 1.12.3.4)
distance are 0 nothing is written out for this position. or read them from an ASCII core file (option coredata/1D-models). The resulting
layer (mean) velocities are stored on a file with the extension VLA under the path
xy-coordinates: if activated the xy-coordinates of the receivers stored in each ASCII under the projectpath. This velocity file may be used within the Create
trace header of the actual profile are written out within the 2. and 3. colum (see LayerShow (chap. 1.12.3.1 - option option velocity file activated). The file has the
also trace header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6). This allows you for example to write following format:
out non equidistant xy-coordinates or the xy-coordinates, if the profile is not comment line
orientated into one direction (x or y). comment line
1.distance v-layer1 v-layer2 ..... v-layer100
correct gain curve: With this option activated the gaincurve stored in the 2.distance v-layer1 v-layer2 ..... v-layer100
fileheader of the actual line is used for the amplitude correction. One must ....
consider that before picking the line must not be corrected in time and the starting n.distance v-layer1 v-layer2 ..... v-layer100
time (timebegin) must not be changed. If the first 4 characters within the second comment line are "mean" the velocities
are used as mean velocities within the Create LayerShow menu.
correct transmission loss: With this option activated the transmission losses T The given velocities refer to the layer above the layer boundary. You may edit the
when the wave is entering a layer boundary are corrected (T=1-r2 - with r- file and change any value.
reflexion coefficient). After choosing the option a window is opened with the following input options:

correct geom.spreading: With this option activated the geometrical spreading is start position, end position, increment: specify the start and end coordinate in
approximately corrected. The amplitudes or the picks are multiplied with the travel the set dimension for the velocity file. Increment specifies the desired increment
time. This is an approximation for a constant velocity. The starting time of the line between subsequent distance values for the velocity file. If the velocities are
must be set to 0 and must be equal to that time when the impulse is generated. calculated based on the amplitudes a mean value is calculated if more than one
pick exists within this distance increment. It is recommended to use a quite large
start: starts the creation of the layershow report. The report is displayed within a increment in order to balance possible statistical amplitude variations.
list box. Closing this box terminates the window.
Reference choice: allows the input or the calculation of the reference amplitude
close: terminates the window. needed for the calculation of the velocities based on amplitude calibration.
Possibilities:
manual: manual input of the true amplitude, this means the entered amplitude
must be corrected for all necessary effects (e.g. gaincurve, geometrical
spreading).
reference picks: calculation of the reference amplitude based on a picked onset,
e.g. the reflexion from a metal plate. The actual activated correction options (see
below) are used. You have to consider that the gaincurve of the actual line is
used for the gain curve correction, this means that the reference line and the
actual data line must have been acquired with the same gain curve and the same
input parameters (sample increment, number of samples). The mean value is
calculated from all reference picks.

pick files: allows to load the different pick files for the amplitude calibration or for
the multioffset picks of the individual layers (see option layer velocity). If the
velocities for all layers are entered manually no pick files must be loaded. The
maximum number of selectable files is 200.
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 263 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 264

consider that before picking the line must not be corrected in time and the starting
Within the "velocity box / layer" panel you may specify how the layer velocities time (timebegin) must not be changed.
for each layer are determined:
correct transmission loss: With this option activated the transmission losses T,
layer number: enter the layer number when the wave is entering a layer boundary, are corrected (T=1-r2 - with r-
reflexion coefficient).
layer velocity determination: input if the layer velocities above the given
boundary are entered manually (option manual) or calculated based on the pick correct geom.speading: With this option activated the geometrical spreading is
amplitudes and a referenceamplitude (option amplitude calibration) or approximately corrected. The amplitudes or the picks are multiplied with the travel
calculated based on multioffset data (option multioffset picks) or taken from time. This is an approximation for a constant velocity. The starting time of the line
coredata (option coredata/1D-models). must be set to 0 and must be equal to that time when the impulse is generated.
If manual input is activated only one value for each layer may be entered for all
distancies. For layer boundary 1 the amplitude calibration is not available.
If amplitude calibration is activated the velocities for the individual layer are Within the "control panel" you are starting the calculation:
calculated from the selected pick file corresponding to that layer using the correct
options (see also Layershow amplitude calibration, chap. 1.12.3.4). filename: allows the input of an arbitrary name. The file receives the extension
If multioffset picks is activated the velocities for the individual layer are VLA and is stored in the directory ASCII.
calculated from the selected pick files using an automatic adaptation of the picks
with different offsets (see also Layershow multioffset picks, chap. 1.12.3.5). start: starts the velocity calculation and the data are stored on the given file
If core data/1D-models is activated the velocities for the individual layer are name. The velocities are displayed within a list box. Closing this box terminates
taken from a core-file ((see also View MenuItem, chap. 1.4 - option Coredata/1D- the window.
models) to be chosen from the filelist. An automatic interpolation between the
values at the different core positions is performed. If no information for a distinct close: terminates the windows.
layer is given at all the velocity is set to 0. If only no information is given at distinct
postions again an interpolation (extrapolation) between the given values is done.

velocity type: input if layer velocities or mean velocities are written out to the
VLA-file. The 2. comment line of the VLA-file contains the information if the
velocities are assumed to be layer (interval) or mean velocities. If amplitude
calibration is used always layer velocities are written out.

apply on all layers: activate this option in order to apply the actual chosen layer
velocity determination item on all layer numbers. To be considered: if the velocity
item “manual” is chosen you still have to specify the velocity for every layer.

use construction change: if activated a query appears for redefining the manual
velocities whenever a construction change marker has been found (see also
global settings chap. 1.2.1). If the option coredata/1D-models has been chosen
for any layers no interpolation will be done within the area bordered by the
construction changes unless two or more coredata are located within this area.

set all layer velocities: the option predefines the manual velocity input to the
specified value for all layers for which the manual velocity determination type is
chosen.

Within the "correction for amplitude calibration" panel you may specify some
options which only act for the amplitude calibration:

correct gain curve: With this option activated the gaincurve stored in the
fileheader of the actual line is used for the amplitude correction. One must
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 265 2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 266

1.12.3.4 LayerShow amplitude calibration All these effects do have a great influence on the dynamics of the wave field.
Most of these effects cannot be corrected for. Approximable the following
corrections can be applied:
Under very restrictive assumptions (see below) it is possible to calculate
approximately the layer velocities from the reflexion amplitudes. - geometrical spreading (see option geometr.spreading)
Under the assumption that the reflexion coefficient is only dominated by a velocity - transmission losses when passing a layer boundary (option transmission loss)
contrast the vertical incidence reflexion coefficient is given by:
To be considered: In any case you have to pick the correct phase because the
r= (v2-v1) / (v2+v1) polarity of the amplitude determines whether a velocity decrease or increase is
given.
with v1 - velocity of the upper layer
v2 - velocity of the lower layer Because of the huge number of possible effects which cannot be corrected for
the velocity determination based on the amplitudes must be very carefully
interpreted.
Knowing the amplitudes of the incoming and reflecting wave and of v1 the
velocity in the lower layer is given by: Example of processing flow:
-data processing - you must be sure that no filter or editing step is used which
v2=v1 * (A0 +A1)/(A0 -A1) influences the succeeding amplitude correction. Therefore no static correction
must be used, if you want to correct for the gaincurve and the geometrical
with A0 - amplitude of the incoming wave spreading. Additionally the timegain must not be changed except you entered the
A1- reflexion amplitude correct values into the gaincurve in the profile header. Additionally the starting
time must be equal to that time the impulse is sent (this also holds true for the
Normally it is difficult to determine A0. In the case of a radar measurement with reference line).
the source in the air you may use the reflexion from a metal plate as the -picking the reflexions - the first boundary must be the reflexion from the air-
reference. This reflection has a phase shift of 180 degrees. Under the surface boundary. All layers must be subsequently numbered starting at 1.
assumption that the initial impulse has a negative sign, v2 is defined as: -picking the reference reflector, e.g. the metal plate reflection. To be considered:
the same gaincurve and the same input parameters (sample increment, sample
v2=v1 *(A0 -A1)/(A0 +A1) number) must be used for the reference line as for the data line.
-calculation of the velocities based on the pick amplitudes using the option create
with A0 - amplitude of the incoming wave with 180 degrees phase shift velocities - activate the wanted corrections.
A1 - reflexion amplitude -Generate the layer-show under the option create. Use for velocity choice the
option velocity file for the time-depth migration with activated or deactivated
option layerinterpolation.
The measured amplitudes do not correspond to the true amplitude values of the -Generate a report under the option create report using the identical amplitude
incoming and reflecting wave. They are dominated by several factors: corrections as for the velocity calculation.

- geometrical spreading
- transmission losses passing through a layer boundary
- damping

In addition the reflexion is influenced by

- rough reflector
- transmission zone instead of a pure discontinuity
- thin layers
2D-Dataanalysis, Layer Show MenuItem 267 2D-Dataanalysis, CMP-processing 268

1.12.3.5 LayerShow multioffset picks 1.12.4 CMP-processing

With the CMP-processing option activated a complete CMP-processing of single
If constant offset lines with different offsets have been acquired you have the shots stored in one file is possible. The main possibilities:
possibility to automatically determine the layer velocities along the profile from -setting and controlling of the CMP-processing geometry
these multioffset data. -sorting to shot, CMP, geophone or offset with the possibility of a fast change of
the sorting parameter
First you have to pick the layer boundary for all the different lines within the Pick -interactive development of a 2-D velocity model (CMP velocity analysis) and
Menu (chap. 1.12.2.). To be considered: the source receiver offset must be stacking of CMP, shot or geophone sorted data ( CMP-processing stack).
stored within the fileheader (see option S/R-distance in chap. 1.9.3). The picks
must be stored separately for each layer and for each offset within the Pick save The menu CMP processing allows the sorting of data from single shots on a
Menu (chap. 1.12.2.1). The layernumber must be entered and must be the same profile to CMP, to common geophones, shots or offsets. The CMP processing is
for each offset. based on a file containing all shots. Please use the option conversion
sequence/combine lines/shots within the import menu for the conversion of the
Then you may calculate the layer velocities within the Create LayerShow single external formatted shot data to the internal REFLEX-format. This option
velocities menu (chap. 1.12.3.3) using the option multioffset picks. First you have allows an automatic combination of the selected data into one file (see also
to select the wanted pickfiles. Import ConversionMode).
For each layer you may switch between the manual input or the automatic
determination based on the multioffset data but you have to consider the The geometrical settings may be edited, e.g. if they are not or not complete read
following: if you are using the manual input for the upper layers you should use from the original files. For defining the geometry click on the option geometry in
the mean velocity type because otherwise the program is not able to calculate the tab control. Editing can be done manually or by applying a predefined
layer velocities from the multioffset picks (see warning message below). A standard geometry (see also CMP-processing geometry).
combination with amplitude calibration is not allowed. The program uses the geometrical settings to create a so-called INDEX-file. This
The program automatically determines the best mean velocity fit for the picks with file contains all information on the locations of the CMP's, the shots and the
the different offsets (at least two picks with different offsets must exist). The geophones.
option velocity type determines if layer (interval) velocities or mean velocities are
written out on the VLA-file. If the geometry is defined, you may easily switch the sorting to CMP, shot,
receiver or offset simply by activating the corresponding option. The ensembles
The following warning messages may appear: to be processed (e.g. display, velocity analysis, stack) must be predefined using
the following parameters:
- for some layerpoints only picks with one offset have been found: this may min.number: enter the number of the first ensemble (CMP or shot or ...) to be
happen if the layer was not picked at the same positions for all offsets e.g. if the shown or stacked
layerboundary is not continuous. Therefore a suggestion in this case: pick the max.number: enter the number of the last wanted ensemble (CMP or shot or ...)
layer boundary for the first offset and save it. Load the picks for the next offset to be shown or stacked
data and only change them and do not include new picks. increment: enter the increment between the ensembles to be shown or stacked.
- transformation into layer velocities not always sucessful because no upper picks The increment determines which ensembles between min. and max. number are
found: this may happen if the velocity type is set to "layer velocity" and the maintained for further processing.
program is not able to transform the calculated mean velocities to layer velocities
because the upper boundary is not specified at distinc points, e.g. if the upper Activating the option show replots the data window based on the actual
boundary is not continuous. Please use in this case the velocity type "mean ensemble settings.
velocity".
velocity analysis: activating this option opens the CMP velocity analysis menu
for the selected ensembles. The program automatically creates all necessary files
(filenames, e.g. CMP_0020.DAT for CMP 20) and jumps into the menu CMP
velocity analysis. The program asks for the trace increment of the individual
ensembles. The default increment is calculated from the trace increment stored
within the fileheader. You must enter the correct increment because the velocity
analysis is based on a constant increment. The program calculates the mean
trace increment between all traces within the individual ensembles and shows it
2D-Dataanalysis, CMP-processing 269 2D-Dataanalysis, CMP-processing 270

on the top of the input query. If there is a jump within one ensemble, e.g. at the channels would be e.g.: first receiver: 4.00, left shot receiver: 0.00, right shot
shotposition, zero traces are automatically included. receiver: 4.00, last receiver: 96.00.

For each ensemble you may use all options of this menu to create 1-D velocity Activating fixed line allows you to define the geometry for a fixed geophone line
models which may be combined together to a 2-dimension model which can be for different shot points. The input parameters are the same as for moving line
used for a subsequent stacking. except the input of the receiver positions. You only have to specify the first and
last receiver position.First and last geophone are the absolute coordinates in
Stacking (see also CMP-processing stack) may be done either using a NMO- contrast to moving line where relative coordinates (to the shot) are used.
stack or a slant stack. example: 48 channels and a receiver increment of 2 meter: first receiver: 100,
last receiver: 194.

1.12.4.1 CMP-processing geometry With the option y-line direction activated the line is assumed to be orientated in
y-direction. This option should only be activated if no further CMP-processing
Within this panel the manual editing of the geometrical settings or the applying of steps are done because for some CMP-processing steps the line direction is
a standard geometry to a selectable number of traces is enabled. always assumed in x-direction. Use this option for example to define the
The program creates a so-called INDEX-file on the basis of the geometrical geometry of a two boreholes transmission measurement.
settings, containing all informations on the locations of the CMP's, shots and
geophones. The option save allows to store the actual standard geometry settings on disk.
The filename automatically receives the extension STD and the data are stored
To be considered: the sorting within the geometry table is done with ascending under the path ASCII under the projectdirectory. The option load allows to load a
shot coordinates. In the case that the data have been acquired with descending previously saved standard geometry.
shot coordinates (this means in negative direction - 1. Fieldrecord has the
greatest shot coordinate and last fieldreocrd has the smallest one) the For applying the defined standard geometry to the current profile it is necessary
shotnumbers are inverse to the fieldrecord numbers or tracenumbers. If a to choose the option apply std.geometry.
standard geometry will be used for such a case, your have to enter the greates
shot coordinate for the shot start (according to the shot coordinate of fieldrecord The option read from ascii-file allows you to read the geometry from an ASCII-
1) and a negative shot increment. The same holds true for the receiverline if the file. The ASCII file must exist under the path ASCII and must have the extension
first geophone has the greatest coordinate and the last geophone the smallest DST. Each line of the ASCII file contains the following 6 informations:
one. tracenumber distance Shot-X-Pos Shot-Y-Pos receiver-X-Pos receiver-YPos
Defining the tracenumber gives you the opportunity to read the geometry only for
Two different standard geometries are implemented: moving line and fixed line. a distinct part of the data.

Activating moving line allows you to define the geometry for a geophone line The option save on AsciiFile allows to write the geometry to an ASCII-file with
moving with the shots. After the selection of this option you must enter the the extension DST (format see option read from ascii-file above).
parameters in the lower left panel. Nr.of channel is the number of channels per
shot. First and last trace define the range on the profile for which the standard The option edit single traces allows you to change the geometry of each trace
geometry should be valid. This gives you the opportunity to declare standard individually. When activating this option the trace header Edit menu will be
geometries for different ranges of the profile. Instead of the first and last trace it is opened.
also possible to define the range using the original field record numbers. The
first and last trace number are automatically changed when entering the field The switch box show geometry controls the table output in the lower right box.
record numbers and vice versa. Shotstart is the position of the shot of the first Activating geometry a table containing all current geometrical settings of the
ensemble, shot increment is the distance between successive shots and shot individual shots are shown.
offset is the distance between a shot and the profile in perpendicular direction. Activating index file displays the actual index number fo the shots, receivers and
Receiver increment is the distance between successive receivers and receiver offsets.
offset is the distance between a geophone and the profile in perpendicular
direction. First receiver, left shot receiver, right shot receiver and last The parameter CMP-bin defines the bin size for defining matching CMP's. All
receiver define the position of the geophones with respect to the shot. CMP's falling within this binrange are combined together. Use a value greater
example:symmetrical geometry with 24 channels and a receiver increment of 1 than 0 if the geometry of the 2D-line is chosen in such a way that too few CMP's
meter: first receiver: -12, left shot receiver: -1, right shot receiver: 1, last receiver: match. The geometry of the individual traces is not changed by this parameter.
12. In contrast a one-sided geometry with a receiver increment of 4 m and 24
2D-Dataanalysis, CMP-processing 271 2D-Dataanalysis, CMP-processing 272

The parameter only acts on the CMP-sorting of the individual traces. Use the 3. From this crosscorrelation a timeshift value is derived for each trace. The max.
option save geometry in order to apply a new CMP-bin value. allowable shift is defined by the parameter range (enter in the given
timedimension).
The parameter offset-bin defines the bin size for defining matching offsets. All 4. The NMO-corrected traces are shifted by the corresponding timeshift values
offsets falling within this binrange are combined together. The geometry of the and the stacking (NMO-correction) is performed.
individual traces is not changed by this parameter. The parameter only acts on
the offset-sorting of the individual traces. Use the option save geometry in order slant stack: This stack sums all information along straight lines through the origin
to apply a new CMP-bin value. and assigns this sum to the vertical travel time. This is done for various slopes or
velocities within a given range (see below). The summation is done automatically
The option save geometry saves the current settings of the geometry within the for each velocity and each vertical travel time. No weighting is applied. No
fileheader and the traceheaders of the actual profile. The old geometry stored velocity analysis prior to stacking is needed. The method works if along straight
within the traceheaders will be lost of course. If you want to preserve this lines phases to be enhanced are coherent and phases to be decreased go
information you should use the option save on ASCIIFile before changing and through destructive interference. The following input parameters are needed:
saving the new geometry. min.vel.: enter the minimum velocity for the slant stack in m/ns or m/s
respectively
The option reload geometry loads the geometry from the traceheaders of the max.vel.: enter the maximum velocity for the slant stack in m/ns or m/s
actual profile. Possible changes of the geometry which have not been saved respectively
within the traceheaders will be lost. dv: enter the velocity increment for the slant stack in m/ns or m/s respectively.
The velocity range (max.vel-min.vel) is subdivided into discrete velocities based
on this increment.
After having activated the option start the filename of the stacked section as well
1.12.4.2 CMP-processing stack as the trace increment of the stacked section are queried (see comment at the
end of this chapter). The stack is stored under the path procdata with the
Stacking is possible for data sorted to CMP, shot or geophone depending on the extension 00t.
current selection of ensembles.First you have to enter the wanted sorting
ensemble (e.g. CMP) and enter the ensemble range for the stacking (e.g.: 1. Within the stack offsets panel the offset range may be redefined. By default the
CMP and last CMP and increment whereby the increment should be set to 1). min. and maximum existing offset numbers for the actual dataset are taken. Here
you may restrict the offset range by entering a higher number for min. and/or a
Two different stack possibilities are available: lower number for max.

NMO-stack: This option allows the normal moveout stack of sorted data. The
dynamical correction of travel times is done according to a preselected 2-D To be considered for the stack section:
velocity model (option load 2D model). This 2-dimensional model must have
been constructed within the menu CMP velocity analysis. After having activated The default value of the trace increment is given by the number of stack traces
the option stack the filename as well as the trace increment of the stacked and the coordinate range. If this mean traceincrement does not equal any
section is queried (see comment at the end of this chapter). The stack is stored increment between successive stack traces the resulting stack traces are
under the path procdata with the extension 00t. obviously not equidistant. This may happen for example if the shot interval is not
The option correct allows a NMO-correction based on the chosen 2-dimensional equidistant for all shots. In this case the program (from version 3.03) gives a
velocity model. No stacking is performed, therefore the number of traces remains warning message and asks if equidistant traces based on the mean
the same but the sorting of the data may have been changed according to the traceincrement shall be made from the non equidistant stack section. If this
chosen sorting ensembles (CMP, shot, receiver or offset). After having activated procedure is cancelled the resulting stack section not equidistant and you must
the option correct the filename of the NMO-corrected section is queried. The activate the plotoption TraceHeaderDistancies (only enabled for the wiggle mode)
section is stored under the path procdata with the extension 00t. or you must make the stack section equidistant afterwards.
With the option corr.residuals activated an automatic correction of the residual
statics is applied for the NMO-stack (option stack) and the NMO-correction
(option correct). The procedure is as following:
1. A stack trace is created for each ensemble based on the given 2-dimensional
velocity distribution.
2. A crosscorrelation is performed for each NMO-corrected trace within each
ensemble and the corresponding stack trace.
2D-Dataanalysis, A/D conversion 273 2D-Dataanalysis, A/D conversion 274

1.12.5 A/D conversion Trace length: Please ensure, that the chosen value of the trace length matches
the value adjusted at the measurement equipment.

The optional module A/D Conversion enables you to convert analog one-channel Start time: This option allows you to set a start time from which the time axis is
data into the REFLEX format during measurement. With the help of A/D plotted. The start time is written to the file header and the converted data are not
conversion the analog data are converted in real time to digital REFLEX influenced by setting the start time. E.g., there will be no data loss if the start time
formatted data and stored. The resolution of the conversion is 12-bit. is set to 5 ns but the data will be displayed with a time axis starting at 5 ns.
Two analog channels must be present: one trigger channel and one data
channel. The trigger channel is used to determine the start and the length of each AD-CARD: Specification of the AD-CARD. (At present only the conversion with a
data scan. PCMCI-Card DAQ-CARD 700 is implemented.) Activating the AD-CARD button
Important: The values Scan Rate and Trace Length have to match the values at shows the ADCardInput window which allows to enter some specifications of the
the measurement equipment to ensure a correct A/D conversion. Please set AD-card (see below).
carefully the coordinates and the filename specification to avoid data loss caused
by overwriting previous converted files. Apparature: Specification of the measure system. (At present analog data of
SIR-8 and SIR-3 systems of GSSI can be used.)
The data are converted using a double buffering acquisition. The data buffer is
configured as a circular buffer. Whenever half of the buffer is filled, the data are Coordinates:
transferred and can be displayed or stored while in the meantime the second half
buffer is filled up. Therefore, a continuous data acquisition is possible. ProfileDirection: enter the axis in which the profile is mainly orientated. Possible
The theoretical max. number of samples to be transferred is 50000 per second. Inputs are X or Y.
The practical max. acquisition rate also depends on the speed of the computer
and the processing steps you ordered. Activating the oscilloscope function (option ProfileConstant: enter the axis perpendicular to the profile orientation. Possible
show 1D-wiggle - see below) drastically increases the cpu time and therefore Inputs are X or Y. With the setting of the ProfileDirection and the ProfileConst the
reduces the max. acquisition rate. The same holds true for the display of the 2D- so-called profile plane is determined.
line. It is necessary to individually determine the max. acquisition rate depending
on the settings. XStart: enter the starting coordinate in x-direction.
The acquisition rate is calculated from the number of samples multiplied with the
scan rate (see below). Approximately the program automatically controls during XEnd: enter the ending coordinate in x-direction.
the acquisition if scans have been lost. The err. number in percent shown in the
small memo window should be 0 or very small. If working with high acquisition YStart: enter the starting coordinate in y-direction.
rates they should be controlled manually by counting the number of acquired
scans within a given time range to ensure that no scans are lost. YEnd: enter the ending coordinate in y-direction.

In order to run the program with the A/D conversion module the nidaq dll’s of the number: enter a number between 0 and 99 which is used for the automatic
DAQ Card 700 must be installed. naming of the profile if the filename specification is set to automatic name.

To collect data the following topics have to be set: Wheel: Enable this option, if a survey wheel is used during data collection.

AD-specifications: UseCoordinates: Enable this option if you want that the entered coordinates
together with the trace increment determine the number of traces to be acquired.
TimeDimension: Setting the dimension of the time scale. The data acquisition automatically stops when the entered profileend is reached:
e.g.: XStart: 0; XEnd: 50; trace increment: 0.1 - the program automatically stops
Scan Rate: Please ensure, that the chosen value of the Scan Rate matches the the acquisition when the number of scans exceeds 501. The option is only
value adjusted at the measurement equipment. enabled when the option Wheel is activated.
Peculiarity for plotting the data: If the number of scans to be acquired is smaller
Sample Number: This number specificates the number of samples the complete than the number of display points within the b-scan window, the plotsize of one
scan is digitized with. If not enough samples per scan are used, aliasing will scan is increased according to the relationship
occur! Based on the entered ScanRate the sample number is automatically display-pointnumber/scan-number.
changed in order to fit the given sampleintervals of the AD-device.
2D-Dataanalysis, A/D conversion 275 2D-Dataanalysis, A/D conversion 276

trace increment: enter the trace increment between successive traces if a scroll 2D-line: If this option is activated the 2D-line is scrolled after the data have
survey wheel is used. reached the end of the display. Otherwise the data are plotted from the beginning
of the display and the previous data are overwritten.

Filename specification: If no one of the previous three options is activated, the converted data are not
displayed but stored in any way.
This group box allows to specify the naming of the converted profiles. A comment
can be entered within the memo box at the bottom. Pl.Opt.: enter the PlotOptions

specification: this option allows you to specify the naming of the converted ProJect: enter the project directory
profiles. Entering automatic name means that the naming is based on the
entered profile coordinates in profile constant direction (see below). Choosing Global: this menu allows to specify some global settings parameters
manual input means that the filename must be entered manually.

filename: enter a name of the converted file provided that the specification is set ADCardInput Box:
to manual input.
AD-input (V): enter the input range for the analog signals. Possible values are +-
Filenamefactor: used if the specification is set to automatic name. The start- 2.5 V, +-5V or +-10 V.
coordinate in profile-constant direction is multiplied with that factor for naming. A
value larger than 1 (e.g. 10) is for example reasonable if floating point numbers High trigger (V): enter the high trigger range in Volts - example values: SIR-3:
should enter the naming. The actual coordinate is of course not influenced by this 2.5 V; SIR-8: 2 V
value.
Low trigger (V): enter the low trigger range in Volts - example values: SIR-3: 0.5
automatic name: The first two digits of the name are taken from the V; SIR-8: 1 V
ProfileConstant direction. The start-coordinate in the direction of the profile-
constant (only Integer number) is used for the digits 3 to 6. For this the coordinate tr. delay: The trigger detection is made after A/D-conversion. To ensure that
is being multiplied by the so-called filenamefactor. The 7th and 8th digit in the file every trigger is detected, the tr. delay specifies which of these digitized values
name is determined by the number. following the first trigger value is used to detect the second trigger value. A value
an example: ProfileDirection is set to Y and ProfileConstant is set to X. The greater than 1 (e.g. 2) is useful because the triggerstep has a finite slope.
profile extends in Y-direction from 0 to 100 meters. The ProfileConstant The apparatures SIR-3 and SIR-8 are triggered in the following way:
coordinates are set to XStart = 1 and XEnd=1. The number is set to 0. With SIR-3: one digitized value must exceed the high trigger and the tr.delay following
automatic file naming the name will be XP000100.DAT (filenamefactor set to 1). value must lie below the low trigger.
SIR-8: one digitized value must lie below the low trigger and the tr.delay
following value must exceed the high trigger.

ControlBox: device number: this number is assigned by the configuration utility of the A/D-
CARD. You must enter the same number as given by this utility.
Start/Stop: Start/Stop of the A/D conversion.
With the option trigger data you may define if the data to be acquired are
Pause: By clicking this button, the A/D conversion is interrupted without closing triggered or not. With this option activated the channel defined within the
the actual file. Clicking the button a second time starts the A/D conversion again ChannelGroup is used as the trigger channel. The other channel is the data
and the following data are added to the actual file. channel. The start and the length oft the data scan to be acquired is defined by
the trigger channel.
Exit: Exit the ADConversion module With this option deactivated you may convert the channel defined within the
ChannelGroup without triggering. Use this option for example in order to control
show 2D-line: By choosing this option the converted data are plotted as 2D-line the trigger channel.
on the display. Default: Channel 0: trigger; Channel 1: data.

show 1D-line: By choosing this option the converted data are displayed as 1D- The option appl.delay allows you to define a delay value for the plotting and the
line in a separate window. refreshing of the screen. This value also determines every appl.delay the mouse
2D-Dataanalysis, A/D conversion 277 2D-Dataanalysis, edit comment markers 278

or keyboard is active. This means you may stop the acquisition only every 1.12.6 edit comment markers
"appl.delay." trace.
Plotting and refreshing the screen needs some cpu-time. Therefore the data
acquisition might be more or less delayed dependent on the computer used. Use With the option edit comment markers activated you may edit and remove
a value larger than 1 (e.g. 10) if you want to use a high acquisition rate. Use a existing comment markers and insert new comment markers. Comment markers
value of 1 if your computer is fast enough for the wanted acquisition rate and you are displayed at the top of the profile if the option show marker within the
want to stop the acquisition at every trace. PlotOptions menu is activated. If the comment marker text is equal to the
construction change marker text (see global settings, chap. 1.2.1) a vertical bar is
plotted in addition.
AD-connector for SIR-3 or SIR-8 After having activated the option a new panel and a table at the lower left corner
of the primary profile appears.
connector pin assignments for DAQ-Card 700: With the option load comment markers you may load the existing comment
markers into the table. The first colum shows the trace number, the second the
channel 0: trigger channel pin distance and the third the comment. The symbol "x" within the first row indicates
the comment marker. It is possible to edit the comment shown in the third colum.
channel 1: data channel pin The comment markers are shown as blue rectangles within the profiles in
addition.
ground pin:
With the option load distance markers you may load the existing distance
markers into the table. Again the first colum shows the trace number, the second
the distance and the third the comment. No symbol "x" within the first row
indicates the distance marker. Editing within the comment cell is enabled. The
distance markers are shown as white rectangles within the profiles in addition.

The option create allows to create new comment markers. The new comment
markers are shown within the table.

The option batch create allows to create and save new comment markers for a
choosable number of datafiles. After having activated the option the wanted
datafiles have to be chosen (multiple file choice using the strg or shft key). If the
comment markers are created based on ASCII files the ASCII-files must have the
same filename (except the extension) and the extension txt and must exist under
the directory ASCII under the projectdirectory. Example:
pin connector at SIR-3: c:\data\test\procdata\file01__00.t -> c:\data\test\ascii\file01__00.txt
If the option ASCII XY-coord. has been chosen (see below) the ASCII-file type is
triggerchannel at Monitor BNC-SWEEP asked for (either XY-coord. files or hypack file) in addition. To be considered: still
datachannel at Monitor BNC-SIGNAL existing comment markers will always be removed.

Creating the marker positions is based on:

pin connector at SIR-8:
equidistant: With this option activated the option generates equidistant comment
triggerchannel at BNC TRIGGER near marker keys markers based on the distance markers and the entered increment. Each
datachannel at Graphics recorder: data at A distance marker is the new starting point for generating equidistant comment
ground at B markers in-between two successive distance markers. By default the actual
construction change marker text (see global settings menu, chap. 1.2.1) is taken
for the comment marker text.
2D-Dataanalysis, edit comment markers 279 2D-Dataanalysis, edit comment markers 280

ASCII distance: with the option ASCII distance activated the distance positions The option sort table allows you to sort the table with ascending trace numbers.
and the marker texts of the new comment markers are read from an ASCII-file
(one line equals one distance value). 3 different formats are supported: The option save table allows to output the comment marker table to an ASCII-file
1. If the chosen ASCII-file has the extension TAB another format is used (extension TAB under the directory ASCII under the projetdirectory). Such an
which corresponds to the format for saving the comment marker tabella ASCII-file may also be used for creating new comment markers for another file
on an ASCII-file (see also option save table): using the distance informations for the postions of the comment markers (see
tracenumber distance markerincrement comentstring option create/ASCII-file).
The tracenumber as well as the markerincrement are ignored. Use this
possibility for example if you have acquired parallel lines with a Activating the option save saves the current settings of the comment markers.
multichannel system where the antenna have different start positions The tracenumbers are used for the positions of the markers. Only the changes
and therefore the comment markers are only correctly positioned for concerning the comment markers are saved. Still existing distance markers
some files. Save the commentmarkers of the correct file on the tab-file remain unchanged.
using the option save table and load the other files, reset the existing
comment markers if necessary and create the comment markers using Activating the option save 2.lines saves the acutal comment markers onto other
this option. profiles to be selected from the file dialog. Only the changes concerning the
2. If the chosen ASCII-file has the extension MAR the format for saving the comment markers are saved. Still existing distance markers remain unchanged.
marker increments for the processingstep “marker interpol” (see chap.
1.11.6.1) is used: It is possible to set a new marker and to remove an existing one using the left
tracenumber markerincrement comentstring mouse button within the profile. With activated option set you can insert a new
The first marker is positioned on the first trace. The positions of the marker at any position clicking the left mouse button within the profile. With
following markers are calculated from this position and the entered activated option remove you can click on any marker shown in the profile in order
markerincrements. to remove it from the table. It is not possible to insert or to remove a marker
3. In all other cases the following format is used: within the table.
distance commentstring

ASCII XY-coord.: With the option ASCII XY-coord. activated the comment
markers are read from an ASCII-file with each line containing the XY-coordinates
of the comment marker and the comment itself. The program searches the
nearest traceheader coordinates (rec. x-pos. and rec. y-pos.) within the profile for
the given XY-marker coordinates and determines the corresponding tracenumber
and distance.
Two different formats of the ASCII-file are supported:
1. comment markers XY-coord. files:
X-coord. Y-coord. Commentstring
2. comment markers Hypack files:
latitude longitude Commentstring
The latitude is converted into the Y-coord.(rec. y-pos.) and the longitude is
converted into the X-coord. (rec. x-pos.) both using the following formula (e.g.
value: 422214.486):
a. 422214.486 -> this is 42 deg and 22.14486 minutes
b. 42 degrees to minutes -> 2520 minutes
Now the minutes of a. and b. are added and multiplied by a factor of 10000:
(a.+b.)*10000= (22.14486+2520)*10000=25421448.6

After having activated the option create the new comment markers are shown
with the table. Clicking on any trace number cell changes a comment marker to a
distance marker and vice versa.

The option reset allows you to reset the table.

2D-Dataanalysis, adjust trace gain 281 2D-Dataanalysis, 3-component analysis 282

1.12.7 adjust trace gain 1.12.8 3-component analysis

Activating this option allows you to individually adapt the gain of the single traces. The option allows the interpretation of 3 component data. Precondition is that the
The option is only available for data stored with the new 16 bit integer or new 32 traceheader items component (identical to the item field record no.) and the
bit floating point format (see also Import format specification, chap. 1.5.4) The Ensemble-nr. are set. The x-component (component =1) is assumed to be
option tracegain within the plotoptions menu (PlotGain/Filter, chap. 1.7.5) orientated to the north and the y-component (component =2) to the east. The z-
controlling if the gains are used for the display is automatically activated. component is stored under component =3. The sorting of the traces must be
always x,y and then z for the first ensemble and so on for the following
After having chosen the option adjust tracegain a tabella appears showing the ensembles.
traceheader coordinates and the gain of the individual traces. The gains can be For the special configuration dipole antenna and two frame antenna it is assumed
adapted either within the tabella or interactively within the data using the left or that the dipole antenna has been stored under the x-component and the two
right mouse button. The left mouse button decreases the gain of the wanted trace frame antenna must be stored under the y- and z-component (see also option
by 10 % whereby the right mouse button increases the gain by 10 %. The tabella dipole/frame).
will be automatically updated when pressing one of the two buttons. tog shown
within a tabella and can be changed manually. The option save changes saves Construct 3-component data within the import menu:
the current settings of the traceheader coordinates. The option reload from file
reloads the traceheader coordinates and gains from file. Set the sequence processing to multi components. The final REFLEXW 3-
component datafile will be constructed from several original datafiles containing
multicomponent data. Each original datafile must contain one single
multicomponent dataset. An ASCII-file under the path ASCII under the
projectdirectory (filename multicomponent.*) must exist with each line containing
the following informations:
filename(without path) declination/north inclination nr.ofcomponents angle1
angle2 angle....
One z-component must exist. The angle of this component must be set to -90/.
The order of the components within the original file is defined by the angles.
The max. total number of components (incl. the z-component) is restricted to 9.
The program searches those 2 components with the angles next to the north and
to the east and a rotation of these components into exact north and exact east
will be done. The same holds true for the z-component which will be rotated
exactly to z.

Example of a 3-component original dataset consisting of two files, which will be

finally combined to one ReflexW 3 component datafile:
xp040000.sg2 20.0 0.0 3 -90.0 0.0 90.0
xp050000.sg2 30.0 1.0 3 -90.0 0.0 90.0
Example of a 7-component original dataset consisting of two files, which will be
finally combined to one ReflexW 3 component datafile:
xp060000.sg2 40.0 0.0 7 0.0 30.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 150.0 -90.0
xp070000.sg2 50.0 1.0 7 0.0 30.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 150.0 -90.0

It is also possible to combine files with different number of components into one
single file.
2D-Dataanalysis, 3-component analysis 283 2D-Dataanalysis, 3-component analysis 284

Interpretation of a 3-component datafile: angle of the 3 antenna towards north is stored within the traceheader under
CMP(x-pos.). This angle will be subtracted from the calculated one (see also
If a 3-component file exist it is possible to interpret it within the 3-component processing option rotate 2 components (chap. 1.11.5.7).
analysis panel within the 2D-datanalysis.

The option sorting controls the display of the data.

With the option ensembles activated the data are plotted into one window with
each ensemble after the next. Each ensemble consists of the 3 different
components.
With components activated the data are plotted into 3 different windows with
each window containing all traces of one single component (x, y and z).

The option show allows to restrict the number of components to be displayed.

With xyz activated all 3 components are displayed, activating xy only displays the
two components x and y and so on.

The particle motion and the actual polarization angle can be displayed. In
order to do so, one has to choose firstly one of the four possibilities of the option
planes and secondly the length of the traveltime window (option analysis
window). The start time of the analysis window can be changed. Activating the
option act. time means that the start time of the analysis window corresponds to
the actual cursor position. Activating the option -wind./2 means a shifting of the
start time by half the analysis window length (analysis window is centered around
the actual time) and -window means a shift by the analysis window length
resulting in an endtime of the analysis which corresponds to the actual time. In
many cases the option -window will give you a sharper and more precise view of
polarization changes.
The option hodogram allows you to continuously display the particle motion
within the chosen plane when moving the mouse cursor in the data. The linearity
factor (1 - completely linear, 0 - circular) and the dominant angle are also
determined and displayed when you have chosen one of the 2-dimensional
planes. The option analysis window determines the lenght of the traveltime
window for the display and the polarization analysis. If the plane xyz has been
chosen, a 3D-cube display of the particle motion is shown.
The option colored allows to color the wiggles based on the actual polarization
angle. Again the option analysis window determines the lenght of the traveltime
window for the polarization analysis. The option is disabled when you have
chosen the plane xyz.
The option save saves the angles and the linearities on two Reflexw files. The
files have the same name like the original datafile plus ‘_ang’ for the angle file
and ‘_lin’ for the linearity file and are stored under the path rohdata. Example:
Original data: file0002.dat - anglefile: file0002_ang.dat
With the suboption dipole/frame activated the angles are determined from the
dipole antenna (x-comp.) and two frame antenna (y- and z-comp.). This is a very
special configuration and therefore shall only be used for this configuration. The
CMP velocity analysis 285 CMP velocity analysis 286

project directory. By default the file name of the data section without extension is
2. CMP(1D) velocity analysis adopted as name.
The module CMP-velocity-analysis allows the calculation of a one-dimensional
reset: resets the actual 1D-velocity model to default values. All changes not
velocity-depth-distribution from CMP- or moveout-data or wide-angle refraction
saved will be lost.
data based on different analysis techniques.
load data: opens the wanted data section. You may load the data from the
The module offers the following possibilities:
rawdata directory (the directory containing the files which are not precessed) or
from the procdata directory. If you are choosing procdata filter, a filter for the file
-interactive CMP velocity adaptation of a velocity-model for a CMP- or a
extension must be entered in order to make the choice easier. The program
moveout-section with continuous indication of the actual reflections and/or
controls whether a velocity file with the same name like the data file exists. If no
refractions.
velocity file is already loaded, this file will be automatically opened. In the other
-loading of a second CMP-section for a parallel adaptation of the reflections
case a message appears if the new velocity file if existing shall be loaded.
and/or refractions
-loading of a zero-offset section with true distance information for a calibration
load traveltimes: allows to load traveltime (pick) data without loading any wave
of the corresponding reflections and/or refractions
data. The program controls whether a velocity file with the same name like the
-CMP semblance analysis for a given velocity-interval, interactive choice of a
data file exists. If no velocity file is already loaded, this file will be automatically
vrms-depth-distribution from the semblance or unnormalized correlation analysis,
opened. In the other case a message appears if the new velocity file if existing
direct reconstruction of the interval velocities, possibility to change the resulting
shall be loaded. It is possible to load REFLEX formatted PCK files as well as 2D-
distribution by the model generation module described above
colums ASCII or ASCII-3D-tomography formatted data.
- intercepttime analysis for creating a starting model from the intercepttimes of
the refraction onsets.
load data/traveltimes: opens the wanted wavedata section together with
-generation of a CMP 2D-model based on the resulting 1D-velocity-depth
traveltime (pick) data. allows to load traveltime (pick) data without loading any
distributions. This 2D-model represents the base for the stacking, the migration
wave data. You may load the data from the rawdata directory (the directory
and the depth-conversion.
containing the files which are not precessed) or from the procdata directory. If
you are choosing procdata filter, a filter for the file extension must be entered in
The following options are valid for all analysis techniques:
order to make the choice easier. The program controls whether a velocity file with
the same name like the data file exists. If no velocity file is already loaded, this
reflection: if activated the primary and multiple (with option multiple activated)
file will be automatically opened. In the other case a message appears if the new
reflections are calculated and displayed. Use this option for the adaptation of
velocity file if existing shall be loaded.
reflection data.
Load Second Line: The option allows the additional selection of a secondary
refraction: if activated the complete traveltime-curves including forward and
profile (e.g. another shot or CMP-section or the zero-offset profile). This section is
backward tavelling waves (reflections and refractions) are calculated and
shown below the section to be investigated in a separate window. The travel time
displayed. Use this option for the adaptation of wide angle refraction and
curves on the basis of the current velocity model are plotted in both sections.
reflection data.
There are two different possibilities of comparing profiles:
a. comparison with a second shot or CMP-section, e.g. a cross profile, in order to
shotpos. allows the specification of the actual shot location. By default the shot
consider anisotropy effects. The option Sec.ShotPos. should be activated for this
location is taken from the fileheader of the profile. For a correct velocity analysis
kind of comparison.
this value has to be correctly specified.
b. comparison with the zero-offset profile. This comparison is suitable, e.g. for
better recognizing reverberations or large layer dips in the region of the CMP,
model pos. allows the modification of the position of the model within the profile
possibly having an influence on the velocity determination within the CMP or the
line. The model position is stored within the velocity file. If no velocity file is found,
shot. The option Sec.ShotPos. should be deactivated for this kind of comparison,
the model pos. is automatically set to the shotpos. The model position is
in order to facilitate a correct, distance true comparison of the beginning point of
important, if a 2D-velocity model shall be created (see option CMP 2D-model).
the CMP or the shot with the zero-offset profile.
Please notice that modifications of the model position only are saved after saving
In both cases each profile is scaled individually in x- and y-direction. Use the
the model.
zoom option to optimize the distance range of the second line in that way that an
optimal comparison of zero-offset profile and shot(CMP)-section is guaranteed.
save (save model): allows to save the current velocity-depth distribution in a file
with an arbitrary name with the extension VEL in the directory ROHDATA in the
CMP velocity analysis 287 CMP velocity analysis 288

next: the next ensemble (CMP, shot or receiver group) is chosen. The option is
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the data
only enabled if the CMP velocity menu is opened from the CMP-processing
set can be selected and plotted in full screen size. If a secondary file has been
menu.
loaded this option can also be applied to the second data set
The area to be enlarged, a rectangle, has to lie within a data set. Pressing the left
back: the previous ensemble (CMP, shot or receiver group) is chosen. The
mouse button you determine a corner of this rectangle and by moving the mouse
option is only enabled if the CMP velocity menu is opened from the CMP-
with pressed button the desired area is opened.
processing menu.
Zooming is only avaible within the data display and not within the 1D-velocity plot,
the semblance and the 2D-model display.
load model: load any existing 1D-velocity model.
Scrolling is possible in x- and time-direction. Again scrolling is only available for
the data display (only primary data). One pecularity: the timeaxis of the
Print: Use this option for printing. Depending on the actual settings only the the
semblance is directly connected to the data time axis. Therefore scrolling in
velocity model together with the data (only primary data) is printed or the
timedireciton is also possible for the semblance.
semblance or the 2D-model is printed in addition. After having activated the
option the print menu opens. Here you may enter the size of the x- and y-axis of
the data display.

EditFileHeader: opens the file header menu for making changes of the file
header for the actual data file (not for the secondary file).

multiples: if activated the first multiple reflections from the surface are calculated

Sec.ShotPos.: if activated the shot position for the second line is read from the
corresponding file header of the second line. This option is only relevant, if a
second profile is loaded using the option load Second line. Activating this option
is reasonable, if two shot(CMP)-sections shall be compared with each other,
since in this case the travel time curves always begin at the shot location of the
corresponding CMP.

vrms: the root mean square velocity is used for calculating the reflection
hyperbolas and for determining the layer (interval) velocities from the semblance
analysis.

mean: the mean velocity (mean for normal incidence) is used for calculating the
reflection hyperbolas and for determining the layer (interval) velocities from the
semblance analysis.

ray based reflections: option is under View in the main menu. If checked the
reflections based on refracted rays are shown in addition to the mean velocity-
based reflections. If the difference between these two reflections is too big, the
assumption of the mean velocity is not valid anymore.

StackTrace: option is under View in the main menu. If activated a stack trace on
the basis of the current velocity model is plotted in a new window between the
model image and the data image. This option only serves as control possibility for
the performed velocity analysis. A complete stacking of various CMPs to a zero-
offset profile only can be executed within the module cmp-processing.

resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the actual line
CMP velocity analysis 289 CMP velocity analysis 290

2.1 CMP velocity adaptation Due to these manifold modification possibilities discontinuities or arbitrary
gradients can be realized.
With the option interactive adaptation activated there is the possibility of an
interactive selection and modification of a one-dimensional velocity distribution change: Changing an existing layer or velocity (see boundary, velocity).
with immediate visualization of the reflections calculated on the basis of the
velocity model. The shot location can be freely chosen. Moreover it is possible to insert: Inserting a new layer boundary (see boundary).
optionally compute surface multiples, additionally, and display them, too.
remove: Removing a layer boundary (see boundary).
In the upper right corner the coordinates of the current cursor position are shown.
There are 3 different analysis windows: upper: For changing the velocities the modification refers to the velocities above
In the left window the current one-dimensional velocity distribution together with the selected layer boundary, i.e. the layer boundary the mouse cursor is next to.
the VRMS-distribution (dashed) is shown. Within this window you may modify the
velocity model using one of the possibilities described below. lower: For changing the velocities the modification refers to the velocities below
In the middle (right) window the currently loaded section with the current plot the selected layer boundary.
parameters and the reflections, calculated on the basis of the current velocity
distribution, are plotted. The color and the size of the calculated reflections are at boundary.: For changing the velocities the modification refers to the constant
taken from the symbol font. velocity above and below the selected layer boundary.
In the right window (only with semblance or unnormalized crosscorrelation
activated) the semblance or unnormalized correlation is shown. The actual in layer: For changing the velocities the modification refers to the velocity (s)
VRMS-velocities associated with a boundary are marked. Use the symbol font for within one layer. These are changed as a whole.
changing the color and the size of the marks. You may mark any new point and
therefore insert a new boundary. This setting is independent from the options min.vel., max. vel. and dv specify the velocity axis range of the 1D-
insert, change or remove. velocity/depth window.
The size of the different windows can be changed within the global settings menu
(chap. 1.2.1 - see option display scale). min.depth, max.depth and deltadepth specify the depth axis range of the 1D-
The number of discrete points of the calculated traveltime curves are also defined velocity/depth window.
within the within global settings menu.
If the options semblance or unnorm.corr. are active the semblance analysis
window is open and changes within the 1D-velocity model are also shown within
boundary: For active option boundary a new layer boundary can be inserted into the semblance window. Additionally you may mark any new point in the
the one-dimensional velocity model (option insert active), an old boundary can semblance analysis window and therefore insert a new boundary.
be shifted continuously (change active) or deleted (remove active).
For changing the depth of a boundary therefore the options boundary and The option intercept time allows the interactive use of the intercept time method.
change have to be activated. Now bring the mouse cursor in the direct proximity The option enables to get a first 1D-model very quickly. After having activated the
of the desired layer and then you can change its depth by keeping the left mouse option you must enter the bending points by the left mouse button. The first point
button pressed and simultaneously moving the mouse upwards or downwards. is automatically set to distance and time zero. The velocites derived from these
For inserting a new layer the options boundary and insert have to be active. You settings must increase with depth. After having finished each setting of one
set the mouse cursor to the desired location of the model and there insert a new straight line the 1D-model is automatically created and shown in the left model
layer boundary simply by clicking the left mouse button. The same procedure window. Deactivate the option when you have finished the intercept time
allows with active option remove the removal of an existing layer boundary. adaptation. It is also possible to store or interactively change this model. The
option is the same like the intercepttime adaptation within the velocity adaptation
velocity: Allows the modification of the velocity where the option change and one menu of the 2D-dataanalysis window.
of the options upper, lower, at boundary or in layer has to be active. The
modification is done by setting the mouse cursor in direct proximity to a layer
boundary, keeping the left mouse button pressed and simultaneously moving the
mouse horizontally. With active option upper the velocity can only be changed
above the selected layer boundary, the corresponding applies for the option
lower. For active option in layer the velocity of the whole layer is changed. For
active option at boundary the velocity above and below the layer boundary is
kept constant and an appropriate variation is permitted.
CMP velocity analysis, CMP semblance analysis 291 CMP velocity analysis, CMP 2D-model 292

2.2 CMP semblance analysis 2.3 CMP 2D-model

The semblance or the unnormalized correlation analysis allows you to specify This option allows the creation of a 2-dimensional velocity model on the basis of
vrms velocities within the velocity/time spectrum. 1D-velocity-depth-profiles. This 2-dimensional velocity distribution can be used,
e.g. for the migration and depth conversion within the module 2D data analysis or
For a given velocity range and velocity increment (min.vel., max.vel., for stacking within the module CMP-processing.
vel.interval) either the semblance, i.e. the normalized output-to-input energy
ratio, or the unnormalized crosscorrelation is calculated within a given time For the creation of the distribution previously created 1D-velocity models are
window for all times. For the semblance the timewindow is centered around the comprised to a 2D-model. For this the position within the profile line for the
actual time, for the crosscorrelation the timewindow starts at the actual time. The corresponding 1D-models has to be determined previously (see option model
summation is done over the given trace range (1. and last trace and n.trace). pos.). Between these 1D-models a linear interpolation is performed. The 1D-
The calculated quantities are shown after having activated the start button in the model with the largest model position is extrapolation to greater position values.
right analysis window with the velocity as the x-axis and the travel time as the y- The 1D-model with the smallest model position is extrapolation to smaller position
axis. The color assignment can be changed using the PlotOptions menu. values of the 2D-model.
Within the 2D-model file only the filenames of the chosen 1D-velocity models are
The velocity range has to be chosen large enough, so that all occurring velocities stored. That is why changes in any of these 1D-models at a later stage have an
are comprised. The increment and the number of traces have to be optimized in influence if the 2D-model file is used for any processing step.
that way that a good viewing and selection is possible.
create: allows to create a new 2D-model file under the directory rohdata using
The unnormalized crosscorrelation takes into account the true amplitudes and it the extension 2DM. After activating create you have to select the 1D-cuts, that
is therefore the better choice if you only wish to adapt high amplitude reflexions. are going to be used for the 2D-distribution and writes the filenames of these 1D-
The semblance analysis uses a normalization. That is why the semblance should cuts in the 2D-model file.
be used if the analysis is mainly focussed on the correlation of the individual
phases and also small amplitude reflexions shall be adapted. create corefile: if activated an ASCII coredatafile is automatically created when
creating a 2D-model (same filename with extension cor - see also option Core
After having activated the start button, the semblance or the unnormalized data/1D models under View MenuItem).
crosscorrelation is calculated. After having finished the calculation, the program
automatically returns to the CMP velocity adaptation with activated semblance or rasterfilename: enter the filename of the Reflexw rasterfile (vrms-velocities)
unnorm.correlation option. It is possible to modify the actual 1D-velocity model which is automatically created on the right hand side when starting the creation of
either within the semblance analysis window or within the velocity model window. the 2D-model. The file will be stored under rohdata under the actual project
If you want to create a completely new model you must activate the button reset directory. If blank a dummyfile will be used.
and then insert new boundaries either within the semblance analysis or the
velocity model window. load: loads an existing 2D-model file.

You may change the actual colorpalette for the semblance display using the show: shows the VRMS-distribution of the actual 2D-model file using a color-
option act. palette independently from the colorpalette for the actual profile. coding.

rasterfilename: enter the filename of the Reflexw rasterfile (semblance values). min.dist., max. dist., min.depth and max.depth define the distance/depth
The file will be stored under rohdata under the actual project directory. If blank a range for showing the 2D-model.
dummyfile will be used.

Direct zooming within the semblance analysis is not possible. The zooming in
time direction is connected to the zoom within the profile display. A zooming in
velocity direction is not possible.
3D-datainterpretation 293 3D-datainterpretation 294

In addition you may construct single timeslices (C-scans) from different 2D-lines
3. 3D-datainterpretation originating all from one acquisition plane - option Generate single timeslices
under 3D-File MenuItem.
The module 3D data-interpretation allows the interpretation of 3-dimensional data
by displaying x-, y- or z-slices or the full 3D-data volume. A 3D-data file is a
Using the option windows the cuts are displayed in manually scalable windows.
single REFLEX formatted file which consists of several equidistant 2D-lines
The step and smoothing rate may be freely chosen - see also Windowing 3D-file,
sequentially stored. All traces belonging to one 2D-line have the same ensemble-
chap. 3.3.
number which is stored within the REFLEXW traceheader (see chap. 1.9.6). The
3D-data may be easily constructed from equidistant 2D-lines either during the
Using the option scroll you may continuously move through the 3D-cube either in
import (see also Import ConversionMode - option combine lines/shots) or in a
x-, y- or z-direction using the track bar. Again the step and smoothing rate is
later stage within the 3D-datainterpretation menu. The 3D data cube is controlled
freely choosable - see also Scroll 3D-file, chap. 3.2.
by only two parameters: the trace increment within each 2D-line and the
linedistance between each line.
Using the option 3D-cube allows the three-dimensional plotting of the 3D-data
volume within predefinable spatial limits and an arbitrarily definable observation
The data are completely loaded into the RAM of the computer whereby a fast
point. Thus you have the possibility to look
visualization of the data is possible. The max. number of points in each direction
at the cube from different angles, e.g. from
(x, y and z or t) is 1024. If the points in one or more direction exceed this
the front side, the back side or from the side
boundary Reflexw offers two possibilities rescale and subdivide which can be
- see also 3D-cube display, chap. 3.4.
selected in a separate window which only opens if the 1024 boundary will be
reached.
Processing: here you may enter the type of
The option rescale automatically calculates rescaling factors in all directions
display for both the primary and secondary
where the number of points exceed the 1024 boundary. Example: 2400 points in
3D-file.
line direction and 1200 points in time direction. The data are automatically
no means that the data are displayed as they are.
rescaled by a factor of 3 and 2 resulting in 800 points in line direction and 600
absoluteValues: if activated the absolute values are calculated and shown.
points in time direction.
Activating this option is useful for slices for example.
The option subdivide will only be enabled if only the number of points in line
envelope: if activated the envelope of each trace of the 3D-file is calculated and
direction exceeds the 1024 boundary. Activating this option generates a number
shown. Activating this option is useful for slices for example.
of subdatasets of the complete 3D-dataset in this direction. Two new options next
envelope timeslices only: with this option activated the envelope of each trace
and prev. control the access to the different subdatasets. An example shall
of the 3D-file is calculated and shown for the timeslices only (option slice
illustrate the option:
activated). For the other cuts (x-cuts and y-cuts) the “normal” traces will be
3D-dataset with 6000 points in line direction, 100 points perpendicular to the line
shown. The option is not available for a seconary 3D-file and will also be
direction and 256 points in time direction. The option subdivision generates 6
automatically deactivated for the primary 3D-file if a secondary 3D-file has been
different subdatasets each with 1000 points in line direction. The first subdataset
loaded.
is displayed after having activated the option. The option next loads the next
subdataset from trace nr. 1001 to 2000 in line direction.
Use the lower panel for a speed access to some further different options:
Three different display options are available (option windows, option scroll and
option 3D-cube - see below).
enter the project directory
It is possible to load a second 3D-file in addition. The second 3D-file must have
the same number of points in all 3 directions like the primary 3D-file. Otherwise a
caption 3D-raw: open REFLEX 3D raw data (see also 3D-File
warning message appears. The screen is either horizontally or vertically splitted if
MenuItem)
a second 3D-file is loaded according to the settings within the plotoptions menu
caption 3D-poc/procf: open REFLEX 3D processed data (procf
(chap. 1.7.6). The parameter second 3D-file under view controls if the secondary
with filter)
3D-file is shown or not.
caption 2D-raw: open several REFLEX 2D raw data
caption 2D-proc/procf: open several REFLEX 2D processed
The module also allows you to load several (up to 25) different 2D-files in order
data (procf with filter)
to display them within the scroll or windows mode (load the 2D-files using the
caption 2D-int: enter the interactive choice menu for opening
option Open several 2D-files under 3D-File MenuItem). The scale of the different
several REFLEX 2D files
2D-files can vary.
3D-datainterpretation 295 3D-datainterpretation, 3D-File MenuItem 296

The caption is automatically updated when using one of the following options 3.1 3D-datainterpretation MenuItems
within the 3D-File MenuItem: open 3D-file, open several 2D-files

copy actual data bitmap to the clipboard. A clipboard scale factor is 3.1.1 3D-File MenuItem
queried. A factor larger than 1 allows you to increase the size of the
bitmap to be transferred and therefore to increase the resolution. From this menu you may open an existing 3D-datafile, create a 3D-file and edit
enter FileHeader Edit the file header.

enter PlotOptions ProjectDir: Selection of a new project. After selecting this option the directories
included in the current project directory are listed. From these you can choose
replot actual line with actual zoom parameters the project you want to work with.

resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the Open 3D-file: Use this option to load an existing REFLEX-3D file. A 3D-file
actual line consists of several equidistant parallel 2D-lines stored successively within one
enable magnifying glass function file. You may load the data from the rawdata directory (the directory containing
the files which are not precessed) or from the procdata directory. If you are
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the choosing procdata filter a filter for the file extension must be entered in order to
data set can be selected and plotted in full screen size - see also make the choice easier. After having chosen the wanted 3D-datafile the 3D-
Windowing 3D-file or Scroll 3D-file. processing menu opens and you have to choose how you want to display the
data (see also option processing within chap. 3). The data are completely loaded
The filter Traceinterpol-3DFile allows a resampling of the data in the direction of into the RAM of the computer whereby a fast visualization of the data is possible.
each line if the number of traces differs in each 2D-line. If the 1204 points boudary will be reached a windows opens for rescaling or
subdividing the too big dataset (see also chap. 3).
To be considered concerning the plot options: The individual Reflexw modules
partly use the same plot options. When using for example the 2D- and the 3D- Open second 3D-file: Use this option to load a second 3D-file in addition. The
module simultanesouly in order to switch between the 2D and 3D views when second 3D-file must have the same number of points in all 3 directions like the
making interpretations it might be useful to have different options for these views. primary 3D-file. Otherwise a warning message appears. The screen is either
Therefore the following settings are separated for the 2D and the 3D- horizontally or vertically splitted if a second 3D-file is loaded according to the
interpretation: manual scaling, color palette, depth axis, show axis. settings within the plotoptions menu (chap. 1.7.6). The parameter second 3D-file
under view controls if the secondary 3D-file is shown or not. After having chosen
the wanted 3D-datafile the 3D-processing menu opens and you have to choose
how you want to display the data (see also option processing within chap. 3).

Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines: Use this option to generate a 3D-file from
existing 2D-lines. After having activated the option a new window appears where
you must enter the wanted parameters (see Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines,
chap. 3.5). The 3D-data are completely loaded into the RAM of the computer
whereby a fast visualization of the data is possible.

Import: import data of different formats into the REFLEX-internal format (see
also Import Menu).
With the suboption 3D-file activated the conversion sequence is automatically set
to combine lines/shots (see also Import ConversionMode).

enter Scan3D: enters the module Reflex 3D-Scan which allows to import and to
analyse automatically rectangular 3-dimensional GPR-data which have been
acquired along 2D-parallel lines in one or two perpendicular directions.
Precondition is that the data have been acquired along equidistant parallel 2D-
lines on a regular rectangular grid. This means that the traceincrement in one
3D-datainterpretation, 3D-File MenuItem 297 3D-datainterpretation, 3D-File MenuItem 298

direction (x or y), the number of Print: Use this option if you want to print out the data.
traces into this direction, the With the option scroll activated either the actual 2D cut (2D-line) or the total
start- and endpositions of the number of 2D cuts (2D-lines) actually chosen within the option box (see Scroll
2D-lines and the scan 3D-file) are printed (see also option print several files in chapter 1.8.3).
increment between the 2D-lines With the option window activated the actually chosen 2D-cuts (2D-lines) are
must be equal. printed out on one paper sheet using the actual window combination. After having
The traceincrement must be finished the Print Menu the complete size of the print output and a corresponding
given within the original data. query (okay or not) are shown.
In addition if the data have When printing several 2D-lines with the option print several files under
been acquired in two PrintOptions2 (see also chapter 1.8.3) activated a filechoice query appears where
perpendicular directions the you must select the wanted profiles. The chosen profiles are sorted alphabetically
increment between the parallel and are printed according to the actual window combination. An example shall
lines (scan increment) must make the proceeding clear once more: You want to print 20 parallel profiles and
equal the traceincrement. for this combine 4 profiles each time in 2*2 windows. First you have to choose 4
The original data may be stored on individual 2D-files or on one 3D-file with the arbitrary sample profiles and make the corresponding window selection. In the
2D-lines sequentially stored. next step you choose the print button with the option print several files activated
Optionally some filter steps are automatically performed. They are: dewow, static and select the desired profiles. The program then automatically prints the first 4
correction, background removal, migration (2D and 3D) and gai n in timedirection. profiles on one paper sheet. After terminating the output the next 4 profiles are
If you have acquired both x- and y-scans you also may choose if the x- and y- taken and processed in the same way.
scans may be processed independently and how the adding of the x- and y-scans With print filecomment activated both the comment stored in the fileheader of
shall be done. Activating the option add x-y scans by choosing the max. abs. the 3D-file and an additional comment about the actual position of the 2D-cut are
value means that the x- and y-scans are not simply added but the max. absolute printed out. See also Print Menu.
value will be determined and this value is taken as the sum value. This has the
advantage that no information will be lost when the two different scans are added. Edit FileHeader: This option allows to display and change the parameters stored
Activating the option build c-scans from the xy-scans choosing the envelope in the global file header and the individual trace headers. These parameters are
means that the c-scans(timeslices) are built independently choosing the envelope for example sample and trace increment, presetting of coordinates etc. (see also
of the original data. FileHeader Edit).

Open several 2D-files: this option allows you to load several (up to 25) different exit: leave the module 3D-datainterpretation.
2D-files in order to display them within the scroll or windows mode. The scale of
the different 2D-files can vary. The data can be loaded from a file choice menu or
interactively from the profile map (see also interactive choice).

Generate single Timeslices: This option offers the possibility to create so-called
time slices, i.e. time constant cuts from a sequence of profiles. The profiles have
to be recorded within the same plane. Another precondition is that a static
correction to one level was performed before. There are no other prerequisites.
The profiles within the plane can be oriented in any direction. The program refers
to the corresponding coordinate specifications. The interpolation ranges are of
your free choice. Also a time range can be specified over which an averaging is
performed. Such an averaging often is necessary because of uncomplete static
correction. The details of computing time slices can be found in Generate single
timeslices (chap. 3.6).

CopyToClipboard/File: copy the actual windows into the clipboard (suboption

clipboard) or into a file (suboption file). Different file-formats like BMP, JPEG or
TIFF are supported.

Image1ToClipboard: copy the primary window into the clipboard.

3D-datainterpretation, View MenuItem 299 3D-datainterpretation, Analyse MenuItem 300

3.1.2 View MenuItem 3.1.3 Analyse MenuItem

ColorBars: activate this option for displaying the actual color amplitude create MPEG-file: option allows to create a MPEG moviefile for the later use with
assignment bar at the right of the window. a MPEG-player. The MPEG moviefile may only be created for the Scroll and the
Cube3D mode. After having activated the option a new window named create
Amplitudes: activate this option if you want the actual amplitudes to be MPEG-file opens which stays on the top. First you must enter the filename
displayed in the status panel on the top (A:) when moving the mouse. (without extension). The MPEG-file will be stored under the actual
projectdirectory with the extension mpg.
Picks: activate this option if you want to display picks stored within individual The compression is controlled by the trackbar and the checkbox MJPEG. The
pickfiles. After having activated the option, you must choose the wanted pickfiles trackbar allows you to either increase the quality (trackbar to the left) or to
from the filelist. Within the fileheader of each pickfile the corresponding increase the compression (to the right). With the highest compression the
datafilename is stored (see also Pick save MenuItem). This filename serves for filesize will be decreased by a factor of about 4 compared to the highest quality.
the assignment of the chosen pickfiles to the chosen 2D-datafiles. With the option MJPEG deactivated an additional encoding is used which again
reduces the filesize by about 50 %. In this case the computertime for constructing
fast data cube display: opens the fast data cube display window (chap. 3.7) the MPEG-file will be significantly increased and the quality as well will be
which allows you a 3D-view of the actually loaded 3D-file. It supports an decreased.
interactive rotation of the 3D cube. The rotation can be achieved either by mouse In the frequency Radio Group box you may set the frequency, with which the
interaction or by using scroll bars. The data can be viewed from any direction and certain pics of the mpeg-file will be shown (8 Hz means 8 pics per sec, e.g.).
can be zoomed. It is possible to bring the fast data cube display window to the Start the recording by pressing the record button. Now the other 3 buttons (play,
front by pressing the right mouse button within the data window of the 3D- pause and stop) are enabled. The play button will be automatically activated and
datainterpretation. the first slide is added to the MPEG movie. As long as the play button is activated
each new slide will be added (e.g. when using the scroll bars or when using the
second 3D-file: allows you to deactivate the display of a second 3D-file - see plot option). The actual slide number is shown. If you want to interrupt the
also Open second 3D-file within the 3D-File MenuItem (chap. 3.1.1). MPEG-construction use the button pause. The button stop finishes the
construction and the MPEG-file will be closed.
Pick surfaces for 3D-cube: the option allows a 3-dimensional display of the 3D To be considered: the bitmap size must not be changed. Therefore an error
picks within the 3D-cube display (chap. 3.4) together with the data. After having message appears and the MPEG construction will be stopped if the bitmap size,
activated the option you are asked for the wanted pickfile(s). An interpolation e.g. after having resized the 3D-datainterpretation window, has been changed.
scheme is used for the picks belonging to one layer. The bitmap size if determined when pressing the record button.
With the activated option use code within the 3D picking panel (chap. 3.8) the
pick code stored with the picks is used for discriminating the layers. After having interpolate actual 3D-file: the option allows a reinterpolation of the actual 3D-file
selected the wanted pickfile(s) you are asked for the codes and therefore for the into the different directions. After having entered the options you must specify the
layers to be displayed. The colors of the layers are connected to the pick code interpolation factors into the 3 different orientations. The number of points into the
colors. individual orientations increases accordingly. For example the option is useful if
With the option use code deactivated the layer number stored with each pickfile the data density in one direction is too small for a good 3D-cube display.
is used for discriminating the layers. The colors of the layers are connected to the
layershow colors. flipXYsorting 3D-file: the option allows to change the internal sorting of the
After having loaded the wanted pickfiles and after having entered the wanted traces of the actual 3D-datafile. A 3D-datafile consists of several parallel 2D-lines
pickcodes (if option use code is activated) you still must specify the interpolation which are orientated into either x- or y-direction (defined within the fileheader -
range in x-, y- and z-direction. Enter a higher value if the pick sampling interval is profile direction). After having applied this option the parallel 2D-lines of the 3D-
larger than the data sampling or if the layer boundaries are not completely filled. datafile are orientated into the other direction (e.g. original x - after the option
With the option Pick surfaces for 3D-cube activated the layer boundaries are they orientated into y). The option may be useful in order to compare two different
displayed within the 3D cube display in addition. For example you may combine 3D-datafiles which are measured into 2 different directions (crossing orientation)
the back display and the picked layers. The layer display is controlled by the because the program only allows to compare 2 different 3D-datafiles which have
options used for the full plot within the 3D cube display. the same number of traces/2D-lines and of 2D-lines and which internal sorting is
the same.
3D-datainterpretation, Scroll 3D-file 301 3D-datainterpretation, Scroll 3D-file 302

3.2 Scroll 3D-file With the option show name activated the filename or the actual slice is shown at
the top of each cut (line).
Using the option "scroll" you may continuously move through the 3D-cube either
in x-, y- or z-direction using the track bar. If you have loaded several 2D-lines free of distortion: activate this option if you want the display of the slices to be
(option Open several 2D-files - see 3D-File MenuItem) you may continuously free of distortion, this means the axis in x- and y-direction have the same scale.
move through the set of 2D-lines. The step and smoothing rate is freely The option is only active for slices.
choosable.
The first two start and end parameters specify the range to be displayed from
The control panel below the track bar allows an automatic scrolling through the left to right. With X-Cuts activated this normally means the y-direction. With Y-
3D-cube: Cuts activated this normally means the x-direction. With Slices activated the
parameters specify the x-direction.
scroll to smaller cuts
The following two parameters specify the range to be displayed from top to
stop scrolling
button. With X-Cuts or Y-Cuts activated this normally means the time range. With
scroll to higher cuts Slices activated the parameters specify the y-direction.

Use the options X-Cuts, Y-Cuts and Slices to determine which 2D-cut of the 3D- The next two parameters specify the range in scroll direction. With Slices
file you want to be shown. With X-Cuts activated all existing cuts perpendicular to activated these parameters specify the wanted time range for example.
the x-direction may be chosen. With Y-Cuts activated all existing 2D-cuts
perpendicular to the y-direction may be chosen. With Slices activated all existing StepRate: this parameter allows you to change step rate for scrolling. Every step
2D-cuts along the time-direction may be chosen. The actual 2D-cut within the range 2D-cut will be plotted when scrolling.
total 3D-cube (a 3D-file has been loaded) is shown within the lower image of the
option menu. smoothing: enter a value for smoothing the data in the scroll direction. A value
of 1 means no smoothing. A value of 2 means that 2D-cuts are summed up and
Plotscale: The minimum and maximum amplitude values are controlled by the the mean values are calculated. The smoothing parameter is independent from
multiplication factor Amplitudescale. With a value of 1 for Amplitudescale the the StepRate parameter.
amplitudes range from -2048 to 2048 for unnormalized data and from -1 to 1 for
tracenormalized data. With a Value of 0.0625 the amplitudes range from -32768 Plot: replot the actual 2D-cut.
to 32768 (see also Amplitudescale under Pointmodeattributes;).
sharpen edges: if activated an algorithm will be applied for the plotting which
sharpens the edges of the different elements within each image.
replot actual 2D-cut with actual zoom parameters
resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the 2D- ShowTimeSliceInAddition: if activated the actual timeslice depending on the
cut mouse position is shown in a second window for the scroll mode. The timeslice is
shown based on the envelope data. The actual cursor position is marked by a
enable magnifying glass function
cross within the timeslice. The screen is either split vertically or horizontally
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the depending on the settings within the plotoptions. The option will be automatically
2D-cut can be selected and plotted in full screen size. The area to be deactivated if one switches to the windows or the 3D-cube mode. The option is
enlarged, a rectangle, has to lie within a data set. Pressing the left also not available if “envelope timeslices only” has been chosen within the 3D-
mouse button you determine a corner of this rectangle and by moving processing menu. The left mouse button allows to scroll one cut forwards and the
the mouse with pressed button the desired area is opened. The zoom right mouse button to scroll backward (precondition: pick option deactivated).
range may be changed step by step using the small + or - buttons on the
right side of the manuel zoom button. Clicking on the + button increases ASCII-export: allows to export the actual cut to ASCII GRD-format (see also
the zoom by 10 %, clicking on the - button decreases the zoom by 10 %, Dataexport, chap. 1.6). The data are written out sample after sample (option x-
this means the x-y-range to be shown will be larger. For scrolling use (distance)-direction activated within chap. 1.6). The second line contains the
the left and lower scroll bars. number of traces and of samples. The third line contains the start and end-
position in x-direction, the fourth line the start and end-position in y-direction.
Each of the following lines contains all amplitude values of one y-sample. The
If Options is activated the option panel at the left allows you to specify some option is only enabled within the scroll mode. The ASCII-filename is automatically
display parameters: determined from the 3D-datafilename and the actual cut. Example:
3D-datainterpretation, Scroll 3D-file 303 3D-datainterpretation, Windowing 3D-file 304

3D-datafilename: file01_3D.00t 3.3 Windowing 3D-file

actual cut: x: 0.58
resulting ASCII-filename: file01_3Dx_ 0_58.grd
Using the option "windows" you may display several 2D-cuts of the 3D-cube or
several individual 2D-lines, resp., placed in a freely choosable manner within the
working window. The maximum number of individual images is 25.

The step and smoothing rate may be freely chosen. The program automatically
determines the StepRate from the existing number of 2D-cuts and the maximum
number of windows using the following formula: number of 2D-cuts / 25.

Use the options X-Cuts, Y-Cuts and Slices to determine which 2D-cut of the 3D-
file you want to be shown. With X-Cuts activated all existing cuts perpendicular to
the x-direction may be chosen. With Y-Cuts activated all existing 2D-cuts
perpendicular to the y-direction may be chosen. With Slices activated all existing
2D-cuts along the time-direction may be chosen. The actual 2D-cuts within the
total 3D-cube (a 3D-file has been loaded) are shown within the lower image of
the option menu.

Plotscale: The minimum and maximum amplitude values are controlled by the
multiplication factor Amplitudescale. With a value of 1 for Amplitudescale the
amplitudes range from -2048 to 2048 for unnormalized data and from -1 to 1 for
tracenormalized data. With a Value of 0.0625 the amplitudes range from -32768
to 32768 (see also Amplitudescale under Pointmodeattributes;).

replot actual 2D-cuts with actual zoom parameters

resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the 2D-cuts
enable magnifying glass function
with win: magnifying glass function for the complete data-window the
cursor is placed. The size of the magnifying glass window is
automatically determined from the actual zoomfactor and the
size of the data-window.
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the 2D-
cuts can be selected and plotted in full screen size. The area to be en-
larged, a rectangle, has to lie within one single 2D-cut. Pressing the left
mouse button you determine a corner of this rectangle and by moving the
mouse with pressed button the desired area is opened. Scrolling is not
possible within the Windows-mode.

The option window combinations allows you to choose the combination of the
windows to be subdivided in horizontal and vertical direction. If you have 20
different cuts to be displayed, you may choose the combination 4/5 - this means
the screen is subdivided into 4 horizontal and 5 vertical cuts.

The options sort by rows and sort by columns define the sorting. With sort by
rows activated the first cuts are displayed within the first row, the next ones within
3D-datainterpretation, Windowing 3D-file 305 3D-datainterpretation, 3D-cube display 306

the second row and so on. With sort by columns activated the first cuts are 3.4 3D-cube display
displayed within the first column, the next ones within the second column and so
on.
Using the option “3D-cube” allows the three-dimensional plotting of the actually
The radio buttons sort by filenames, sort by const.coord. and sort by loaded 3D-file within predefinable spatial limits (options xmin,..,zmax) and an
prof.coord. specify how the several individual 2D-files are sorted for the display. arbitrarily definable observation point (x/, y/ and z/). Thus you have the
If you have loaded a 3d-file, the options are disabled. With sort by filenames possibility to look at the cube from different angles, e.g. from the front side, the
activated the 2D-files are sorted by files with ascending order. The chosen lines back side or from the top. The rotation is done interactively using the scroll bars.
are alphabetically resorted (sorted with ascending order - see also Generate 3D- To be considered: The directions of the x-, y- and z-axis do not follow the right
file from 2D-lines). With sort by const.coord. activated the 2D-files are sorted by hand rule because the z-axis points from top to bottom in positive direction.All
the coordinates in profile constant direction with ascending order. With sort by three axis are automatically labelled. The scaling may be changed within the
prof.coord. activated the 2D-files are sorted by the coordinates in profile plotoptions using manual scaling and entering a new label increment for the
direction with ascending order. different axis.

By default the size of the cube depends on the number of points in the 3 different
If Options is activated the option panel at the left allows you to specify some directions x, y and z (the z-direction is normally the time-direction). The size of
display parameters: the axis may be changed individually (options scaleX, scaleY and scaleZ - linear
interpolation is done) and jointly (option magnification - no interpolation is done).
With the option show name activated the filename or the actual slice is shown at Increasing the magnification does not coincide with an increase of the needed
the top of each cut (line). computer-time whereas increasing the scaleX, scaleY or scaleZ values leads to a
significant increase of the computer-time.
free of distortion: activate this option if you want the display of the slices to be
free of distortion, this means the axis in x- and y-direction have the same scale. These options allow the saving of the actual 3D-cube display
The option is only active for slices. parameters(angles and scaling values) and to read them from the disk
(filename cube3Dpar.txt under the REFLEXW program directory).
The first two start and end parameters specify the range to be displayed from
left to right. With X-Cuts activated this normally means the y-direction. With Y-
Cuts activated this normally means the x-direction. With Slices activated the When changing any of the parameters mentioned above the cube frame is
parameters specify the x-direction. always plotted in order to have an immediate control on the actual settings.
The following two parameters specify the range to be displayed from top to You may select if only the front or back planes of the data cube are displayed
button. With X-Cuts or Y-Cuts activated this normally means the time range. With (options front and back) or the full 3D-data volume (option full). In addition you
Slices activated the parameters specify the y-direction. only may select single cuts (option single) and scroll (option scroll) through the
cube in one distinct direction.
The next two parameters specify the range in scroll direction. With Slices
activated these parameter specify the wanted time range for example. It is possible to restrict the datavalue range to be considered. Within the value
range radiobox you may select if all data points (parameter all activated) or if
StepRate: this parameter allows you to change step rate for cutting. Every step only a special datavalue range (parameter inside or outside activated) is
range 2D-cut will be plotted. considered. The datavalue range is defined within the editfields min. and max..
With the parameter inside activated all data values lying inbetween the specified
smoothing: enter a value for smoothing the data in the cutting direction. A value min. and max. value are considered. With the parameter outside activated all
of 1 means no smoothing. A value of 2 means that 2D-cuts are summed up and data values lying outside of the specified min. and max. value are considered.
the mean values are calculated. The smoothing parameter is independent from
the StepRate parameter. The parameter fill scale (%) allows you to control the filling of the cuts. The
option is not available for the full plot mode. By default the value is set to 100 %.
Plot: replot the actual 2D-cuts. The value range is restricted between 100 and 200 %.
It might happen that certain parts of a cut may not fully be covered by the used
interpolation scheme. This results in white points normally arranged in a distinct
pattern. In this case you may increase the fill scale parameter in order to avoid
3D-datainterpretation, 3D-cube display 307 3D-datainterpretation, 3D-cube display 308

this problem. To be considered: Increasing the fill scale parameter results in a existing cuts perpendicular to the x-direction may be chosen. With Y-Cuts
decrease of the resolution. activated all existing 2D-cuts perpendicular to the y-direction may be chosen.
With Slices activated all existing 2D-cuts along the time-(z-)direction may be
The option hide controls if not visible parts of profiles are covered (option chosen.
activated) or not (option deactivated). With the option deactivated the max. It is possible to plot a “background” in addition. For that purpose you may define
amplitude value will be displayed. any x-, y- or z-cuts.You may enter single numbers separated by commas, blocks
with dash or combination of the two (e.g. 5,6,7,10-20) - see also option single.
The option actualize controls if the cube display is always actualized when
changing a parameter like roatation degree or scaling. With the option full activated all the data of the 3D-cube are displayed. There are
two possibilities to plot the whole data:
The option plot enables the plotting of the 3D-data volume based on the actual
settings. 1. With the option hide activated and a threshold chosen, the data with having
firstly an amplitude higher than the chosen threshold and secondly the
smallest distance to the observation point will be plotted: By this means a
With the option front activated only the front planes of the data cube are possibility is given to "look through" certain parts of the 3D-data volume,
displayed when pressing the plot option. In addition you may select a distinct whose amplitude values are smaller than the chosen threshold value.
cornerpoint which serves as the starting point for a cutting out of the cube. The Using the option shading in addition a shading algorithm is used to give
size of this cube sector in the 3 directions (options x, y and z) can be changed certain objects a contour. Shading is based on the spatial derivatives of the
individually or jointly (option synchronize activated). With the option synchronize distances from the observation point. Data points with a small change rate are
activated the size in the other 2 directions are automatically changed when lightened whereas data points with a high rate are darkened. The min. and
changing the size of any direction. max. change rates are taken from the data. In many cases some very high
change rates will occur. Therefore filtering of the change rates is necessary
(box use filter for shading). You may choose between no (no filtering), sqrt
With the option back activated only the back planes of the data cube are (square root), ln (natural logarithm) or median (the max. value is restricted to
displayed when pressing the plot option. In addition you may select a distinct twice the median), which is the standard filter option.
cornerpoint which serves as the starting point for a cutting out of the cube. The To display the data, it is possible to use the actual color palette together with
size of this cube sector in the 3 directions (options x, y and z) can be changed a contrast value or a gray shade palette from bright to dark. If you are using
indiviudally or jointly (option synchronize activated). With the option synchronize the gray shade palette the data points with the smallest distance change rates
activated the size in the other 2 directions are automatically changed when are white and the data points with the highest change rates are black. If you
changing the size of any direction. are using the actual color palette you must enter the contrast value. The
color associated with the actual data point is brightened or darkened
With the option single activated it is possible to plot any combination of x-,y- or z- according to the relative change rate and the entered contrast. The max.
cuts. You may enter single numbers separated by commas, blocks with dash or contrast value is 255.
combination of the two (e.g. 5,6,7,10-20). The option step is used when the cuts
are defined using numbers separated by a dash (e.g. 10-20, step rate: 2 - the 2. With the option hide deactivated the maximum amplitude will be plotted by
following cuts are plotted: 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20). taking into consideration only the chosen threshold and not the distances to
the observation point. Therefore, no shading is possible in this case.
With the option scroll activated it is possible to continuously move through the For instance, this option can be used to "cut open" line or point diffractors,
3D-cube either in x-, y- or z-direction using the track bar. The scroll rate is freely respectively, in migrated data. Assuming that the energy increases up to the
choosable. middle of the diffractor and then decreases again, a point diffractor, e.g., will
The control panel below the track bar allows an automatic scrolling through the be displayed in plane view (x-y-plane, e.g.) as concentric circles with
3D-cube: increasing amplitudes up to the middle.
scroll to smaller cuts
Within the select interpol.direction box you may define the interpolation
stop scrolling direction for the 3D-full cube display.
scroll to higher cuts The other parameters like envelope, absolute values,..., are described under
Scroll 3D-File (chap. 3.2).
Use the options X-Cuts, Y-Cuts and Slices in the upper control panel to
determine which 2D-cut of the 3D-file you want to scroll. With X-Cuts activated all
3D-datainterpretation, Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines 309 3D-datainterpretation, Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines 310

3.5 Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines The parameters XStart, XEnd, YStart and YEnd specify the range coordinates
within the dataacquisition plane for the computation of the 3D-data cube. The
dimension complies with the distance dimension of the individual 2D-profiles. This
The option allows to construct a 3D-datafile either from equidistant parallel has to be the same for all profiles, of course. To be considered: The program
2D-lines without interpolation or from 2D-lines freely orientated within one uses 32 bit floating point representation for these values. Therefore if very high
acquisition plane using a weighted interpolation. values are entered (e.g. values like 40000000) a warning message appears that
the data might be smoothed.
The filename of the resulting 3D-file must be entered under 3D-filename. The The next two parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement specify the
3D-datafile is stored under the path ROHDATA under the projectdirectory. grid interval of the two coordinate axes spanning the plane in the given distance
dimension. This grid interval determines the discretization of the 3D-data cube
The option load 2D-files allows to specify the wanted 2D-files for the generation and thus also the size of the file. In both coordinate directions the max. number of
of the 3D-file. You must choose the original data path (either rawdata or points can be 1024. A useful value for both XRasterincrement and
procdata) and afterwards you must select the wanted 2D-files. YRasterincrement is the trace increment used for the individual 2D-profiles.
The next two parameters XInterpolation and YInterpolation define the
The parameter type of interpolation defines which type of interpolation is used. interpolation area in the given distance dimension. Due to the specification of the
interpolation range in the two directions for each discrete point of the timeslice a
After having chosen equidistant parallel 2D-lines without interpolation the rectangle is opened. All points of the individual 2D-profiles, falling in this
3D-file is generated from equidistant parallel 2D-lines. rectangle, are considered and the distance to the discrete point is determined.
The individual amplitude values from the desired time range (see below) are
The line-increment specifies the increment between successive parallel lines in weighted according to the distance, summed and assigned to the discrete point.
the given distance dimension of the 2D-lines. To guarantee a complete filling of the 3D-data cube, the interpolation in x- or
The radio buttons sort by filenames and sort by coordinates specify how the y-direction has to comply with the greatest occurring distance between two data
2D-files are sorted for the generation of the 3D-file. points in the corresponding direction. The parameter interpol.weight allows to
With sort by filenames activated the 2D-files are sorted by files with ascending specify the type of the interpolation weight. Using linear weight means that the
order. The chosen lines are alphabetically resorted (sorted with ascending order - values are weighted according to the distance, using square weight means that
see also Import ConversionMode). Problems may occur if the files don't have the the values are weighted according to the square of the distance.
same length (e.g. file1, file2,..., file11). In this case the chosen files are resorted
in the following manner: file1, file11, file2, .... Please take care that all original The parameters within the timerange/sorting group box allow the settings of the
filenames have the same length - for example: file01, file02, ..., file11. The timerange and the sorting.
coordinates are redefined based on the entered line-increment and the profile The parameter time end specifies the timerange for the 3D-data cube. The time
constant start-coordinate of the first chosen line (after alphabetical resorting). The always starts at 0. The parameter sorting determines the sorting of the profiles
start coordinate in profile direction of each 2D-line is taken into account. For this entering the computation of the time slices. Four different sortings are possible:
purpose the minimum start coordinate of all 2D-lines is calculated and zero traces fileheader coordinates - the program takes the current trace coordinate from the
are inserted for those 2D-lines which start coordinate is larger than this minimum profile headers (x, y, z begin - and end coordinates, profile direction and profile
coordinate. All other previously entered coordinates of the 2D-lines are of no constant). This sorting is recommended if zero-offset profiles are used for time
importance. slice computations (normally the case for GPR-measurements).
With sort by coordinates activated the 2D-files are sorted by the coordinates in Geophone coordinates - the current coordinate is read from the geophone
profile constant direction with ascending order. coordinates of the individual traces (see also trace header Edit).
midpoint coordinates - the current coordinate is calculated from the shot and
A 3D-data file consisting of equidistant parallel lines (sorted by filenames) may geophone coordinates of the trace header (midpoint between shot and geophone
also be constructed directly during the data import (- see also Import - see also trace header Edit).
ConversionMode - option combine lines/shots). CMP coordinates- the current coordinate is taken from the CMP-coordinates of
the trace header (see also trace header Edit).

After having chosen use interpolation scheme for freely orientated 2D-lines
you may construct a 3D-file from freely orientated 2D-lines analogous to the
generation of single timeslices (see also Generate single timeslices).

The parameters within the 3D-coordinates group box allow the settings of the
raster.
3D-datainterpretation, Generate single timeslices 311 3D-datainterpretation, Generate single timeslices 312

3.6 Generate single timeslices of slices the number of time slices to be computed with the above spatial
parameters is determined. With the number of time slices to be computed the
temporal range specification (time begin to time end) is divided into a
The computation of timeslices (C-scans) allows the representation of corresponding number of equidistant intervals for which the time slice calculation
equitemporal amplitude values. The precondition is a full coverage of the is performed. The first computation begins at time begin and ends at time
investigation area. The 2D-profiles entering the calculation have to originate all begin+(time end - time begin) divided by the number of time slices. The
from one plane and must be static corrected. The profiles can have arbitrary computation of the next time slice begins at the end of the first and so on. The
orientations. Gaps between the profiles are filled by a corresponding time dimension has to be identical for all profiles.
interpolation.
The parameter summing determines how the time samples within the predefined
To be considered: The amplitudes are rescaled during the calculation of the time range are summed. You have the possibility of a summation of absolute
timeslices depending on the actual interpolation and summing parameters. If you amplitudes or of true amplitudes or no summing. The summing of absolute
wish to compare different timeslices with respect to the amplitudes, all timeslices amplitudes is recommended, if the summation range is larger than half a wave
have to be calculated using the same parameters (raster increment, interpolation length and/or the arrivals cannot be static corrected exactly. No summing means
points and time range, which is used for the summing). that for each time sample within the given time range an individual timeslice will
be created. The parameter number of slices has no meaning in this case.
The parameters within the coordinates group box allow the settings of the The parameter sorting determines the sorting of the profiles entering the
timeslice raster. computation of the time slices. Four different sortings are possible:
The parameters XStart, XEnd, YStart and YEnd specify the range coordinates fileheader coordinates - the program takes the current trace coordinate from the
within the dataacquisition plane for the computation of the timeslice. The profile headers (x, y, z begin - and end coordinates, profile direction and profile
dimension complies with the distance dimension of the individual 2D-profiles. This constant). This sorting is recommended if zero-offset profiles are used for time
has to be the same for all profiles, of course. To be considered: The program slice computations (normally the case for GPR-measurements).
uses 32 bit floating point representation for these values. Therefore if very high Geophone coordinates - the current coordinate is read from the geophone
values are entered (e.g. values like 40000000) a warning message appears that coordinates of the individual traces (see also trace header Edit).
the data might be smoothed. midpoint coordinates - the current coordinate is calculated from the shot and
The next two parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement specify the geophone coordinates of the trace header (midpoint between shot and geophone
grid interval of the two coordinate axes spanning the plane. This grid interval - see also trace header Edit).
determines the discretization of the time slice and thus also the size of the file. In CMP coordinates- the current coordinate is taken from the CMP-coordinates of
the second coordinate direction (in this example the y-coordinate) the number of the trace header (see also trace header Edit).
points can be 16384 maximum, in the first coordinate direction 64000. A useful
value for both XRaster and YRaster is the trace increment used for the individual The option load 2D-files allows to specify the wanted 2D-files for the calculation
2D-profiles. of the timeslices.The maximum number of 2D-files is restricted by the system
The next two parameters XInterpolation and YInterpolation define the (about 1000 files). This number is not exact and therefore no warning message
interpolation area in the given distance dimension. Due to the specification of the appears.
interpolation range in the two directions for each discrete point of the timeslice a The option load from ASCII allows to specify the wanted 2D-datafiles within a
rectangle is opened. All points of the individual 2D-profiles, falling in this separate ASCII-file. Each line of the ASCII-file contains the name of the 2D-
rectangle, are considered and the distance to the discrete point is determined. datafile without the filepath. The complete filename of each 2D-datafile is given
The individual amplitude values from the desired time range (see below) are by the actual project directory, the chosen filepath (procdata or rawdata) and the
weighted according to the distance, summed and assigned to the discrete point. filename stored within the ASCII-file. This option overcomes the problem with
To guarantee a complete filling, the interpolation in x- or y-direction has to comply specifying more than about 1000 2D-files using the option load 2D-files.
with the greatest occurring distance between two data points in the corresponding
direction. The parameter interpol.weight allows to specify the type of the The parameter filename specif. is used for the naming of the computed time
interpolation weight. Using linear weight means that the values are weighted slice.
according to the distance, using square weight means that the values are manual /automatic1: the naming is based both on the manually entered
weighted according to the square of the distance. filename and an automatically determined part. For the manual name up to 30
characters are permitted. If you use less than 2 characters, the name is filled with
The parameters within the timerange/sorting group box allow the settings of the '_'. The following 6 digits are taken from the time range beginning of each time
timerange and the sorting. slice. Based on the max. traveltime of the original data a multiplication factor
The parameters time begin, time end and number of slices specify the time 1,10,100 or 1000 is calculated in order to fill out completely the four digits. The
range(s) for which the time slice(s) is (are) computed. With the setting of number greatest power of ten of the actual time coordinate is multiplied by this factor.
3D-datainterpretation, Generate single timeslices 313 3D-datainterpretation, Generate single timeslices 314

Thereby it is possible to take into account timeslices with starting times differing showlines: show the 2D-lines actually loaded.
from each other only slightly (e.g. 4.5 and 4.7 nsec).

manual /automatic2: the naming is based both on the manually entered

filename and an automatically determined part. For the manual name up to 28 3.6.1 Timeslice calculation example
characters are permitted. If you use less than 2 characters, the name is filled with
'_'. The following 6 digits are taken from the time range beginning of each time The measured area has a size of 50(x)*40(y) meter. 20 parallel 2D-lines with a
slice. Based on the max. traveltime of the original data a multiplication factor length of 50 meter in x-direction and an offset in y-direction from each other of 0,5
1,10,100 or 1000 is calculated in order to fill out completely the four digits. The meter have been acquired. The recorded time length is 50 nsec. The trace
greatest power of ten of the actual time coordinate is multiplied by this factor. increment within each 2D-line is 0,05 meter.
Thereby it is possible to take into account timeslices with starting times differing Timeslices are to be calculated based on the following parameters:
from each other only slightly (e.g. 4.5 and 4.7 nsec). The 7th and 8th digit of the x-start: 0
name are according to the file number, as explained under automatic name. x-end: 50
y-start: 0
automatic name: the automatic file naming is used. The temporal beginning of y-end: 40
each time slice is used for the 2.-6. digit analogous to the manual naming. The 1. XRasterincrement: 0.05
character is a 'T'. The 7th and 8th digits of the name are determined by the so YRasterincrement: 0.05
called file number. XInterpolation: 0.05
The timeslice is saved within the directory Procdata and automatically receives YInterpolation: 0.50
the processing label 0. time begin: 0
Example for automatic naming: time end: 50
settings: time begin: 100 msec, max. time for calculation of timeslices: 500, number of slices: 20
number: 0 - time slice receives the name TP100000.00T (data file) and sorting: fileheader coordinates
TP100000.00R (profile header file) and is saved in the directory Procdata. summing: absolute amplitude
Example for manual naming: filename specif.: automatic name
settings: time begin: 5 nsec, max.time: 50 nsec, FileName: Test - time slice filename:
receives the name Test0500.00T (data file) and Test0500.00R (profile header filenumber: 0
file) and is stored in the directory Procdata.
20 different timeslices are calculated. Each timeslice is summed over a time
: Enter this option, if you want to change the plot parameters and to save range of 2,5 nsec. The number of interpolationpoints in y-direction is greater than
them in the fileheader of each actual timeslice. in x-direction because of the big offset between each parallel profile of 0,5 meter.
0.5 meter is the minimum value in order to completely fill the measured area. It is
save: saves the actual timeslice parameters on an ASCII-file with the extension also possible to enter greater values for the interpolation, because the
tsl interpolation is based on a weighted summation. The following values are also
useful:
load: loads previously saved timeslice parameters from an ASCII-file with the XInterpolation: 0.1
extension tsl YInterpolation: 1.0

create: start the calculation of the timeslices.

3.6.2 Timeslice calculation overview
batch create: batch start for the calculation of the timeslices. Precondition is that
different timelice parameter ASCII-files (see option save) have been created The computation of timeslices (C-scans) allows the 2-dimensional representation
before. In order to discriminate the individual filenames of the timeslices it is of amplitude values at equal times. The precondition is a full coverage of the
recommended to use the filename specif. manual/automatic. Of course the investigation area.
manual filenames have to be defined within the ASCII-timeslices parameter file
before. After having activated the option the timeclisceparameters ASCII-files are The computation of time slices is performed within the module 3D-
queried (multiple file choice possible). All timeslices are calculated for the actual datainterpretation using the option Generate single timeslices within the 3D-File
chosen set of 2D-files. MenuItem.
3D-datainterpretation, Generate single timeslices 315 3D-datainterpretation, view 3D-cube 316

The time slice allows to recognize reflecting elements lying in one depth (time). 3.7 view fast data cube display
The profiles entering the calculation all have to originate from one plane and a
static correction has to be performed. Before the computation of the time slice the
desired profiles have to be selected interactively from the profile location map. The option fast data cube display under view within the 3D-datainterpretation
The profiles can have arbitrary orientations. The plane can represent either the x- opens the fast 3D- cube window which allows you a 3D-view of the actually
y, the x-z or the y-z-plane. In the following we restrict ourselves to the x-y-plane loaded 3D-file. It supports an interactive rotation of the 3D cube. The rotation can
for the description. For the other planes the equivalent applies. be achieved either by mouse interaction or by using scroll bars. The data can be
The geometrical location of the profiles is determined by the defined coordinates, viewed from any direction and can be zoomed.
i.e. by the start coordinate in profile direction, the trace increment, the start
coordinate in the direction of the profile constant, and the end coordinate in the It is possible to bring this window to the front by pressing the right mouse button
direction of the profile constant. Normally the x-axis or the y-axis should comply within the data window of the 3D-datainterpretation.
with the profile direction. "Oblique" profiles, i.e. profiles that do not lie along an
axis, nevertheless can be introduced into the computation of the time slices. The For the fast data cube display first the data are rescaled and loaded into an
program refers to the coordinate specifications, then. internal buffer. Then the data are ready for the display and the rotation. The time
For the computation of the time slices first the extension and the gridding of the needed for the rotation or the display depends on the size of the 3D-data volume
region for the time slice in x- and y-direction have to be specified. In the first step and on the complexity of the display, i.e. the number of different colors. Therefore
the program determines for all selected profiles the amplitude values pertaining to you have different possibilities to restrict the total number of datapoints to be
the selected time range and assigns them to the corresponding grid point. If displayed (e.g. amplitude threshold, definition of the polarity and defining the
several values fall on one grid point (e.g. in the crossing point of single profiles), max.nr. of points).
the mean value is calculated. If the preset grid interval is smaller than the
distance between the profiles and/or the trace interval within the profiles, these All three axis of the 3D-cube have the same length. The z-direction always
gaps are filled by an appropriate interpolation. For this you have to specify the corresponds to the time-(y-)axis of the 3D-data.
interpolation range in x- and y-direction. Thus, around each grid point within the
plane a rectangle of the size x-points*y-points is put and all amplitude values The scroll bars at the bottom determine the angles of view. The actual angles in
within this rectangle are weighted according to their distance to the current grid x-, y- and z-direction are displayed on the right. In addition you may use the
point and then summed. The result is a more or less smoothed (according to the mouse for the rotation. In that case only the x- and y-angles can be changed, the
set rectangle) area-covering representation of equitemporal amplitude values. z-angle is fixed to 90 /.
Normally, it is recommended not to compute the time slice only for one single Some examples for the rotation around one axis:
time sample but to average over a certain time range (approx. 1/4 wave length), rotation around z-axis: Z=0 /, x=270 / and use the y-angle for the rotation.
since because of velocity fluctuations in the upper layers the arrival times of a rotation around x-axis: Z=0 /, y=0 / and use the x-angle for the rotation.
reflection from profile to profile are often submitted to certain fluctuations. rotation around y-axis: Z=0 /, x=0 / and use the y-angle for the rotation.
The time slices are stored in the same format as the "normal" sections, so that
any data processing and visualization possibilities can be applied. If you view the The magnification is controlled by the option magnification (in %) .
time slice as a profile, the position of the profile is rotated against the "normal"
zero-offset profiles. Per definition for each computed time slice for the profile First you have to load the data into the internal buffer.
direction the x-axis is set as well as for the profile constant the z-axis is set.
"Time" corresponds to the y-axis. Of course, this only applies to zero-offset The option amp. threshold defines an amplitude threshold for the data. Only
profiles in the x-z-plane. The other planes are treated analogously. those data having an amplitude larger than this threshold are stored within the
The time slices can be constructed either from parallel profiles or from profiles internal buffer.
crossing each other, as it is usual, e.g. for GPR investigations, or from any traces
located in the plane, which originate from special shot-receiver-geometries. For Within the polarity box you may define the polarity of the datapoints to be loaded
sorting (geometry) the data the program can either access the coordinate values into the internal buffer. This box is only enabled if both the option absolute
saved in the header or the shot and geophone coordinates stored in the trace amplitudes and envelope are deactivated within the 3D-datainterpretation.
header (if these exist - check over HeaderInfo in Data processing). For
equidistant zero-offset-profiles one would normally use the header coordinates. The option max. nr. of points defines the maximum of data points stored within
the internal buffer. If the number of datapoints exceeding the given amplitude
threshold is greater than this value the program automatically determines a factor
n for reducing the data. Only every n. datapoint will be stored within the internal
buffer.
3D-datainterpretation, view 3D-cube 317 3D-datainterpretation, 3D picking 318

The number of datapoints actually loaded into the internal buffer is shown after 3.8 3D picking
having pressed the option load.
With the pick option activated arrivals of a 3D-datafiles can be picked analogous
Within the colors box you may define if all data are displayed in blue or using the to the pick option within the 2D-dataanalysis (see also Pick MenuItem, chap.
actual color palette. To be considered: for performance reasons only 16 different 1.12.2) . Picking may be done within the individual 2D-cuts (scroll or window
colors from the actual color palette are used. mode) or within the 3D-datacube display. You have the choice between manual
picking and continuous pick.
The option mark size allows you to define the size of the display marks. Use a Corrections can be performed either on zero crossings, on the extremum or some
big size for a small datavolume and use a small size for a big datavolume. other types (options correct all or corr. act cut). The picks can be saved with an
arbitrary name and reloaded any time (option save and load). The maximum
The option clear empties the internal buffer. The rotation is much faster with an number of picks is limited to the maximum number of scans per profile.
empty buffer. The option take over allows you to take over the picks of the previous cut for the
actual one. This allows you a fast picking of the individual cuts.
The option print allows you to print out the actual 3D-cube. The option print With the option use code activated you may pick all elements within one step (the
scale controls the size of the output. pick code is used for discriminating the individual elements (reflectors)).

copy 3D-cube to the clipboard Both the travel time and the current amplitude of the phase are detected. In
addition to the distance the xyz-shot- and receiver coordinates of each individual
The option close closes the fast data cube display window. trace are stored within the pick record.

Within the global settings menu, chap. 1.2.1 you can choose between two
different symbols for the picks (* and -). The size of the pick-symbol can be
changed within the symbol font menu (see also Global MenuItem).

manual pick: With the option set activated a pick can be set with the left mouse
button. The same applies to the manual removal or change of an existing pick
after selecting the options remove or change, respectively. Here those picks are
removed or changed which are next to the current cursor position.

continuous pick: With this options activated you can set (option set activated)
or change (option change activated) picks by moving the mouse cursor over the
data set with continuously pressed left mouse button. The picks are set or
removed or changed at those traces that are next to the current cursor position.
The continuous picking must be done from left to right, this means with increasing
distance coordinates. The option continuous pick therefore makes manual picking
a lot easier for large data sets. If the cursor movement is too fast to pick every
trace no interpolation between the founded pick position is done in contrast to the
2D-dataanalysis. The parameter delay under global settings controls the speed of
the continuous picking.

show xy-proj.: interactive display of the xy-projections of the actual picks. The
option is useful for a direct control of the locations of the picks within the xy-
plane. Picks belonging to the same code are connected. For example the option
might be used for the location control of picked pipes or rebars .

3D-pick-cube: interactive fast 3D cube display of the actual picks. The 3D-cube
may be freely rotated either by mouse interactions or by using scroll bars. The
picks can be viewed from any direction and can be zoomed. It is possible to bring
this window to the front by pressing the right mouse button within the data
window of the 3D-datainterpretation. The option print allows you to print out the
3D-datainterpretation, 3D picking 319 3D-datainterpretation, 3D picking 320

reset: This option allows to reset all current picks. With the option use code
actual 3D-cube. The option print scale controls the size of the output. copy
activated only the picks with the actual code are lost.
3D-cube to the clipboard. The magnification is controlled by the option
magnification (in %) .
reset act cut: This option allows to reset the picks of the currect cut. With the
option use code activated only the picks with the actual code are lost.
pick code: input of a code (integer value) for the characterization of the following
picks to be chosen. With the option use code activated this code may be used
take over: this option allows the picks of the previous cut to be taken over for
for discriminating the individual layers. The actual code of already existing picks
the actual cut. As long as this option is activated the picks are automatically taken
is displayed when moving the mouse cursor (label act - code of the pick next to
over for the next cut (use for example the single scroll bar). With the option auto
the mouse cursor).
cor. activated the acutal correction type(s) is (are) used.The option will be
automatically deactivated when loading new picks.
use code:
if activated the pick code is used for discriminating the indivudual picks:
correct all: activate this option to correct the current picks using the actual
- only the picks with the actual code may be changed or removed
correction type. With the option use code activated the option only acts on the
- different colors are used for the picks with different codes (by default the
picks with the actual code.
layershow colors are used, therefore the max. code is restricted to 99)
- options corr. act cut, correct all and auto corr. only act on the picks with the
corr. act cut: activate this option to correct the current picks of the actual cut
actual code
using the actual correction type. With the option use code activated the option
- options reset and reset act cut only act on the picks with the actual code
only acts on the picks with the actual code.
- options control all and control act cut only act on the picks with identical code
- the colors as well as the correction type are hold within the RAM for each code
The following correction types are available within the combo box above:
(option show shows you the actual settings)
- option view/Pick surfaces for 3D-cube: code is used in order to discriminate
correct to max.: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the signal
the individual layers
belonging to the pick.
if deactivated the following holds true:
correct to zero: allows to correct the current picks to the zero crossing of the
- all picks may be changed or removed
signal belonging to the pick.
- the actual pick color is used for all picks
- one correction type is used for all picks
corr.max/min.time: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the
- options control act and control all: only picks which belong to a special trace
signal and the minimum time within a tracerange of a predefined number of
and which traveltimes are nearly identical are controlled and if necessary
traces (see input pickcorrect traces under global settings). Use this option for
double picks are removed
example to correct the picked cusp of a diffraction hyperbola.
- option view/Pick surfaces for 3D-cube: the layernumber stored with the pickfile
is used for the discrimination of the individual layers
corr.max/dist.range: allows to correct the current picks to the extremum of the
signal within a given tracerange of a predefined number of traces (see input
show: shows the actual settings of the pick codes (color and correction type)
pickcorrect traces under global settings). The timerange for searching the
maximum is automatically restricted by the polarity of the actual pick. Use this
color: enter the wanted pick color
option for example to correct the picked cusp of a migrated diffraction.
load: This option allows to load new picks from disc. Please note that the current
dip correct: the picks are corrected for the dip of the reflector (dip is in scroll
picks are lost with the loading of new picks. After selecting the option you can
direction). The dip is automatically calculated from the mean of the traveltime
choose a data set from the file list. In addition to the REFLEX pick format one
differences of the reflector picks of the two previous cuts which are placed at the
ASCII-format is supported: each line of the ASCII-file corresponds to one pick
same distance position. If no picks with the same distance position exist for the
and consists of two colums containing the distance and the time in the
two cuts the dip correction is set to 0.
corresponding dimensions.
auto cor.: if activated the picks are automatically corrected during the setting.
save: saves the current picks. After selecting the option the Pick save menu
The actual correction type is used.
(chap. 1.12.2.1) will be opened.
3D-datainterpretation, 3D picking 321 Modelling 322

The two arrows at the right side allow to move up and down the picks of the
actual cut by one sample increment. With the option use code activated in
4. Modelling
addition only the picks with the actual code are moved.
The menu modelling allows the interactive production of a 2-dimensional layer
model and based on this layer model the simulation of the electromagnetic and
control all: this option allows you to remove double picks, this means several
seismic wave propagation by means of finite difference (FD) methods or ray
picks for one distance (one trace). With the option use code activated only double
tracing. In addition, a tomographic approach is included, which allows the
picks with identical codes are removed.
automatic adaptation of transmitted travel time data.
control act cut: this option allows you to remove double picks of the actual cut.
The possibilities of the menu modelling as a summary:
With the option use code activated only double picks with identical codes are
removed.
' interactive production of a 2D-layer model with given physical parameters
(effective dielectric permittivity , [ ], effective magnetic permittivity : [ ] and
electric conductivity F [S/m] or pressure wave velocity Vp [m/s], shear wave
velocity Vs [m/s] and density D [g/cm3], respectively)
' simulation of electromagnetic, seismic wave propagation, respectively by
means of FD-method for different sources (plane wave, point source as well
as "Exploding-Reflector"-source), storage of the complete wave field on disk
' generating of arbitrary profiles, snapshot sequences, respectively, from the
calculated wave field
' tomographic inversion of transmission travel time data
' calculation of synthetic traveltimes using two different methods (see
raytracing 2D, chap. 4.7.1) and to invert picked forward and reciprocal
traveltimes using a wavefront inversion technique (see wavefront-inversion
2D, chap. 4.7.2).

The menu modelling allows the interactive production of an arbitrary 2-

dimensional layer model (e. g. wedging-out interfaces). The distance dimension
is either METER or FOOT (must be specified within the global settings menu,
chap. 1.2.1). The FD-modelling of electromagnetic waves only allows the
distance dimension METER. The max. number of layers is restricted to 50. It is
possible to generate isolated elements as well as to fall back on predefined
symbols (circles and rectangles). A topography can be given, too. A layer
interface can be made of a maximum of 100 different x,z-points. Different
physical parameters can be assigned to any layer point, so that the physical
parameters of a layer can vary laterally. In between the entered values linear
interpolation in the x-direction occurs. A set of parameters is valid for the whole
depth area (z-axis) below the current interface. The interfaces do not have to be
entered exactly at the edge, intersection, respectively, but only in the vicinity
because the option extrapolate allows the automatic interpolation between two
interfaces as well as the extrapolation of the interface at the border. Therefore the
program searches automatically the nearest border at the exposed end and
extrapolates in that direction (in the case of an edge, extrapolation in x-, z-
direction, respectively, in the case of an interface to the nearest layer point). This
is necessary for the following FD-rastering.
The option hor.extrap. allows the extrapolation of the interface only to the left
and right borders of the model. Use this option instead of extrapolate if you want
the interface to be only extrapolated to the vertical borders.
Modelling 323 Modelling 324

On the basis of an arbitrary 2-dimensional model a finite difference-simulation Three different sources are supplied. The plane wave can be excited in an
(FD-computation) of the electromagnetic, seismic wave propagation, respectively, arbitrary depth level z. It allows, e. g. the simulation of a zero-offset-section. But
can be executed. The result of this calculation is the wave field depending on x, z here it has to be noticed that the reflection characteristics are only equivalent to
and t (time). This method allows the simulation of the kinematic (travel time) as those of a zero-offset-section in the case of horizontal plane reflectors.
well as dynamic (amplitude, frequency etc.). An explicit method is used, i.e. the Additionally, it has to be noticed that a loss of divergence, as it happens in a field
wave field is calculated for a certain point of time with the values of the preceding experiment, where single events are put together to a zero-offset-section, can't
point of time etc.. The layer model has to be rastered for the calculation with a be considered for a plane wave excitation and thus the amplitudes reflect the
given increment in x- and z- direction. Just so an increment for the time has to be reality limited. The point-source can be placed at any arbitrary point in the 2D-mo-
given. The size of the space-increment is in accordance with the minimal wave del. By it, a single experiment can be simulated kinematically and dynamically
length, i.e. it depends on the choice of the physical parameter as well as the correct (e.g. a CMP-experiment or a shot-section). Several single calculations
given main frequency. If the increment is given too coarse, numerical dispersion can be put together to a zero- or constant-offset section (very computation time
appears, i.e. the propagation velocity depends on frequency even if the physical intensive), too. Anew, the exploding-reflector-model allows the simulation of a
parameters are given frequency independent. The program determines zero-offset-section in a single FD-simulation. Using the exploding-reflector-model
automatically the critical value of the space-increment and shows this one in a means that starting at time t=0 all points stemming from a reflector are the
window. This value should not be passed over. The max. time-increment starting point of a Huygen's elementary wave with an amplitude proportional to

(approximately: )t <= )x/(%2V) for the electromagnetic propagation and )t <=

depends on the max. velocity V as well as on the given space-increment )x the reflexion coefficient for the normal incidence case. During the rastering the
source strengths are calculated and stored on a special file. For the
)x/(Vp+Vs) for the elastic propagation). In the case of the electromagnetic wave electromagnetic case the phase is calculated in addition. For the exploding-
propagation and a high conductivity the critical time value can be dominated reflector-model, contrary to the plane wave, reflectors which are not plane are
additionally by the condition: )t <= ,/F. If one of these critical values is passed described kinematically correct. In regard to the amplitude characteristic the
over the FD-scheme turns to be instable, i.e. the calculated values increase same is valid as for the plane wave, which impinges on a plane reflector.
continuously with time and under certain circumstances an overflow is possible, The FD-program is an autonomous program (program name FDEMSEIS.EXE)
i.e. the values cannot be displayed binarily. The critical time-increment is and is automatically started from REFLEXW.
displayed in the same window as the critical space-increment. Moreover, the After terminating the FD-computation one or several single lines or the complete
critical time-increment for the currently set space-increment is shown. The wave field, depending on the space coordinates x and z as well as on time t, are
computation time, necessary for the FD-computation, depends linearly on the stored automatically in the directory ROHDATA of the current project directory .
number of time points as well as on the number of space points in x- and z-direc- Thereby it can be given which component has to be saved (electromagnetic wave
tion, i.e. decreasing the space-increment by a factor of 2 increases the propagation: selecting out of Ex, Ey, Ez, Hx, Hy, Hz; elastic wave propagation:
computation time by a factor of 4 (actually by a factor of 8, because the time- vertical or horizontal displacement). Additionally, the sampling in x, z as well as in
increment has to be decreased, likewise). t can be selected coarser in order to minimize disc space. The data are stored in
The electromagnetic simulation is based on the solution of the Maxwell- the REFLEXW-internal format and can be viewed and processed like every other
equations. By doing so, it is assumed that the physical parameters ,, : and F data profile.
are frequency independent and that the physical parameters are constant in y-
direction. In each case the x-, y-, z-components of the electrical (E) and
magnetical (H) field are calculated. If the source excites only in Ey-direction, in Use the speed buttons in the first lower panel on the left for a speed access to
Hx- or Hz-direction, respectively, the needed computation time decreases by a some further different options:
factor 2 because the other fields are decoupled and are identical to 0 in this case
(TE-Mode).
enter the project directory
The seismic simulation is based either on the 2-dimensional elastic-, acoustic- or
SH (shear wave, polarized in y-direction) -wave equation according to the chosen
method. In all cases no attenuation is taken into consideration and the elastic copy model to the clipboard
parameters are assumed to be frequency independent. The computation for the
acoustic case is much faster than for the elastic case. In the case of the elastic
computation the vertical (z) and the horizontal (x) displacement is computed. The resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots the
complete actual model
potential is calculated in the case of the acoustic and SH- modelling.
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the
The model-boundaries can be reflective or absorbing. In the case of data set can be selected and plotted in full screen size
electromagnetic wave propagation the model-boundaries can be enlarged by an
absorbing edge area, in the case of seismic propagation an absorbing boundary reset all model parameters - All model parameters apart from the
condition is set on. dimensions are reset
Modelling 325 Modelling 326

The option generate pickfile (2-way traveltimes) allows to generate a pickfile

load model from file
consisiting of the 2-way reflection traveltimes generated from the layer
boundaries of the actual model (except the uppermost layer boundary). The
Save model on file vertical gradients are taken into account. The 2-way reflection traveltimes are
calculated up to the uppermost layer (corresponds to the model top in case of no
topography). The number of the layer boundary is stored within the pick code.
Print model Example of application: conversion of a model taken from refraction data into 2-
way traveltime data for a comparsion with a seismic reflection section.
FD-Button: FDGroupBox is activated - In this Box all the parameters for the
FD-computation are set
Tomo-Button: TomographyGroupBox is activated - In this Box all the
Help MenuItem: This item activates the main help menu or displays some
parameters for the tomography are set
information about memory and disk usage etc..
ray-Button: RayGroupBox is activated - In this Box all the parameters for
the raytracing/wavefront inversion are set
Exit MenuItem: Leave the module modelling.

The option fill allows to fill the model layer with colors automatically assigned to
Within the Main Menu Bar you may choose the following items:
one physical parameter of each model point. You may determine within the model
generation input of model parameters menu (chap. 4.4.3) which physical
File MenuItem: From this menu you may choose your project directory, load,
parameter is used. Click on the wanted parameter in the upper right corner table.
save, reset and print an existing model and copy the actual model to the
By default the first parameter is set (marked by a x). The option is also valid for
clipboard.
the print output. When filling the model a Reflexw rasterfile will be automatically
created. By default a dummyfile will be used. If you enter a name under
Edit MenuItem: Perform editing functions (e.g. undo-function).
rasterfilename the entered filename will be used for the Reflexw rasterfile.The
file will be stored under rohdata under the actual project directory.
Global MenuItem: Enter some global settings like fonts, printer,... (For further
information refer to Global MenuItem in chapter 1.)
The traveltime radiogroup within the second lower panel controls how the
View MenuItem: This item controls the display options.
traveltimes (calculated or loaded) are displayed. With x-project activated the
traveltimes are plotted over the x-distance axis.With y-project activated the
Plot MenuItem: Within this icon you may activate all the plot settings. (For further
traveltimes are plotted over the y-distance axis.With z-project activated the
information refer to Plot MenuItem and Plot Options in chapter 1.)
traveltimes are plotted over the z-depth axis.
Analyse MenuItem: Enter the wanted analysis option FD, Tomo or ray (see
The sec.coord. radiogroup within the second lower panel controls the choose of
above).
second coordinate e.g. for the raytracing and the 2D-tomography. The first
The option calculate traveltime differences allows to calculate traveltime
coordinate is always x. With y-coord. activated it is assumend that the y-
differences between the data and the calculated traveltimes. As the positions of
coordinate represents the second coordinate axis. With z-coord. activated it is
the data and the synthetic traveltimes may vary because of the fixed raster
assumend that the z-coordinate represents the second coordinate axis.
increment of the raytracing you may enter a position bin which is used for
The sec.coord. option is used for example when calculating traveltimes using the
determining the quasi-identical positions. By default the actual raster increment of
raytracing or when performing a 2-D tomography with 3D-data. It is
the raytracing is used. The total absolute timedifference, the total timedifference
recommended to activate z-coord. for seismic refraction data. The last chosen
and the number of identical positions are displayed. The total absolute
option is saved when leaving the program.
timedifference defines the sum of the absolute timedifferences independently
form the sign (pos. or neg. difference). This value gives you an estimate of the
The speedbutton V or velocity adaptation under analyse: allows to determine a
overall adaptation. The total timedifference defines the sum of the timedifferences
velocity by creating a straight line with two mouse clicks within the traveltime
taking into account the sign of the differences. This value gives you an estimate
window. With this button activated the program waits for the input of two
whether the mean model leads to too small or too big traveltimes, e.g. an
datapoints for generating a straight line of distinct velocity. Pressing the left
interface is too high or too deep. The number of identical positions is shown
mouse button determines the first datapoint and by moving the mouse with
together with the total number of data picks in order to have an estimate over the
pressed button the line with the actual velocity is shown. Leaving the mouse
significance of the analysis.
button holds the actual line.
Modelling, File MenuItem 327 Modelling, File MenuItem 328

4.1 Modelling File MenuItem the one-dimensional models using the option create 2D-model within the
modelling Edit MenuItem (chap. 4.2).
From this menu you may choose your project directory, load, save, reset and
print an existing model and copy the actual model to the clipboard. print model: Use this option if you want to print out the model.

ProjectDir: Selection of a new project. After selecting this option the directories copy to clipboard: Use this option if you want to copy the actual model to the
included in the current project directory are listed. From these you can choose clipboard.
the project you want to work with.
load data traveltimes: allows to load picked data traveltimes. The plot color of
load model: Use this option to load an existing model. Models which are built the traveltimes is taken from the actual set symbol font color. It is possible to load
using the DOS programs REFLEX and REFRA can also be loaded. The data REFLEX formatted PCK files as well as
should be stored in the directory MODEL (default model directory) of the current 2D-colums ASCII with each line containing
project directory but it is also possible to load the data from any other directory or distance traveltime
drive. ASCII-3D-tomography with each line containing (see also chap. 1.12.2.1)
traveltime code x-transmitter y-transm. z-transm. x-receiver y-receiver z-receiver
save model: Saves the actual model in the new format used by REFLEXW. The ASCII-2D-tomography with each line containg (see also chap. 1.12.2.1)
model is stored automatically in the directory MODEL of the current project traveltime code x-transmitter y-transmitter x-receiver y-receiver
directory and has the extension MOD. Saving the model in the formats of the In addition you may load ASCII-matrix data (option Shot-Rec.Matrix, m shots and
DOS programs REFLEX and REFRA is not supported. n receivers) which has the following format:
1. line contains the x-positions of all m shots
reset model: Reset all model parameters. All model parameters apart from the 2. line contains the z-positions of all m shots
dimensions are reset. 3.-n.lines: 1.column: x-receiver position
2. column: z-receiver position
load from ASCII: allows to import the coordinates and the parameters of the 3.-m. Column: picked traveltimes
layer boundaries from an ASCII-file. The format of the ASCII-file must be the example:
shot position -100.00 -50.00 3.75 41.25 78.75 132.50 182.50
same as used with the option export to ASCII. Each line of the ASCII-file contains GP pos. Elev. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
all informations about one point of a layer boundary: 0.0 0.00 110.00 59.00 10.00 57.00 78.00 140.00 175.00
electromagnetic: layer-nr. X-coord. Z-coord. , : F d,/dz d:/dz dF/dz 7.5 0.00 115.00 62.00 10.50 50.00 73.00 137.50 170.00
seismics:layer-nr. X-coord. Z-coord.Vp Vs D dVp/dz dVs/dz dD/dz 15.0 0.00 120.00 65.00 20.00 46.00 69.00 132.50 168.00
The actual wave type as well as other options like topography and the FD- 22.5 0.00 124.00 71.00 28.00 42.50 62.50 130.00 165.00
30.0 0.00 128.00 78.00 39.50 25.00 60.00 130.00 165.00
parameters are not changed. Only the model borders (min./max x- and z-
37.5 0.00 130.00 94.00 47.00 11.00 50.00 122.50 162.50
coordinates) are changed if the actual model borders are smaller than the 45.0 0.00 135.00 105.00 56.00 10.50 45.00 120.00 160.00
min./max. coordinates of the layer boundaries within the ASCII-file. 52.5 0.00 138.00 116.00 60.00 22.00 37.50 115.00 158.00
60.0 0.00 141.00 119.00 62.50 30.00 31.50 109.00 154.00
export to ASCII: allows to export the coordinates and the parameters of the layer 67.5 0.00 143.00 121.00 68.00 38.00 24.00 102.50 147.00
boundaries into an ASCII-file. The file will be stored under the path ASCII under 75.0 0.00 147.00 126.00 72.00 45.00 15.00 95.00 141.00
the projectdirectory using the extension MOD. Each line of the ASCII-file contains 82.5 0.00 150.00 130.00 76.00 50.00 9.50 85.00 135.00
all informations about one point of a layer boundary:
electromagnetic: layer-nr. X-coord. Z-coord. , : F d,/dz d:/dz dF/dz load calc. traveltimes: allows to load calculated traveltimes. The dataformat of
seismics:layer-nr. X-coord. Z-coord.Vp Vs D dVp/dz dVs/dz dD/dz the calculated traveltimes is the same PCK-REFLEX format like for the data
traveltimes but the plotting colors are different. The color corresponds to the shot
load additional model: activating this option allows to load and plot additional no stored with the traveltimes.
models. The additional models cannot be edited and are only plotted for
comparison. export calc.traveltimes to ASCII: allows to save the actually loaded calculated
traveltimes into an ASCII-format. The format corresponds to the
load 1D-models: activating this option allows to load several 1D-models which ASCII-3D-tomography format within the Pick save MenuItem (chap. 1.12.2.1).
have been generated within the CMP velocity analysis (chap. 2) or within the Each line contains the following values: traveltime(10:xx), code(10:0),
2D-dataanalyis when using the intercepttime method within the velocity x-tracehadercoordinate of the transmitter, y-traceheadercoordinate of the
adaptation (chap. 1.12.1) panel. The layer boundaries of the individual 1D-models transmitter(10:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(10:xx),
are marked by colored signs. A two-dimensional model may be composed from x-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:xx), y-traceheadercoordinate of the
Modelling, Edit MenuItem 329 Modelling, View MenuItem 330

receiver(10:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:xx) where xx defines modelpoints: Allows to display or to hide the model layer points.
the number of decimal places given within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1).
The file has the extension TOM and will be stored under the path ASCII under the modellayers: Allows to display or to hide the model layer boundaries.
actual projectpath. The format corresponds to that format needed by the 2D and
3D-tomographic traveltime-inversion. modelparameters: With this option activated the physical parameters (one single
set of parameters) are displayed below the defined model points. The program
export data traveltimes to ASCII: allows to save the actually loaded data controls if identical physical parameters for subsequent layerpoints are present
traveltimes into an ASCII-format. The format corresponds to the and only displays the middle one. Analogous to the option fill or interpolated
ASCII-3D-tomography format within the Pick save MenuItem (chap. 1.12.2.1). physical parameters you may determine within the model generation “ input of
Each line contains the following values: traveltime(10:xx), code(10:0), model parameters menu” (chap. 4.4.3) which physical parameter is used. Click
x-tracehadercoordinate of the transmitter, y-traceheadercoordinate of the on the wanted parameter in the upper right corner table. By default the first
transmitter(10:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(10:xx), parameter is set (marked by a x).
x-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:xx), y-traceheadercoordinate of the
receiver(10:xx), z-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(10:xx) where xx defines data traveltimes: Allows to display or to hide the data traveltimes which have
the number of decimal places given within the global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). been loaded using the option load traveltimes under modelling file MenuItem
The file has the extension TOM and will be stored under the path ASCII under the (chap. 4.1).
actual projectpath. The format corresponds to that format needed by the 2D and
3D-tomographic traveltime-inversion. calc. traveltimes: Allows to display or to hide the actually calculated traveltimes
or the traveltimes which have been loaded using the option load calc. traveltimes
Exit: Leave the module modelling. under modelling file MenuItem (chap. 4.1).

calc. rays: Allows to display or to hide the actual calculated rays.

4.2 Modelling Edit MenuItem
show traveltimepoints: Displayed traveltimes are marked with crosses if this
Undo: The option allows to undo the last model change. option is activated.

create 2D-model from 1D-models: This option allows the automatic show data traveltimelines: Displayed data traveltimes of a shot are connected
combination of several 1D-models to a 2-dimension model. The 1D-models must with straight lines if this option is activated.
be loaded first using the option load 1D-models under modelling file MenuItem
(chap. 4.1). The number of layers within each 1D-model should be equal because show calc. traveltimelines: Displayed calculated traveltimes of a shot are
the layers are combined corresponding to their index number. The program connected with straight lines if this option is activated.
automatically controls this number. The depths of the layers are linearly
interpolated. The parameter table witht the velocity and the vertical velocity show additional models: allows to display or to hide the loaded additional
gradient are automatically updated. models (see also option load additional models under modelling file MenuItem
(chap. 4.1).

show 1D models: allows to display or to hide the loaded 1D models (see also
option load 1D models under modelling file MenuItem (chap. 4.1).
4.3 Modelling View MenuItem
show additional rasterfile: allows to display any rasterfile in addition to the
ColorBars: Activate this option for displaying the actual color amplitude model. This rasterfile may be a REFLEX-formatted file or a FD-rasterfile
assignment bar at the right of the window. (extension FDP, standard outputpath ASCII) generated during the rastering of the
FD-modelling, the raytracing or the tomographic inversion. The option is also
interpolated physical parameters: activate this option if you want the physical valid for the print output.
parameters to be displayed in the status panel on the top (par:) when moving the
mouse. Analogous to the option fill you may determine within the model
generation input of model parameters menu (chap. 4.4.3) which physical
parameter is used. Click on the wanted parameter in the upper right corner table.
By default the first parameter is set (marked by a x).
Modelling, Model generation 331 Modelling, Model generation 332

4.4 Model generation directly fill in their coordinates into the table in the input of model parameters
window (see following paragraph).
The first paragraph of this chapter gives a short introduction of the steps which After having set all points, please click on the button extrapolate or hor.extrap. in
have to be done during the generation of a new model. The following paragraphs the second lower panel to extrapolate the layer to the model boundaries, the
describe the various possibilities to change this ‚raw‘ model in order to adapt it to nearest layer, respectively. PLEASE NOTE: The layer points are sorted
the physical reality which shall be simulated. PLEASE NOTE: Independent of the automatically from lower x-distance to higher x-distance, i.e. the interface function
wanted simulation ( FD-calculation, Tomography or ray-tracing) the models are all is unequivocal. Should for example a convolution be given it has to occur by
generated in the same way. giving several interfaces, like it is done by the predefined symbols circle and
rectangle (see below). The interfaces don't have to be entered exactly at the
edge, intersection with another interface, respectively, but in the vicinity because
the option extrapolate makes the automatic interpolation between two interfaces
4.4.1 Getting started as well as the extrapolation of the interface to the boundary possible. Therefore
the program searches automatically the nearest border at the exposed end and
The first steps to generate a model are to define the model size (start and end extrapolates in that direction (in the case of an edge, extrapolation in x-, z-
coordinates in x- and z-direction [m]), the model file name with which the model direction, respectively, in the case of an interface to the nearest layer point).
should be stored and the wanted wave type during the simulation The physical parameters of the layer (,, : and F, Vp, Vs and D, respectively) can
(electromagnetic, seismic(elastic), acoustic and sh-seismic). PLEASE NOTE: The only be entered using the table in the input of model parameters window (see
model file name should not exceed 6 characters (test10, e. g.) to ensure a correct following paragraph).
generation of the output file name of the calculated data (see below). All these PREDEFINED SYMBOLS: If the radio buttons in the first lower panel are set to
parameters can be set in the first lower panel. circle, rectangle, respectively, and set point, the location of the middle point, the
After clicking the reset button in the first lower panel the model and the first focal point, respectively, can be set in the model by means of the left mouse
interface (layer nr. 1) are displayed. This first layer interface is automatically button or by using the option place object within the input of model parameters
generated and represents the upper boundary of the model (i.e. the ‚raw‘ model window using the midpoint coordinates center x-pos. and center z-pos. PLEASE
always consists of one layer with one interface at its top). NOTE: It is not necessary to care about the fact that the predefined symbols exist
The next step is to define the model parameters of the first layer by using the of two interfaces. The layer nr. is adapted automatically and after the generation
table in the input of model parameters window which displays all the model of the chosen object the two interfaces are treated independently. The needed
parameters belonging to the current layer. This is done in the same manner as physical and additional parameters like the radius of the circle or the extension of
for any other layer and will therefore be generally explained below. the rectangle are entered in the input of model parameters window (see following
After having done these steps, the generation of the ‚raw‘ model is finished and paragraph).
the adaption of the model to the reality can start.

With the option altitude activated a second axis on the right is shown with the
altitudes based on the entered reference level. The actual altitude is calculated
4.4.3 Input of model parameters window
from: reference level - actual z-value.
The input of model parameters window is used to set, display and change all the
The option ycoord allows to enter the coordinate value into the third (y) direction. parameters belonging to the current layer. This window comes to the fore by
This value is used for the generation of the 3D-model from 2D-cuts for the 3D-FD means of the right mouse button if the cursor is situated inside the model.
calculation (only the simulation of the electromagnetic wave propagation, see In the table at the bottom of the group box all the points of the current layer are
also chap. 4.5.4). listed in a rising sequence according to their x-coordinates. In addition to the
coordinates of the points their corresponding physical parameters are listed
dependent on the chosen wave type and if the physical parameters should vary
gradually with depth (EditGradients is chosen in the ControlBox).
4.4.2 Generating a new layer All parameters can be set or changed by simply editing the corresponding fields
of the table. By clicking the update button in the ControlBox the model values and
By clicking on the new button the layer nr. will automatically be adapted to (n+1), the model display are updated. (A new point is added at the end of the table. The
whereby n is the nr. of existing layer interfaces. (Alternatively you can count up to points are automatically resorted during the update.)
the maximum possible layer nr..) If the radio buttons in the first lower panel are Another possibility to set or change the parameter values of some points is to use
set to layer and set point all needed points of the new layer interface can be set the field situated in the upper right corner of the input of model parameters
inside the model by means of the left mouse button. The interface is interpolated window. In this field all the necessary physical parameters (, [ ], : [ ] and F [S/m]
linearly between the layer points. Another possibility to set the layer points is to or Vp [m/s], Vs [m/s] and D [g/cm3], respectively) are listed and can be set
individually. These parameters can be overtaken to selected points of the current
Modelling, Model generation 333 Modelling, Model generation 334
layer. The selection is done by clicking on the fields in the first column of the table sigma) respectively. The distribution functions are the same for all physical parameters.
(the fields, which indicate the number of the points) and is indicated by a cross. The parameter density(%)
Clicking the take over button in the ControlBox leads to the updating of the allows you to restrict the
parameters at the selected points. (For updating the model please use the update density of the pertubations
button in any case!) (density must be greater than
If the parameters in this field are set before the first point of a layer is set 0 and smaller/equal 100). The
interactively, these parameters will be assigned to all the layer points. parameter does not exactly
The import button in the ControlBox allows the import of (x,z)-coordinates which represent the resulting density
are saved in ASCII format (one lines contains the x-coordinate and the z- of the pertubations
coordinate). If specified the 3. and 4. colum may contain the physical parameter escpecially for small
Vp or epsilon and the corresponding vertical gradient, the 5. and 6. colum Vs or correlation lengths and for the
mue and the corresponding vertical gradient and the 7. and 8. colum rho and type discontinuous. Therefore
sigma and again the corresponding vertical gradient. If these parameters are not it might be necessary to
specified the following holds true: if no physical parameters already exist the change this value by trial and
actual parameters are taken over. If the physical parameters of the actual layer error if the resulting density does not fit the wanted needs. With the type
already exist those parameters which are most close to one xz-coordinate point discontinuous the single pertubations do not overlap for densities smaller
are taken over for that point. than/equal 75 %. For greater densities an overlapping is allowed.
The parameter mean value defines a static level for the pertubations which will be
PREDEFINED SYMBOLS: If a circle or a rectangle shall be integrated into the added to all pertubation values. It is possible to define a positive or negative
model two values for each parameter of the field situated in the upper right corner mean value.
can be set: The upper parameters indicate the values of the upper interface (i.e. By deactivating the option random start the random function repetitively
inside the object), the lower ones the values of the lower interface (i.e. below the generates the same specific sequence of random numbers if the other
object). Usually the parameters of the lower interface (outside the object) are in parameters and the discritization interval do not change. Activating the option
accordance with the parameters in the layer in which the object has been random start always generates a new sequence of random numbers.
embedded. As the random distribution depends on the used rasterincrement the results from
In case of a rectangle the length (extension in x-direction [m]) and the width the option fill and from the “normal” FD-rastering differ. Therefore if you want to
(extension in z-direction [m]) must be set. In addition, there is a possibility to set a check your FD-rasterfile you always should use the option “show additional
slope in / which allows to generate parallelograms with the upper and lower rasterfile” instead of the option fill.
border having the chosen slope value.
If a circle shall be set, only the radius has to be chosen.
The option place object allows to set a new symbol object using the midpoint
coordinates center x-pos. and center z-pos. 4.4.4 Changing an existing layer
The option RandomLayer within the All changes but the removing of a layer can be done using the input of model
model input menu allows to specify parameters window. In addition, the position/form of an existing layer can be
statistic parameters for a random changed interactively by using different options in the first, second lower panel,
pertubation of the physical parameters of respectively.
the individual layer. It is possible to PLEASE NOTE: The radio button layer in the first lower panel has to be activated
choose between fluctuations (see picture to carry out any interactive changes on the current layer. Then, e.g. the layer,
on the right - 2. layer) and discontinuous which should be changed, can be chosen interactively by means of the left
pertubations (see picture - 1.layer). mouse button while choose layer is activated and the cursor is situated near the
Different spatial distributions as well as layer interface. (It is also possible to choose a layer by adjusting the
different statistic distributions for the corresponding layer nr. in the first lower panel.) Any point of the current layer can
physical parameters are available. be changed or removed interactively (change p. or remove p.). New points can
The correlation lengths in x- and z-direction define the average size of the also be set (set point). For changing a layer point, please choose the desired
inhomogeneities. point by means of the left mouse button, hold it until the desired locus is reached
The variance defines the strength of the pertubation for the first physical and then release the left mouse button.
parameter (either p-velocity or epsilon). The parameters var. par. 2 and var. par.
3 define the strength for the 2 other parameters (s-velocity or : and density or
Modelling, Model generation 335 FD-model simulation 336
With edit layer the radio groupbox edit actual layer is activated and some edit 4.5 FD-Model simulation
functions which influence not only one layer point but the whole actual layer can
be carried out: The FiniteDifference simulation technique is described in the following
The layer can be removed (remove), vertically or horizontally moved (vert. move paragraphs.
or hor. move) by a certain amount [m], which has to be entered in the amount
box. In addition, the topography of the actual layer boundary can be averaged by
a given number of layer points, whereby the number of layer points has to be
entered in the amount box. 4.5.1 FD-computation
The option combine layers allows you to combine a different number of layers to The parameters necessary for the FD-computation can be entered if the
one single layer. After having activated the option the layer nr. of the layers to be FDGroupBox is activated (e.g., use the speed button FD in the first lower panel).
combined are queried. If the total number of layer points exceed the max. number The rastering of the model based on the actual parameters and the FD-
of layer points (100) an averaging is automatically done. Use this option for computation must be started from this box, too.
example if you have inverted one single layer within different wavefront inversion According to the given wave type the simulation on the basis of the Maxwell-
steps using different layer numbers. equations or of the elastic, acoustic, SH respectively, wave equation takes place.
The result of this calculation is the wave field depending on x,z and t (time). An
The last change can be undone using the undo option under the edit file menu explicit method is used, i.e. the wave field is calculated for a certain point of time
item. from the preceding point of time. All the FD-parameters listed below are stored in
the ASCII-file with the name Filename+the extension 'FDR' (test10.fdr, e. g.).

For the FD-computation the layer model has to be rastered with a given
increment in x- and z-direction (option DeltaX). Just so, a time increment has to
4.4.5 Changing the position of all layers within the model be given (option DeltaT). The size of the space- and time-increment corresponds
to the minimal wave length as well as the velocity (see above). The program
All layers of the model can be vertically, horizontally moved, respectively, by a determines automatically the critical value of the space-increment (1/8 of the min.
certain amount [m], which has to be entered in the amount box, by clicking on the wave length for FD-scheme 4-space, 1/12 of the min. wave length for FD-scheme
button tot. vert. move, tot. hor. move, respectively, in the second lower panel. 2-space, respectively) and shows this one in the calc. critical values box down
right. This value should not be passed over. The max. time-increment depends
on the max. velocity as well as on the given space-increment (approximately: )t
4.4.6 Topography <= )x/(2Vmax)). The critical time-increment is shown in the calc. critical values box
as well. In addition, the critical time-increment of the current set space-increment
The position of the points of the first layer (layer nr. 1) can normally not be varied is displayed there.
in depth (z-direction). To take into account a topography at the top of the model,
i.e. to vary the layer points in depth, the option topography in the second lower The input frequency shows the main frequency of the signal for the simulation in
panel has to be activated. Hz (seismic), MHz (el.magnetic), respectively. TMax specifies the point of time in
If the first layer has a topography, this topography can be added or removed from msec, nsec, respectively at which the simulation shall be terminated. The
ALL other layers by clicking ONE time the button add topog., remove top., boundary conditions selection box enables you to choose one of the predefined
respectively. PLEASE NOTE: Clicking several times adds or removes the model boundaries. In the case of electromagnetic wave propagation the model
topography several times! boundaries can be extended by an absorbing edge area (see chapter 4.5.1.2). In
the case of seismic propagation an absorbing boundary condition is set on (see
If you are calculating synthetic traveltimes (see also raytracing 2D/wavefront for example: Reynolds, boundary conditions for the numerical solution of wave
inversion 2D) or FD-seismograms/radargrams (see also FD-model simulation) all propagation problems, geophysics, 43, 1099-1110, 1978). You may choose
source and receiver positions above the topography are automatically placed between the two different boundary conditions A1 and REY. The absorbing
directly below the topography. boundary condition A1 does not show the problems with the instability at the
model borders when a discontinuity is present but it is a little bit less efficient.
Choosing reflecting means total reflection from the boundaries both for the
electromagnetic and the seismic wave propagation.

The source type selection box allows the choice of a plane wave, a point source
and an exploding-reflector model (not in the case of elastic wave propagation).
FD-model simulation 337 FD-model simulation 338
According to the choice of the source the depth position (source z for plane wave PLEASE NOTE: The ASCII output formats of the DOS program REFLEX are no
and point source) as well as the lateral postition (source x for point source) has to longer supported.
be given. To import ASCII-total wave field data generated with REFLEX please use the
option convertFDtoReflex in the Modelling File MenuItem. The import format is
The signal type allows to chooose any of the following different signal types: automatically set to FD-total wavefield. (For further information about the Import
Kuepper, sine, Ricker, digitized signal, Kuepper 4 Extr. damped, and Kuepper 6 Menu see chapter 1.5.)
Extr. damped.
The digitized signal is taken from the first trace of a Reflexw formatted datafile. A Choosing single line you have to specify the coordinates of the receiver line
possibly existing starttime within the Reflexw file will not be considered. The (recxstart, recxend, reczstart, reczend).
critical values for DeltaX and DeltaT are still be calculated from the manually
entered frequency which should be the dominant frequency of the digitized signal. The given of x,z-scaling as well as time scaling controls, together with DeltaX and
The Kuepper 4 and 6 Extr. damped types may be used in order to simulate a DeltaT, the sampling in x-,z- and time-direction for the storage of the wave fields
longer reverberating signal. The first 2 extrema remain undamped and then a on disc (e.g. x,z-scaling = 2 and time scaling = 4 means a sampling interval of
cos-taper is used in order to damp the following 2 or 4 extrema. 2*DeltaX and 4*DeltaT). x,z-scaling and time scaling should be set as large as
possible because in the case of the output type total wavefield the output usually
According to the chosen wave type the excited fields, field components, needs a huge amount of disc space. In the case of the total wavefield output the
respectively, of the source have to be set: program automatically controls the scaling parameters in such a way that the
electromagnetic: setting of the excited field components Ex, Ey, Ez, Hx, Hy and resulting number of points in all directions (x, z and time) does not exceed the
Hz; max. number of datapoints for the 3D-datainterpretation (see chap. 3).
seismic(elastic): setting of p- and s-source;
acoustic and sh-seismic: no selecting options because of a potential. If you have entered a topography all source and receiver positions above the
Default settings are Ey for the electromagnetic and p-source for the topography are automatically placed directly below the topography (see also
seismic(elastic). model generation - topography, chap. 4.4.6).

The components of the calculated fields, which shall be registrated and stored on Within the 3D-FD group it is possible to activate the 3D-FD-calculation for the
disk can also be chosen dependent on the current wave type: electromagnetic wave propagation - for further information see chap. 4.5.4).
electromagnetic: setting of Ex, Ey, Ez, Hx, Hy and Hz;
seismic(elastic): setting of vert. displacement (WZ) and hor. displacement (UX); DoRaster: The FD-program needs discrete 2-dimensional arrays of the physical
acoustic and sh-seismic: no selecting options because of a potential (PT). parameters. The option DoRaster allows the rastering of the model parameters
Default setting is Ey for the electromagnetic. based on the actual raster increment DeltaX. The max. number of raster points in
z-direction is restricted to 2000.
The option free surface in the case of seismic or acoustic wave propagation During the rastering the model is filled with different colors. These colors do not
allows you to set the upper boundary always as a free surface even in the case of correspond to any physical model parameter but indicate which areas of the
chosen absorbing boundary conditions. model are attached to which model layers. PLEASE NOTE: If a FD-computation
shall be done using a new model the first time, the rastering should be done at
The output file name for the computed data consists of the model file name plus least one time with DoRaster. So the attachment of the model areas to the
an extension (according to the field component: EX, EY, EZ, HX, HY, HZ for the corresponding layers can be controlled and any error caused by the rastering can
electromagnetic, WZ, UX for the seismic(elastic) or PT for the acoustic and sh- be avoided.
seismic calculation, respectively) and the successive numberplus extension The 2D-arrays of the individual model parameters are stored under the path
‚DAT‘. The data are stored in the directory ROHDATA of the current project model under the actual projectdirectory on different files with the following
directory. filenames: model file name + special extension. The different extensions are:
electromagnetic wave propagation: , - FDP, : - FDS, F - FDD;
The output type allows to set the wanted type of data output. elastic wave propagation: Vp - FDP, Vs - FDP, D - FDD
total wavefield: The complete wavefield is stored in 3D-REFLEXW format acoustic wave propagation: Vp - FDP, D - FDD
(test10ey.dat, e.g.) and can be viewed within the 3D-data-interpretation module sh-wave propagation: Vs - FDS, D - FDD
(processing within the 2D-data-analysis module like any 2D-line). ExplodingReflector Model: source strength - FDQ, phase - FDI
single line: A single line is stored in REFLEXW format (test10ey.dat, e.g.) and Storing the arrays is done in an ASCII-format using the following block notation
can be viewed and processed within the 2D-data-analysis module. (all z-values for one x-point):
several single lines: This option allows to compute a sequence of different FDP and FDS-files: 10F8:2
modellings based on the actual model. For further information see chapter 4.5.2. FDD-files: 10F8:5
FD-model simulation 339 FD-model simulation 340
FDQ and FDI-files: 10F8:3 deselected, the computation is faster but there is no possibility to work with
At the end of each block the line must be ended. REFLEXW until the FD-computation is finished.
example - 15 values in z-direction, 2 blocks = 2 successive x-values:
BatchStartFD: batch start for different models. After having activated the option
10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 the model filenames for the FD-calculation are queried. Before using this option
12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 you have to save your models with the wanted FD-parameters.
10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00
12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00

If the rastering of the model parameters is not done using the option Raster of
REFLEX please consider the following: the file with the extension FDR contains
all the necessary parameters like signal length, max. time and the point number
Nx and Nz in x- and z-direction, respectively. These numbers (+1 because
counting starts at 0) must be identical to the number of points in x- and z-direction
used in the raster files.
A message appears if undefined parameter values are found for , und : (electro-
magnetic) or Vp, Vs and D (seicmic). The following default values are set in this
case: ,: 1, :: 1, F: 0 S/m; Vp: 1000 m/s, Vs: 500 m/s, D: 1 g/cm3.

export: the option allows to store the FD-rasterfiles onto one single ASCII-file
with each line containing the following informations:
x-pos. y-pos. z-pos. ,(Vp) :(Vs) sigma(density) sourcestrength sourcephase
The first line contains the following informations:
xpoints ypoints zpoints DeltaX

import: the option allows to read the FD-rasterfiles from an ASCII-file with each
line containing the following informations:
x-pos. y-pos. z-pos. ,(Vp) :(Vs) sigma(density) sourcestrength sourcephase
The first line contains the following informations:
xpoints ypoints zpoints DeltaX
An error message appears if the actual FD-parameters and the parameters
stored within the ASCII-file do not match. Deactivating the option raster allows
you to start a FD-simulation using the parameters stored within such an ASCII-
file.
The options export and import may be used for an easier manual change of the
rasterized physical parameters.

StartFD: The option allows the start of the FD-program FDEMSEIS.EXE.With the
option raster activated first the chosen model will be rastered based on the actual
parameters and then the FD-computation will be started.
With the option raster deactivated (not possible with activated 3D-FD option - see
chap. 4.5.4) the computation is started immediately using the actual raster values
stored in the different rasterfiles (see option DoRaster). The program
automatically controls if the size of the rasterfiles matches the actually set values
of the raster increment and the model size. If not an error message appears. The
number of points in z-direction and x-direction must be: (z-size / DeltaX) +1 and
(x-size / DeltaX) +1.

The program FDEMSEIS.EXE will normally be executed in the background, so

that it is possible to go on with the work in REFLEXW. If the option background is
FD-model simulation 341 FD-model simulation 342

4.5.2 Computation of several single lines 4.5.3 Absorbing Range for the e.-m. wave propagation
If the output type is set to several single lines, a sequence of different modellings For the electromagnetic FD-wavepropagation an absorbing range is used to
based on the actual model can be computed. Up to 999 different single shots decrease the disturbing reflections from the model boundaries. You have the
may be simulated in one step. The source must be a point source. possibilities between lin.absorbing-range, exp.absorbing-range, big
An ASCII file FDSHOTS.* (FDSHOTS.1, e.g.) under the path MODEL must exist lin.absorb.range and big exp.absorb.range.
which contains in each line for a single modelling the shot, receiver positions, In all cases it is assumed that the conductivity inside the absorbing range is con-
respectively, and the name of the file, in which the data shall be stored: tinuously increased to a max. value starting from the actual one. Entering
lin.absorbing-range, big lin.absorb.range, respectively, a linear increase is used,
sourcexpos sourcezpos recxstart recxend reczstart reczend modeloutputname entering exp.absorbing-range, big exp.absorb.range, respectively, an exponential
increase is used.
Again, the modeloutputname should not exceed 6 characters to ensure a correct
generation of the output file name of the calculated data. The max. value of the conductivity F end is defined as:
The number of lines in the file controls the number of different calculations.
example:
0.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 test10
1.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 1.0 0.0 test20
2.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 test30
3.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 3.0 0.0 test40
4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 test50

Five simulations with different source and receiver positions will be generated.
The resulting five single lines will be stored with different names in REFLEXW
format in the directory ROHDATA of the current project directory (test10ey.dat,
test20ey.dat, test30ey.dat, test40ey.dat, test50ey.dat, respectively, if the field
component EY shall be stored and the wave type is chosen to electromagnetic).

After starting the computation (StartFD button) the ASCII file FDSHOTS.* has to
be chosen whereupon the included shot geometry is displayed. If the shot
geometry is correct the computation can be started, otherwise aborted.
With k - grid variable inside the boundary range the conductivity F k for the linear
increase is defined as:

and for the exponential increase:

FD-model simulation 343 Tomography 344

4.5.4 FD-modelling 3D 4.6 Tomography

Within the 3D-FD group it is possible to activate the 3D-FD-calculation for the If the TomographyGroupBox is activated (e.g., use the speed button TOMO in the
electromagnetic wave propagation. first lower panel), the parameters necessary for the Tomography can be entered.
The rastering of the model based on the actual parameters and the Tomography
With the option 3D-FD activated a 3D-FD-calculation is performed. At present the must be started from this box, too.
following restriction concerning the y-direction are valid: The simulation technique Tomography allows the automatic adaptation of
- the receivers as well as the source are located at the midpoint of the y-axis. synthetic travel time data to real data based on a tomographic algorithm. Only
transmitted (crosshole tomography) or refracted data (refraction tomography)
The parameters ymin and ymax define the model range in y-direction. The may be used. The algorithm is based on an iterative adaptation (SIRT-Simulta-
rasterincrement DeltaX also holds true for the y-direction. neous Iterative Reconstruction Technique). Starting from the actual model
synthetic travel times are calculated. Either straight or curved rays (only 2D) are
The 3D-model is built up from different 2D-cuts lying within the xz-plane. The considered. These travel times are compared to the real ones. Model changes
parameter ycoord (see chap. 4.4.1) defines the location of each cut in the y- are automatically derived from the travel time residuals. This procedure is
direction. The option load allows you to define the wanted 2D-model cuts. repeated based on the changed model. The complete process stops, if distinct
stopping criteria are fulfilled, e.g. if the max. number of iterations is reached (see
below).
The distancedimension is always METER or FOOT(see global settings menu,
chap. 1.2.1), the timedimension is either ms or ns (wavetype is set to
electromagnetic wave propagation).

If no model has been defined a start model will be generated automatically when
starting the tomography. For that purpose a mean velocity as well as the
min./max. coordinates are calculated from the loaded traveltimes. Of course it is
also possible to define a start model manually. In this case the model size must
be defined in such a way that all wanted shot-receiver-positions are located within
the model. In addition, the physical parameters must be defined (p-velocity or , -
see below). The simplest model is a homogeneous one, which is a sufficient
approximation for many cases.
This start model must be transformed into a rectangular grid analogous to the
FD-scheme, i.e. it has to be rastered both in x- and z-direction according to the
entered space increment. For the seismic wave propagation only the p-velocity
(wave type acoustic) is considered. If s-velocities should be used, nevertheless
use the acoustic wave type and enter the s-velocities under the vp option. For the

transformed into a velocity v according to v=0.3/%, [m/nsec].

electromagnetic wave propagation the given values of , are automatically

The resulting information-file (inf-file) contains some informations about the

tomographic inversion, e.g. the number of iterations, the number of rays and the
data residual for the iteration steps. The calculated data residual is the total sum
of all residualsof the individual rays. You may divide this value by the number of
rays in order to get the mean residual value for each traveltime. The individual
residuals for each ray are calculated as the square of the differences of the real
and the calculated traveltimes divided by the datavariance which is given by the
parameter "def. data-variance". The datavariance is a measure for the quality of
the real traveltimes. The higher this value the lower is the quality. Therefore the
individual residuals will be decreased with increased given datavariance because
of the higher uncertainty of the real data.
The parameter "Desired Statistical Range of Data Residuals" is described under
the stopping criteria (statistical criterium).
Tomography 345 Tomography 346
To stop the iteration, one of the following 5 stopping criteria has to be fulfilled: and the preceding step is repeated using model changes mutiplicated with the
square of the option modelchange B etc. The iteration process is stopped at the
Non-physical criteria, i. e. the algorithm is stopped in any way by these so-called latest if the maximum number of model changes is reached or in advance if a
knock-out-criteria: stopping criterion is fulfilled.
' max. iterations specifies the maximum number of iterations before stopping.
(Default value: 10) PLEASE NOTE: The restriction to small model changes can be useful to get a
' max. time is the maximum CPU-time in sec for the tomography. (Default better final model, but the number of iterations increases with decreasing model
value: 1000) changes.
Physical criteria:
' threshold is a normalized threshold stopping criterion. If the ratio of the actual max.def.change(%): allows to enter the default maximum change in percent of
and of the preceding decrease of the travel time residual is smaller than this the odel values from the start model. The default value is 50 %. If you expect
value, the iteration process will be stopped. (Default value: 0.001) igher variations of the model you should set a greater value, e.g. 100 or 200 %.
' statistical criterium: Setting this option activates a stopping criterium which is The parameter should be set in such a way that the resulting parameters are
related to the variance of the travel times given by the parameter "def. within realistic bounds (e.g. epsilon should not be greater than 80 or smaller than
Data-variance". The individual residual for each ray is calculated as the 1).
square of the difference of the real and the calculated traveltime divided by
the datavariance. If the difference of the real and the calculated traveltime of def. data-variance: The default variance of the traveltime data is entered in the
each ray fits the standard deviation, i.e. the square of the difference fits the given timedimension. The default value is 0.01. Increase this value if the data
data variance, the residual of each ray is simply 1 and the sum of all quality (e.g. noise) is bad. Increasing this parameter results in a smaller residual
residuals is simply the number of rays. The errors of the real traveltimes are value for the tomographic result and the stopping statistical criterium will be
assumed to be Gaussian distributed. For a model that satisfies the data, fulfilled faster. A possible value is the timeincrement of the original data.
theory demands a range for the sum of all residuals between number of rays
- Sqrt(2*number of rays) and number of rays + Sqrt(2*number of rays). This max. beam width: enter the max. size of the beam range in gridpoints.
is the statistical criterium. These values are listed within the inf-file under
"Desired Statistical Range of Data Residuals" (minimum und maximum). start curved ray: enter the first iteration number when the curved ray algorithm
Setting this option activates a stopping criterion which is related to the shall be used instead of the straight rays - precondition: activated option curved
standard deviation of the travel time residuals. rays. Set this value to 1 for the tomographic inversion of refraction data.
' If the SIRT-algorithm does not converge, the option convergence search
controls the maximum number of model changes before stopping the average x:enter the x-range in gridpoints over which an averaging shall be done
tomography (see below). (Default value: 5). after each iteration step.

The SIRT-algorithm calculates the best model changes by theory at every average z: enter the z-range in gridpoints over which an averaging shall be done
iteration step. In practice it may be advantageous to scale this model changes. Im after each iteration step.
most cases a decrease of the model changes leads to a steadier approach to the
final model by the cost of more iteration steps needed. min.velocity: Setting a value > 0 restricts the min. value for the inverted velocities
to that value.
If the SIRT-algorithm converges the model changes are mutiplicated with the
option modelchange A. A value of modelchange A smaller than 1 decreases the max.velocity: Setting a value > 0 restricts the max. value for the inverted
model changes, a value greater than 1 increases the model changes. The value velocities to that value.
of the option modelchange A has to be positive.
Check no ray area: With this option activated a model area, which is not covered
The SIRT-algorithm does not always converge, i. e. it is not able to find a better by rays, is separately considered. The model changes in those ranges are
fitting model with every new iteration step. If no convergence occurs after a calculated from the given changes of the neighbouring cells.
certain iteration step, this iteration step is rejected and the preceding step is
repeated using model changes mutiplicated with the option modelchange B. A beam: with this option activated the modelchanges based on the traveltimes
value of modelchange B smaller than 1 decreases the model changes, a value residuals are not restricted to the single rays but to a range around the ray. The
greater than 1 increases the model changes. In most cases it is appropriate to size of the range is determined from the actual traveltime and the standard
choose a value smaller than 1 to decrease the model changes. The value of the deviation of the traveltimes (see also def. data-variance).
option modelchange B has to be positive. If the iteration does not converge with
this new start model, the procedure is repeated, i.e. the iteration step is rejected
Tomography 347 Tomography 348
weighted beam: the option is only enabled if beam is activated. With this option example (5 travel times):
activated a weighting factor within the beam range based on a normal distribution 800.00 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 2.00 5.00
is used for building up the mean value of the modelchanges within the beam 801.60 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 6.00 5.00
range. 803.20 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 10.00 5.00
806.20 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 14.00 5.00
curved ray: if activated the curved ray algorithm is used for calculating the 811.00 1 0.00 2.00 1.00 100.00 18.00 5.00
traveltimes instead of the straight ray algorithm. The option start curved ray
defined the first iteration number for the application of the curved ray algorithm. The geometry (transmitter_X ...) are in meter, the travel times are in msec
For a tomographic inversion of refraction data you must activate this option. (seismic), nsec (electromagnetic) respectively. The code has no significance at
Note: The 3D-tomography only works with straight rays. present and should be set to 1.

force 1. Iter.: if acivated the model after the first iteration is always taken as the With final model you may enter the filename for the final model. The final model
start model for the next iteration even if the data variance has been increased. is automatically converted in REFLEX format and stored in the directory
Activate this option if you want to force the tomographic alogrithm to change the ROHDATA of the current project directory with the extension DAT. The final
start model in any case. model contains velocities in m/sec for the seismic wave propagation and the
values of , in the case of the electromagnetic wave propagation.
In addition, an ASCII file with the extension CON is generated, which contains the
The option load data allows the determination of the input travel time data set. sums of the ray lengths in each grid cell giving an idea of the confidence of the
These data have a special format and should be stored in the directory ASCII of calculated grid velocities.
the current project directory with the extension TOM.The distancedimension is At last, an ASCII info file with the extension INF is generated.
always METER, the timedimension is either ms or ns (wavetype is set to
electromagnetic wave propagation). The travel time data may be built up in the The option 3D-tomography within the 3D-tomography box activates the 3D-
module 2D-dataanalysis using the Pick MenuItem (see chapter 1.12.2). The tomography. The modelsize in y-direction must be entered within ymin and ymax.
geometry is taken from the corresponding trace headers.It is possible to choose If the 3D-tomography is activated the data must have the 3D-dataformat specified
several files. If the number of chosen files is greater than 1 the program above under the option load data. The data-format of the final model is the
automatically creates a new ASCII-file named DUMMY.TOM in which all the data REFLEX 3D-dataformat. The several X-Z cuts for each y-point are stored behind
of the chosen files are stored. each other within one file. It is possible to use the 3D-datainterpretation
The option use 2D-data controls for the 2D-tomography (option 3D-tomography possibilities to look for the different 2D-cuts.
deactivated) whether the 2D-traveltime data format or the 3D-data format is used.
With deactivated option the radiobox sec.coord. (see chap. 4) controls which DoRaster: The option Raster allows the rastering of the model parameters based
second coordinate (y or z) is used. The first coordinate is always x. The third on the actual space increment. In any case the rastering should be done before
coordinate is neglected. starting the Tomography. The 2D-arrays of the individual model parameters are
stored on different files with the following filenames: model file name + special
For the 2D-tomography with activated option use 2D-data one line contains all extension. The different extensions are:
informations for one travel time: electromagnetic wave propagation: , - FDP;
travel time, code, transmitter_X, transmitter_Z, receiver_X, receiver_Z seismic wave propagation: Vp - FDP;
F8.2 I8 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 Storing the arrays is done in an ASCII-format using the following block notation
example (5 travel times): (all z-values for one x-point):
800.00 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 2.00 FDP-files: 10F8:2
801.60 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 6.00 At the end of each block the line must be ended.
803.20 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 10.00 example - 15 values in z-direction, 2 blocks = 2 successive x-values:
806.20 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 14.00
811.00 1 0.00 2.00 100.00 18.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00
12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
For the 3D-tomography or the 2D-tomography with deactivated option use 2D- 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00
data again one line contains all informations for one travel time: 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00

traveltime,code,transmitter_X,transmitter_Y,transmitter_Z, receiver_X, receiver_Y, start tomography starts the tomography. After activating this option the chosen
receiver_Z model is rastered based on the given parameters and then the tomography is
F8.2 I8 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 F8.2 started. During the computation the ProcessingStatus is shown in a window. The
Tomography 349 Raytracing/wavefront inversion 350
resulting 2D-velocity-file of that iteration step preceding the actual is displayed in
another window, too.
4.7 raytracing/wavefront inversion
After the algorithm is stopped by one of the stopping criteria the final 2D-velocity-
file is displayed in this window and the actual stopping criterion together with the If the RayGroupBox is activated (e.g., use the speed button RAY in the first lower
number of iterations is shown. Please click on the close button to finally stop the panel), the parameters necessary for the raytracing and the traveltime inversion
memo window. can be entered. The rastering of the model based on the actual parameters and
With the option show result activated the final model is displayed wihin the start the raytracing/traveltime inversion must be started from this box, too.
model image.
With the option confidencefile activated a Reflex formatted confidence file is Within this group box you have the possibility of calculating synthetic
generated which may be displayed for example within the 2D-dataanalysis - the traveltimes using two different raytracing methods (see raytracing 2D, chap.
filename is queried after having finished the tomography. The confidence is a 4.7.1) and to invert picked forward and reciprocal traveltimes using a wavefront
measure for the number of rays within one cell. With the beam option activated inversion technique (see wavefront-inversion 2D, chap. 4.7.2). Both the method
the beamrange around the ray is taken into account in addition. to calculate traveltimes and the wavefront inversion technique are only suitable
An information file with the extension inf will be automatically created. It has been for the interpretation of first arrivals, e.g. refraction traveltimes and they are
described at the top of this chapter. restricted to 2D. The wanted method is chosen within the type option.

check rays: After having chosen this option an ASCII-file is generated for all the DoRaster: The option Raster allows the rastering of the model parameters based
rays containing the following values in each line: on the actual space increment. For more detailed information see FD-model
time SourceX SourceZ RecX RecZ distance mean_velocity simulation, chap. 4.5).
The file gets the name CHECKRAY.REP and is stored under the path ASCII.
start starts the rastering and then the raytracing or the wavefront-inversion.
show rays: The option allows the display of the rays based on the actually After having finished the raytracing the calculated traveltimes are shown in the
loaded ASCII-TOMO traveltime data into the start model. Every n.ray will be lower window. The upper window shows the model together with the optional
displayed. The rays are displayed as straight lines from the source to the rays.
receiver. Therefore the option is not suitable if curved rays shall be interpreted, After having finished the wavefront-inversion the actual model is updated.
e.g. for the refraction tomography.
If the option colored within the ShowRays Box is activated the rays are plotted
with different colors. The color-code corresponds to the mean velocity of the ray 4.7.1. raytracing 2D
and is based on the actual loaded color palette (see plotoptions chap. 1.7.2). The
following values must be input: min. and max. velocity for the color code The calculation of the synthetic traveltimes is restricted to the first arrivals for
(velocities ranging outside this interval are plotted in the first or last corresponding an arbitrary 2-dimensional medium. No reflections and secondary arrivals can be
color). Default: the values are automatically determined from the loaded calculated. This can be done using the FD-simulation (chap. 4.5). The wanted
traveltime data. One goal of the color code is to realize possible errors more method is chosen within the type option. Two different methods are available.
easily.
With the network raytracing the raypath with the shortest traveltime from one
point to the other is determined.
As a prerequisite for the calculations the model has to be gridded with the
appropriate spatial increment DeltaX. The next step is to develop a so-called
Forward-Star. The Forward-Star of a node i is the set of nodes which are
connected directly with the node i.
The calculation of the shortest raypath is done with the Dijkstra algorithm. At the
begining of the computation the traveltime for the source-node, which is the
location of the point-source, is given. In order to determine the traveltime to the
other nodes, the Dijkstra algorithm is applied, which won't be described in more
detail, in here. The interested reader may refer to the corresponding specialized
geophysical literature. For optimizing the computation time various changes
(according to Klimeš & M.Kvasni ka) are implemented. The accuracy of the
calculations depends on the order of the spatial increment, with which the model
has been gridded and on the size of the Forward-Stars. The amount of grid-
points is restricted to 150000 points.
Raytracing 2D 351 Raytracing 2D 352
The option calculate controls if one single line or several lines are calculated. For 4.7.1.1 raytracing shot/receivers
detailed information please refer to raytracing shot/receivers, chap. 4.7.1.1.
The calculate option allows to set the wanted type of calculation:
With FD-vidale a method based on a finite difference approximation of the
eikonal equation for calculating synthetic traveltimes is used. It takes into the single line: The first arrivals for a single line are calculated and stored in
account the existence of different propagation waves like tansmitted, diffracted or REFLEXW pick format using the outputfile name under the path LINEDATA
head waves. Therefore no practical limatation concerning the complexity of the under the current projectdirectory. You have to specify the coordinates of the
medium is given. Again the model has to be gridded with an appropriate spatial source (sourcex, sourcez) and of the receiver line (recxstart, recxend, reczstart,
increment DeltaX. In analogy to the network raytracing only first arrivals can be reczend). The given of output-scale controls, together with DeltaX, the sampling
calculated. Therefore the method is only suitable to simulate picked refraction in x- and z-direction of the output.
traveltimes. Two different FD-algorithms are availabe. With the option Podvin
activated a more accurate but also more CPU-time consuming method is used. several single lines: This option allows to compute a sequence of different
Starting from the source point traveltimes are calculated in a quadratic region. If single lines based on the actual model.The given of output-scale controls,
headwaves are detected the propagation direction must be redirected in order to together with DeltaX, the sampling in x- and z-direction of the output.
find the minimum traveltimes. The option Iteration nr. controls the number of Up to 999 different single shots may be simulated in one step.
redirections of the wavefront propagation in order to take account possible An ASCII file FDSHOTS.* (FDSHOTS.1, e.g.) under the path MODEL must exist
additional head waves. Increasing this number also significantly increases the which contains in each line for a single modelling the shot, receiver positions,
CPU-time. The option calculate rays controls if the rays are calculated in respectively, and the name of the file, in which the traveltimes shall be stored:
addition to the traveltimes or not. The option exact ray controls how the rays are
calculated. With exact ray activated always the steepest descent of the local best sourcexpos sourcezpos recxstart recxend reczstart reczend
fitting plane to the neighbouring traveltimes is calculated. With exact ray traveltimeoutputname
deactivated the rays are always calculated from the greatest decrease in
traveltime of the neighbouring gridpoints. It depends on the model which method The number of lines in the file controls the number of different calculations.
gives the better results. example:
The option calculate controls if one single line or several lines are calculated. For 0.0 0.0 0.0 45.0 0.0 0.0 test10
detailed information please refer to refer to raytracing shot/receivers, chap. 10.0 0.0 0.0 45.0 0.0 0.0 test20
4.7.1.1. 20.0 0.0 0.0 45.0 0.0 0.0 test30
30.0 0.0 0.0 45.0 0.0 0.0 test40
The given of output-scale controls, together with DeltaX, the sampling in x- and 40.0 0.0 10.0 45.0 0.0 0.0 test50
z-direction of the output.
Five simulations with different source and receiver positions will be generated.
The option calculate rays controls if the rays are calculated in addition to the The resulting five single lines will be stored with different names in REFLEXW
traveltimes or not. pick format in the directory LINEDATA of the current project directory (test10.pck,
test20.pck, test30.pck, test40.pck, test5.pck, respectively).
The option raster controls if the actual model is rastered with the given deltaX or
if an already existing raster file will be used. With the option raster deactivated Data traveltimes: This option allows to calculate synthetic traveltimes at those
you are asked for the raster file (extension fdp). In this case the choosen raster distance postions where data traveltimes are displayed in the lower window panel
file must have the same sitze as the raster file which would be generated from (option load datatraveltimes, chap. 4.1). The geometries of the shots to be
the actual model with the given deltaX. Deactivating the option raster might be calculated are automatically taken from the shot- and receiver geometries of the
useful for example in order to perform a raytracing for a tomographic inversion actually loaded data traveltimes (see also option load datatraveltimes, chap. 4.1).
model (see also chap. 0.10.4.3). The z-positions of the shots and the receivers are set to the min. model z-
coordinate. With the option topography activated the z-positions are automatically
With the option syn.distancies activated the stored distancies from the loaded shifted to the topography (see below). The given of output-scale controls,
data traveltimes are taken over for the calculated traveltimes. This might be together with DeltaX, the sampling in x- and z-direction of the output.
useful if you want to load the calcualted traveltimes into the original seismic data Up to 999 different single shots may be simulated in one step.
within the 2D-dataanalysis module.
After starting the computation (Start button) the ASCII file FDSHOTS.* has to be
chosen whereupon the included shot geometry is displayed.
wavefront-inversion 2D 353 wavefront-inversion 2D 354
The source and receiver z-positions may also be located on any interface. On reinterpolated based on the given DeltaX. The CPU-time drastically increases
the right hand side of the “source z” option you may define if this value shall be with decreasing DeltaX. Therefore the best compromise between needed
taken or if the source shall be located on the 1. layer (topogr.) or on the 2.-5. resolution and CPU-time must be found. A window informs you about the status
layer. Equally the option next to the “rec z-start” and “z-end” options allows you to of the calculation.
define the receiver line according to the entered values or to the chosen interface
(1.layer(topogr.) or on the 2.-5. layer). Depending on the setting of the option The parameter nr. of diff. velocities controls the number of different refractor
topography (see also model generation - topography, chap. 4.4.6) “value” (not velocities to be determined. After having finished the wavefront inversion the new
activated topography) or “topogr.” is highlighted by default both for the source and window “velocity determination using linear regression” opens showing the
the receiver line. resulting forward and reverse traveltimes for the determination of the refractor
velocities. These traveltime branches are automaticall subdivided into a number
of different linear regression curves dependent from the chosen number of
4.7.1.2 3D raytracing different velocities. The resulting velocities are shown in the middle of each
regression curve. You may change the start and end position of each regression
The option 3D-ray allows a 3-dimensional raytracing based on the network curve by simply clicking on it and drawing it with pressed left mouse button. The
raytracing. forward and reverse brances are connected to each other. Therefore for example
The parameters ymin and ymax defines the model range in y-direction. The any change on a forward regression curve also acts an the equivalent reverse
rasterincrement DeltaX also holds true for the y-direction. regression curve.
The parametera source y and receiv. y define the source and receiver positions Activating the option close terminates the velocity determination window and the
in y-direction. Restriction: the receivers may only be located along one constant new new layer boundary is plotted. The refractor velocities are determined from
y-position. the mean of the two velocities for the forward and reverse branches.
The 3D-model is built up from different 2D-cuts lying within the xz-plane. The
parameter ycoord defines the location of each cut in the y-direction. The option The inverted interface should be extrapolated either to the vertical model borders
load allows you to define the wanted 2D-model cuts. (use option hor.extrap.) or to the nearest layer or model border (use option
extrapolate).

4.7.2 wavefront-inversion 2D
Activating wavefront-inversion allows to migrate the picked forward and reverse
traveltimes into depth using a FD-approximation of the eikonal equation
analogous to the forward raytracing FD-vidale method. Again the model has to be
gridded with an appropriate spatial increment DeltaX. This value should be
chosen in such a way that no siginificant inhomogeneity of the overburden will be
lost. The computertime for the inversion increases by a factor of 4 if you decrease
the increment by a factor of 2.The complete forward and reverse wavefronts are
continued downward based on the given overburden model. The new refractor is
constructed at those points where the sum of the downward traveltimes is equal
to the reciprocal traveltime. The refractor velocity is determined from the mean of
the slopes of the forward and reverse wavefronts at the new calculated refractor
points.
Precondition for the application of the wavefront-inversion is the existence of both
a complete forward and reverse traveltimecurve (see also traveltime analysis and
traveltimes combine, chap. 5.3). Only these traveltimes must be used which have
been stored within the combine traveltime panel.
The overburden must be existent. It may contain any 2-dimensional structure.
After having entered the parameters (deltaX and outputscale) the wanted
traveltime datafile must be chosen. If the wavefrontinversion module is called
from the traveltime analysis menu the actual combined traveltimecurves are used
and no datafile must be chosen. The traveltimecurves are automatically
Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 355 Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 356
The speedbutton V or velocity adaptation under analyse: allows to determine a
5. Refraction traveltime analysis 2D velocity by creating a straight line with two mouse clicks. With this button
activated the program waits for the input of two datapoints for generating a
Within this menu it is possible to analyse and interpret picked first arrivals
straight line of distinct velocity. Pressing the left mouse button determines the first
(refraction seismics). The distancedimension is always METER or FOOT(see
datapoint and by moving the mouse with pressed button the line with the actual
global settings menu, chap. 1.2.1), the timedimension is either ms or :s.
velocity is shown. Leaving the mouse button holds the actual line.
Precondition is that all chosen data are located along one line within one
acquisition plane. You may put together the traveltimes from several shots
The option load second traveltimes under file allows to load secondary
(traveltimes put together, chap. 5.1) and assign the traveltimes to special layers
traveltimes, which are plotted as comparative traveltimes in addition to the actual
(option assign, see also traveltimes assign, chap. 5.2). Those traveltimes
ones. You may choose different pick files from the file list. These traveltimes or
stemming from several shots and belonging to one layer may be combined
secondary picks are displayed in red rectangles. The option is convenient to
together to one forward and reverse traveltime curve (option combine, see also
control traveltimes of neighbouring shot points or to compare real traveltimes with
traveltimes combine, cahp. 5.3). These combined traveltimes are the basis for a
calculated ones (see option calculate traveltime differences under analyse). The
subsequent wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2) which allows to invert both the
option second traveltimes under view controls if the secondary traveltimes are
structure of the layer and the smoothed refractor velocity (option wavefront-
visible or not.
inversion).
The option export to ASCII allows to save the actually loaded traveltimes into an
The following options are always valid:
ASCII-format. The format corresponds to the ASCII-3D-tomography format within
the Pick save MenuItem (chap. 1.12.2.1). Each line contains the following values:
traveltime(8:2), code(8:0), x-tracehadercoordinate of the transmitter,
enter the project directory y-traceheadercoordinate of the transmitter(8:2), z-traceheadercoordinate of the
transmitter(8:2), x-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(8:2),
y-traceheadercoordinate of the receiver(8:2), z-traceheadercoordinate of the
copy actual traveltime picture to the clipboard receiver(8:2). The file has the extension TOM and will be stored under the path
ASCII under the actual projectpath. The format corresponds to that format
resets the x- and y-scale values (zoomvalues) to 1 and replots all actual needed by the 3D-tomographic traveltime-inversion.
traveltimes
The option calculate traveltime differences under analyse allows to calculate
enable manual zoom - With the option ZOOM an arbitrary area of the traveltime differences between the actual and the secondary traveltimes. As the
data set can be selected and plotted in full screen size positions of the actual and the secondary traveltimes may vary because of the
Print traveltimes fixed raster increment of the raytracing you may enter a position bin which is
used for determining the quasi-identical positions. The total absolute
The traveltime curves are always marked with shot numbers, beginning with 1, in timedifference, the total timedifference and the number of identical positions are
ascending order corresponding to ascending shot coordinates. displayed. The total absolute timedifference defines the sum of the absolute
timedifferences independently form the sign (pos. or neg. difference). This value
show traveltimepoints under view: allows to display or to hide the traveltime gives you an estimate of the overall adaptation. The total timedifference defines
points. the sum of the timedifferences taking into account the sign of the differences. The
number of identical positions is shown together with the total number of actual
With the option show traveltimelines under view activated the traveltimes picks in order to have an estimate over the significance of the analysis.
belonging to one shot and to one layer (activated option assign or combine) are
joined by a straight line. The option calculate reverse traveltimes under analyse allows to control the
reverse traveltimes. The reverse traveltime and the relative traveltime error
With the option shot number under view activated the shot number corresponding should be checked in any case. Activating the option a new window named
to the traveltime pick nearest to the actual mouse position is shown within the “show reciprocal times” appears which allows the following inputs:
coordinate window in addition. output: you may choose a file output or an output to the screen.
With the option file chosen an ASCII-file named reciprocal.times under the actual
The option plot options under plot allows you to enter some plot options like show project directory is created. One file block (two lines) contains a pair of reverse
grid, etc. traveltimes (shot_x, shot_y, receiver_x, receiver_y, traveltime).
Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 357 Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 358
With the option screen chosen the reverse traveltimes are shown on the screen.
The option load traveltimes under file or the speedbutton allows to load the
Each pair of reverse traveltimes is shown in one color (the layershow colors are
traveltimes from different pick files. Already existing traveltimes will be lost. Use
used.). In addition to the traveltime the corresponding shot number is shown.
this option if you want to load traveltimes which have already been put together in
traveltimes choice: you may choose if all traveltimes (option all), only
a previous step. If only one file is loaded the filename for saving the traveltimes is
traveltimes for a definable shotnumber (option one shot) or only picks for a
automatically set to this datafilename. It is possible to load REFLEX formatted
definable layernumber (option one layer) are taken into account.
PCK files as well as
With the option one shot chosen you have to enter the wanted shot no. The
2D-colums ASCII with each line containing
minimal shot number is 1. Shot numbers are in ascending order according to
distance traveltime
ascending shot coordinates. The relative traveltime error is calculated from the
ASCII-3D-tomography with each line containing (see also chap. 1.12.2.1)
traveltimes of the selected shot. The relative traveltime error and the reverse
traveltime code x-transmitter y-transm. z-transm. x-receiver y-receiver z-receiver
traveltime of this shot are displayed.
ASCII-2D-tomography with each line containg (see also chap. 1.12.2.1)
With the option one layer chosen you have to enter the wanted layer no. An
traveltime code x-transmitter y-transmitter x-receiver y-receiver
assignment of traveltimes to layers prior to this option is required. The relative
In addition you may load ASCII-matrix data (option Shot-Rec.Matrix, m shots and
traveltime error is calculated from all traveltimes assigned to the desired layer.
n receivers) which has the following format:
The relative traveltime error and the reverse traveltimes of this layer are
1. line contains the x-positions of all m shots
displayed.
2. line contains the z-positions of all m shots
As a summary the mean reciprocal time error is displayed.
3.-n.lines: 1.column: x-receiver position
2. column: z-receiver position
The option Time Term interpretation under Analyse allows the reconstruction of
3.-m. Column: picked traveltimes
a 3D-refractor from xy-traveltimedata (see chap. 5.4).
example:
shot position -100.00 -50.00 3.75 41.25 78.75 132.50 182.50
You have the possibility to show the corresponding seismic shot section by GP pos. Elev. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
simply double click on any traveltime pick if the option seismic line is activated. 0.0 0.00 110.00 59.00 10.00 57.00 78.00 140.00 175.00
The program automatically searches the default datapath (raw or proc, if proc is 7.5 0.00 115.00 62.00 10.50 50.00 73.00 137.50 170.00
chosen you also have the possibility to set any filefilter in addition) and shows the 15.0 0.00 120.00 65.00 20.00 46.00 69.00 132.50 168.00
shot section with the same shot coordinates as the chosen traveltime pick within 22.5 0.00 124.00 71.00 28.00 42.50 62.50 130.00 165.00
30.0 0.00 128.00 78.00 39.50 25.00 60.00 130.00 165.00
a separate window. If no section could be found you may choose any shot 37.5 0.00 130.00 94.00 47.00 11.00 50.00 122.50 162.50
section from the filelist. The picks are also automatically plotted if the picks have 45.0 0.00 135.00 105.00 56.00 10.50 45.00 120.00 160.00
been stored under the same filename like the seismic shotfile. 52.5 0.00 138.00 116.00 60.00 22.00 37.50 115.00 158.00
60.0 0.00 141.00 119.00 62.50 30.00 31.50 109.00 154.00
67.5 0.00 143.00 121.00 68.00 38.00 24.00 102.50 147.00
75.0 0.00 147.00 126.00 72.00 45.00 15.00 95.00 141.00
82.5 0.00 150.00 130.00 76.00 50.00 9.50 85.00 135.00
5.1 traveltimes put together
The option add traveltimes under file or the speedbutton add allows to add
The first step for the refraction traveltime interpretation after having picked the traveltimes to the existing ones.
first arrivals within the menu 2D-DataAnalysis (see also Pick MenuItem, chap.
1.12.2) is to put together the traveltimes from the several shots. Precondition is
that the shots and the receivers are located along one line within one acquisition The option reset traveltimes under file or the speedbutton removes all
plane. The chosen traveltimes are automatically sorted after shot and receiver existing traveltimes.
positions in ascending order. Forward and reverse traveltimes are automatically
separated. The taveltimes are plotted over the distance. The distance is always The option save traveltimes under file or the speedbutton allows to save the
determined from the xy-coordinates of the receiver-positions. The start distance existing traveltimes under the datafilename specified within the option filename
is determined from the minimum x- or y-coordinate of the line. The min. x-value is (saved with the extension PCK under the path LINEDATA under the actual
chosen if the pronounced line direction is the x-direction, the min. y-value is project directory).
chosen if the pronounced line direction is the y-direction.
With the option colored activated the layershow-colors are used for The option change under analyse or the speedbutton change allows to change
discriminating the individual shots. individual traveltimes. The options move and remove determine the action.
With the option remove activated individual traveltimes may be deleted using the
left mouse button.
Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 359 Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 360
With the option move activated a block of traveltimes may be moved in time. After having put together the traveltimes from the several shots you may assign
Pressing the left mouse button determines the first datapoint. Pressing the left the traveltimes to layers. The assignment of traveltimes to layers and the
mouse button again determines the second datapoint and by moving the mouse subsequent combination to one forward and reverse traveltime curve (traveltimes
with pressed button all traveltimes lying inbetween these traveltimes are moved. combine, chap. 5.3) is required for the wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2).
To beconsidered: the traveltimes are sorted after shotnumbers. Therefore if you Forward traveltime pick means that the profiledistance of the geophone location
are choosing two traveltimes stemming from different shots all traveltimes is greater than the profiledistance of the shot location. Reverse traveltime pick
stemming from the shots lying inbetween these shotnumber will be moved. means that the profiledistance of the geophone location is smaller than the
profiledistance of the shot location.
There are some other possibilities of editing the traveltimes under edit:
The actual layer number is entered within the layer nr. text field. If traveltimes are
Insert shot Zerotraveltime: If a shot point does not coincide with a geophone already assigned to layers all traveltimes corresponding to a layer are shown in
position there is no measured traveltime at that shot point. This option inserts a the same color.
traveltime with timevalue 0 at every shot point.
It is possible to assign a special traveltime pick to the actual layer (activated
CMP sort: This option allows to resort the traveltimes after Common Mid Points. option set) or to remove the assignment (activated option remove). Already
The user is asked for a value for the CMP averaging (CMP-bin). This value existing assignments are replaced by the new ones. Therefore it is not necessary
should be of the order of the average shot point increment. CMP sorted to remove a wrong existing assignment first.
traveltimes are well suited for 1D modeling. It is not only possible to assign one single pick but a total set of picks for one
traveltime branch. For that purpose move along the traveltime branch with
generate single shot(CMP)-traveltimes: By choice of this option traveltimes pressed mouse button and leave the button when the last wanted pick is reached.
aloready put together from different shots or CMP's may be broken up in
individual files. As a few files will be created, a value to scale the automatic The option interpolate allows to automatically assign all traveltime picks between
naming of the outputfiles is asked for. The shot (CMP) coordinate will be the last two manually assigned single picks. This enables you a fast assignment
multiplied with this value. The result should be in the range 0 to 999. This number of many traveltime picks of one shot. To be considered: The two picks must
and the actual filename truncated to a maximum of 4 letters define the names of belong to one shot and should only belong to the forward or reverse traveltime
the output files in the directory LINEDATA. branch.

The option all unassigned assigns all free picks to the actual layer number.
apply xz-topography: this option allows to automatically redefine the geometries
of the shots and the receivers based on topographic xz-values. It is assumed that The options Forward and Reverse enable to or disable the assignment
the x-values of the actual traveltimes do not represent the correct x-coordinates possibility to the forward and/or reverse traveltime branch. Example: With
but are determined directly on the topographic interface. The program activated option Forward and deactivated option Reverse only forward traveltimes
automatically determines the positions of all shots and receivers on the given picks may be assigned.
topography and calculates the x- and z-projections of these positions. With the option keep last shot activated only the picks belonging to the shot of
The topographic xz-values are read from an ASCII-file whereby each line of the the last pick are considered. Activate this option for example before defining the
ASCII-file contains one pair of xz-values.The x-coordinate within the ASCII-file seond pick for a subsequent interpolation. Then it is ensured that the interpolation
represents the true x-coordinate within the xz-coordinate system. is only done for picks belonging to one single shot.
The following assumptions must hold true: With the option keep assigned picks activated only the non assigned picks are
1. The topography file must contain the values for x=0 (fixed point) because this taken into account.
value serves at the starting point for determing the corrections. All corrections are
relative to the value at x=0.
2. The profiledirection is pure x, this means that the y-coordinates of all shots and
receivers are equal.
5.3 traveltimes combine
3. The original x-values are taken directly on the topographic interface.
The application of this option if useful if you want to introduce a topography for In order to use the wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2) for the inversion of the
the wavefront-inversion or for the raytracing (chap. 4.7). traveltimepicks assigned to one special layer the individual traveltimepicks must
be combined to one complete forward and one complete reverse traveltime
branch.

First you must define the forward shot number and the reverse shot number.
5.2 traveltimes assign The forward and reverse traveltimepicks of these two shot number are the basis
Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 361 Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 362

for the building of the two complete traveltime branches. Therefore forward or and move the mouse with pressed button. The traveltimes belonging to the
reverse traveltime picks respectively must have been assigned to the actual layer chosen forward and reverse shot number cannot be moved.
for both shot numbers before combining the traveltimes. After having moved the traveltimes to the wanted positions it is still necessary to
generate a complete forward and reverse traveltimecurve. This means hat the
maximum forward and reverse traveltimes must be determined if not existing and
The combined traveltimes can be saved on disk using the speedbutton within
double datapoints must be smoothed. Both is done using the option generate.
the combine panel. By default the filename is equal layer+actual layer number.
The option medianfit controls if the smoothing is done using the mean
Activating the speedbutton within the combine panel allows you to load a (deactivated) or the median (activated). This means that data redundancy is
previously saved traveltime curve. considered in the definition of the combined traveltimes.

There are two possibilities to combine the traveltime picks. The assigned forward To be considered: In both cases (automatic and manual combine using the
and reverse traveltimes may be combined automatically (option auto combine) or option generate) the forward and reverse traveltime branches are automatically
manually (option manual combine). extrapolated both to the forward and reverse distance if no traveltime picks exist
at those positions.
With the option auto combine activated the option generate allows to
automatically create the two traveltime brances. The forward and reverse Activating the option wavefront-inversion opens the menu modelling for a
traveltimepicks of the forward shot and the reverse shot are the basis for the subsequent wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2). First you must load the wanted
building of the two complete traveltime branches. These traveltimes are not overburden model. Then you have to enter the wanted space increment DeltaX
changed. and then you can start the wavefront-inversion.
Forward traveltimes belonging to shot numbers smaller than the forward shot Pecularity for layernumber 1: Layernumber 1 means that the assigned
number are combined at the beginning of the forward shot curve. Forward traveltimes are connected to the uppermost layer. Therefore these
traveltimes belonging to shot numbers greater than the forward shot number are traveltimepoints only contain informations about the velocities of the uppermost
combined at the end of the forward shot curve. The opposite holds true for the layer and no information about the depths. Activating the option wavefront-
reverse traveltimes. inversion applies a linear regression on all forward and reverse traveltimes
If there are several traveltimes for one coordinate the automatic algorithm allways between the chosen forward and reverse shot numbers. Then a completely new
uses the traveltime of the smallest shot number for the forward traveltimes and model is created with an uppermost layer containing the calculated velocities at
the traveltime of the highest shot number for the reverse traveltimes. If necessary the given positions. The positions are always calculated from the mean of the
the combined traveltimes are extrapolated to the smallest and greatest individual forward or reverse pick positions stemming from one single shot.
coordinates of the profile. The combined forward (black) and reverse (fuchsia)
traveltimes are displayed after having pressed the button generate together with
the maximum of the forward and reverse traveltimes and the difference in the left
upper corner. The difference of the maximum forward and reverse traveltime 5.4 time term analysis
should be small. Otherwise the assignment of traveltimes or the traveltimes itself
might be in error and the picks should be reassigned (see traveltimes assign, The timeterm analysis (option Time Term interpretation under Analyse) allows the
chap. 5.2). In the combined traveltimes the redundancy of traveltimes is not reconstruction of a 3D-refractor from xy-traveltimedata. The timeterm analysis
considered at all. This is only considered when using the manual combine has been described by Willmore and Bancroft (1960). The essential feature of the
method. method is that each traveltime tij may be written in the form tij = ai + bj + )ij/v,
The option balance allows you to balance these two values. In any case the where ai and bj are timeterms which are characteristic of the shot- and receiver
wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2) started later uses the arithmetic mean of point respectively, )ij is the distance between shot and receiver and v is the
these two values. refractor velocity. Under special conditions it is possible to derive ai, bj and v
which give the best fit to the observed traveltimes tij. The preconditions are:
With the option manual combine activated the assigned traveltimes are - the velocity of the overburden varies only with depth within the critical refracted
manually shifted and combined. The option get all extracts all assigned ray cone under the shot or receiver
traveltimes between the entered forward shot number and reverse shot number. - the refractor velocity is assumed to be constant
The forward traveltimes are shown as black rectangles, the reverse traveltimes - slope and curvature of the refractor is small
are shown as pink rectangles. In addition the traveltimes belonging to the chosen - the model consists of one layer and a half space
forward and reverse shot number are plotted bold. With activated option show
original the original data are plotted in addition. If the actual layernumber (option layer nr.) is set to 0 all traveltime data above the
It is possible to move in time a complete group of forward or reverse traveltimes min. traveltime are taken into account. If the actual layernumber is unequal 0 only
belonging to one shot. Click on one traveltime of that group you want to move the traveltimes which have been assigned to that layer before are taken into
Refraction traveltime analysis 2D 363 User‘s Guide 364

account. After having activated the option Time Term 6. User‘s Guide
interpretation under Analyse the wanted traveltime
data are queried. The time tern analysis window In this chapter the user will find answers to distinct questions which occur by the
opens. The processing of data using ReflexW.
following
options are
available:
min. 6.1 GPR-DATA
traveltime:
specifies the
lower border for the traveltimes which are 6.1.1 Which data types can be imported?
taken into account for the timeterm
analysis (layer nr. = 0). At the moment the program supports the following formats: SEGY, SEG2, SEG2-
Within the time terms box you may RADAR, RADAN, RADAN_ANALOG, PULSEEKKO, RAMAC, EMR, BGREMR,
specify if the timeterms are calculated for BGRDHU, BGRBHRU, UTSI, IDS, TRS2000, ABEM, BISON-2, OYO8BIT,
the different receivers or shots. With the ASCII-OYO8BIT, ASCIISYNTH, ASCII-3COLUMS.
option autoanalyse 1. layer velocities activated the timeterms are always For further information please refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu).
calculated for the different shots.
convert to depths: if activated the depths are calculated in addition. For that There exist three different default data types in the Import Menu of ReflexW:
purpose the velocity of the overburden must be entered (option 1. layer velocity). const. offset, single shot and several shots.
With the option The default data type ‚const. offset‘ can be used for the import if the
autoanalyse 1. layer velocities activated the velocities for the overburden are measurement is done along a line using a fixed offset between shot and receiver
calculated from the given traveltimes. The option max. traveltime specifies the (e.g. Constant-Offset (CO) radar data).
upper border for the traveltimes which are taken into account for this calculation. If the data set is the result of a measurement with only one shot point but many
receivers in a line, the use of the default data type ‚single shot‘ data is
recommended (e.g. Common-Mid-Point (CMP) radar data).
After having activated the option start the traveltime data are sorted and In case of data, which contain any kind of multiple shot / multiple receiver data,
analyzed. The result is plotted into the 3D-cube and is saved under an ASCII-file. the default data type ‚several shots‘ should be used (e.g. one data set combined
of individual CMP data sets).
The output is an ASCII-file with the first line showing the velocity of the refractor. For further information please see below and refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu).
The following lines contain the resulting time terms and the coordinates:
timeterm x-coord. y-
coord. 6.1.2 The difference between FileHeader and
overburdenvelocity
depth Traceheader
The fileheader contains all the information about the geometry of the whole file,
literature: Willmore, P.L. e.g. it‘s start and end coordinates, distance dimension, trace increment.
and A.M. Bancroft Therefore, if one deals with equidistant data, the coordinates of any single trace
,1960. The time-term are known in relation to the other traces of one file without defining the
approach to refraction traceheader coordinates. Consequently, in most cases of radar data, no matter
seismology, whether CO data or CMP data, the fileheader coordinates are sufficient to
Geophys.J., 3, 419-43. process the data (see chapter 6.5). PLEASE NOTE: The trace coordinates must
In order to use the not be mistaken for the traceheader coordinates!
wavefront-inversion 2D The traceheader contains additional information concerning a single trace: e.g.
(chap. 4.7.2) for the shot position or receiver position in relation to the trace, which are needed in the
inversion of the case of multi shot data.
For further information please refer to chapter 1.9, especially to chapter 1.9.1 and
chapter 1.9.6)
User‘s Guide 365 User‘s Guide 366

6.1.3 How is the FileHeader set or changed? After having imported the files there are two possibilities to change the
plotoptions:
There exist different possibilities to set or change the fileheader: To change the plotoptions of one single file please use the option PlotOptions of
First of all, the fileheader of every single file is set during the import. For further the option Edit Fileheader of the File MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module.
information please refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu). For further information please refer chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit) and chapter 1.7
To change and supplement the fileheader of one single file, please use the option (Plotoptions).
Edit Fileheader in the File MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. For further To change the plotoptions of all or some, respectively, files of one project, please
information please refer chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit). use the option PlotOptions of the option Edit several FileHeaders in the File
To change and supplement the fileheaders of several files belonging to one pro- MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. For further information please refer to
ject, please use the option Edit several FileHeaders in the File MenuItem of the chapter 1.10 (ProjectFile-Headers) and chapter 1.7 (Plotoptions).
2D-Data-Analysis Module. For further information please refer to chapter 1.10
(Edit several FileHeaders).
6.1.6 First filter steps
6.1.4 How is the TraceHeader set or changed? Before starting the processing and interpretation of radar data the user of
ReflexW must ensure, that the file header coordinates, trace coordinates (NOT to
In comparison to the fileheader coordinates which must be set in any case, the be mistaken for the traceheader coordinates) and the start time of the data are
traceheader coordinates can be set if they are needed at all. correct. Otherwise any information (e.g. material velocity or target position)
If the original file format provides them, it is possible to read them during the extracted from the data is wrong!
import. In that case the button ‘read coordinates‘ has to be activated in the control
options of the Import Menu (see chapter 1.5).
To change or set the traceheader coordinates of a single file after the import 6.1.6.1 Fileheader
please use the option ShowTraceHeader in the option Edit Fileheader of the File
MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. There exist three default possibilities Normally the fileheader coordinates set during the import are sufficient to process
to actualize the traceheader coordinates: radar data, because in most cases one deals with equidistant data. Nevertheless,
- They are read from an ‚Ascii file‘ (*.DST), which contains the needed it can be necessary to enter some additional information in the fileheader: If the
information for every trace. data file is e.g. a CMP, the position of the CMP point must be entered. For further
- They are actualized by using the fileheader coordinates. information please refer to chapter 6.1.3 and chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit).
- They are calculated using the ‚fileheader‘ coordinates and the default type
‚circle‘ if the receivers are orientated along a circle with the shot at the midpoint of
the circle. 6.1.6.2 Coordinates
For further information please refer to chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit).
As already mentioned, the trace coordinates are set correctly during the import
The traceheaders of several files belonging to one project can only be set or using the fileheader coordinates, if one deals with equidistant data. But there are
actualized, respectively, simultaneously, in case of using the fileheader some peculiarities:
coordinates (option ‚Update traceheaders‘ in the option Edit several FileHeaders If the data is measured by setting markers and not by using a survey wheel, the
in the File MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. ). Otherwise, there exists data must be preprocessed in the module data-analysis by means of the function
no possibility to change or set the traceheader coordinates of several files at the markerinterpol to achieve correct trace coordinates (see chapter 1.11.6.1).
same time. For further information please refer to chapter 1.10 (Edit several For some data like e.g. non equidistant data the traceheader coordinates (Hence
FileHeaders). the trace coordinates, too!) must be actualized after the import. For further
information please refer to chapter 6.1.3, chapter 6.1.4 and chapter 1.9.6
(Traceheader Edit).
6.1.5 How are the PlotOptions set or changed?
Not only the fileheaders but also the plotoptions of every single file are set during 6.1.6.3 Shot time
the import. Therefore, it is recommended to set the desired plotoptions before the
import of the data. For further information please refer to chapter 1.5.6 In the case of radar measurements it is not possible to measure exactly the
(ImportControlPanel) and chapter 1.7 (Plotoptions). moment at which the shot was generated, because one is dealing with a high
frequency equipment. To ensure that no information is lost during the
User‘s Guide 367 User‘s Guide 368
measurement, the data are often registered by starting the registration before the If one deals with ZO- or CO-data with little offset, respectively, the energy, which
generation of a shot. was spread by any object, can be again concentrated at the place of the object
Therefore, the so-called shot time must be defined by a correction of the start by migration. This is done by e.g. summation along synthetic hyperbolas, the
time of the traces. This can be done in different manner dependent on the data: shape of which is dependent on the velocity of the background. With the correct
In the case of single CMP data or single Moveout data, respectively, the shot velocity the concentration of the energy is maximal. Therefore, if the background
time is defined by the direct air wave which intersects the time axes at the velocity is more or less homogeneous, the carrying-out of some migrations - by
position of the CMP or the shot point, respectively. Often, the direct air wave has taking different velocities as a basis - will lead to the right background velocity.
very small amplitudes in comparison to the other information in the data. In this For further information please refer to chapter 1.11.9 (Migration)
case it is helpful to display the data using the plot option AGC-Gain (see chapter
1.7.5).
In default of distinct information the shot time for CO data is often set to that time, 6.1.7.2 ZO-data / CO-data
at which the first non zero amplitude is recorded, and the distance between
transmitter and receiver is neglected. If the ZO- or CO-data with little offset, respectively, contains well defined
For fixing the shot time of ZO data there is information needed about the time the hyperbolas, e.g. originating from reflexions on pipes, synthetic hyperbolas can be
radar system needs to switch from sending state to recording state. adapted to the data using the option velocity adaptation of the Analysis MenuItem
For other data like non equidistant data, 3D data or VSP data no recipe for of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. The shape of these synthetic hyperbolas can be
setting the shot time can be given. changed by e.g. varying the medium velocity or the radius of the pipes. It is also
In all cases the start time of the data has to be corrected in a way that afterwards possible to determine a velocity by creating a straight line between two points. All
the shot time is situated at t == 0 (see chapter 1.11.3.1). PLEASE NOTE: The adapted velocities can be stored on file with the extension hyp (e.g. test.hyp).
correction of the start time does not automatically change the gain values, which When saving the actual velocity adaptation, the following parameters are stored:
were possibly set in the fileheader before! These values must be actualized after velocity, distance in profile direction, x-weight.
setting the shot time according to the resulting time shift. For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.1 (Velocity adaptation).

6.1.6.4 Peculiarities 6.1.7.3 CMP-Measurements / Moveout-Measurements

Some data like RAMAC or PULSE-EKKO formatted data must be preprocessed If no hyperbolas but reflectors are visible in radar ZO- or CO-data with little offset,
in a special way using the module data- analysis: The first filter is either the so respectively, CMP- or Moveout-measurements should be carried out to get
called subtract-mean(dewow) under the 1D-filter processing group (see chapter information about the velocity distribution in the investigated medium. Every
1.11.1.8) or the subtract DC-shift filter (see chapter 1.11.1.9) which eliminates a CMP- or Moveout data set can be processed within the module CMP-velocity-
possible time constant shift. The second filter consists of the application of a analysis to get a 1D-velocity-depth-model which can be stored.
gainfunction (e.g. option manual gain(y), energy decay, AGC or gain function This can also be done for CMP sorted data because the module CMP-velocity-
under the Gain processing group, chapter 1.11.2). The AGC (AutomaticGain analysis can also be awaked from the option CMP-Processing of the Analysis
Control) or the energy decay has not to be used as a filter function but can also MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module.
be used only for the presentation of the data (see chapter 1.7.5). For further information please refer to chapter 2 (CMP velocity analysis) and
chapter 1.12.4 (CMP-processing).

6.1.7 Getting information about the velocity of the Another way to interpret CMP data is to adapt reflection hyperbolas or straight
lines to the data using the option velocity adaptation of the Analysis MenuItem of
medium the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. Again, all adapted velocities can be stored on file
with the extension hyp (e.g. test.hyp). When saving the actual velocity adaptation,
There are various possibilities to get information about the velocity distribution in the following parameters are stored: velocity, distance in profile direction, x-
the investigated medium. Depending on the data, there are different ways to weight.
create 2D-velocity models, which can be used for further processing steps (see For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.1 (Velocity adaptation).
chapter 6.1.7.5).

6.1.7.4 Using Coredata to get velocity information

6.1.7.1 Migration
A core data file contains the information of several cores associated with a 2D-
line. This ASCII-file is either generated using real geological cores or may also
User‘s Guide 369 User‘s Guide 370
automatically be created within the CMP 2D-model menu if the option create largest model position is extrapolation to greater position values. The 1D-model
corefile is activated (see chapter 6.1.7.5 and chapter 2.3 (CMP 2D-model)). The with the smallest model position is extrapolation to smaller position values of the
core data file should be stored in the path ASCII in the actual project directory 2D-model.
and must have the extension cor (e.g. test.cor) For the format specification of a PLEAS NOTE: Within the 2D-model file only the filenames of the chosen 1D-
core data file please refer to chapter 1.4 (View Menu Item). velocity models are stored. That is why changes in any of these 1D-models at a
A core data file can be displayed as vertical bars onto a 2D-line by means of the later stage have an influence, if the 2D-model file is used for any processing step.
option Core data/1D models in the View MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis For further information please refer to chapter 2.3 (CMP 2D-model).
Module. If the core data do not contain the velocities of the individual core layers,
all velocities are preset to the actual adaptation velocity (option velocity
adaptation of the Analysis MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module). Within this 6.1.8 Picking of onsets
option velocity adaptation you may interactively adapt the core bars to layer
boundaries visible within the 2D data, if the speed button core is activated: Click The picking is done using the option Pick in the Analysis MenuItem of the 2D-
on any layer bar which you want to adapt. The fill style of this layer bar changes. Data-Analysis Module.
With the adaptation parameter v highlighted it is now possible to change the
velocity of this distinct layer by pressing the key < or >, respectively.
Again, all adapted velocities can be stored on file with the extension hyp (e.g. 6.1.8.1 Preconditions for picking
test.hyp). When saving the actual velocity adaptation, the following parameters
are stored: velocity, distance in profile direction, x-weight. If picking shall be done, the traceheader coordinates must be set to get the exact
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.1 (Velocity adaptation). location of any pick. For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2 (Pick
There are some global settings influencing e.g. the display or saving of the core MenuItem).
data files. For further information please refer to chapter 1.2.1 (Global settings).
But there are two peculiarities which should be mentioned here: With the option
save corefile in the option global settings of the Global MenuItem of the 2D-Data-
6.1.8.2 Setting of picks
Analysis Module activated the actually loaded corefile is automatically updated if
the layer velocities are changed. With the option save VLA-file in the option global
The picks are set using one of the options manual picking, continuous pick, a
settings of the Global MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module activated a
semi-automatic picking using a phase follower and a special function called
VLA-ASCII velocity DataFlex is automatically created when storing the core
difference pick.
velocity adaptations on file with the extension hyp (e.g. test.hyp). This VLA-ASCII
file may be used for the generation of a layershow. For further information about
manual pick: With the option set activated a pick can be set with the left mouse
the layershow please refer to chapter 1.12.3 (LayerShow MenuItem).
button. The same applies to the manual removal or change of an existing pick
after selecting the options remove or change, respectively.
6.1.7.5 Generating 2D-velocity models continuous pick: With this option activated you can set, remove or change picks
by moving the mouse cursor over the data set with continuously pressed left
2D-velocity models can be created either using the option velocity adaptation of mouse button.
the Analysis MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module or by means of the option
2D-model in the CMP-velocity analysis module. phase follower: The option allows the automatic assignment of picks to a selected
phase. For this you first have to select the desired phase at an arbitrary position
Using the suboption 2D in the option velocity adaptation of the Analysis Menu- of the profile with the left mouse button.
Item of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module it is possible to generate the 2-dimensional
velocity distribution based on the actual adapted or loaded, respectively, difference pick: With this option activated the traveltime difference between two
velocities. The interpolation is controlled by the parameter x-weight. successive picks is automatically determined. In addition the thickness is
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.1 (Velocity adaptation). calculated based on this traveltime difference and the entered velocity (see
PlotOptions chap. 1.7). First you must enter the reference pick and then the
The option 2D-model in the CMP-velocity analysis module allows the creation of investigation pick. The two values traveltime distance and calculated thickness
a 2-dimensional velocity model on the basis of 1D-velocity-depth-profiles. For the are plotted right to the investigation pick using the symbol font. The remove
creation of the distribution previously created 1D-velocity models are comprised button as well as the sort and control buttons are disabled. After having activated
to a 2D-model. For this the position within the profile line for the corresponding this option all picks are reset.
1D-models has to be determined previously (see option model pos.). Between
these 1D-models a linear interpolation is performed. The 1D-model with the For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2 (Pick MenuItem).
User‘s Guide 371 User‘s Guide 372
6.1.8.3 Saving of picks

The picks are saved using one of the following formats:

ReflexWin: new binary REFLEX pick format containing both the travel times and
the amplitudes.

ReflexDOS: old binary REFLEX pick format.

ASCII-columns: convert picks to an ASCII file whereby every pick uses one line.

Ascii-tomography: also convert picks to an ASCII file whereby every pick uses
one line. But the stored information differs from that stored using ASCII-columns.

For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2.1 (Pick save MenuItem).

6.1.8.4 Saving of picks to create a layershow

If the option pick shall be used together with the option layershow in the Analysis
MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module, the picks have to be stored in the
format ReflexWin. PLEASE NOTE: For using all options the layershow is
providing, all the following information must be set before storing the picks:
To add a legend to the layershow, for every specific pick file a ‚global code‘ has to
be specified. As global code every combination of characters and numbers is
allowed.
Additionally a ‚velocity‘ has to be preset which is used for the conversion of the
travel times in depths in the layershow if no other velocity information can be
used (see chapter 6.1.8.6). You have to specify a mean velocity for the TOTAL
overburden of the picked onsets (and NOT a layer velocity in between two sets of
picked onsets).
Also, a ‚layer number‘ must be specified, which serves to identify the individual
picks within the layershow. Therefore, you should process together and save on a
file only those arrivals that belong to one layer, if using the option pick together
with the option layershow.

For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2.1 (Pick save MenuItem).

6.1.8.5 Export of picks to create contour plots

To create contour plots, the picks must be exported using the format ‚ASCII-
columns‘in one of the two following manners:

1. Export of actual picks:

With the option ‚export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file‘ deactivated it is
possible to save the actual picks (no matter if just set or loaded from a pick file)
into an ASCII-file, whereby every pick uses one line. Each line contains the
following values: coordinate in profiledirection(10:3), coordinate in
profileconstant(10:3), x-traceheadercoordinate (optional,10:xx), y-
User‘s Guide 373 User‘s Guide 374
traceheadercoordinate (optional,10:xx), travel time(12:6), depth(10:4), The first possibility is to use the constant mean velocities for the total overburden
amplitude(10:xx) where xx defines the number of decimal places given within the of every pick file, which were set during the pick process.
global settings menu (chap. 1.2.1). By default the travel times and also the plane- The second possibility is to use a VLA-ASCII velocity datafile (e.g. test.vla). In
coordinates of the picks are written on a file. Additionally the travel time can be that case, the velocities for each layer may vary laterally and they are given as
converted into depths on the basis of a specified constant velocity (option depth layer velocities in contrast to the mean pick velocities. Such a VLA-ASCII velocity
activated) and the current amplitude of each pick can be saved (option datafile can either be generated using core files (see chapter 6.1.7.4) or using the
amplitudes activated). If no depths and/or amplitudes shall be extracted, these option ‚Create LayerShow velocities‘ in the LayerShow option (see below).
values are set to zero. Optionally the xy-coordinates of the receivers
(specification xy-coordinates) stored in each trace header may be written out (see The option ‚Create LayerShow velocities‘ (button ‚create velocity‘ in the option
also FileHeader Edit). This allows you for example to write out non equidistant xy- LayerShow) can be used in two different ways to generate a VLA-ASCII velocity
coordinates or the xy-coordinates, if the profile is not orientated into one direction datafile: The layer velocities are set manually, which implies no lateral change of
(x or y). The xy-coordinates are only saved on file if chosen. Optionally the the velocity in one layer, or the velocities are calculated using an amplitude
acquisition times of each trace stored within the traceheader is written out (option calibration of the picked layer boundaries.
acquisition times activated). The parameter n.pick controls the pick number to be In the latter case there exist also two possibilities to proceed: The needed
output: only every n. pick will be output. The file has the extension PCK and will reference amplitude can be set manually or calculated based on a picked onset,
be stored in the path ASCII in the actual projectpath. e.g. the reflexion from a metal plate. In the manual case, the reference amplitude
must have been corrected for all necessary effects, i.e. a TRUE amplitude must
2. Export of several pick files: be entered. If the reference amplitude is calculated based on a picked onset, their
With the option ‚export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file‘ activated you may amplitudes need not to be corrected for all necessary effects. They will be
export several existing pickfiles into 1 ASCII-file. Each line of the ASCII-file corrected automatically if one of the following correction options are actualized:
contains the following values: ‚correct gain curve‘, ‚correct transmission losses‘ and ‚correct geom. spreading‘.
traveltime(12:6), depth(10:4), amplitude(10:xx), x-shot(10:xx), y-shot(10:xx), z- These correction options influence beside the reference amplitude also the
shot(10:xx), x-receiver(10:xx), y-receiver(10:xx), z-receiver(10:xx) where xx amplitudes of the actual radar data during the calculation of the layer velocities
defines the number of decimal places given within the global settings menu using the amplitude calibration.
(chap. 1.2.1). The x-,y-,z-shot and receiver coordinates have been taken from the No matter how the layer velocities are calculated, they finally will be stored in a
traceheaders of the individual profiles when picking the onsets (see also trace VLA-ASCII velocity datafile, which can be used to create a layershow.
header Edit menu - chap. 1.9.6). Depths and amplitudes are set to zero if the PLEASE NOTE: Due to the huge number of possible effects which cannot be
corresponding options depth and amplitudes are deactivated. corrected for, the velocity determination based on the amplitudes must be very
carefully interpreted!
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2.1 (Pick save MenuItem). For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.3.3 (Create LayerShow
velocities) and chapter 1.12.3.4 (LayerShow amplitude calibration).

6.1.8.6 Picking and time-depth conversion of several layer A new layer show is created using the ‚create‘ button in the option LayerShow,
boundaries which opens the create LayerShow window. This window allows to create a file
of combined equidistant picks. The "Input-picks", which do not have to be
To get information about the depth of arrivals/layer boundaries occurring in the equidistant, have to be saved on file before under the option PICK.
radar data, the arrivals have first to be picked and then to be processed further The creation is done by defining a filename for the layershow, it‘s start and end
on with the option LayerShow in the Analysis MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis position and an increment for the equidistant picks, which will be generated. Also,
Module. up to 200 pick files can be loaded. Finally, one has to choose, if the mean pick
velocities or a VLA-ASCII velocity datafile shall be used for the creation of the
The picking has to be done as described in the preceding chapters. Afterwards layershow.
the saved pick files can be loaded and displayed in the option LayerShow. This PECULIARITIES:
option offers the possibility to combine individual pick files stored on file, to plot If the mean pick velocities are used for the time-depth conversion, the time-depth
them together with the wiggle-files and to output them in report form on printer or conversion of each layer boundary is independent from the conversion of the
file. upper boundary.
For more information please refer to chapter 1.12.3 (LayerShow MenuItem). In contrast, if a VLA-ASCII velocity datafile is used, the time-depth conversion of
each layer boundary depends on the conversion of the upper boundary.
For the time-depth conversion using the option LayerShow it is necessary to take Therefore, in that case one has to control how the time-depth conversion for a
a velocity into account. special layer is done if any upper layer is not continuously picked. This is done
using the option ‚interpolate layer‘.
User‘s Guide 375 User‘s Guide 376
If this option is activated every upper layer is assumed to be continuous even if it If the 2D-lines to be combined are already imported, the option Generate 3D-file
is not picked and either an interpolation or an extrapolation both for the layer from 2D-lines of the File MenuItem of the 3D-Datainterpretation Module is used.
points and the velocities is done. Based on these calculated values the time- There exist two types of interpolation: equidistant parallel 2D-lines without
depth conversion of the actual layer is done. interpolation and use interpolation scheme for freely orientated 2D-lines.
If the option is deactivated, the velocities of the next upper picked layer are used.
This might result in a sharp step of the depth of the actual layer at the point In the first case one must only enter the line increment and choose whether the
where any of the upper layers is broken. sorting is done using the filenames or the file coordinates (in profile constant
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.3.1 (Create LayerShow). direction with ascending order). The 3D-file is again generated without any
interpolation, because of the simple geometry.
The results of the current layershow can be stored in a report. The output is
performed either on a printer or on a file with an arbitrary name. According to the In the second case the original profiles can be freely orientated, so that an
individual settings, the report contains information about single layers like e.g. interpolation has to be done to get a 3D-file, the data points of which have fixed
thickness, velocity, amplitudes and coordinates. In addition, actually loaded core- increments in x-, y- and time-direction, respectively. The following parameters
data and marker comments can be reported. It is also possible to reduce the must be set:
information on single points e.g. to represent only material depth between two The parameters XStart, XEnd, YStart and YEnd specify the range coordinates
construction changes. within the dataacquisition plane for the computation of the 3D-data cube.
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.3.2 (Create LayerShow The next two parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement specify the
report). grid interval of the two coordinate axes spanning the plane in the given distance
dimension. The next two parameters XInterpolation and YInterpolation define the
interpolation area in the given distance dimension.
6.1.9 Generating 3D-files The parameter interpol.weight allows to specify the type of the interpolation
weight.
Depending on the original data there are several ways to generate a 3D-file in The parameter time end specifies the timerange for the 3D-data cube. The time
ReflexW format. It can either be generated directly during the import or using the always starts at 0.
option Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines of the File MenuItem of the 3D- The parameter sorting determines the sorting of the profiles entering the
Datainterpretation Module. In any case, the data points of the resulting 3D-file computation of the time slices. Four different sortings are possible: fileheader
have fixed increments in x-, y- and time-direction, respectively, and the max. size coordinates, geophone coordinates, midpoint coordinates and CMP coordinates.
of the 3D-file is limited to 10243 points. To ensure, that the resulting 3D-file does not exceed the max. size of 10243
points, the parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement can be enlarged
and/or the volume of the data to be considered during the generation of the 3D-
6.1.9.1 Generating 3D-files during the import file can be reduced using the parameters XStart, XEnd, YStart and YEnd (see
also chapter 6.1.10).
The Import ReflexW Menu can be activated using the option Import in the File For further information please refer to chapter 3.5 (Generate 3D-file from 2D-
MenuItem of the 3D-Datainterpretation Module or of the 2D-DataAnalysis Module. lines).
Using this Menu, one has to distinguish, if the original data consist of several
single equidistant parallel 2D-lines or of only one single 3D-file consisting of
parallel 2D-lines with equidistant trace increment and equal trace number for 6.1.10 Interpretation of freely orientated 2D-lines.
each 2D-line and equidistant distance between the individual 2D-lines.
In the first case, the conversion sequence must be set to Combine lines/shots The interpretation of freely orientated data is most comfortably done by
and only the line distance must be entered. generating one 3D-file using the 3D-Datainterpretation Module (see chapter
In the second case, the conversion sequence must be set to 3D-file equidistant 6.1.9).
and the parameters line distance, trace incr. and tracenr./2D-line must be As mentioned before, the max. size of the 3D-file is limited to 10243 points.
entered. Therefore, if one deals with huge data amounts, it can be necessary to enlarge
Because of the simple geometry of the original data, in both cases the 3D-file is the parameters XRasterincrement and YRasterincrement to ensure that the limit
generated without any interpolation. will not be exceeded. If the raster increments can not be enlarged further on,
For further information please refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu). because the resolution of the resulting 3D-data-cube would be too bad, one can
reduce the size of the data volume which is considered for the generation of one
3D-file. I.e., the total data volume is divided in several small data volumes on the
6.1.9.2 Generating 3D-files from already imported data basis of which several small 3D-data-cubes are generated using the parameters
XStart, XEnd, YStart and Yend.
User‘s Guide 377 User‘s Guide 378
It is recommended to generate 3D-data-cubes, because in that case, the best 6.3 seismic refraction data
performance of the 3D-Datainterpretation Module is guaranteed. Due to the
interpolation, which is carried out during the generation of a 3D-data-cube if
necessary (see chapter 6.1.9), one does no longer need to pay attention to the
orientation of the original profiles inside the complete data volume: X-Cuts, Y- 6.3.0 standard processing/interpretation procedure
Cuts and timeslices of the 3D-data-cube can be displayed.
In the following the standard processing procedure for seismic refraction data is
It is not a must to generate a 3D-file to use the 3D-Datainterpretation Module: Up described.
to 25 single 2D-lines can also be loaded and displayed using the option open
several 2D-files of the File MenuItem. PLEASE NOTE: In that case, the 1. Import the seismic data into the REFLEXW format and define the geometry of
orientation of the individual 2D-lines inside the complete data volume is not taken the source and the receivers if necessary (see chap. 1.5).
into account by the program. Therefore, the interpretation of data which are not
oriented parallel or perpendicular, respectively, to each other is not as 2. Process the seismic data (editing, filtering,... - see chap. 1.11).
comfortable as using a 3D-data-cube. But the advantage of not generating a 3D-
file is, that no interpolation is done and the data are displayed 'as they are'. 3. Pick the first arrivals (chap. 1.12.2).

For further information about the display possibilities of the 3D-Datainterpretation 4. Put the traveltimes of the different shots together (chap. 5.1).
Module please refer to chapter 3.2 (Scroll 3D-file) and chapter 3.3 (Windowing
3D-file). 5. Assign the traveltimes to specific layers (chap. 5.2).

If timeslices from a complete huge data amount must be created and the 6. Combine the wanted traveltimes of one layer to one forward/reverse traveltime
generation of one single 3D-file does not work due to the size limitation, single branch (chap. 5.3).
timeslices can be generated and stored with individual file names. Because of the
individual file names, the timeslices can be loaded and displayed in the same way 7. Perform the wavefront-inversion for this layer (chap. 4.7.2).
as 2D-lines (see above).
The 2D-lines on the basis of which the timeslices shall be generated have to be 8. Perform a forward raytracing based on the evaluated model and compare the
recorded within the same plane. Another precondition is that a static correction to synthetic traveltimes to the real ones (chap. 4.7.1).
one level was performed before. There are no other prerequisites. The profiles
within the plane can be oriented in any direction. The program refers to the 9. Make some manual changes to the model and perform the raytracing again. If
corresponding coordinate specifications. The interpolation ranges are of your free wanted this procedure may be repeated until the model fullfills the wanted
choice. Also a time range can be specified over which an averaging is performed. precision (chap. 4.7.1).
Such an averaging often is necessary because of uncomplete static correction.
The details of computing time slices can be found in chapter 3.6 (Generate single Step 6 to 9 must be performed for each layer separately and with ascending
timeslices). order of the layers.

6.3.1 import seismic data and define the geometry of the

source and the receivers

6.3.1.1 import the data

This is the first step within the seismic refraction data interpretation.

The data are imported within the import menu within the 2D-dataanalysis module.
For further information please refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu).

At the moment the program supports the following seismic formats: SEGY,
SEG2, ABEM, BISON-2, OYO8BIT.
User‘s Guide 379 User‘s Guide 380
There exist three different default data types in the Import Menu of ReflexW: To change and supplement the fileheaders of several files belonging to one pro-
const. offset, single shot and several shots. ject, please use the option Edit several FileHeaders in the File MenuItem of the
For seismic refraction data the data type single shot should be used. 2D-Data-Analysis Module. For further information please refer to chapter 1.10
(Edit several FileHeaders).
The profile direction is predefined to x.

The source position (shot pos. and shot lat. offset) as well as the start- and 6.3.1.4 edit the geometry of source and the receivers within each
endposition of the receivers (option rec.start, rec.end and lat.offset) may entered traceheader
manually or read from the original data (option read coordinates activated - not
enabled for all input formats). The values are stored within the fileheader. In comparison to the fileheader coordinates which must be set in any case, the
The traceheader coordinates (see chap. 6.3.1.2) are not always updated traceheader coordinates can be set if they are needed at all.
automatically because the program also allows to handle non equidistant data If the original file format provides them, it is possible to read them during the
(see chap. 6.3.1.2). The picking options of Reflexw need the traceheader import. In that case the button ‘read coordinates‘ has to be activated in the control
coordinates but the program automatically controls if the traceheader coordinates options of the Import Menu (see chapter 1.5).
are set (see also chap. 6.3.3). To change or set the traceheader coordinates of a single file after the import
please use the option ShowTraceHeader in the option Edit Fileheader of the File
MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. There exist three default possibilities
6.3.1.2 The difference between FileHeader and Traceheader to actualize the traceheader coordinates:
- They are read from an ‚Ascii file‘ (*.DST), which contains the needed
information for every trace.
The fileheader contains all the information about the geometry of the whole file, - They are actualized by using the fileheader coordinates.
e.g. it‘s start and end coordinates, distance dimension, trace increment. - They are calculated using the ‚fileheader‘ coordinates and the default type
Therefore, if one deals with equidistant data, the coordinates of any single trace ‚circle‘ if the receivers are orientated along a circle with the shot at the midpoint of
are known in relation to the other traces of one file without defining the the circle.
traceheader coordinates. The traceheader contains additional information For further information please refer to chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit).
concerning a single trace: e.g. shot position or receiver position in relation to the
trace. The traceheaders of several files belonging to one project can only be set or
For further information please refer to chapter 1.9, especially to chapter 1.9.1 and actualized, respectively, simultaneously, in case of using the fileheader
chapter 1.9.6). coordinates (option ‚Update traceheaders‘ in the option Edit several FileHeaders
in the File MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. ). Otherwise, there exists
The option TraceHeaderDistancies within the plotoptions menu (chap. 1.7.6) no possibility to change or set the traceheader coordinates of several files at the
controls if the fileheader coordinates or the distancies stored within the same time. For further information please refer to chapter 1.10 (Edit several
traceheader coordinates are used for the display of the data. The option is only FileHeaders).
active for the wiggle mode. When using the pointmode the data may only be It is recommended to only set the x-coordinates and to leave the y-coordinates
displayed using the equidistant fileheader coordinates. constant or 0. The same holds true for the z-coordinates. The topography may be
entered at a later stage (see chap. 6.3.9). The x-coordinates should correspond
It is also possible to create equidistant data from non equidistant data using the (not obligatory) to the real coordinates on the topographic interface.
processing option Make equidist.traces (see chap. 1.11.6.3).

6.3.2 process the seismic data

6.3.1.3 edit the geometry of source and the receivers within the
fileheader The imported data are stored under the path rohdata under the atual
projetdirectory. There are different possibilities to edit and process (filter) the
There exist different possibilities to set or change the fileheader: data. Examples:
First of all, the fileheader of every single file is set during the import. For further - combine some shots together (option Insert profile, chap. 1.11.7.10).
information please refer to chapter 1.5 (Import Menu). - bandpassfilter (option Bandpassbutterworth, chap. 1.11.1.4 ).
To change and supplement the fileheader of one single file, please use the option - Fk filter (option Fk filter, chap. 1.11.10.1).
Edit Fileheader in the File MenuItem of the 2D-Data-Analysis Module. For further
information please refer chapter 1.9 (FileHeader Edit).
User‘s Guide 381 User‘s Guide 382

6.3.3 pick the frst arrivals The option insert shot Zerotraveltime allows to insert a 0 time traveltime at the
shot position. This is useful if a shot point does not coincide with a geophone
position.
6.3.3.1 Preconditions for picking

If picking shall be done, the traceheader coordinates must be set to get the exact 6.3.5 assign the traveltimes to specific layers
location of any pick. For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2 (Pick
MenuItem). If the traceheader coordinates are not set a query appears whether The next step after having put together the traveltimes from different shots is to
they shall be actualized based on the fileheader coordinates. assign the traveltimes to specific layers (see also chap. 5.2). For this you must
activate the option assign within the refraction traveltime menu.
The assignment of traveltimes to layers and the subsequent combination to one
6.3.3.2 Setting of picks forward and reverse traveltime curve (traveltimes combine, chap. 5.3) is required
for the wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2 and chap. 6.3.7).
The picks are set using one of the options manual picking, continuous pick or a
semi-automatic picking using a phase follower. First you have to enter the wanted layer-nr. It is possible to assign each
traveltime to this layer-nr by simply clicking in the neighbourhead of the wanted
manual pick: With the option set activated a pick can be set with the left mouse traveltime. Already existing assignments are overwritten. It is also possible to
button. The same applies to the manual removal or change of an existing pick remove an assignment (option remove activated).
after selecting the options remove or change, respectively. It is not only possible to assign one single pick but a total set of picks for one
traveltime branch. For that purpose move along the traveltime branch with
continuous pick: With this option activated you can set, remove or change picks pressed mouse button and leave the button when the last wanted pick is reached.
by moving the mouse cursor over the data set with continuously pressed left
mouse button. It is also possible to assign the start and end pick of one traveltimebranch and
then use the option interpolate which allows to automatically assign all traveltime
phase follower: The option allows the automatic assignment of picks to a selected picks between the last two manually assigned picks. This enables you a fast
phase. For this you first have to select the desired phase at an arbitrary position assignment of many traveltime picks of one shot. To be considered: The two
of the profile with the left mouse button. picks should belong to one shot and should only belong to the forward or reverse
traveltime branch.
For further information please refer to chapter 1.12.2 (Pick MenuItem).
It is also possible to only concentrate on the forward or the reverse traveltimes.
The options Forward and Reverse enable to or disable the assignment possibility
to the forward and/or reverse traveltime branch. Example: With activated option
6.3.4 put together the traveltimes of different shots Forward and deactivated option Reverse only forward traveltimes picks may be
assigned.
The first step for the refraction traveltime interpretation after having picked the
first arrivals within the menu 2D-DataAnalysis (see also Pick MenuItem, chap.
1.12.2) is to put together the traveltimes from the several shots (see also chap.
5.1). Precondition is that the shots and the receivers are located along one line 6.3.6 combine the assigned traveltimes to one
within one acquisition plane. forward/reverse traveltime branch
First you must load the wanted pick files (extension pck) using the option load
traveltimes within the refraction traveltime analysis module. In order to use the wavefront-inversion 2D (chap. 4.7.2 and chap. 6.3.7) for the
The chosen traveltimes are automatically sorted after shot and receiver positions inversion of the traveltimepicks assigned to one special layer the individual
in ascending order. Forward and reverse traveltimes are automatically separated. traveltimepicks must be combined (phantomed) to one complete forward and one
The taveltimes are plotted over the distance. The distance is always determined complete reverse traveltime branch. The distance range for the phantoming is
from the xy-coordinates of the receiver-positions. The start distance is given by the shot coordinates of the forward and reverse shot. For this you must
determined from the minimum x- or y-coordinate of the line. The min. x-value is define the forward shot number and the reverse shot number. The forward and
chosen if the pronounced line direction is the x-direction, the min. y-value is reverse traveltimepicks of these two shot numbers are the basis for the building
chosen if the pronounced line direction is the y-direction. of the two complete traveltime branches. Therefore forward or reverse traveltime
There are different possibilities to edit the traveltimes. The option change allows picks respectively must have been assigned to the actual layer for both shot
to remove and to move special traveltimes or a block of traveltimes. numbers before combining the traveltimes.
User‘s Guide 383 User‘s Guide 384
The phantoming of all the other traveltimes may be done manually or model within the modelling module (chap. 4.1 - option load 1D-models and chap.
automatically (options auto combine or manual combine). For further informations 4.2 - option create 2D-model from 1D-models).
about the two possibilites please refer to chap. 5.3.
In many cases single shot data are not suitable for a one-dimensional
6.3.7 invert the individual layers interpretation because lateral changes of a reflector are not taken into account.
Therefore it might be useful to use CMP-sorted data for the 1D-interpretation.
After having done the phantoming you may perform the wavefront-inversion by The option CMP sort within the traveltime analysis module (see chap. 5.1) allows
actvating the option wavefront-inversion. The wavefront-inversion must be done you to resort traveltimes after Common Mid Points. The database must be
for each layer separately. For inverting layer 1 no overburden is necessary. For traveltimes which have been put together from the different single shot gathers.
the inversion of all other layers the overburden must be known. Afterwards you must generate single CMP-traveltime files. These data files may
be the database for a subsequent 1D-interpretation.
When activating the option wavefront-inversion for layer 1 the program
automatically creates a new model consisting of the top layer boundary with layer
points at the positions of the different traveltime branches assigned to layer 1.
The velocities at these positions are automatically determined by linear 6.3.9 how to handle the topography
regression. You may edit the model (e.g. remove or add some layerpoints) and
you should store the model under any name. Then you may leave the modelling Both the wavefront-inversion (chap. 4.7.2) and the forward raytracing (chap.
menu. 4.7.1) allow a topography of the profile line. The CMP(1D)-analysis (chap. 2) and
Increase the layernr. for inverting the next layer. After having activated the otpion the intercepttime-method howeves do not take into account any z-variations of
wavefront-inversion the model filename of the overburden is queried. Then you the receivers.
must enter enter the rasterincrement DeltaX and start the inversion. Before you Normally the seismic refraction data are acquired along a line with equidistant
must ensure that the model borders are large enough in order that the new layer distancies on the topographic surface. These values are entered into the file and
boundary fits into the model. After the inversion is finished the new layer is traceheader coordinates of the original seismic data. You should always use x as
automatically plotted. Now you should extend the layer boundary either to the left the profile direction and one value for the offset for all receivers and shots which
and right borders of the model (option hor.extrap.) or to the nearest interface shall be interpreted together. At this stage it is not necessary to take into account
(option extrapolate). It is also possible to do any editing of the model. The new the topographic z-values (shot and receiver elevation).
model should be stored under any name. Then you may leave the modelling
menu in order to invert the next layer boundary. Use of the topography for the wavefront-inversion:

After having put together the traveltimes and assigned to layers you may apply
6.3.8 use of the 1D-interpretation the option apply xz-topography on these data. This option allows to
automatically redefine the geometries of the shots and the receivers based on
Apart from the standard traveltime interpretation as described under chap. 6.3.0 it topographic xz-values. It is assumed that the x-values of the actual traveltimes do
is also possible to interprete single traveltime gathers independently (1D- not represent the correct x-coordinates but are determined directly on the
intepretation) and put the results together to a 2-dimensional model. topographic interface. The program automatically determines the positions of all
shots and receivers on the given topography and calculates the x- and z-
The module CMP(1D)-velocity-analysis allows the calculation of a one- projections of these positions. For further informations please refer to chap. 5.1.
dimensional velocity-depth-distribution from wide-angle refraction data based on Now you may combine the assigned traveltimes to one forward/reverse traveltime
different analysis techniques (see chap. 2). branch (chap. 6.3.6) and perform the wavefront-inversion for the individual layers.
A first model may be obtained using the interactive intercepttime method. This The overburden model must contain the same topography. It is possible to read
first model may be interactively changed in order to best adapt the seismic wave- the topography from an ASCII-file (option import (x,z) within the Input of model
or traveltime data. parameters window - see chap. 4.4.3) or to enter it manually.
The database for both the intercepttime method and the interactive modelling is To be considered for layer1: After having applied the topography the velocities of
either the wave-data (option file/load data) or the picked first arrivals (option of the uppermost layer are calculated using a linear regression with the x-
file/load traveltimes). projection axis and the time. This might cause some problems.

You may define the correct position of the 1D-model along your refraction line. Use of the topography for the raytracing:
This position is used if you are combining the different 1D-models to one 2D-
As described above you may load the topography from an ASCII-file by the use
of the option import (x,z) within the input of model parameters window (chap.
User‘s Guide 385 Index 386
4.4.3) for layer 1. It is also possible to enter it manually. In both cases the option
topography must be activated.
Index
The program automatically places all source and receiver positions above the
topography directly below the topography (see also model generation -
correct elevations
topography, chap. 4.4.6). Therefore you must not care about the exact source
plot options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
and receiver positions in z-direction.
NMO-correction
The calculated traveltimes are normally plotted about the x-axis. Therefore if you
CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
want to compare the real data with the synthetic ones fist you must apply the
1. derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
option apply xz-topography on the real data in order to make sure that the x-
1D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 369
projected values are stored within the real data.
1D-Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154-157, 160
1D-models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329, 384
2D-Data-Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2D-Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209-214
3-component analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
3D diffraction stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3D Kirchhoff migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3D picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
3D-cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
3D-cube display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
3D-data, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3D-datafile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
3D-FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
3D-FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
3D-File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
3D-file, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3D-semblance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3D-topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
A/D Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
ABEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Act. spectrum, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Act. trace, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Add profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
add. 2colum data
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
AGC-Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AGC-Gain, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
AGCGain
plotoptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Air layer, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
amplitude calibration
layer velocity determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Amplitude, instantaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Amplitudes, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Analog data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Analysis MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Apply on example trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Arithmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Index 387 Index 388
ASCII-export CMP velocity analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 CMP-bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ASCII-MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105 CMP-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 383
ASCII-pick difference CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 273, 278, 281
save picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 CMP-processing geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
ASPI-interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CMP-processing stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
assign CMP-velocity parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ColorBars, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
auto correlation Combine files f.CMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1D-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 combine layers
Autointerpolation, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 model generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
autom.load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 comment boxes
automatic picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
autostart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 comment markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Comment, fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
average layer Comment, print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
model generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Commentmarker: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Average xy-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 complete plot by scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Complex trace-analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Axis, labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Complex trace-analysis/spectral analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
B-Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Compress 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Background removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Compress data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Background removal, sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 construction change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Bandpassbutterworth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 layer show velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Bandpassfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Banner paper, print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 control xy-coord
Batch printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
batch processing ConversionMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
sequence processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ConversionMode, sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
BatchStartFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Coordinates, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134-138
BGREMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 104 Coordinates, project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
BISON-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Coordinates, traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
bitmap Copy, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Core data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Bitmap size[kb] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 core data/1D-models
Bitmap-Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 layer velocity determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
C-scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 311 core parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
calc. traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Corefile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
calculate traveltime differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 356 Correct 3D-topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
calculated traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Correct for 2 layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 179
change pick code Correct max. phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Correct phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177
Check disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Correct picked phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
check source/receivers positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 create 2D-model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 create MPEG-file
CMP 2D-model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
CMP semblance analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Crosscorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
CMP sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 crosshole tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CMP velocity adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 crossing line
Index 389 Index 390
picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Edit several FileHeaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
crossing line picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Edit traces/traceranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200-207
CSV-GPS eikonal equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 351
traceheader coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
cube EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3D-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Energy decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cube, move through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 307 Energy decay, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
curves size EnergyDecay
CMP-velocity analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 plotoptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Damping, compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
DAQ-CARD 700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Exabyte drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Data cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 exabyte-conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
data traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Exabyte-drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
data type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 135 Expand data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Data-interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Exploding-Reflector-Model, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Decimal separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 export calc.traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Declipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 export data traveltimes to ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Declipping/arithmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Export Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Declipping/max.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 export several existing picks into 1 ASCII-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 250, 373
Declipping/plateau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 export to ASCII
Declipping/threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Export, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Deconvolution/shap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Extract traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Depth-axis, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 extrapolate
Dewow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
plotoptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 fast data cube display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
difference FD-migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 370 FD-simulation, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 322
difference pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 FD-vidale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Diffraction 2D-veloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 File, export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diffraction stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 File, filenamefactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Diffractions, contraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217-219, 223, 224 File, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 96, 97, 100, 101, 104-108, 110
digitized signal File, primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 File, second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dijkstra algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 134
Dip filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231 Fileheader ControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Directory structure/project directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 4 Fileheader coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Display resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FileHeader Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
display scale: Fileheader filename specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
CMP-velocity analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Fileheader input1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Display, 3D-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 304 Fileheader time specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
distance markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Fileheader, coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Distortion free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302, 305 FileInfo, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
div. compensation Filename, automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 136
gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Filename, manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 136
downhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Filename, number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100
Drift, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Filename, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 136
Duplicate traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 fill
Dynamic correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Index 391 Index 392
Filter parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Horizontally coherent energy, suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Filter/timedependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 import
finite difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 automatic import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
First arrival, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Import ControlOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
first arrivals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 350, 355 Import ControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fk filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Import ConversionMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fk filter-lineparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Import Fileheader-coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fk migration (Stolt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Import filename specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fk spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Import format specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 104, 148
Fk-filter/Fk-spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 228 Import HeaderInput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Flatten, phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177 Import Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
FlipProfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 194 Import, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 97, 100, 101, 104-106, 108, 110
FlipXAxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Infrasense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
flipXYsorting 3D-file Inline lines, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 104
FlipYAxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Insert profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 129 Insert zero traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
FontSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
forward shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
free of distortion intercept time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 290
interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 interpolate actual 3D-file
free surface 3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
FD-simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Interpolate non-equidistant data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Frequency analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Interpolate traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Frequency analysis, moving window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 interpolated physical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Frequency attenuation, compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 interpolation
Frequency, instantaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 traceheader coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 164-168 Interpolation, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Gain function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Gain, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Kirchhoff 2D-veloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Gain, fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Kirchhoff migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Generate 3D-file from 2D-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
generate batchfile last pick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
batch processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 layer thickness
generate pickfile (2-way traveltimes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Generate single timeslices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 save picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Geometric spreading, compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 layer velocities
Geometry file, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 layershow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Geometry, CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 layer velocity determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
GeoTomoCG Layer, pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 LayerShow amplitude, calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Global MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 LayerShow MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Global settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 86 LayerShow multioffset picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
GPS LayerShow parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
traceheadercoordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 LayerShow report, create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Graphics resolution: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 LayerShow velocities, create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Grid, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 LayerShow, create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Hilbert-Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 legend
histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 layershow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Horizontally coherent energy, emphasizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Linear features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Index 393 Index 394
load perpendicular picks Modelling, Tomography, travel time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Modelling, topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Low amplitude, emphasizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 modelparameters
Lowpass filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Make equidist.traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Modelpoints, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Manual gain (x), changing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 move picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Manual gain (y), changing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Move starttime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Manual scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Move traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Moveout-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Marker, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Moving window spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Markerinterpol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Multichannel
MarkerRelocate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 150 import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 multichannel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
mean velocities multioffset data
layershow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 layer-show velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 267
Mean velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 multioffset picks
meandering layer velocity determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
data-import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 multiplexed data
meandering 2D-profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Meandering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Meanfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 multiply profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Median xy-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Medianfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 network raytracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Merge files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 NMO, CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
merge in timedir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Noise suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155-157, 210
Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217-224 Noise suppression, dip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
Model generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Non-equidistant, data, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Model parameters, input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Notchfilter/frequ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Model simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Offset-bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Model, load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Open 1.-4. Line
Model, save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 2D-dataanalysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Modellayers, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Open SCSI-menu: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Modelling File MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 329 Output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Modelling View MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 output type
Modelling, DoRaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Modelling, Exploding-Reflector-Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 OYO8BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Modelling, FD-computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Parallel lines, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Modelling, FD-computation of several single lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 PCMCI-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Modelling, plane wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Phase follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 370, 381
Modelling, point-source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Phase, correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177
Modelling, setting of FD-parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Phase, flatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177
Modelling, space-increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Phase, instantaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Modelling, StartFD-computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 pick
Modelling, time-increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Modelling, tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Pick MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Modelling, Tomography, check rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 pick parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Modelling, Tomography, DoRaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Pick save MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 251
Modelling, Tomography, SIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Picking, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Modelling, Tomography, stopping criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 PickPanel, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Index 395 Index 396
Picks RAMAC-borehole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 RAMAC-GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Picks for 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 random pertubation
PixelsPerSample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
PixelsPerTrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 raytracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Plane wave, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 receiver line
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 117-122, 124 import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plot MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 reduction velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Plot, change color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 120 reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Plot, marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 reflection amplitudes
Plot, pallette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 layer-show velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Plot, pointmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Reflexion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Plot, wigglemode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 refraction data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 285, 383
PlotGain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 refraction seismics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
PlotOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 refraction tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Plotsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 refraction traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Plotsuboptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Reinterpolate each 2D-line of a 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Podvin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Remove header gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Point-source, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 remove non double picks
Pointmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Pointmodeattributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 save picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Remove range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3D-datainterpretaton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Remove traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
print header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 remove zero traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Replace traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 report only construction data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Print, comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Print, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127-129 rescale
Print, several files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 3D-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printersetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 residual statics
PrinterSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 CMP-stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Printing on banner paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Resort, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
PrintOptions1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Resort-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
PrintOptions2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Resort-traceheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Processing reverse control
3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 traveltime analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Processing flow, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Reverse polarity of traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Processing flow, sequence proc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 233 reverse shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 382
Processing MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
ProcessingLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Ricker
profile line (trace header coord.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Profile map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 rotation
profile xy-location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 3D-cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 316
Project directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 4, 82 Rresampling, data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
PULSEEKKO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 101, 104 Running average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
RADAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 102, 104 S/R-distance, fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
RADAN_ANALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Scaled windowgain(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RADAN_TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Scaling, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
RADANTAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Scaling, manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 121
RAMAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 101, 104 Scaling, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 121
Index 397 Index 398
Scaling, print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 128 Spectrum, amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Scan3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Spikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Screen, delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Spiking-deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Screen, split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Screen, tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Stack traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 214
scroll Stacking, CMP-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
3D-cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Starttime, move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Scroll 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Stat. correction, pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Static correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Scrolling, size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 StaticCorrection/muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Scrolling, synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Stolt migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
SCSI-menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 subdivision
second 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 3d-datainterpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Second profile, show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 subtract profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
SEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 102, 104 Subtract traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SEG2-RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Subtract-DC-shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
SEGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 104, 114 Subtract-mean (dewow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
semblance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Subtracting average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Semblance analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 291 summary comment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Sequence Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Suppress multiples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Sequence Processing, peculiarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Swap bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 104
Set to zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 swell correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
several FileHeaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 synthetic traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
several pages synthetic traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 take over
several single lines 3D-picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 thickness determination
shading picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 370
3D-cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Time cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
sharpen edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Time delay, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173
Shear waves - subtract traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Time range, shortening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Shift-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Time-increment, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Shot position, fileheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Timedepth conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Show markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Timeslice calculation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
show picks Timeslice calculation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Timeslices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
show profile Timeslices, generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 timeterm analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 362
show rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Tomography, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 344
ShowTimeSliceInAddition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 topographic correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Signal-to-noise ratio, improving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 topography
single line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352, 353 traveltimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 384
FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Topography, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SIRT, Tomography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 total wavefield
Slant stack, CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 FD-modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Sorting, CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Trace Interpolation/Resorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Source couplings, compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Trace number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Source-receiver-distance, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Trace spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Space-increment, modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 tracegain
Spectral whitening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 plot options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Index 399 Index 400
TraceHeader axis XFlipProfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 xy-projection
Traceheader Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 picks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Traceincr-resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 XYScaledPlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Traceinterpol-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 YFlipProfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Traces of a 2. line, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Yo-Yo section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 z-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
traveltime analysis 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Zero level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
traveltime branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 382 Zero mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
traveltimes Zero traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
put together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
TRS2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
True amplitude information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
model changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Unnormalized correlation analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
UpdateTraceHeaders
Project fileheaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
uphole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
use code
3D-picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
use traceh.coord.
interactive choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
UTM-conversion
traceheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Velocity adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 368, 369
modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Velocity model 2D, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Velocity model, adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Velocity model, CMP-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 383
Velocity model, CMP-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
VelocityAdaptationPanel, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
View MenuItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Vrms velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
VSP (vertical seismics profiling) measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Walsh bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
wavefront inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
wavefront-inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
traeltime analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
wide-angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Wiggleattributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wigglemode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
WiggleWindow of actual trace, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Windowing 3D-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
x-distance decay(db)
gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
x-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
XFlip-3DFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198